Chevrolet - Civic Ex Sedan - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001

Factory Workshop Manual Make Honda Model Civic Ex Sedan Engine and year L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 12 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 13 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 19 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 20 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 23 59. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 26 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 27 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 28 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 29 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 30 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 31 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 32 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 33 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 34 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 35 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 36 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 37 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 38 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 39 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 40 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 41 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 42 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 43 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 44 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 45 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 46 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 47 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 48 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 49 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 50 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 51 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 52 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 53 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 54 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 55 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 56 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 57 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 58 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 59 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Connector Views 182. Immobilizer Control Unit - Receiver 214. Security Control Unit (Optional) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 60 Immobilizer System - Except System Image 132 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 61 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The immobilizer system is designed to prevent the car from being started without the owner's ignition key. If an attempt is made to Start the car with any other key, the immobilizer system will disable the car's fuel supply. The immobilizer system consists of the ignition key, immobilizer control unit-receiver, immobilizer indicator light, PGM-FI main relays, injector relay (GX), fuel pump (except GX), fuel tank internal solenoid valve (GX), and the ECM/PCM. With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the ECM/PCM receive an "ignition on" signal through fuse 6 and the PGM-FI main relay 1. The ECM/PCM then sends power to the ignition key transponder through the immobilizer control unit-receiver. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to the ECM/PCM through the receiver. If the signal is correct, the ECM/PCM will energize the car's fuel supply system by grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light flashes a code to indicate that the correct key has been inserted. If the ignition key signal is not correct, the ECM/PCM will not energize the car's fuel supply system by not grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light then flashes a code to indicate that an incorrect key has been inserted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations 134. Right C Pillar (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 65 28. Antenna Module (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 66 Antenna Control Module: Testing and Inspection Antenna Module Input Test 2-door 1. Remove the right C-Pillar trim. 2. Make sure the antenna module mounting bolt (A) is torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the antenna module (C). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), turn the rear window defogger switch ON. Check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no voltage, check for: Faulty rear window defogger relay. - Blown No.11 (40 A) fuse or No.19 (80 A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - An open in the BLK/YEL wire. 5. With the ignition switch ON (II), turn the radio ON, and turn to an FM station. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and body ground. If there is no voltage, check for: An open in the YEL/GRN wire. - A short to ground in the YEL/GRN wire. - Faulty audio unit. 6. Disconnect the rear window defogger (+B OUT) connector (D) from the antenna module. 7. With the ignition switch and the rear window defogger switch ON, check for voltage to ground. If there is no voltage, replace the antenna module. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 67 9. Check for continuity between the rear window defogger negative terminal (A) connector and body ground. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check for: An open in the BLK wire (B) - An open in the rear window defogger wire - Poor ground (G701) (C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 74 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 75 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 76 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 77 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 78 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 83 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 84 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 85 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 86 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 87 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system.See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 91 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 92 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 96 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 97 165. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 98 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 223. ABS Modulator-Control Unit (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 103 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Control Unit Main Control The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. Self-diagnosis Function 1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub-CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems. 2. The CPUs check the circuit of the system. 3. The ABS control unit turns on the ABS indicator when the unit detects a problem and the unit stops the system. 4. The self-diagnosis can be classified into these two categories: ^ Initial diagnosis ^ Regular diagnosis On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 104 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 31P Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 105 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Pull up the lock (C) of the ABS control unit 31P connector (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the two 8 mm nuts. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (A). Installation 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 8 mm nuts. 2. Align the connecting surface of the ABS control unit 31P connector. 3. Push in the lock of the ABS control unit 31P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 4. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 5. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 112 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 113 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 114 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 115 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 116 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 117 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 118 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 119 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 120 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 121 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 122 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 123 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 124 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 125 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 126 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 127 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 128 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 129 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 130 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 131 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 132 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 133 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 134 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 135 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 136 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 137 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 138 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 139 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 140 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 141 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 142 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 143 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 144 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 145 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 149 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 150 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 151 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 152 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 153 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 158 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 159 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 160 207. Cruise Control Unit (USA: HX; Sedan: LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 161 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Unit Input Test Except 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures, in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 162 4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests. 5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit may be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly, replace the control unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 167 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 168 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 169 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 173 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 174 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 175 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 176 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 177 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 178 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 182 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 183 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 184 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 185 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 186 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 191 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 192 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 193 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 194 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 195 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 196 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 197 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 198 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 199 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 200 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 201 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 202 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 203 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 204 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 205 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 206 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 207 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 208 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 209 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 210 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 211 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 212 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 213 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 214 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 215 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 216 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 217 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 218 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 219 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 220 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 221 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 222 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 223 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 228 (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 229 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 230 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 231 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 235 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 236 208. DRL Control Unit (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 237 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test - Canada The DRL indicator light in the gauge assembly will come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the headlight switch off and the parking brake set. If should go off when you turn on the headlight switch, release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, do the control unit input test. NOTE: When the daytime running lights are on, the high beam indicator will glow at half its normal intensity. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. '01-03 models Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 238 4. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. '04 model Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 239 5. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 243 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 244 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 58. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 248 159. Fog Light Relays 1 And 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 252 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 253 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 257 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 258 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 259 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 263 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 264 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 265 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 272 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 273 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 274 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 275 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 276 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 278 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 279 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 280 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 281 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 282 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 283 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 284 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 285 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 286 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 287 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 288 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 289 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 290 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 291 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 292 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 293 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 294 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 295 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 296 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 297 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 298 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 299 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 300 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 301 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 302 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 303 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 115-0 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 304 Diagram 115-1 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 305 Diagram 115-2 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 306 Diagram 115-3 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 307 Diagram 115-4 (Sedan EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 308 Diagram 115-5 (Sedan EX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 309 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 310 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to steps. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 314 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 315 Low Beam Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 316 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 317 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 321 Tail Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 322 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 323 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 327 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 328 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 329 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 330 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 331 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 337 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 338 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 339 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 340 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 341 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 342 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 343 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 344 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 345 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 346 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 347 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 348 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 349 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 350 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 351 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 352 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 353 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 354 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 355 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 356 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 357 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 358 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 359 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 360 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 361 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 362 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 365 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 366 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 373 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 374 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 375 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 376 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 377 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 378 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 379 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 380 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 381 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 382 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 383 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 384 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 385 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 386 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 387 Engine Control Module: Locations Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 388 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 389 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 392 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 393 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 394 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 395 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 396 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 397 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 398 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 399 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 400 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 401 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 402 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 403 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 404 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 405 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 406 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 407 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 408 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 409 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 410 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 411 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 412 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 413 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 414 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 228. ECM/PCM Part 1 228. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 415 228. ECM/PCM Part 3 228. ECM/PCM Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 416 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 417 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 418 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 419 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 420 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 421 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 422 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 423 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Electrostatic Discharge Damage Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. - An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat. - Charge by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentary touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: - Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. - Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. - Before removing the pan: from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. - If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 426 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 427 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 428 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 429 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 430 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 431 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 432 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter (C). 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P ECM/PCM wire harness connector from the ECM/PCM mounting bracket. Remove the ECM/PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the ECM/PCM (B). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 435 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or disconnect its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the Honda PGM Tester does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - Remove the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 battery (80A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove PGM-FI main relay 1. - Remove any of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect any of the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the G2 terminal from the transmission housing. - Disconnect the G1 terminal from the body. - Disconnect the G101 terminal from the water passage. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear defogger, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 3. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 436 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Monitors, Trips, and/or Drive Cycle (Readiness Codes) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emissions test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set readiness codes from incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code. Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from incomplete to complete. - The readiness code will not switch to complete until all the enable criteria are met. - If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault. Enable Criteria - ECT at 158 °F (70 °C) or higher. - Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 °F (-7 °C) or higher. - Vehicle speed is steady, and vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more then 25 mph (40 km/h). Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Control System Monitor and Readiness code NOTE: - All readiness code are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - The enable criteria must be repeated if the intake air temperature (IAT) drops lower then 36 °F (2 °C) from its value at engine start up. Enable Criteria - At engine start up, ECT and IAT are higher than 32 °F (O °C), but lower than 95 °F (35 °C). - At engine start up, the ECT and IAT are within 12 °F (7 °C) of each other. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 2.5 miles (4 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 437 ECT at 140 °F (60 °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air/Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor Readiness Code NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 3. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the procedure. Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because misfiring is continuously monitored. - Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if the vehicle is driven over a rough road. - Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the throttle position changes more than a predetermined value, or if driving conditions fall outside the range of any related enable criteria. Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because the fuel system is continuously monitored during closed loop operation. - Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active. - Monitoring also pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when the enable criteria is again being met. Comprehensive Component Monitor and Readiness Code This readiness code is always set to available because the comprehensive component monitor is continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running. EGR Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness Codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria - ECT at 176 °F (80 °C) or higher Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the CVT and A/T in D position or M/T in 4th gear, 50 - 62mph (80 - 100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds. 4. With the CVT and A/Tin D position or M/T in 4th gear, decelerate from 62 mph (100km/h) or above by completely releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again. 5. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 438 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) - P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest version, replace the ECM/PCM. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original ECM/PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Cut Control Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Cut Control Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Cut-off Control During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy at speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,900 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. With A/T model, when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 445 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 446 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 447 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 448 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 449 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 450 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 454 95. Behind Glove Box (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 455 155. A/F Sensor Relay (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 462 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 463 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 464 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 465 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 466 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 467 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 468 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 469 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 470 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 471 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 472 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 473 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 474 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 475 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 476 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 477 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 478 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 479 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 480 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 481 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 482 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 483 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 484 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 485 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 486 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 487 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 488 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 489 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 490 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 491 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 492 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 493 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 494 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 495 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 496 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 497 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 498 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 502 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 503 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 504 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 505 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 506 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 507 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 516 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 517 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 518 SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 519 104. In Front Pass. Or Pass. Seat (Side Airbag) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 520 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 521 233. SRS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 522 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the DLC (16P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 523 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester/HDS (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu to ground the SCS line (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, if DTC 15-1 is indicated, repeat the initialization procedure. If another DTC is indicated, go to the appropriate DTC Troubleshooting Index. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/DTC List - Supplemental Restraint System 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 3. Disconnect the side airbag connectors. 4. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 5. Remove the dashboard center lower cover. 6. Pull down the carpet, then remove the Torx bolt (A) from the SRS unit. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the two Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. NOTE: When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their heads rest squarely on the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 526 brackets. 2. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover. 3. Reconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 4. Reconnect the side airbag connectors. 5. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Initialize the OPDS unit. 8. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 527 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 536 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 537 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 538 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 539 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 540 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 541 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 542 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 543 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 544 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 545 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 546 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 552 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 553 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 554 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 555 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 556 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 557 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 558 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 559 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 560 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 561 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 562 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 567 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 568 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 576 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 577 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 581 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 588 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 589 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 593 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 598 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 602 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 603 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 605 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 606 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 614 - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. '04 model 6. Disconnect the X connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connector. If this input test proves OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 623 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 624 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 631 118. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc: DX) 121. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 632 122. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 633 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except DX) 110. Door Lock Switch, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 636 - There should be no continuity when the LOCKED position. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 637 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Remove the two mounting screws and the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 641 201. Power Mirror Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 642 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 648 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 142. Moonroof Limit Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 650 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the moonroof limit switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE: Turn the motor by hand with the wrench. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 651 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (P) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 656 138. Rear of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 657 174. Moonroof Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations 151. Middle Of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 663 89. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 668 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 669 31. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 670 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (A) with the float in the down position and the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to MAX (upper) level (B). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 674 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 675 Braking Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 676 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the brake lights. Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal? YES - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Press the brake pedal. Do the brake lights come on? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 4. 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E22 with the brake pedal pressed. Is there battery voltage? YES - The brake pedal position switch signal is OK. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch. 4. Inspect the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Replace the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 677 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector, turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet (B). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (C) from the middle of the right side of the pedal pad (D). Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 184 mm (7 4/16 inch) A/T: 188 mm (7 6/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Pedal Free Play Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 678 4. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 0.4 - 3.0 mm (0.016 - 0.118 inch) 5. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. 6. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch clockwise to lock it. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 7. Check the brake pedal free play. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 682 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 683 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 684 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations 145. Right Side Of Floor (EX) 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 688 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment 165. Under Left Side Of Floor (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 689 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front (EX, GX) 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear (EX, GX) 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 690 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensors The wheel sensors are the magnetic contact less type. As the gear purser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 692 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Inspect the front and rear pursers for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the purser all the way around while rotating the purser. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), check for a bent suspension arm. Standard: Front: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Rear: 0.2 - 1.0 mm (0.01 - 0.04 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 693 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 705 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 706 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 707 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 708 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Intermittent Overheating or High Temp Gauge Reading APPLIES TO: 2000-01 Civics SERVICE TIP: If owners of are complaining that the temperature gauge needle sometimes shoots up to the dreaded H mark for no apparent reason, the problem may be a faulty radiator cooling fan switch. If the switch is faulty, it can cause an intermittent overheating problem or cause the temperature gauge needle to climb past its normal position. To fix this problem, replace the thermoswitch, P/N 37760-P00-004, H/C 3881554. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 713 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Radiator fan switch Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196 - 203 deg F Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5 - 15 deg F from actual "ON" temperature Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 714 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 715 10. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 716 67. Radiator Fan Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 717 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the radiator fen switch. 1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C) and B terminal (D) according to the table. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 718 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Radiator Fan Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector, then remove the radiator fan switch (A). 2. Install the radiator fan switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 728 33. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 733 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 734 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams 139. Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch (except DX) 157. Cruise Control Main Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch > Page 737 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch > Page 740 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 745 161. Middle Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 746 12. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 747 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 748 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 3. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. 4. Install the oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations 75. Behind Recir-A/C-Rear Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 753 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel and Push Switch Assembly Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), then remove the self-tapping screws and the heater control panel (B) from the center panel (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the push switch assembly (D) from the center panel. 3. Install the control panel and the push switch assembly in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly. 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Door Position Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 764 82. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 765 43. Evapoator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 766 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The heater control panel controls the blower controls, air delivery, and A/C compressor controls automatically. With the ignition switch in ON (II), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14. The control unit is grounded at G502. Evaporator Temperature Sensor The evaporator temperature sensor is located on the evaporator housing. If the temperature at the evaporator gets too cold, the evaporator temperature sensor sends a signal to the heater control panel to turn off the A/C compressor clutch. This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking air delivery into the passenger compartment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 767 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance, 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 768 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Turn the evaporator temperature sensor counterclockwise to the stop, and carefully pull out it. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 778 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 779 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 780 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 781 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 782 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 783 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 784 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 785 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 786 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 787 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 788 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 789 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 790 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 791 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 792 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 793 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 794 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 795 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 796 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 797 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 798 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 799 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 800 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 801 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 802 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 803 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 804 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 805 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 806 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 807 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 808 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 809 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 810 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 811 Dimmer Switch: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 812 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 817 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 818 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 819 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 824 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 825 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 826 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 827 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from minimum to maximum position and then returns to the minimum position, the gauge is OK. Go to step 3. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep from minimum to maximum position and then return to the minimum position, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion. 5. Remove the access panel from the floor. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 7. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 7. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground. - an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G551). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 828 9. Install a 2 Ohms resistor between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F". - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicates "F", replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom on the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. 11. Relieve the fuel pressure. 12. Remove the fuel fill cap. 13. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel pump. 14. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 829 15. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the shown readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 830 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the seat cushion. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 831 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the stopper (O). Release the hook (P) and remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. When connecting the fuel tank unit, make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). 11. Install in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (I) and new O-rings (J), then check these items: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (K) is firmly locked into the place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist the connector excessively. - When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the fuel tank (M) and the fuel tank unit (N). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Key Reminder Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 836 Key Reminder Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 837 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 838 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 841 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 842 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 843 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 844 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 845 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 846 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 847 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 848 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 849 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 850 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 851 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 852 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 853 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 854 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 855 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 856 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 857 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 858 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 859 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 860 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 861 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 862 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 863 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 864 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 865 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 866 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 867 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 868 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 869 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 870 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 871 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 872 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 873 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 874 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 875 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 877 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the circuit diagram and input test. When the ignition key is in the ignition switch the multiplex control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch and sounds the beeper. 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 881 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 882 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 889 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 890 29. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 891 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) connector. 2. Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 3P connector No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 895 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 896 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 905 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 906 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 907 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 908 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 909 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 910 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 911 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 912 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 918 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 919 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 920 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 921 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 922 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 923 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 924 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 925 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 926 Combination Switch: Locations Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 927 54. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 928 212. Combination Light Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 929 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 930 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 935 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 936 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 937 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 77. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 941 160. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 945 72. Behind Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 946 193. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 947 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the center panel (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: Recalls Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horn Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 964 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 965 11. Horn Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 966 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) No.2 terminal to body ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: horn relay - No.7 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A), and disconnect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B). 5. Using a jumper wire, connect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B) to ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 6. - If the horn does not sound, replace the cable reel. 6. Reconnect the horn switch positive connector (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 967 7. Using a jumper wire, connect the steering column. - If the horn sounds, replace the steering column. - If the horn does not sound, replace the horn and contact plate. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that the ECM/PCM uses to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 986 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 987 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 988 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 989 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 993 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 994 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 995 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 996 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1000 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1001 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1002 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1003 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1004 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1008 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1017 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1018 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1019 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1020 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1026 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1027 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1028 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 1029 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1030 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1031 111. ELD Unit (USA) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1032 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 How to Tell a Bad FTP Sensor From an EVAP Leak Troubleshooting a '01-05 Civic with DTC P0497 (EVAP system low purge flow)? When the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor doesn't respond to vacuum testing, it's really easy to think you've got a leak in the FVAP system. Here's an simple way to tell if the problem is just a bad FTP sensor or an actual system leak: 1. Connect the HDS to the 16P DLC. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 2. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN (if you're asked) and the odometer reading. 3. From the Select Mode screen, select Honda Systems. From the System Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. From the Mode Menu, select All Data List. 4. Disconnect the two FTP sensor vacuum lines. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. ^ If the value doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, check the electrical connections. If you find any problems, fix them, then go to step 5. If the circuits are OK, replace the FTP sensor, then go to step 5. 5. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value now reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, reconnect the vacuum lines and disconnect the HDS. Return the vehicle to your customer. ^ If the value still doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the larger FTP sensor hose (the smaller hose is the FTP vent) Slowly squeeze the pump handle to pull a vacuum on the FTP sensor. Look at the sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value changes, continue troubleshooting for DTC P0497. ^ If the value stays the same, the FTP sensor has a leak. Replace the sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1037 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1038 163. Under Left Side Of Floor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1039 114. FTP Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1040 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1044 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045 53. IAT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the IAT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1051 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1052 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1053 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1054 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1058 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1059 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1060 120. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1061 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1062 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1066 D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1069 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1070 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 10. Middle Of Engine 11. Middle Of Engine (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1071 17. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1072 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 130. A/F Sensor 140. HO2S, Primary (GX; '01-'03: EX, DX, LX) Or Secondary (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1073 141. HO2S, Secondary (except HX) Or Third (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Primary Oxygen Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (D17A1, D17A2 engines) The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary HO2S is installed in the three way catalytic converter (TWC) (D17A1 engine) or in the exhaust manifold (D17A2 engine). By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary HO2S and secondary HO2S, the deterioration of the primary HO2S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 1076 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) sensor (D17A6 engine) The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed in the exhaust manifold. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 1077 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the TWC and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which checks the efficiency of the TWC. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The secondary HO2S is installed in the TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 1078 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) (D17A6 engine) The third HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalytic Converter (NOX Adsorptive TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The third HO2S is installed behind the NOX Adsorptive TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the primary HO2S or A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the primary HO2S or A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the primary HO2S or A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 1081 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together (D17A6 engine except '01 model) 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 1082 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Third HO2S Replacement Third HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together. 1. Disconnect the third HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the third HO2S (B). 2. Install the third HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1086 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1087 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1088 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1089 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1090 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1091 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1095 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1096 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1097 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1101 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1104 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1105 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1106 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1107 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1108 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1109 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1110 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1111 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1112 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1113 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1114 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1115 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1116 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1117 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1118 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1119 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1120 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1121 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1122 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1123 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1124 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1125 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1126 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1127 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1128 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1129 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1130 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1131 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1132 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1133 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1134 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1135 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1136 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1137 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1138 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1139 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1140 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1141 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1142 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1143 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations 13. Middle Of Engine (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1147 93. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1148 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the resonator (see step 5). 2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B) securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting pipe. 4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector, then remove the VTEC oil Pressure switch (A). 5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1153 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1154 20. Transmission Housing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1155 128. VSS (except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1156 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a pulsed signal from an input of 1 volts. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1157 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Special Tools Required: Test Harness 07LAJ-PT3020A Before testing, inspect the No.4 (10 A) and No.10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (A). 2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire harness. 3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and green (D) test harness leads with protective tape (E). 4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness clip and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS and G101. 5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED test harness clip (C) to the negative probe. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the VSS and the under-dash fuse/relay box. 7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1158 8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the positive probe of a voltmeter. Is there 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short or open in the BLU/WHT or WHT/GRN wire between the VSS and the cruise control unit, or the ECM/PCM. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the VSS(B). 11. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 14. NO - Replace the VSS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1159 14. Disconnect the 22P connector "A" from the gauge assembly. 15. Touch a probe to the BLU/WHT wire, and connect it to body ground through a voltmeter. 16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Replace the speedometer assembly. NO - Repair open in the BLU/WHT wire between the VSS and the speedometer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1160 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VSS Replacement 1. Remove the intake resonator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (B). 3. Remove the mounting bolt, then remove the VSS. 4. Install the VSS in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1165 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1172 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1177 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1178 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1179 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1180 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1184 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1185 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1186 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1187 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1188 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 1194 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1198 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1199 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1200 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1201 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1208 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 155. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1209 157. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1210 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1211 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 54. Impact Sensor, Left Front 55. Impact Sensor, Right Front 77. Side Impact Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1212 78. Side Impact Sensor, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 79. Side Impact Sensor, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Impact Sensor: Vehicle Damage Warnings SRS Unit, Front Impact Sensors, and Side Impact Sensors - Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. - During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. - After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors and/or side impact sensors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or the side impact sensors. - Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. - Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) - Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. - Store the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F/40 °C) and dry (less than 80 % relative humidity, no moisture) area. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the front sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the front sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag 2P, both seat belt tensioner 2P and both seat belt buckle tensioner 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front inner fender. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor(C). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 1217 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Side Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the side impact sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the side airbag 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. 2-door: Slide the front seat forward. 4-door: Remove the seat assembly. 3. 2-door: Remove the rear seat-backs and rear seat cushion. 4-door: Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel. 4. 2-door: Remove the front seat belt lower anchor slide bar. 5. 2-door: Remove the side trim panel. 6. 2-door: Remove the middle cross-member gusset. 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (B). 8. Remove the Torx bolt (C) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (B). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new side impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A) then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the side impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Install all remove parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 100. Under Driver's Seat 101. Under Front Passenger's Seat (Passenger's Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 121. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 122. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 123. Seat Belt Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1230 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1231 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1232 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1233 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1234 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1235 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1236 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1237 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1238 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1239 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1240 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: Customer Interest Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1246 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1247 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1248 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1253 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1254 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1255 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1256 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1257 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1258 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1259 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1260 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1261 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1267 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1268 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1269 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1270 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1271 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1272 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1273 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1274 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1275 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1276 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1277 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1282 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1283 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1284 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1289 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1290 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1291 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1292 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1293 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1294 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1295 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1296 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1297 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1303 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1304 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 1305 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1310 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1311 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1312 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1313 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1314 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1315 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1316 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1317 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 1318 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1324 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1325 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1326 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1327 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1328 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1329 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1330 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1331 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1332 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1333 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 1334 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1335 Occupant Position Detection System: Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1336 104. In Front Passenger's or Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1337 OPDS Unit - Connectors A, B, C, D Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1338 Occupant Position Detection System: Description and Operation OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) The side airbag system also includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of Sensors (G) and a OPDS Unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, it will automatically disable the airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator When the side airbag is disabled, the Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off, alerting the driver that the side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. 5. Remove the two screws (C) and OPDS unit (D). Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation. Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1341 Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit are replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, and go to the appropriate page in the DTC Troubleshooting Index. 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1346 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1347 32. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1348 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector. 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1349 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.1 - 5.5 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 inch) 3. Tighten locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C).. 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten locknut (A). 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch (1) 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (1) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten locknut (H). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 1355 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1359 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1360 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1366 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1367 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1368 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1369 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1370 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1371 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1378 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1379 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1380 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1381 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1388 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1391 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1392 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1393 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1394 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1395 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1396 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1412 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1413 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1414 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1415 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1416 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1417 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1418 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1419 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1420 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1421 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1422 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1423 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1424 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1425 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1426 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1427 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1428 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1429 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1430 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1435 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1436 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1437 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 1440 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1446 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 1447 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 1450 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1451 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 1458 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 1461 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 1462 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1463 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1464 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1465 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1470 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1471 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1472 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1473 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1478 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1479 Heated Glass Element Switch: Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations 120. Driver's Door (Sedan except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1483 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 1492 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 1493 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 1499 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 1500 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1501 Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1502 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1503 Power Windows Component Location Index 119. Driver's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1504 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan except DX) 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1505 119. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 120. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1506 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1507 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1508 Power Window Switch: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1509 (Coupe Except DX, HX) 167. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 168. Power Window Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1510 169. Power Window Switch, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX, HX) 232. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1513 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1514 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1515 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1516 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1517 4. Disconnect the 20P connector and make these input tests. 5. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch and make these input tests. 2-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1518 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, Go to step 4. 4. Reconnect the 14P connector to the power window master switch, and perform the given input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1519 5. Disconnected the 14Pconnecter and, make these in put tests at the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1520 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1521 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1522 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Input Test Passenger's Switch Input Test 1. Remove the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1523 4. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 1524 5. Disconnect the 5P connector, and make these input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1527 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1528 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1529 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1530 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 1531 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1536 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams (Canada) 94. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1540 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1541 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1542 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1546 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1547 Wiper Switch: Diagrams 209. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1548 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1549 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1559 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1560 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1561 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1562 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1563 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1564 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1565 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1566 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1567 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1573 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1574 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1575 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1576 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1577 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1578 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1579 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1580 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1581 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 1586 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 1592 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1593 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1594 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1595 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1596 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1597 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1598 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1599 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1600 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1601 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1602 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # SN030915 Date: 030901 Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1603 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1604 TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1605 During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1606 NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1607 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1608 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1609 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1610 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1611 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1612 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Alignment: Specifications Alignment Wheel alignment Camber Front .................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 0°00' ± 45' Rear ........................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ -0°45' ± 45' Caster, Front '01-02 models ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 1°33' ± 1° '03-04 models ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 2°14' ± 1° Total toe Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................. 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch) Rear ............................................................................... .................................................................................. IN 2 [2/1] mm (0.08 [0.08/0.04] inch) Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel w/o P195/60R15 tire.............................................................. ...................................................................................................... 40°00' ± 2° Inside wheel w P195/60R15 tire.................................................................................................................................... ................................... 38°00' ± 2° Outside wheel w/o P195/60R15 tire ................................................................................................................................................... 31°00' (Reference) Outside wheel w P195/60R15 tire ...................................................................................................................................................... 30°00' (Reference) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment > Page 1615 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Honda Motor Company does not list ride height/trim height specifications. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1616 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments are interrelated to each other. For example, when you adjust toe, the camber changes. Therefore, you must adjust the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber or toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: Front/rear: P185/70R14 87S P185/65R15 86H P195/60R15 87H Tire pressure: Front/rear:210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi) 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling). 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the suspension. Front Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the caster angle. If the caster angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front caster angle: 1°33' ± 1° for '01-02 models 2°14' ± 1° for '03-04 models Front Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within the specification, adjust the camber. Front camber angle: 0°00' ± 45' Front Camber Adjustment The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or both of the damper pinch bolts with the smaller diameter adjusting bolt(s). The difference between the adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows a small range of adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1617 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Loosen the damper pinch nuts and bolts (A), and adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play 3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 4. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. 5. Check the camber angle. If it is within the specification, check the front toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 6. 6. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 7. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. NOTE: The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 15' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 30' by replacing both upper and lower damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. 8. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 9. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. 10. Check the camber angle. if it is within the specification, check the front toe, and adjust it if necessary. If it is not within the specification, readjust, and recheck. If the camber angle cannot be adjusted to the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Rear Camber Inspection Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Rear camber angle: - 0°45' ± 45' Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes. 2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 3. Front toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1618 3. Loosen the locknut (A) while holding the tie-rod arm (B). 4. Turn the tie-rod end (C) until the toe is correct. NOTE: Adjust both the right and left wheels at the same time by the same amount in opposite directions to obtain the correct toe. 5. After adjusting, tighten the locknut while holding the tie-rod arm. Make sure the toe setting does not change. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 3. Rear toe-in: 2 [+2/-1] mm (0.08 [+0.08/-0.04] inch) 3. Loosen the self-locking nut (A) while holding the adjusting bolt (B). NOTICE: Do not loosen the special bolts (C) on the lower arm to adjust the alignment. 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever you loosened it. 5. Turn the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct. 6. Tighten the self-locknut to the specified torque while holding the adjusting bolt. Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 1619 1. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left while applying the brake, and check the turning angles of both front wheels. If the turning angle is not within the specification or the inward turning angles differ between the right and left side, go to step 2. 2. Check the toe. If it is correct, but the turning angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure at idle .................................................................................................................................... 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1624 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1625 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, step 5. - If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed With no-load conditions: USA model: M/T .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 700 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT .................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada model: M/T .............................................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm A/T .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 720 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT ........................................................ ................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1629 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system. Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve: - After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed. - When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1630 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Leave the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connected. - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up, start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve 2P connector. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in neutral) unit the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. 5. Idle the engine for 1 minute with the heater fan switch on HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see the Symptom Chart. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 1631 Idle Speed: Service and Repair Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so that the the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or unplug its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM with the PGM tester. NOTE: Erasing the DTCs does not require the idle learn procedure to be done again. - Remove the No.6 (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 (60 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the PGM-FI main relays 1 and 2 (behind the glove box). - Remove either of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug any of the connectors from the back of the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and the ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the ground G1 from the transmission housing. To complete the idle learn procedure, do this: 1. Make sure all the electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. 2. Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). 3. Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations > Page 1636 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1641 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Gasoline Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) ITEM MEASUREMENT / QUALIFICATION STANDARD / SPECIFICATION SERVICE LIMIT Spark Plug Type NGK: PFR6F-11 DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11 Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1655 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1656 Spark Plug: Application and ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PZFR6F-11 DENSO ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... PKJ20CR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................. 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1657 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1658 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1662 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Disconnect all four injector connectors. 5. Remove the four ignition coils. 6. Remove the four spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Connect a tachometer. 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 10. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 11. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then re-measure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1666 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the grommet from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector. Remove the upper cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the TDC marks (B) on the pulley should line up with the top edge of the head. 6. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Adjusting screw location: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1667 7. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. 8. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 9. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1668 10. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be toward the exhaust side of the head. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 12. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. TDC marks (A) are visible again. 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 14. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) should be on the intake side of the head. 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 16. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt Replacemnt Interval 110,000 miles (176,000 km) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1672 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder mounting bolts. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 5. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1673 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially-available 19 mm socket 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 3. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its Top Dead Center (TDC) mark (A) lines up with the pointers (B). 4. Remove the front tires/wheels. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Remove the adjust plate mounting bolt (A), locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1674 without disconnecting the P/S hoses. 7. Remove the alternator. 8. Remove the four ignition coils. 9. Remove the throttle cable clamps (A) and harness holder (B) from the cylinder head cover. 10. Remove the cylinder head cover. 11. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 12. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar. 13. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1675 14. Remove the upper bracket. 15. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the CMP (TDC) sensor connector (B). 16. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 17. Remove the side engine mount bracket. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1676 18. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor from the oil pump without disconnecting the connector. 19. Apply a force of 98 Nm (10 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.) to the timing belt at the mid point between the camshaft pulley and the water pump pulley and check that the auto-tensioner move smoothly. ^ If the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly, replace the auto-tensioner. ^ Inspect the auto-tensioner when replacing the timing belt. 20. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt, then remove the timing belt. Installation Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially-available 19 mm socket NOTE: If you are removing the auto-tensioner, refer to the auto-tensioner installation procedure. 1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and lower covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1677 2. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 3. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC. -1 The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top. -2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley with the top edge of the head. 4. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence, starting with the drive pulley. -1 Drive pulley (A). -2 Tensioner pulley (B). -3 Water pump pulley (C). -4 Camshaft pulley (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1678 5. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 6. Install the ail bolts loosely, then tighten the mounting bolts as the numbered sequence shown. 7. Install the lower cover. 8. Clean the pulley bolt and washer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1679 9. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and washer (C). 10. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 11. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). 12. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°. 13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns counter clockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark (A) lines up with the pointers (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1680 15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A) ^ If the camshaft pulley marks are also at TDC, go to step 15. ^ If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 11. 16. Install the upper cover (A), then connect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B), and install the grommet (C). 17. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the nuts in the numbered sequence shown. 18. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1681 19. Install the harness holder (A) and throttle cable clamps (B). 20. Install the ignition coils. 21. Loosely install the alternator. 22. Adjust the alternator belt tension or the alternator-compressor belt tension. 23. Loosely install the power steering (P/S) pump belt and pump. 24. Adjust the P/S pump belt. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Install the front tires/wheels. 27. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper. Connect the negative cable, then positive cable and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 28. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1686 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1687 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Alternator Belt Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1688 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1691 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1692 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1693 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1694 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering Belt Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-0010100, 07JGG-001010A, or 07TGG-001000A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Remove the P/S reservoir from the bracket, and set it aside. 2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension of the belt. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to avoid hitting the gauge reset lever. Tension: Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 121 lbs.) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 165 - 198 lbs.) 3. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. Adjustment 4. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A.) and pump locknut (B). 5. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mounting nut and locknut. 6. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt. Deflection Method Inspection 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B). If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. Deflection: Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.5 mm (0.51 - 0.65 inch) New Belt: 9.0 - 11.0 mm (0.35 - 0.43 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 1695 2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. Adjustment 3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A) and pump locknut (B). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mounting nut and locknut. 5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 1696 Drive Belt: Tools and Equipment Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 1697 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations > Page 1703 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement (With Air Conditioning) The dust and pollen filters should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever comes first. Replace the filters more often if the air flow is less than usual. 1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on each side, then hang the glove box down. 2. Remove the filter lid (A) from the blower unit, then pull out the first dust and pollen filter (B). Slide the second filter to the left, and pull it out. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filters in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - CVT: Service and Repair CVT ATF Filter Installation 1. Install the ATF filter brackets (A) on the ATF filter (B). 2. Install the ATF filter and bracket on the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1714 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 3/4-turn type 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Tighten:3/4 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1718 5. If 4 numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 3 numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1 comes around the bottom. 6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 7/8-turn type 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-cm, 16 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1719 5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7 numbers from the one you noted. For example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1 comes around the bottom. 6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Geniune Honda Brake Fluid ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... Dot 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1731 Brake Fluid: Service Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or eyes. In case of contact, take the following actions: * Eye Contact - rinse eyes thoroughly with water. * Skin Contact - wash skin with soap and water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1732 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Brake Bleeding; Service and Repair. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid ..................................................................................................................................... Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid (P/N 08798-9008) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Refill Capacity (including the reservoir capacity of 0.4 L (0.4 US qt): M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 4.0 L (4.2 US qt.) A/T, CVT ............................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 3.9 L (4.1 US qt.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1740 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type .................................................................................................................................................. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1741 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX mark, and inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1742 Coolant: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the radiator cap. 5. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 6. Remove the drain bolt (A) from the rear of the cylinder block. 7. After the coolant has drained, apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 8. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1743 9. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. 10. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. - Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Premixing is not required. Engine Coolant Refill Capacity (including the reservoir capacity of 0.4 L (0.4 US qt): M/T: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt.) A/T, CVT: 3.9 L (4.1 US qt.) 11. Install the radiator cap loosely. 12. Install the battery. 13. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 14. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed. 15. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. 16. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications ATF Change ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 2.7L (2.9 Qt) Overhaul .................................................. .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.0L (6.3 Qt) CVT fluid Change ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................. 3.1L (3.3 Qt) Overhaul .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... 5.6L (6.0 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1750 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Honda ATF-Z1 Honda Service News Notice: If you're replacing transmission fluid in a CVT-equipped vehicle, or just topping it off, make sure you're using the new CVT fluid (P/N 08200-9006). From here on, DON'T put ATF-Z1 in a CVT. If you're topping off a CVT that's already got ATF-Z1, there's no need for concern; this fluid is compatible with ATF-Z1. All CVT-equipped Hondas starting with the 2006 models and onward will be factory-filled with the new CVT fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1753 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF Cooler Flushing. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 5. Refill transmission with the recommended fluid into dipstick hole to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.7 L (2.9 US qt) at changing 6.0 L (6.3 US qt) at overhaul Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - CVT: Capacity Specifications ATF Change ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 2.7L (2.9 Qt) Overhaul .................................................. .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.0L (6.3 Qt) CVT fluid Change ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................. 3.1L (3.3 Qt) Overhaul .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... 5.6L (6.0 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1760 Fluid - CVT: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Honda ATF-Z1 Honda Service News Notice: If you're replacing transmission fluid in a CVT-equipped vehicle, or just topping it off, make sure you're using the new CVT fluid (P/N 08200-9006). From here on, DON'T put ATF-Z1 in a CVT. If you're topping off a CVT that's already got ATF-Z1, there's no need for concern; this fluid is compatible with ATF-Z1. All CVT-equipped Hondas starting with the 2006 models and onward will be factory-filled with the new CVT fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level within 60 - 90 seconds after the engine is turned off. The dipstick should read between the upper mark (A) and the lower mark (B) on the HOT side of the gauge (C). Do not check the level on the COLD side of the gauge (D) when the ATF warmed up. NOTE: Some dipsticks have only the HOT gauge, in which case they might or might not have HOT stamped into the dipstick. 6. If the level is below the lower mark (B), check for fluid leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints, and cooler lines. 7. If the level exceeds the upper mark (A), drain the fluid for proper level. 8. Pour the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 9. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 1763 Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. Change Intervals: Replace at 48,000 miles (80,000 km) or 48 months, then replace every 36,000 miles (60,000 km) or 36 months in normal conditions Replace every 24,000 miles (40,000 km) or 24 months in severe conditions 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. 2. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF Cooler Flushing. 3. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 4. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole (A). Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using non Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 3.1 L (3.3 US qt) at changing 5.6 L (5.9 US qt) at overhaul 5. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark (E) and lower mark (F) on COLD gauge (D), if the dipstick has COLD gauge. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. 7. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 8. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark (A) and lower mark (B) on HOT gauge (C). Do not check the level with COLD gauge (D) when the ATF wormed up. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 1.5L (1.6 Qt) Overhaul .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. 1.6L (1.7 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1768 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................ Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF): P/N 08798-9016 If not available you may use 10W-30 or 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary replacement. An SG grade is preferred, but an SH or SJ grade may be used if SG grade is not available. Replace with Honda MTF as soon as it is convenient. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1769 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid, and make sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 3. If the transmission fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (D) and drain the fluid. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level. Oil Capacity 1.5 L (1.6 US qt) at fluid change 1.6 L (1.7 US qt) at overhaul Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with anew washer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil D17A2, D1746 engines: For engine overhaul ............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 4.2L (4.4 Qt) For oil change, including filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.5L (3.7 Qt) For oil change, without filter ................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.3L (3.5 Qt) D17A1 engine: For engine overhaul ............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 4.2L (4.4 Qt) For oil change, including filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.2L (3.4 Qt) For oil change, without filter ................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.0L (3.2 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1776 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". From -20°F (-30°C) to over 100°F (40°C) .......................................................................................................................................................... SAE 5W-20 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1777 Engine Oil: Service Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosine, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinner or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1778 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. Change interval Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months (Normal conditions) Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months (Severe conditions). 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill with the recommended oil. Capacity D17A2, D17A6 engines: 3.3 L (3.5 US qt.) at oil change. 3.5 L (3.7 US qt.) at oil change including filter. 4.2 L (4.4 US qt.) after engine overhaul. D17A1 engine: 3.0 L (3.2 US qt.) at oil change. 3.2 L (3.4 US qt.) at oil change including filter. 4.2 L (4.4 US qt.) after engine overhaul. 5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Honda Power Steering Fluid Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 1783 Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power steering fluid Capacity For fluid change ................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 0.4 L (0.42 US qt.) For system overhaul .................................................... ................................................................................................................... 1.0 L (1.06 US qt.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 1784 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................................ Honda Power Steering Fluid Do not use ATF Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1785 Power Steering Fluid: Service Precautions Use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid, or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1786 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1787 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1792 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1793 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1794 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity or system .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 500 - 550 g (17.6 - 19.4 oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1797 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... HFC-134 a (R-134 a) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information Service Procedures The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun. Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone depletion. When CFC's are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules. Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage. Upper Level vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and vegetation. Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat. Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all developed countries. As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased. Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle air conditioning systems. Alternative Refrigerants The introduction of alternative refrigerants, primarily the hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) 134a, aims at preventing further ozone layer depletion. Because 134a is chlorine free, it is deemed ozone safe. Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling certification include: National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2 Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/ International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX 76147-2000 Phone: (817) 338-1100 Fax: (817) 338-1451 Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041 Phone: 215-679-2220 Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/ Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 1800 Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information WARNING ! ! * SHOULD HFC-134A CONTACT YOUR EYE(S), CONSULT A DOCTOR IMMEDIATELY. * DO NOT RUB THE AFFECTED EYE(S). INSTEAD, SPLASH QUANTITIES OF FRESH COLD WATER OVER THE AFFECTED AREA TO GRADUALLY RAISE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE REFRIGERANT ABOVE THE FREEZING POINT. * OBTAIN PROPER MEDICAL TREATMENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. * SHOULD THE HFC-134A TOUCH THE SKIN, THE INJURY MUST BE TREATED THE SAME AS SKIN WHICH HAS BEEN FROSTBITTEN OR FROZEN. IMPORTANT: * Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working on refrigerant systems. * Beware of the danger of carbon monoxide fumes caused by running the engine. * Beware of discharged refrigerant in enclosed or improperly ventilated garages. * Always disconnect the negative battery cable and discharge and recover the refrigerant whenever repairing the air conditioning system. CAUTION: Avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant-134a and lubricant vapor and mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. To remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. IMPORTANT: * Do not mix R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant, even in the smallest amounts. R12 and R-134a are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. * Use only the specified lubricant (PAG) for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If you use lubricants other than those specified, compressor failure is likely to occur. Coat all the fittings and the O-ring seals with clean 525 viscosity refrigerant oil in order to provide a leak-proof seal and in order to aid in assembly and disassembly. * Do not store or heat the refrigerant containers above 52 °C (125 °F). * Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame. If the container must be warmed, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. * Do NOT intentionally do the following to the refrigerant containers: Drop - Puncture - Incinerate * Refrigerant will displace oxygen. Work in well ventilated areas in order to prevent suffocation. * Do NOT introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component. Contamination will occur. * If you must carry a container of DOT CFR Refrigerant-134a in a vehicle, do not carry the refrigerant in the passenger compartment. All of the Refrigerant-134a disposable, blue containers are shipped with a heavy metal screw cap in order to protect the valve and the safety plug of the container from damage. Replace the cap after each use of the container in order to continue the protection. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1801 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Air conditioning systems contain HFC-134a. This is a chemical mixture which requires special handling procedures to avoid personal injury. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test Pressure Test Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 1804 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Leak Test Refrigerant Leak Test Special Tool Required Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM, commercially available WARNING: - Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a combustible vapor. - The vapor can burn or explode causing serious injury. - Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning system. CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to the specified capacity, then close the supply valve, and remove the charging system couplers. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year or better. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), recover the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 1805 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must be evacuated. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 1808 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Evacuation System Evacuation CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J221 0 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. When an A/C system has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.) 2. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system. 3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 1809 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Charging System Charging CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Evacuate the system. 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only SANDEN SP-10 refrigerant oil. 4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-1 34a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor will be damaged. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 5. Check for refrigerant leaks. 6. Check for system performance. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant oil Capacity of components Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 25 ml (5/6 fl oz) Evaporator ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... 45 ml (1 1/2 fl oz) Each line and hose ....................................................................................................................................... ..................................... 10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Receiver ............................................................................... ............................................................................................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Compressor . .............................................................................................................................................................. ..... 130 - 150 ml (4 1/3 - 5 fl oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1814 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Type ................................................................................................................................... SANDEN: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH or 38899-P13-A01) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1815 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: SANDEN SP-10: - P/N 38897-P13-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1816 Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Fluid type Genuine Honda DOT3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 1820 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a container of new brake fluid. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 1821 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 1827 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 1828 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 1829 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 1832 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 1833 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 1834 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 1835 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1838 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1839 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 1840 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Specifications Fuse: Specifications Electrical ratings Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 80A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A, 7.5A Under-dash fuse/relay box 20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1847 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1848 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1849 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1850 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1851 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1852 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1855 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1856 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Fuse and Relay Box Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1861 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1862 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1863 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1864 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1865 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1866 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1867 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1868 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1869 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1870 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1871 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1872 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1873 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1874 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1875 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1876 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 71. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1877 69. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1878 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1879 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1882 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1883 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1884 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1885 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1886 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1887 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1888 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1889 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1894 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1895 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1896 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1897 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1898 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1899 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1900 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1901 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1902 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1903 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1904 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1905 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1906 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1907 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1908 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1909 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1910 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1911 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1912 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1913 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1914 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1915 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1916 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1917 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1918 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 1919 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1922 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1923 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 Civic Sis, 2003 Civic Hybrids, 2002-03 CR-Vs, and 2003 Elements. SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining that they can't reset the maintenance required indicator (MAINT REQ'D) on the instrument panel? Find out if the headlights, parking lights, or both were turned on when they tried to reset it. The maintenance required indicator can't be reset if any of these lights are on. In fact, some aftermarket daytime running light devices designed to turn on the headlights, parking lights, or both as soon as you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), must be disabled before the indicator can be reset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1929 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection If the light does not blink or does not come on, check the bulb and speedometer operation. If the bulb and the speedometer are OK, the gauge internal circuits must be faulty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1930 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Required Indicator Reset 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button in the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON 3. Hold the button until the indicator resets (approximately ten seconds). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1934 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures to set them in this section. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1935 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Connect an OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and read the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. Does the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to troubleshooting "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". 3. Check the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for DTCs. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and watch the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on and stay on for more than 20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II)? YES - If the MIL always comes on and stays on, go to step 74. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E29) and the data link connector (DLC). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. NO - If the MIL is always off, go to step 6. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. A loose No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A loose No.20 IG (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal E31. - An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the throttle position (TP) sensor, knock sensor, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A5) and the knock sensor. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the low oil pressure light on? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Inspect the No.10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse and the gauge assembly. Also replace the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse. 9. Inspect the No.20 IGN (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1936 YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the gauge assembly. If the wires are OK, test the ignition switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.20 IG (40A) fuse. 10. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Go to step 14. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E31 to body ground with a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. Also check for a blown MIL bulb. If the wires and the bulb are OK, replace the gauge assembly. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Inspect the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Remove the blown No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box 17. Remove the glove box and PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1937 18. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.4 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 19. 19. Disconnect each of the components or connectors connector below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Idle air control (IAC) valve 3P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 20. NO - Replace the component that made continuity to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 20. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Injectors - Idle air control (IAC) valve - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1938 21. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 22. Inspect the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 34. NO - Go to step 23. 23. Remove the blown No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 24. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 25. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 26. NO - Replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1939 26. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 27. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9), or the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Remove the rear seat cushion. 29. Remove the access panel from the floor. 30. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 31. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 32. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1940 32. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 33. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it as necessary. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 36. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals E9 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 37. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9). 37. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1941 38. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E7 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 42. NO - Go to step 39. 39. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 40. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 41. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1942 41. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E7. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1. If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (E7). 42. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 43. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 44. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 51. NO - Go to step 45. 45. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 46. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 47. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1943 48. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 49. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 1. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (A2, A3). 51. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A23, and A24 individually. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (A4, A5, A23, A24). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1944 52. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 59. NO - Go to step 53. 53. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 54. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 with the ignition switch ON (II). Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the sensor that restored 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 55. 55. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 56. Disconnect the 3P connector from the following sensors. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 57. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1945 58. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 59. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 66. NO - Go to step 60. 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 with the ignition switch ON (II). Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1946 YES - Replace the sensor that restored about 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 62. 62. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 63. Disconnect the 3P connectors from the following sensors. - Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) 64. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 65. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the EGR valve position sensor, knock sensor, TP sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT), or repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A8) and the knock sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 66. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Go to step 67. 67. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 68. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 3P connector. 69. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1947 70. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the FTP sensor. NO - Go to step 71. 71. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 72. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 73. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 74. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 75. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 76. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there about 5 V (or battery voltage)? YES - Go to step 80. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 1948 NO - Go to step 77. 77. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 78. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 79. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the DLC and the ECM/PCM (E29). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 80. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 81. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 82. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ECM/PCM (E31). If the wires are OK, replace the gauge assembly. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse (or the automatic transmission in [P] position). 4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 5. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle will level. 6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 1957 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Tires: Mechanical Specifications Design Specifications Tires Size of front and rear tire U.S.: DX, HX, LX ................................................................................................................................. ........................................... P185/70R14 87S Canada: DX, LX .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... P185/70R14 87S U.S.: EX ........................................................................................................................................................ ................................... P185/65R15 86H Canada: SI .......................................................................... .............................................................................................................. P185/65R15 86H Size of spare tires U.S.: DX, HX, LX ................................................................................................................................. .......................................... T115/70D14 88M Canada: DX, LX ........................................................... ................................................................................................................... T115/70D14 88M U.S.: EX, LX with ABS .................................................................................................................................. ................................ T125/70D15 95M Canada: SI, DX, LX with ABS ....................................................................................................................................................... T125/70D15 95M Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 1960 Tires: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Tire Pressure Front/rear 210 kPa Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1961 Tire Information Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1962 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (l) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications Wheels: Specifications Aluminum wheel Runout Axial Standard or new 0 - 0.7 mm Service limit 2.0 mm Radial Standard or new 0 - 0.7 mm Service limit 1.5 mm Steel wheel Runout Axial Standard or new 0 - 1.0 mm Service limit 2.0 mm Radial Standard or new 0 - 1.0 mm Service limit 1.5 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1966 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1967 Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the axial runout by turning the wheel. Front and Rear Wheel axial runout: Standard: Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. Front and Rear Wheel radial runout: Standard: Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, cheek the wheel bearing end play. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel bearings End play Front 0 - 0.05 mm Rear 0 - 0.05 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 1973 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1974 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the wheels. 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc or drum securely against the hub. 3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as shown, and measure the bearing end play moving the brake disc or drum inward and outward. Bearing end play: Standard: Front/Rear: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 - Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 - Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 - Driver 07749-0010000 - Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1977 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1978 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1979 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1980 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1981 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. - Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. - Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1982 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Hub Bearing Unit Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1983 3. Remove the hub cap (A), raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 4. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 5. Remove the brake drum (A), and remove the hub bearing unit (B) from the spindle. If the brake drum has stuck to the hub bearing unit, pull them out together. Do not tap on the aluminum brake drum. 6. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. - Use a new hub cap on reassembly. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair Jump Starting Jump Starting with an Auxiliary (Booster) Battery CAUTION: Never push or tow the vehicle in an attempt to start it. Serious damage to the emission system as well as other vehicle parts will result. Treat both the discharged battery and the booster battery with great care when using jumper cables. Carefully follow the jump starting procedure, being careful at all times to avoid sparking. WARNING: FAILURE TO CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING: 1. Serous personal injury, particularly to your eyes. 2. Property damage from a battery explosion, battery acid, or an electrical fire. 3. Damage to the electronic components of one or both vehicles particularly. Never expose the battery to an open flame or electrical spark. Gas generated by the battery may catch fire or explode. Remove any rings, watches, or other jewelry before working around the battery. Protect your eyes by wearing an approved set of goggles. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with your eyes or skin. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with fabrics or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a highly corrosive acid. Should battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin, fabric, or a painted surface, immediately and thoroughly rinse the affected area with clean tap water. Never allow metal tools or jumper cables to come in contact with the positive battery terminal, or any other metal surface of the vehicle. This will protect against a short circuit. Always keep batteries out of reach of young children. Jump Starting Procedure 1. Set the vehicle parking brake. If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the selector level in the "PARK" position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the shift lever in the "NEUTRAL" position. Turn "OFF" the ignition. Turn "OFF" all lights and any other accessory requiring electrical power. 2. Look at the built-in hydrometer. If the indication area of the built-in hydrometer is completely clear, do not try to jump start. 3. Attach the end of one jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. This will cause a ground connection, effectively neutralizing the charging procedure. Be sure that the booster battery has a 12 volt rating. 4. Attach one end of the remaining cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to a solid engine ground (such as the air conditioning compressor bracket or the generator mounting bracket) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. The ground connection must be at least 450 mm (18 in.) from the battery of the vehicle whose battery is being charged. WARNING: NEVER ATTACH THE END OF THE JUMPER CABLE DIRECTLY TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE DEAD BATTERY. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery. Make sure that all unnecessary electrical accessories have been turned "OFF". 6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 7. To remove the jumper cables, follow the above directions in reverse order. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1994 Be sure to first disconnect the negative cable from the vehicle with the discharged battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. To accommodate the flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with towing hooks (A) and tie down slots (B). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down slots can be used to secure the vehicle to truck. Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission in Neutral. Automatic Transmission and CVT - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to D position, then N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1998 - Turn off the engine. It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE: - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse (or the automatic transmission in [P] position). 4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 5. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle will level. 6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2009 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2010 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2011 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2012 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2013 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2014 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2015 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2016 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2017 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2018 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2019 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2020 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2021 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2022 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2023 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2024 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2025 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2026 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2027 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2028 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2029 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2030 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2031 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2032 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2033 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2034 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2035 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2036 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2037 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2038 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2039 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2040 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2041 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2042 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31 (EX, HX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2043 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2044 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve moves, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2049 14. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2050 17. VTEC Solenoid Valve (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2051 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2052 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2056 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Disconnect all four injector connectors. 5. Remove the four ignition coils. 6. Remove the four spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Connect a tachometer. 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 10. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 11. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then re-measure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2064 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2065 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Camshaft: Testing and Inspection Inspection NOTE: ^ Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection. ^ Remove the rocker arms and rocker shafts. 1. Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 2. Seat the camshaft by pushing it away from the camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth and read the end play. Camshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.05 - 0.15 mm (0.002 - 0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) 4. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the camshaft holders from the cylinder head. 5. Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head, wipe them clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn. 6. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder head, then set the camshaft back in place. Place a plastigage strip across each journal. 7. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque as shown in step 1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2069 8. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest portion of plastigage on each journal. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits, go to step 10. ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has been replaced, replace the cylinder head.; ^ If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has not been replaced, go to step 9. Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.050 - 0.089 mm (0.0020 - 0.0035 inch) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 9. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks. ^ If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head. ^ If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-to-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head. Camshaft Total Runout: Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2070 10. Measure cam lobe height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2071 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2072 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2073 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake Standard or new 0.017 - 0.050 mm Service limit 0.08 mm Exhaust Standard or new 0.018 - 0.054 mm Service limit 0.08 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Standard (New): Intake: 0.017 - 0.050 mm (0.0007 - 0.0020 inch) Exhaust: 0.018 - 0.054 mm (0.0007 - 0.0021 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) 4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over tolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace both rocker arms in that set (primary and secondary). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2079 5. Inspect the rocker arm piston (A). Push it manually. If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B), carefully apply air pressure to its oil passage. ^ Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2080 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required ^ Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 ^ Air stopper 07LAJ-PR3020B 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 3. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the cylinder head cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 6. Verify that the intake secondary rocker arm (A) moves independently of the intake primary rocker arm (B). ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the secondary and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm moves freely, go to step 7. 7. Repeat step 6 on the remaining intake secondary rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 8. 8. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi). 9. Inspect the valve clearance. 10. Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. 11. Plug the relief hole with the air stopper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2081 12. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the inspection hole (B), and connect an air pressure regulator with a 0 - 100 psi gauge (C). 13. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) NOTE: If the synchronizing piston does not move after applying air pressure, move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually by rotating the crankshaft counterclockwise. 14. Move the intake secondary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm should move together. ^ If the intake primary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the secondary and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 15. Remove the special tools. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2084 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2085 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2086 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms. ^ The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points. ^ Bundle the intake rocker arm assemblies with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2087 NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms. ^ The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2088 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Removal 1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A). 2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. -1 Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. -2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Camshaft Holder Bolt Loosening Sequence Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2095 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2096 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2097 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2098 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2099 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2100 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2101 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2102 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2103 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2104 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2105 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2106 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2107 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2108 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2109 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2110 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2111 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2113 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2114 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2115 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2116 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2117 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2118 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2119 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2120 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2121 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2122 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2123 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2124 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2125 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2126 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31 (EX, HX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2127 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2128 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve moves, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2133 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. 2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal. 4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts to 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-cm, 24 ft. lbs.). Do not rotate the crankshaft. 5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 0.0017 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Rod Bearing Selection Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) increments) depending on the size of its big-end bore. It's then stamped with a number (1, 2, 3, or 4), indicating the range. You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 in any engine. Normal Bore Size: 43.0 mm (1.89 inch) Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2134 Numbers have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the letters stamped on the crank (codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Why Do Connecting Rods Break? Curious why connecting rods break? Afier all, these are heavy-duty parts specifically designed to endure punishing forces and temperatures. Yet, every once in a while they do bend or break and wind up as cool conversation pieces for a coffee table or desk. Connecting rods break only after they've gotten bent. And they won't get bent unless the engine hydro-locks or the rod bearings fail. When troubleshooting a bent or broken connecting rod, here are some things to consider: ^ The number one culprit for connecting rod breakage is hydro-lock. This happens when liquid (water or fuel) entering the combustion chamber exceeds the chamber's volume. Since liquids don't compress, that extra volume in the chamber causes the rod to bend. You won't really notice anything wrong, until that bent rod finally gives out and breaks. This could happen if you're driving through deep, standing water and someone coming the other way splashes water over your hood. On very rare occasions, a bad ECM/PCM or fuel injector can cause too much fuel to enter a cylinder, causing hydro-lock and resulting in a bent rod. Before this happens, though, there are usually some kind of drive ability problems that crop up and remain afier the engine is fixed. A bent rod might not show any symptoms until it actually breaks. But bent rods leave a wider-than-normal carbon witness line in the cylinder because they're shorter. Typically, a healthy engine has a carbon line that's 6 mm deep. An engine that's suffering from bent rods has a second carbon line that's 9 to 12 mm deep. ^ Connecting rod bearings fail for a number of reasons. To properly determine what actually caused a rod bearing to fail, you've got to take apart all rod bearings and main bearings and compare them side by side. If all or most of the bearings and journals show similar damage (scoring, exposed copper, or heat discoloration) the likely cause is oil starvation, poor maintenance, customer abuse, or running the engine with an aftermarket power booster (nitrous oxide setup, supercharger, turbocharger). If only the bearing or journal for the failed rod looks bad but all the other ones look good (no scoring, no exposed copper or heat discoloration) and the crankshaft journals are smooth with no heat discoloration, then that particular bearing/ clearance would be suspect. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2139 Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.016 0.036 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 inch) Small-end bore diameter Standard or new .............................................................................................................................................. 18.96 18.98 mm (0.746 - 0.747 inch) Large-end bore diameter Nominal Standard or New .................................................................................................................................. .................................. 48.0 mm (1.89 inch) End play installed on crankshaft Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.15 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) Torque: Connecting rod bolts to ............................................................................................................................................................. 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ft.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2140 Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pump. 2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft. Connecting Rod End Play Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) 3. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft. 4. Mount a dial indicator on the block so that its tip contacts the end of the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. Crankshaft End Play Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) 6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2141 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Piston base 07973-6570500 ^ Piston base spring 07973-6570600 ^ Piston pin base insert 07973-PE00400 ^ Piston base head 07973-SB00100 or 07TGF-001000A ^ Pilot collar 07973-PE00200 ^ Piston pin driver shaft 07973-PE00310 ^ Piston pin driver head 07973-PE00320 Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block 2. Assemble the special tool as shown. 3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver head and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 inch). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2142 4. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 5. Press the pin (C) out with the pin driver (D), pilot collar (E) and a hydraulic press. Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin Diameter Standard (New): 18.996 - 19.000 mm (0.7479 - 0.7480 inch) 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2143 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.020 mm (0.0004 - 0.0008 inch) 4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and connecting rod small end diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference Standard (New): 0.016 - 0.036 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 inch) Reassembly 1. Assemble the piston and connecting rod with the connecting rod oil hole (A) facing the "IN" mark (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2144 2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and connecting rod. 3. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (B) on the special tool (C). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 4. Press the pin (D) in with the pin driver (E) and a hydraulic press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement 1.Remove the timing belt. 2.Remove the crankshaft position, (CKP) sensor. 3.Remove the timing belt drive pulley. 4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley. 5. Install the CKP sensor. 6. Install the timing belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Bearing Size Codes Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Bearing Size Codes Main Bearing Selection Crankshaft Bore Code Location Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the five main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Bearing Size Codes > Page 2152 Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Bearing Size Codes > Page 2153 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Service Specifications Crankshaft Journals Crankshaft Main journal diameter Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 54.976 55.000 mm (2.1644 - 2.1654 inch) Rod journal diameter Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................... 44.976 45.000 mm (1.7707 - 1.7717 inch) Rod/main journal taper Standard or New .................................................................................................................................. ................................ 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Rod/main journal out-of-round Standard or New .................................................................................................................................. ................................ 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) End play Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.10 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Runout Standard or New ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) maximum Service Limit .................................................................................... ......................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Main Bearing Clearance Crankshaft bearing Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No.1 journal; No.5 journal Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.018 - 0.036 mm (0.0007 - 0.0014 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) No.2, 3 and 4 journals Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Rod bearing clearance Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.024 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Bearing Size Codes > Page 2154 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque the bearing cap bolts sequentially in two steps. 1st step torque: 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft. lbs.) 2nd step torque: 51 Nm (5.2 kgf-m, 38 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2155 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the main caps and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt the main cap down to check the clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights, and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts to 51 Nm (5.2 kgf-cm, 38 ft. lbs.). Do not rotate the crankshaft. 5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance Standard (New): No.1, 5: 0.018 - 0.036mm (0.0007 - 0.0014 inch) No.2, 3, 4: 0.024 - 0.042mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. Main Bearing Selection Crankshaft Bore Code Location Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the five main journal bores. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2156 Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main journal diameter ................................................................................................................................... 54.976 - 55.000 mm (2.1644 - 2.1654 inch) Rod journal diameter ..................................................................................................................................... 44.976 45.000 mm (1.7707 - 1.7717 inch) Rod/main journal taper Standard or New .................................................................................................................................. ................................ 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Rod/main journal out-of-round Standard or New .................................................................................................................................. ................................ 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ........................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) End play Standard or New .................................................................................................................................................. 0.10 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Runout Standard or New ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) maximum Service Limit .................................................................................... ......................................................................................... 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Crankshaft Inspection Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Inspection Straightness NOTE: ^ Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush. ^ Check the keyway and threads. 1. Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block. 2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush. 3. Check the keyway and threads; repair as necessary. 4. Support the crankshaft with V-blocks. 5. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Crankshaft Total Indicator Runout Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Out-of-Round and Taper 6. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Out-of-Round Standard (New): 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) 7. Measure taper at the edge of each rod and main journal. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper Standard (New): 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) max. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Crankshaft Inspection > Page 2162 Service Limit: 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Crankshaft Inspection > Page 2163 Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection End Play Inspection Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection 1. Remove the oil pump. 2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft. Connecting Rod End Play Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) 3. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft. 4. Mount a dial indicator on the block so that its tip contacts the end of the crankshaft. 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not exceed the service limit. Crankshaft End Play Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) 6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission: ^ Manual transmission. ^ Automatic transmission. 3. Remove the cylinder head. 4. Remove the oil pan. 5. Remove the engine block end cover. 6. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil pump (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2166 7. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 8. Remove the bearing cap bridge/bearings. Keep all bearings in order. 9. Turn the crankshaft so No. 2 and No. 3 crankpins are at the top. 10. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 11. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage the journals. 12. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. 13. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge and bearings on the engine in the proper order. 14. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2167 15. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the pistons (B). 16. Reinstall the connecting rod bearing and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 17. To avoid mix-up on reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod size. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2168 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Installation Installation Special Tools Required ^ Handle Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Driver Attachment, 96 mm 07948-SB00101 or 07VAD-P8A010A 1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage. 2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage. 3. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod bearings. 4. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and connecting rods. 5. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No. 2 and rod journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the crankshaft into the block. 6. Install the thrust washers (A) on both edges of the No. 4 main bearing recess. 7. Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod bolts. 8. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and connecting rod No. 4. Install the caps and nuts finger tight. Install the cap so the bearing recess is on the same side as the recess in the rod. 9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the journals into connecting rod No.2 and connecting rod No. 3. Install the connecting rod cap and bolts finger tight. 10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ft. lbs. ). 11. Install the bearing cap bridge. Coat the bolt threads with engine oil. 12. Torque the bearing cap bolts sequentially in two steps. 1st step torque: 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) 2nd step torque: 51 Nm (5.2 kgf-cm, 38 ft. lbs.) NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for about 15 minutes. Bearing Cap Bolts Tightening Sequence: 13. The seal mating surface on the engine block end cover should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2169 14. Drive the crankshaft oil seal squarely into the engine block end cover. 15. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way around with a feeler gauge. Clearance: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.02 - 0.03 inch) 16. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating surfaces. 17. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the engine block end cover and to the inner threads of the bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), and the engine block end cover (B) on the cylinder block. NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue. 18. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. 19. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2170 20. Install the oil pump (A). -1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump. -2 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the bolt holes. -3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to the new O-ring (B). -4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil pump. -5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and check the seal for distortion. 21. Install the oil screen (D) with a new gasket (E). 22. Install the oil pan: ^ Aluminum Oil Pan Type. ^ Steel Oil Pan Type. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Crankshaft Pulley Service Manual Revision Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Crankshaft Pulley Service Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News October 2003 TITLE: S/M Fix: Crankshaft Pulley Installation APPLIES TO: 2001-04 Civic SERVICE TIP: You need to fix the crankshaft pulley installation procedure on page 6-13 of the 200104 Civic S/M. In your copies of the S/M, make these changes: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2175 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Tighten bolt to 200 Nm (148 lb.ft.). - Do not use an impact wrench. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2176 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially-available 19 mm socket Removal 1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 2. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar. Installation 1. Remove any oil from the pulleys (A), guide plate (B), crankshaft (C), bolt (D), and washer (E). Clean and lubricate as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2177 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten bolt to 200 Nm (148 lb.ft.). Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). Tighten the bolt with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Skirt O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 inch) from bottom of skirt Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 74.98 74.99 mm (2.9520 - 2.9524 inch) Service limit .................................................................................... ....................................................................................... 74.97 mm (2.9516 inch) Clearance in cylinder Standard or New .......................................................................................................................................... 0.010 0.040 mm (0.0004 - 0.0016 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2181 Piston: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Remove the crankshaft and pistons 2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 13 mm (0.5 inch) from the bottom of the skirt. Piston Diameter Standard (New): 74.98 - 74.99 mm (2.9520 - 2.9524 inch) Service Limit: 74.97 mm (2.9516 inch) Oversize Piston Diameter 0.25: 75.23 - 75.24 mm (2.9618 - 2.9622 inch) 0.50: 75.48 - 75.49 mm (2.9716 - 2.9720 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2182 4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at three levels in each cylinder as shown. If measurements in any cylinder are beyond the Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the block. If the block is to be rebored, refer to step 6 after reboring. Cylinder Bore Size Standard (New): 75.00 - 75.02 mm (2.9528 - 2.9535 inch) Service Limit: 75.07 mm (2.9555 inch) Oversize: 0.25: 75.25 - 75.27 mm (2.9626 - 2.9634 inch) 0.50: 75.50 - 75.52 mm (2.9724 - 2.9732 inch) Reboring limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) max. Bore Taper: Limit: (Difference between first and third measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2183 6. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown. Engine Block Warpage Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and cylinder block for excessive wear. Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.040 mm (0.0004 - 0.0016 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal Piston: Service and Repair Crankshaft and Piston Removal Removal 1. Remove the engine assembly. 2. Remove the transmission: ^ Manual transmission. ^ Automatic transmission. 3. Remove the cylinder head. 4. Remove the oil pan. 5. Remove the engine block end cover. 6. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil pump (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2186 7. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 8. Remove the bearing cap bridge/bearings. Keep all bearings in order. 9. Turn the crankshaft so No. 2 and No. 3 crankpins are at the top. 10. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order. 11. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage the journals. 12. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective caps. 13. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge and bearings on the engine in the proper order. 14. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2187 15. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the pistons (B). 16. Reinstall the connecting rod bearing and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 17. To avoid mix-up on reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod size. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2188 Piston: Service and Repair Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Piston base 07973-6570500 ^ Piston base spring 07973-6570600 ^ Piston pin base insert 07973-PE00400 ^ Piston base head 07973-SB00100 or 07TGF-001000A ^ Pilot collar 07973-PE00200 ^ Piston pin driver shaft 07973-PE00310 ^ Piston pin driver head 07973-PE00320 Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block 2. Assemble the special tool as shown. 3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver head and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 inch). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2189 4. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 5. Press the pin (C) out with the pin driver (D), pilot collar (E) and a hydraulic press. Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin Diameter Standard (New): 18.996 - 19.000 mm (0.7479 - 0.7480 inch) 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2190 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.020 mm (0.0004 - 0.0008 inch) 4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and connecting rod small end diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference Standard (New): 0.016 - 0.036 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 inch) Reassembly 1. Assemble the piston and connecting rod with the connecting rod oil hole (A) facing the "IN" mark (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2191 2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and connecting rod. 3. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (B) on the special tool (C). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 4. Press the pin (D) in with the pin driver (E) and a hydraulic press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2192 Piston: Service and Repair Piston Installation Installation If the crankshaft is already installed 1. Set the crankshaft to BDC for each cylinder. 2. Remove the connecting rod caps, and slip short sections of rubber hose (A) over the connecting rod bolts. Then install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is securely in place. 3. Position the arrow (B) facing the timing belt side of the engine. 4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 5. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. 6. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage. 7. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the rod caps with bearings. Torque the nuts to 32 Nm (3.3 kgf-cm, 24 ft. lbs.). If the crankshaft is not installed 1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is securely in place. 2. Position the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the engine. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft and Piston Removal > Page 2193 3. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. 4. Position all pistons at top dead center. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Piston pin O.D. Standard or new 18.996 - 19.000 mm Pin-to-piston clearance Standard or new 0.010 - 0.020 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2197 Piston Pin: Service and Repair Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Piston base 07973-6570500 ^ Piston base spring 07973-6570600 ^ Piston pin base insert 07973-PE00400 ^ Piston base head 07973-SB00100 or 07TGF-001000A ^ Pilot collar 07973-PE00200 ^ Piston pin driver shaft 07973-PE00310 ^ Piston pin driver head 07973-PE00320 Disassembly 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block 2. Assemble the special tool as shown. 3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver head and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 inch). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2198 4. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 5. Press the pin (C) out with the pin driver (D), pilot collar (E) and a hydraulic press. Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin Diameter Standard (New): 18.996 - 19.000 mm (0.7479 - 0.7480 inch) 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2199 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.020 mm (0.0004 - 0.0008 inch) 4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and connecting rod small end diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference Standard (New): 0.016 - 0.036 mm (0.0006 - 0.0014 inch) Reassembly 1. Assemble the piston and connecting rod with the connecting rod oil hole (A) facing the "IN" mark (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2200 2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and connecting rod. 3. With the embossed mark facing up, place the piston assembly (B) on the special tool (C). Be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. 4. Press the pin (D) in with the pin driver (E) and a hydraulic press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring groove width Top Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 1.020 - 1.030 mm (0.0402 - 0.0406 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 1.05 mm (0.041 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 1.220 - 1.230 mm (0.0481 - 0.0484 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) Oil Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 2.005 - 2.020 mm (0.0789 - 0.0795 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.05 mm (0.081 inch) Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.035 - 0.060 mm (0.0014 - 0.0024 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Second Standard or New .................................................................................................................................... 0.030 - 0.055 mm (0.0012 - 0.0022 inch) Service Limit ............................................................................................. .......................................................................... 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Ring end gap Top Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.15 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.30 0.45 mm (0.012 - 0.018 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Oil Standard or New ............................................................................................................................................ 0.20 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit ......................................................................................... .............................................................................. 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2204 Piston Ring: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block. 2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B). 3. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade to fit the piston grooves. The top ring groove is 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) wide. The second ring groove is 1.2 mm (0.05 inch wide. The oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) wide. File down a blade if necessary. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper with cleaning tools. NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15 - 20 mm (0.6 - 0.8 inch) from the bottom. 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge: ^ If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. ^ If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits. ^ If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder block must be rebored. Piston Ring End-Gap: Top Ring Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Ring Standard (New): 0.30 - 0.45 mm (0.012 - 0.018 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Oil Ring Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2205 6. Install the top ring (A) and second ring (B) as shown The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward. 7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. 8. Position the ring end gaps as shown: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2206 9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearances: Top Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.035 - 0.060 mm (0.0014 - 0.0024 inch) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Second Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.030 - 0.055 mm (0.0012 - 0.0022 inch) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2211 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the grommet from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector. Remove the upper cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the TDC marks (B) on the pulley should line up with the top edge of the head. 6. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Adjusting screw location: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2212 7. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. 8. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 9. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2213 10. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be toward the exhaust side of the head. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 12. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. TDC marks (A) are visible again. 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 14. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) should be on the intake side of the head. 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 16. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2217 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake Standard or new 0.017 - 0.050 mm Service limit 0.08 mm Exhaust Standard or new 0.018 - 0.054 mm Service limit 0.08 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection Inspection 1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition. Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Standard (New): Intake: 0.017 - 0.050 mm (0.0007 - 0.0020 inch) Exhaust: 0.018 - 0.054 mm (0.0007 - 0.0021 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) 4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over tolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace both rocker arms in that set (primary and secondary). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2223 5. Inspect the rocker arm piston (A). Push it manually. If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm set. NOTE: ^ When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B), carefully apply air pressure to its oil passage. ^ Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2224 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection VTEC Rocker Arm Test VTEC Rocker Arm Test Special Tools Required ^ Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100 ^ Air stopper 07LAJ-PR3020B 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 3. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the cylinder head cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC). 6. Verify that the intake secondary rocker arm (A) moves independently of the intake primary rocker arm (B). ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the secondary and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. ^ If the intake secondary rocker arm moves freely, go to step 7. 7. Repeat step 6 on the remaining intake secondary rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 8. 8. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi). 9. Inspect the valve clearance. 10. Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. 11. Plug the relief hole with the air stopper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Rocker Arms and Shaft Inspection > Page 2225 12. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the inspection hole (B), and connect an air pressure regulator with a 0 - 100 psi gauge (C). 13. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 36 psi) NOTE: If the synchronizing piston does not move after applying air pressure, move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually by rotating the crankshaft counterclockwise. 14. Move the intake secondary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm should move together. ^ If the intake primary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the secondary and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest. 15. Remove the special tools. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2228 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2229 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2230 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly/Reassembly NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms. ^ The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points. ^ Bundle the intake rocker arm assemblies with rubber bands to keep them together as a set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2231 NOTE: ^ Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location. ^ Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms. ^ The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. ^ When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. ^ Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation > Page 2232 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly Removal Removal 1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A). 2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly. -1 Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. -2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts. Camshaft Holder Bolt Loosening Sequence Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair Cylinder Head Cover Installation 1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the groove. 2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the cylinder head cover (B). Seat the head cover gasket in the recesses for the camshaft first, then work it into the groove around the outside edges. Make sure the head cover gasket is seated securely in the corners of the recesses (C) with no gap. 3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry. 4. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, to the head cover gasket at the four corners of the recesses (A). NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue. 5. Hold the head cover gasket in the groove by placing your fingers on the camshaft holder contacting surfaces (top of the semicircles). Set the spark plug seal (A) on the spark plug tubes. Once the cylinder head cover (B) is on the cylinder head, slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the head cover casket. 6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer that is damaged or deteriorated. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2236 7. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf-cm, 7.2 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the harness holder (A) and throttle cable clamps (B). 9. Install the ignition coils. 10. Check that all tubes, hoses and connectors are installed correctly. 11. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications Valve guides I.D. Intake Standard or new 5.51 - 5.53 mm Service limit 5.55 mm Exhaust Standard or new 5.51 - 5.53 mm Service limit 5.55 mm Installed height Intake Standard or new 17.85 - 18.35 mm Exhaust Standard or new 18.65 - 19.15 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2240 Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm, then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). ^ If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck it using a new valve. ^ If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve. ^ If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service limit, go to step 2. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.002 - 0.004 inch) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.16 mm (0.004 0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.22 mm (0.009 inch) 2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.02 - 0.05 mm (0.0008 - 0.0020 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.05 - 0.08 mm (0.0020 - 0.0031 inch) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2241 Valve Guide: Service and Repair Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 ^ Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 1. As illustrated below, use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer. 2. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour. 3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats. 4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 inch) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2242 5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head. 6. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 inch) bit, then try again. Drill out the guides only in extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks. 7. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them. 8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide in to the specified installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. Valve Guide Installed Height Intake: 17.85 - 18.35 mm (0.703 - 0.722 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2243 Exhaust: 18.65 - 19.15 (0.734 - 0.754 inch) 9. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil. 10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore. 11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore. 12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue. 13. Check the clearance with a valve. Verify that the valve slides in the intake and exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Valve seats Width Intake Standard or new 0.85 - 1.15 mm Service limit 1.60 mm Exhaust Standard or new 1.25 - 1.55 mm Service limit 2.00 mm Stem installed height Intake Standard or new 53.17 - 53.64 mm Service limit 53.89 mm Exhaust Standard or new 53.17 - 53.64 mm Service limit 53.89 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2247 Valve Seat: Service and Repair Reconditioning If the valve guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats. 1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cover. -1 Carefully cut a 45°seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. -2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5° cutter (Intake) or 60° cutter (exhaust). Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. -3 Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters. Valve Seat Width Intake: Standard (New): 0.85 - 1.15 mm (0.033 - 0.045 inch) Service Limit: 1.60 mm (0.063 inch) Exhaust: Standard (New1: 1.25 - 1.55 mm (0.049 - 0.061 inch) Service Limit:2.00 mm (0.079 inch) 2. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several times. 3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat. ^ If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 67.5° cutter (Intake) or 60° cutter (exhaust) to move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. ^ If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2248 4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and measure the valve stem installed height (A). Valve Stem Installed Height Standard (New): 53.17 - 53.64 mm (2.093 - 2.112 inch) Service Limit: 53.89 mm (2.122 inch) 5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications Valve springs Free length VTEC intake Standard or new 56.49 mm VTEC exhaust Standard or new 58.70 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal Removal Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed, so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers. 3. Install the valve guide seal remover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2254 4. Remove the valve seal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2255 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation Installation 1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides. 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B). NOTE: Exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D), and intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (F). They are not interchangeable. 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2256 7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Specifications Valve: Specifications Valves Clearance (cold) Intake Standard or new 0.18 - 0.22 mm Exhaust Standard or new 0.23 - 0.27 mm Stem O.D. Intake Standard or new 5.48 - 5.49 mm Service limit 5.45 mm Exhaust Standard or new 5.45 - 5.46 mm Service limit 5.42 mm Stem-to-guide clearance Intake Standard or new 0.02 - 0.05 mm Service limit 0.08 mm Exhaust Standard or new 0.05 - 0.08 mm Service limit 0.11 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Valve Inspection Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Inspection Inspection Measure the valve in these areas. Intake Valve Dimensions A Standard (New): 29.85 - 30.15 mm (1.175 - 1.187 inch) B Standard (New): 118.27 - 118.87 mm (4.656 - 4.680 inch) C Standard (New): 5.480 - 5.490 mm (0.2157 - 0.2161 inch) C Service Limit: 5.45 mm (0.215 inch) Exhaust Valve Dimensions A Standard (New): 25.85 - 26.15 mm (1.018 - 1.030 inch) B Standard (New): 115.65 116.25 mm (4.553 - 4.577 inch) C Standard (New): 5.450 - 5.460 mm (0.2146 - 0.2150 inch) C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Valve Inspection > Page 2262 Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection Inspection 1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm, then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). ^ If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck it using a new valve. ^ If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve. ^ If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service limit, go to step 2. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.002 - 0.004 inch) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.16 mm (0.004 0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.22 mm (0.009 inch) 2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.02 - 0.05 mm (0.0008 - 0.0020 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Standard (New): 0.05 - 0.08 mm (0.0020 - 0.0031 inch) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal Valve: Service and Repair Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal Removal Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed, so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers. 3. Install the valve guide seal remover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2265 4. Remove the valve seal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2266 Valve: Service and Repair Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation Installation 1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides. 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B). NOTE: Exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D), and intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (F). They are not interchangeable. 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal > Page 2267 7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2273 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2274 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Alternator Belt Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2275 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2278 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2279 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Alternator - A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), lock bolt (B) and lower bracket mounting bolt (C). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2280 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), lock bolt (C) and lower bracket mounting bolt (D). 3. Torque the mounting bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (E) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt, mounting bolt and lower bracket mounting bolt. 5. Recheck the belt tension. 6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2281 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering Belt Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-0010100, 07JGG-001010A, or 07TGG-001000A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Remove the P/S reservoir from the bracket, and set it aside. 2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and measure the tension of the belt. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to avoid hitting the gauge reset lever. Tension: Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 121 lbs.) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 165 - 198 lbs.) 3. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. Adjustment 4. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A.) and pump locknut (B). 5. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mounting nut and locknut. 6. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt. Deflection Method Inspection 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B). If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. Deflection: Used Belt: 13.0 - 16.5 mm (0.51 - 0.65 inch) New Belt: 9.0 - 11.0 mm (0.35 - 0.43 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment > Page 2282 2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. Adjustment 3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A) and pump locknut (B). 4. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mounting nut and locknut. 5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 2283 Drive Belt: Tools and Equipment Honda Serpintine Belt Wrench AST tool# HON1419 -Lightweight and slim design -Equipped with 14mm and 19mm, 12 point securing attachments Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 2284 -Works on most Honda applications Contact AST for pricing Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure with oil temperature at 176°F (80°C) At idle ................................................................................................................................................... .............. 70 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm ....................................................................................................................................................... 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) minimum Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2292 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer or a Honda PGM Tester. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install an oil pressure gauge (A). 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Al low the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) minimum 5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect these items: ^ Check the oil filter for clogging. ^ Check the oil pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil D17A2, D1746 engines: For engine overhaul ............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 4.2L (4.4 Qt) For oil change, including filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.5L (3.7 Qt) For oil change, without filter ................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.3L (3.5 Qt) D17A1 engine: For engine overhaul ............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 4.2L (4.4 Qt) For oil change, including filter .............................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.2L (3.4 Qt) For oil change, without filter ................................................................................................................. ............................................................ 3.0L (3.2 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2299 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. Engine Oil API Classification .................................................................................................................................... Make sure the label says "For Gasoline Engines". From -20°F (-30°C) to over 100°F (40°C) .......................................................................................................................................................... SAE 5W-20 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2300 Engine Oil: Service Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosine, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinner or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practicable, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2301 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil Replacement NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. Change interval Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months (Normal conditions) Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months (Severe conditions). 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil. 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B). 4. Refill with the recommended oil. Capacity D17A2, D17A6 engines: 3.3 L (3.5 US qt.) at oil change. 3.5 L (3.7 US qt.) at oil change including filter. 4.2 L (4.4 US qt.) after engine overhaul. D17A1 engine: 3.0 L (3.2 US qt.) at oil change. 3.2 L (3.4 US qt.) at oil change including filter. 4.2 L (4.4 US qt.) after engine overhaul. 5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil Filter Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 3/4-turn type 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Tighten:3/4 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2305 5. If 4 numbers or marks (1 to 4 or V to VVVV) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number or mark is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 3 numbers or marks from the one you noted. For example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1 comes around the bottom. 6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 7/8-turn type 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-cm, 16 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2306 5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten the filter. ^ Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number is at the bottom. ^ Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7 numbers from the one you noted. For example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1 comes around the bottom. 6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Aluminum Oil Pan Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.). Note: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Steel Oil Pan Tighten the bolts and nuts finger tight at six points as shown. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clockwise in 3 steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.). Note: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal Oil Pan Removal If the engine is out of the vehicle, go to step 6. 1. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. D17A2 engine: Disconnect the primary heated oxygen sensor (primary HO2S) connector and secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary HO2S) connector, then remove the exhaust pipe A/ three way catalytic converter (TWC). 4. D17A6 engine: Disconnect the third heated oxygen sensor (third HO2S) connector, remove the exhaust pipe A/TWC assembly. 5. D17A1 engine: Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler assembly. 6. Remove the bolts/nuts securing the oil pan. 7. Remove the oil pan. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2312 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Installation Installation Aluminum Oil Pan 1. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces and bolt holes. 2. Apply liquid gasket, part No.08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes. NOTE: ^ Apply a 4 mm wide bead of liquid gasket. ^ Apply a second bead where the two ends of the first bead meet. ^ Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue. 3. Install the oil pan. 4. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.). 5. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Steel Oil Pan 1. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces and bolt holes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2313 2. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, on the oil pump and engine block end cover mating areas. NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue. 3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, to the new oil pan gasket (A) at the four corners of the recesses (B), then install the oil pan (C). NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue. 4. Tighten the bolts and nuts finger tight at six points as shown. 5. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clockwise in 3 steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.). 6. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2317 161. Middle Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2318 12. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2319 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2320 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 3. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. 4. Install the oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2325 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2326 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2327 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2328 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2329 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2330 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2331 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2332 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2333 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2334 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2335 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2336 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2337 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2338 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2339 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2340 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2341 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2342 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2343 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2344 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2345 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2346 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2347 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2348 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2349 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2350 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2351 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2352 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2353 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2354 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2355 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2356 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2357 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2358 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2359 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure with oil temperature at 176°F (80°C) At idle ................................................................................................................................................... .............. 70 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm ....................................................................................................................................................... 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) minimum Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2364 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer or a Honda PGM Tester. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install an oil pressure gauge (A). 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Al low the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) minimum 5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect these items: ^ Check the oil filter for clogging. ^ Check the oil pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2368 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2369 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2370 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2376 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2377 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2378 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2379 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2380 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2381 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2382 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2383 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2384 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2385 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2386 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2387 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2388 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2389 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2390 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2391 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2392 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2393 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2394 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2395 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2396 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2397 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2398 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2399 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2400 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2401 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2402 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2403 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2404 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2405 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2406 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2407 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2408 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2409 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2410 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2415 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2416 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Customer Interest Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks 01-040 August 14, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED * Civic Rear Main Oil Seal Leaks (Supersedes 01-040, 1996-2001 Civic Rear Main Seal Leak, dated June 12, 2001) * Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil between the block and the transmission. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal) is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED REQUIRED MATERIALS PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2425 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91214-P7A-004 H/C 5618988 Defect Code: 051 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. *DIAGNOSIS Clean the area with a shop towel where the engine block and transmission meet. Start the engine, and look for oil leakage from the area with the aid of a powdered leak detector. ^ If you see any signs of leakage, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no signs of leakage, then what looked like leakage may have been excess residue from a previous repair on another part. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission. Refer to section 13 or 14 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Remove and discard the rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal). 3. Install the new oil seal. Refer to page 7-29 of the '96-00 service manual or page 7-27 of the '01 service manual. 4. Reinstall the transmission. 5. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 6. Refill the transmission with the appropriate fluid. 7. 2001 models only Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 8. 2001 2-door EX and LX models only Drive the vehicle above 40 mph for 5 to 10 minutes with the cruise control on. (This lets the cruise control actuator learn how much slack there is in the throttle cable.)* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2426 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks 01-040 August 14, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED * Civic Rear Main Oil Seal Leaks (Supersedes 01-040, 1996-2001 Civic Rear Main Seal Leak, dated June 12, 2001) * Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil between the block and the transmission. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal) is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED REQUIRED MATERIALS PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2432 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91214-P7A-004 H/C 5618988 Defect Code: 051 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. *DIAGNOSIS Clean the area with a shop towel where the engine block and transmission meet. Start the engine, and look for oil leakage from the area with the aid of a powdered leak detector. ^ If you see any signs of leakage, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no signs of leakage, then what looked like leakage may have been excess residue from a previous repair on another part. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission. Refer to section 13 or 14 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Remove and discard the rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal). 3. Install the new oil seal. Refer to page 7-29 of the '96-00 service manual or page 7-27 of the '01 service manual. 4. Reinstall the transmission. 5. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 6. Refill the transmission with the appropriate fluid. 7. 2001 models only Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 8. 2001 2-door EX and LX models only Drive the vehicle above 40 mph for 5 to 10 minutes with the cruise control on. (This lets the cruise control actuator learn how much slack there is in the throttle cable.)* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2433 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2434 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation - In Car Special Tools Required ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Driver attachment 07948-SB00101 or 07VAD-P84010A 1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 3. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the engine block end cover. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Installation - In Car Special Tools Required Inner driver handle 07746-0030100 1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Installation 1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides. 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B). NOTE: Exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D), and intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (F). They are not interchangeable. 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2441 7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2446 161. Middle Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2447 12. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2448 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2449 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 3. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. 4. Install the oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Camshaft, Rocker Arm, Camshaft Seal and Pulley Installation NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes. 1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a new O-ring (B) (D17A2, D17A6 engines). 3. Clean and install the oil control orifice (C) (D17A1 engine). 4. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (D) is facing up (No.1 piston TDC). 5. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws. 6. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface (shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. 7. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2454 8. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Specified torque 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-cm, 8.7 ft. lbs.) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 9. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug (B) with the top edge of the head, then install the cylinder head plug in the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2455 10. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement 1.Remove the timing belt. 2.Remove the crankshaft position, (CKP) sensor. 3.Remove the timing belt drive pulley. 4. Install the new timing belt drive pulley. 5. Install the CKP sensor. 6. Install the timing belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt Replacemnt Interval 110,000 miles (176,000 km) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2462 Timing Belt: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder mounting bolts. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 5. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2463 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially-available 19 mm socket 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 3. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its Top Dead Center (TDC) mark (A) lines up with the pointers (B). 4. Remove the front tires/wheels. 5. Remove the splash shield. 6. Remove the adjust plate mounting bolt (A), locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2464 without disconnecting the P/S hoses. 7. Remove the alternator. 8. Remove the four ignition coils. 9. Remove the throttle cable clamps (A) and harness holder (B) from the cylinder head cover. 10. Remove the cylinder head cover. 11. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 12. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar. 13. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2465 14. Remove the upper bracket. 15. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the CMP (TDC) sensor connector (B). 16. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 17. Remove the side engine mount bracket. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2466 18. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor from the oil pump without disconnecting the connector. 19. Apply a force of 98 Nm (10 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.) to the timing belt at the mid point between the camshaft pulley and the water pump pulley and check that the auto-tensioner move smoothly. ^ If the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly, replace the auto-tensioner. ^ Inspect the auto-tensioner when replacing the timing belt. 20. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt, then remove the timing belt. Installation Special Tools Required ^ Holder handle 07JAB-001020A ^ Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A ^ Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially-available 19 mm socket NOTE: If you are removing the auto-tensioner, refer to the auto-tensioner installation procedure. 1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and lower covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2467 2. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 3. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC. -1 The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top. -2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley with the top edge of the head. 4. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence, starting with the drive pulley. -1 Drive pulley (A). -2 Tensioner pulley (B). -3 Water pump pulley (C). -4 Camshaft pulley (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2468 5. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 6. Install the ail bolts loosely, then tighten the mounting bolts as the numbered sequence shown. 7. Install the lower cover. 8. Clean the pulley bolt and washer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2469 9. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and washer (C). 10. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B). 11. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-cm, 14 ft. lbs.) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). 12. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°. 13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns counter clockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark (A) lines up with the pointers (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2470 15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A) ^ If the camshaft pulley marks are also at TDC, go to step 15. ^ If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 through 11. 16. Install the upper cover (A), then connect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B), and install the grommet (C). 17. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the nuts in the numbered sequence shown. 18. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2471 19. Install the harness holder (A) and throttle cable clamps (B). 20. Install the ignition coils. 21. Loosely install the alternator. 22. Adjust the alternator belt tension or the alternator-compressor belt tension. 23. Loosely install the power steering (P/S) pump belt and pump. 24. Adjust the P/S pump belt. 25. Install the splash shield. 26. Install the front tires/wheels. 27. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper. Connect the negative cable, then positive cable and apply grease to prevent corrosion. 28. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications Tighten the auto-tensioner mounting bolt (A) to 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-cm, 33 ft. lbs.). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2475 Timing Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Auto-Tensioner Inspection 1. Remove the auto-tensioner. NOTE: Do not apply force to the tensioner pulley. 2. Put the auto-tensioner on a surface plate. 3. Measure the height at point A (A) and point B (B). 4. Calculate the difference in height between point A and point B. If the difference in height is out of tolerance, replace the auto-tensioner. Difference in height: Specification: 0.75 mm (0.030 inch) 5. Inspect the spring grommet (A). Replace the grommet if it is damaged or deteriorated. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2476 Timing Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Auto-Tensioner Removal/ Installation Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the auto-tensioner. Installation 1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and lower covers. 2. Set the crankshaft to TDC. Align the TDC mark (A) on the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump. 3. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC. -1 The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2477 -2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley with the top edge of the head. 4. Align the holes on the tensioner pulley (A) and tensioner base (B), then insert a 3.0 mm (0.12 inch) diameter pin into the holes. 5. Install the tensioner spring (A) on the auto tensioner (B). 6. Install the auto-tensioner, then tighten the auto tensioner mounting bolt (A) to 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf-cm, 7.2 ft. lbs.). 7. Loosen the auto-tensioner mounting bolt 180°. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2478 8. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise sequence, starting with the drive pulley. -1 Drive pulley (A). -2 Tensioner pulley (B). -3 Water pump pulley (C). -4 Camshaft pulley (D). 9. Install the tensioner spring on the tensioner bolt. 10. Rotate the crankshaft pulley two turns counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 11. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. 12. Tighten the auto-tensioner mounting bolt (A) to 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-cm, 33 ft. lbs.), then remove the pin (B) from the auto-tensioner. 13. Install the remaining parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2487 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2488 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2489 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2490 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2491 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2492 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2493 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2494 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2495 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2496 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2497 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2498 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2499 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2500 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2501 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2502 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2503 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2504 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2505 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2506 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2507 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2508 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2509 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2510 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2511 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2512 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2513 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2514 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2515 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2516 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2517 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2518 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2519 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2520 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31 (EX, HX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2521 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2522 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve moves, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations 13. Middle Of Engine (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2526 93. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2527 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the resonator (see step 5). 2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B) securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting pipe. 4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector, then remove the VTEC oil Pressure switch (A). 5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2532 14. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2533 17. VTEC Solenoid Valve (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2534 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2535 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure at idle .................................................................................................................................... 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2540 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2541 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, step 5. - If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed With no-load conditions: USA model: M/T .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 700 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT .................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada model: M/T .............................................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm A/T .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 720 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT ........................................................ ................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2545 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system. Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve: - After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed. - When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2546 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Leave the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connected. - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up, start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve 2P connector. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in neutral) unit the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. 5. Idle the engine for 1 minute with the heater fan switch on HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see the Symptom Chart. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 2547 Idle Speed: Service and Repair Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so that the the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or unplug its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM with the PGM tester. NOTE: Erasing the DTCs does not require the idle learn procedure to be done again. - Remove the No.6 (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 (60 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the PGM-FI main relays 1 and 2 (behind the glove box). - Remove either of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug any of the connectors from the back of the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and the ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the ground G1 from the transmission housing. To complete the idle learn procedure, do this: 1. Make sure all the electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. 2. Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). 3. Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations > Page 2552 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2557 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Gasoline Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) ITEM MEASUREMENT / QUALIFICATION STANDARD / SPECIFICATION SERVICE LIMIT Spark Plug Type NGK: PFR6F-11 DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11 Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2571 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2572 Spark Plug: Application and ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PZFR6F-11 DENSO ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... PKJ20CR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................. 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2573 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2574 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2578 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Disconnect all four injector connectors. 5. Remove the four ignition coils. 6. Remove the four spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Connect a tachometer. 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 10. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 11. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then re-measure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2582 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the grommet from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector. Remove the upper cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the TDC marks (B) on the pulley should line up with the top edge of the head. 6. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Adjusting screw location: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2583 7. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. 8. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 9. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2584 10. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be toward the exhaust side of the head. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 12. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. TDC marks (A) are visible again. 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 14. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) should be on the intake side of the head. 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 16. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm ............................................................................................................................................... 130 L (137 US qt, 114 Imp qt)/minute Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2588 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole (A) is normal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2589 Water Pump: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the water pump (A) by removing four bolts. 3. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 4. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal. 5. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Refill Capacity (including the reservoir capacity of 0.4 L (0.4 US qt): M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 4.0 L (4.2 US qt.) A/T, CVT ............................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 3.9 L (4.1 US qt.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2595 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type .................................................................................................................................................. Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2596 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Check 1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the MAX (A) and MIN mark (B). 2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX mark, and inspect the cooling system for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2597 Coolant: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the radiator cap. 5. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant. 6. Remove the drain bolt (A) from the rear of the cylinder block. 7. After the coolant has drained, apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 8. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2598 9. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. 10. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. NOTE: Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. - Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Premixing is not required. Engine Coolant Refill Capacity (including the reservoir capacity of 0.4 L (0.4 US qt): M/T: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt.) A/T, CVT: 3.9 L (4.1 US qt.) 11. Install the radiator cap loosely. 12. Install the battery. 13. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 14. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed. 15. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. 16. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications Coolant Reservoir: Specifications Reservoir Coolant capacity 0.4 L Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2611 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2612 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2613 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2614 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2615 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2616 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2617 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2618 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2619 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2620 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2621 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2622 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2623 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2624 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2625 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2626 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2627 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2628 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2629 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2630 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2631 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2632 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2633 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2634 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2635 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2636 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2637 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2638 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2639 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2640 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2641 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2642 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2643 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2644 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations 9. Middle Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2650 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2651 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2652 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2653 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2654 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2655 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2656 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2657 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2658 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2659 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2660 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2661 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2662 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2663 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2664 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2665 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2666 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2667 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2668 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2669 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2670 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2671 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2672 66. Radiator Fan Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2673 Fans Image 63 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2674 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Fan Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). 2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the B terminal and the ground to the A terminal. 3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2678 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2679 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2680 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2681 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2682 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Intermittent Overheating or High Temp Gauge Reading APPLIES TO: 2000-01 Civics SERVICE TIP: If owners of are complaining that the temperature gauge needle sometimes shoots up to the dreaded H mark for no apparent reason, the problem may be a faulty radiator cooling fan switch. If the switch is faulty, it can cause an intermittent overheating problem or cause the temperature gauge needle to climb past its normal position. To fix this problem, replace the thermoswitch, P/N 37760-P00-004, H/C 3881554. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2687 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Radiator fan switch Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196 - 203 deg F Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5 - 15 deg F from actual "ON" temperature Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2688 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2689 10. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2690 67. Radiator Fan Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2691 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the radiator fen switch. 1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C) and B terminal (D) according to the table. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2692 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Radiator Fan Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector, then remove the radiator fan switch (A). 2. Install the radiator fan switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2700 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2701 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2702 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2703 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Intermittent Overheating or High Temp Gauge Reading APPLIES TO: 2000-01 Civics SERVICE TIP: If owners of are complaining that the temperature gauge needle sometimes shoots up to the dreaded H mark for no apparent reason, the problem may be a faulty radiator cooling fan switch. If the switch is faulty, it can cause an intermittent overheating problem or cause the temperature gauge needle to climb past its normal position. To fix this problem, replace the thermoswitch, P/N 37760-P00-004, H/C 3881554. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2708 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Radiator fan switch Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196 - 203 deg F Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5 - 15 deg F from actual "ON" temperature Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2709 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2710 10. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2711 67. Radiator Fan Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2712 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the radiator fen switch. 1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C) and B terminal (D) according to the table. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2713 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Radiator Fan Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector, then remove the radiator fan switch (A). 2. Install the radiator fan switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 2719 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2720 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). 2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C). 3. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool with the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C) to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cool Air At Idle Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cool Air At Idle Heater Blows Cool Air When Coming to a Stop or at Idle Got a 01-05 Civic with a heater that blows warm air while driving but starts blowing Cool air when coming to a stop or at idle? What's most likely causing this problem is air trapped in the heater core. To fix this problem, you've got to bleed the cooling system (replacing the thermostat won't do the trick). Here's how you do it: 1. Fill the reserve tank with Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 50 the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the tank. 2. Remove the radiator cap. Make sure the coolant level is up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if needed. 3. Loosely install the radiator cap. 4. Set the temperature control knob to maximum. 5. Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). Shut off the engine. 6. Remove the radiator cap. Make sure the coolant level is up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if needed. 7. Securely install the radiator cap. 8. Start the engine, and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2725 Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2726 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater core. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting bolt and the heater valve as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2727 8. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 9. Remove the dashboard. 10. Remove the blower unit. 11. Disconnect the drain hose (A), then remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit (B). 12. Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion valve cover (A). With air conditioning; carefully pull out the evaporator core (B) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. Remove the self-tapping screws and the flange cover (C), then remove the grommet (D), and carefully pull out the heater core (E) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. 13. Install the heater core and the evaporator core (with A/C) in the reverse order of removal. 14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2728 - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Be sure to connect the drain hose securely. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - With air conditioning, refer to evaporator core replacement. - Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge is controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives coolant temperature information from the ECM/PCM via the multiplex control unit, The ECM/PCM receives coolant temperature information from the ECT sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2733 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Coolant Temperature Gauge Troubleshooting Before testing, check the No.9 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the No.10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Start the engine, and check the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on? YES - Troubleshoot the cause of the ECM/PCM DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Check for a multiplex control unit DTC. Is a DTC indicated? YES - Troubleshooting the cause of the multiplex control unit DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 3. 3. Do the communication line check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Is the word "Error" indicated on the odo/trip display? YES - The gauge cannot receive the signal from the multiplex control unit and the ECM/PCM. Check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire (gauge connector terminal A5 for 03 model Visteon type, terminal A2 for other type.). NO - Go to step 4. 4. Do the gauge drive circuit check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Does the temperature gauge needle sweep from the minimum position to the maximum, then return to the minimum position? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the gauge assembly. 5. Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. Did the symptom/indication go away? YES - Replace the ECM/PCM. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications Radiator: Specifications Radiator Coolant capacity M/T: engine overhaul 5.1 L includes engine, heater, hoses, and reservoir M/T: coolant change 4.0 L A/T: engine overhaul 5.0 L A/T: coolant change 3.9 L Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2737 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2738 Radiator: Testing and Inspection Test 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the top of the filler neck. 2. Attach a commercially-available pressure tester (A) to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap. 5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2739 Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator and Fans Replacement 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the front bumper. 3. Remove the hood latch. 4. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses. 5. Disconnect the fan motor connectors and compressor clutch connector. 6. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator. 7. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator. 8. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely. 9. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Radiator cap Opening pressure 93 - 123 kPa Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2743 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Test 1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with engine coolant, then install it on a commercially available pressure tester (B). 2. Apply a pressure of 93 - 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2750 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2751 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2752 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2753 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2754 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2755 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2756 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2757 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2758 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2759 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2760 Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2761 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2762 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2763 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2764 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2765 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2766 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2767 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2768 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2769 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2770 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2771 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2772 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2773 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2774 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2775 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2776 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2777 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2778 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2779 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2780 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2781 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2782 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2783 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2787 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2788 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2789 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2790 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2791 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2803 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2804 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2805 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2806 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling Intermittent Overheating/High Temp Gauge Reading SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Intermittent Overheating or High Temp Gauge Reading APPLIES TO: 2000-01 Civics SERVICE TIP: If owners of are complaining that the temperature gauge needle sometimes shoots up to the dreaded H mark for no apparent reason, the problem may be a faulty radiator cooling fan switch. If the switch is faulty, it can cause an intermittent overheating problem or cause the temperature gauge needle to climb past its normal position. To fix this problem, replace the thermoswitch, P/N 37760-P00-004, H/C 3881554. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2811 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications Radiator fan switch Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196 - 203 deg F Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5 - 15 deg F from actual "ON" temperature Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2812 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2813 10. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2814 67. Radiator Fan Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2815 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Radiator Fan Switch Test NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the radiator fen switch. 1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the thermostat cover. 2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C) and B terminal (D) according to the table. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2816 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Radiator Fan Switch Replacement 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector, then remove the radiator fan switch (A). 2. Install the radiator fan switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge is controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives coolant temperature information from the ECM/PCM via the multiplex control unit, The ECM/PCM receives coolant temperature information from the ECT sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2820 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Coolant Temperature Gauge Troubleshooting Before testing, check the No.9 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the No.10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Start the engine, and check the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on? YES - Troubleshoot the cause of the ECM/PCM DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Check for a multiplex control unit DTC. Is a DTC indicated? YES - Troubleshooting the cause of the multiplex control unit DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 3. 3. Do the communication line check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Is the word "Error" indicated on the odo/trip display? YES - The gauge cannot receive the signal from the multiplex control unit and the ECM/PCM. Check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire (gauge connector terminal A5 for 03 model Visteon type, terminal A2 for other type.). NO - Go to step 4. 4. Do the gauge drive circuit check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Does the temperature gauge needle sweep from the minimum position to the maximum, then return to the minimum position? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the gauge assembly. 5. Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. Did the symptom/indication go away? YES - Replace the ECM/PCM. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Thermostat: Mechanical Specifications Thermostat Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm minimum Torque Specifications THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 2825 Thermostat: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open ..................................................................................................................................... .................................. 169 - 176°F (76 - 80°C) Fully open .................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 194°F (90°C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2826 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2827 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Test Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature. To test a closed thermostat: 1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container. 2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open. 3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open: Standard Thermostat Lift height: above 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Starts opening: 169 - 176°F (76 - 80°C) Fully open: 194°F (90°C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2828 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm ............................................................................................................................................... 130 L (137 US qt, 114 Imp qt)/minute Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2832 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole (A) is normal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2833 Water Pump: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the water pump (A) by removing four bolts. 3. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 4. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal. 5. Clean up any spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise > Page 2839 Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2840 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalyst (NOX Adsorptive TWC) (D17A6 engine) The NOx adsorptive TWC absorbs NOx created during lean burn running when the oxygen concentration is high. Then the engine is put into a richer running mode where the oxygen concentration and NOx levels are low, and the absorbed NOx is released, keeping the average NOx emissions low. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Torques D17A1, D17A6 engines Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2844 D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2845 Exhaust Manifold: Diagrams EXHAUST MANIFOLD COMPONENTS D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2846 D17A1, D17A6 engines Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2847 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD REPLACEMENT W/ RELATED COMPONENTS NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2848 D17A1, D17A6 engines Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams Exhaust Pipe: Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2852 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2853 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER REPLACEMENT W/ RELATED COMPONENTS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2854 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2855 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2856 NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2860 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2861 NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2869 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2870 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2871 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2872 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2873 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2874 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2875 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2876 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2877 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2878 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2879 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2880 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2881 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2882 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2883 Engine Control Module: Locations Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2884 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2885 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2888 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2889 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2890 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2891 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2892 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2893 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2894 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2895 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2896 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2897 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2898 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2899 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2900 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2901 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2902 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2903 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2904 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2905 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2906 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2907 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2908 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2909 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2910 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 228. ECM/PCM Part 1 228. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2911 228. ECM/PCM Part 3 228. ECM/PCM Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2912 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2913 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2914 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2915 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2916 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2917 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 2918 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2919 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Electrostatic Discharge Damage Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. - An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat. - Charge by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentary touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: - Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. - Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. - Before removing the pan: from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. - If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2922 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2923 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2924 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2925 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2926 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2927 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 2928 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter (C). 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P ECM/PCM wire harness connector from the ECM/PCM mounting bracket. Remove the ECM/PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the ECM/PCM (B). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2931 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or disconnect its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the Honda PGM Tester does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - Remove the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 battery (80A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove PGM-FI main relay 1. - Remove any of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect any of the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the G2 terminal from the transmission housing. - Disconnect the G1 terminal from the body. - Disconnect the G101 terminal from the water passage. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear defogger, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 3. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2932 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Monitors, Trips, and/or Drive Cycle (Readiness Codes) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emissions test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set readiness codes from incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code. Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from incomplete to complete. - The readiness code will not switch to complete until all the enable criteria are met. - If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault. Enable Criteria - ECT at 158 °F (70 °C) or higher. - Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 °F (-7 °C) or higher. - Vehicle speed is steady, and vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more then 25 mph (40 km/h). Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Control System Monitor and Readiness code NOTE: - All readiness code are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - The enable criteria must be repeated if the intake air temperature (IAT) drops lower then 36 °F (2 °C) from its value at engine start up. Enable Criteria - At engine start up, ECT and IAT are higher than 32 °F (O °C), but lower than 95 °F (35 °C). - At engine start up, the ECT and IAT are within 12 °F (7 °C) of each other. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 2.5 miles (4 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2933 ECT at 140 °F (60 °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air/Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor Readiness Code NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 3. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the procedure. Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because misfiring is continuously monitored. - Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if the vehicle is driven over a rough road. - Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the throttle position changes more than a predetermined value, or if driving conditions fall outside the range of any related enable criteria. Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because the fuel system is continuously monitored during closed loop operation. - Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active. - Monitoring also pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when the enable criteria is again being met. Comprehensive Component Monitor and Readiness Code This readiness code is always set to available because the comprehensive component monitor is continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running. EGR Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness Codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria - ECT at 176 °F (80 °C) or higher Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the CVT and A/T in D position or M/T in 4th gear, 50 - 62mph (80 - 100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds. 4. With the CVT and A/Tin D position or M/T in 4th gear, decelerate from 62 mph (100km/h) or above by completely releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again. 5. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2934 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) - P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest version, replace the ECM/PCM. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original ECM/PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Cut Control Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Cut Control Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Cut-off Control During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy at speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,900 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. With A/T model, when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2950 95. Behind Glove Box (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2951 155. A/F Sensor Relay (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2958 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2959 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2961 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2962 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2963 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2964 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2965 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2966 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2967 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2968 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2969 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2970 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2971 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2972 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2973 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2974 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2975 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2976 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2977 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2978 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2979 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2980 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2981 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2982 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2983 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2984 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2985 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2986 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2987 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2988 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2989 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2990 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2991 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2992 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2993 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2994 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 2999 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3000 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3001 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3002 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3003 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that the ECM/PCM uses to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3020 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3021 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3022 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3023 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3027 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3028 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3029 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3030 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3034 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3035 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3036 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3037 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3038 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3042 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3051 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3052 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3053 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3054 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3060 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3061 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3062 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3063 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3064 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3065 111. ELD Unit (USA) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3066 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 How to Tell a Bad FTP Sensor From an EVAP Leak Troubleshooting a '01-05 Civic with DTC P0497 (EVAP system low purge flow)? When the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor doesn't respond to vacuum testing, it's really easy to think you've got a leak in the FVAP system. Here's an simple way to tell if the problem is just a bad FTP sensor or an actual system leak: 1. Connect the HDS to the 16P DLC. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 2. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN (if you're asked) and the odometer reading. 3. From the Select Mode screen, select Honda Systems. From the System Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. From the Mode Menu, select All Data List. 4. Disconnect the two FTP sensor vacuum lines. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. ^ If the value doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, check the electrical connections. If you find any problems, fix them, then go to step 5. If the circuits are OK, replace the FTP sensor, then go to step 5. 5. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value now reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, reconnect the vacuum lines and disconnect the HDS. Return the vehicle to your customer. ^ If the value still doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the larger FTP sensor hose (the smaller hose is the FTP vent) Slowly squeeze the pump handle to pull a vacuum on the FTP sensor. Look at the sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value changes, continue troubleshooting for DTC P0497. ^ If the value stays the same, the FTP sensor has a leak. Replace the sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3071 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3072 163. Under Left Side Of Floor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3073 114. FTP Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3074 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079 53. IAT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3080 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3081 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the IAT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3085 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3086 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3087 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3088 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3092 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3093 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3094 120. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3095 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3096 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3100 D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3103 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3104 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 10. Middle Of Engine 11. Middle Of Engine (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3105 17. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3106 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 130. A/F Sensor 140. HO2S, Primary (GX; '01-'03: EX, DX, LX) Or Secondary (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3107 141. HO2S, Secondary (except HX) Or Third (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Primary Oxygen Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (D17A1, D17A2 engines) The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary HO2S is installed in the three way catalytic converter (TWC) (D17A1 engine) or in the exhaust manifold (D17A2 engine). By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary HO2S and secondary HO2S, the deterioration of the primary HO2S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3110 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) sensor (D17A6 engine) The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed in the exhaust manifold. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3111 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the TWC and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which checks the efficiency of the TWC. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The secondary HO2S is installed in the TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3112 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) (D17A6 engine) The third HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalytic Converter (NOX Adsorptive TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The third HO2S is installed behind the NOX Adsorptive TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the primary HO2S or A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the primary HO2S or A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the primary HO2S or A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3115 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together (D17A6 engine except '01 model) 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3116 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Third HO2S Replacement Third HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together. 1. Disconnect the third HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the third HO2S (B). 2. Install the third HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3120 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3121 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3122 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3123 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3124 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3125 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3129 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3130 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3131 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3135 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3138 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3139 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3140 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3141 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3142 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3143 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3144 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3145 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3146 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3147 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3148 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3149 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3150 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3151 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3152 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3153 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3154 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3155 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3156 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3157 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3158 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3159 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3160 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3161 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3162 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3163 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3164 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3165 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3166 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3167 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3168 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3169 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3170 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3171 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3172 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3173 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3174 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3175 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3176 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3177 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations 13. Middle Of Engine (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3181 93. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3182 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the resonator (see step 5). 2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B) securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting pipe. 4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector, then remove the VTEC oil Pressure switch (A). 5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3187 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3188 20. Transmission Housing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3189 128. VSS (except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3190 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a pulsed signal from an input of 1 volts. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3191 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Special Tools Required: Test Harness 07LAJ-PT3020A Before testing, inspect the No.4 (10 A) and No.10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (A). 2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire harness. 3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and green (D) test harness leads with protective tape (E). 4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness clip and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS and G101. 5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED test harness clip (C) to the negative probe. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the VSS and the under-dash fuse/relay box. 7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3192 8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the positive probe of a voltmeter. Is there 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short or open in the BLU/WHT or WHT/GRN wire between the VSS and the cruise control unit, or the ECM/PCM. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the VSS(B). 11. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 14. NO - Replace the VSS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3193 14. Disconnect the 22P connector "A" from the gauge assembly. 15. Touch a probe to the BLU/WHT wire, and connect it to body ground through a voltmeter. 16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Replace the speedometer assembly. NO - Repair open in the BLU/WHT wire between the VSS and the speedometer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3194 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VSS Replacement 1. Remove the intake resonator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (B). 3. Remove the mounting bolt, then remove the VSS. 4. Install the VSS in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3199 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3204 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3205 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3206 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3211 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3212 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3213 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3214 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3218 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3219 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3220 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3221 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3222 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 3228 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3232 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3233 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3234 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3235 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure at idle .................................................................................................................................... 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3240 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3241 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, step 5. - If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed With no-load conditions: USA model: M/T .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 700 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT .................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada model: M/T .............................................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm A/T .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 720 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT ........................................................ ................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3245 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system. Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve: - After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed. - When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3246 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Leave the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connected. - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up, start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve 2P connector. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in neutral) unit the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. 5. Idle the engine for 1 minute with the heater fan switch on HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see the Symptom Chart. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 3247 Idle Speed: Service and Repair Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so that the the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or unplug its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM with the PGM tester. NOTE: Erasing the DTCs does not require the idle learn procedure to be done again. - Remove the No.6 (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 (60 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the PGM-FI main relays 1 and 2 (behind the glove box). - Remove either of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug any of the connectors from the back of the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and the ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the ground G1 from the transmission housing. To complete the idle learn procedure, do this: 1. Make sure all the electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. 2. Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). 3. Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations > Page 3252 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3257 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Gasoline Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) ITEM MEASUREMENT / QUALIFICATION STANDARD / SPECIFICATION SERVICE LIMIT Spark Plug Type NGK: PFR6F-11 DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11 Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3271 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3272 Spark Plug: Application and ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PZFR6F-11 DENSO ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... PKJ20CR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................. 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3273 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3274 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3278 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Inspection 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing. 4. Disconnect all four injector connectors. 5. Remove the four ignition coils. 6. Remove the four spark plugs. 7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 8. Connect a tachometer. 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression. Compression Pressure: Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) 10. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders. Maximum variation: Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) 11. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then re-measure the compression. ^ Damaged or worn valves and seats ^ Damaged cylinder head gasket ^ Damaged or worn piston rings ^ Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust ............................................................... ....................................................................................................... 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3282 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Adjustment NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). 1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the four ignition coils. 2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness holder from the cylinder head cover. 3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Remove the grommet from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector. Remove the upper cover. 5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the TDC marks (B) on the pulley should line up with the top edge of the head. 6. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Adjusting screw location: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3283 7. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag. 8. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. 9. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3284 10. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley should be toward the exhaust side of the head. 11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder. 12. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. TDC marks (A) are visible again. 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder. 14. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) should be on the intake side of the head. 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 2 cylinder. 16. Install the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation A/C Signal: Description and Operation This signals the PCM when there is a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3293 A/C Signal: Testing and Inspection A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E18 with a jumper wire several times. Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the blower switch ON. 5. Turn the A/C switch ON. Does the A/C operate? YES - The air conditioning signal is OK. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 6. Momentarily connect under-hood fuse/relay box 14P connector terminal No.10 to body ground with a jumper wire several times. Is there clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E18) and the A/C clutch relay. NO - Check the A/C system for other symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3297 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3298 53. IAT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3299 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3300 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the IAT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that the ECM/PCM uses to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3307 Brake Signal: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the brake lights. Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal? YES - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Press the brake pedal. Do the brake lights come on? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 4. 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E22 with the brake pedal pressed. Is there battery voltage? YES - The brake pedal position switch signal is OK NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch. 4. Inspect the No.7 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse. Replace the No.7 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3311 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3312 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3313 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3314 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3318 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3319 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3320 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3321 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3325 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3326 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3327 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3328 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3329 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3333 82. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3356 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3357 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3358 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3359 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3361 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3362 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3363 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3364 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3365 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3366 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3367 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3368 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3369 213. DLC Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3370 Data Link Connector: Testing and Inspection DLC Circuit Troubleshooting If the ECM/PCM does not communicate with the OBD II scan tool, Honda PGM Tester, or I/M test equipment, do this troubleshooting procedure. 1. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No.16 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.16 and the No.9 BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. 2. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.4 and No.16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.4 and body ground. 3. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.5 and ECM/PCM (E3). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3371 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.7. Is there 8.5 V or more? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to step 6. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). Make sure the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is disconnected from the DLC. 8. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (E23). After repairing the wire, check the DTC with the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester and go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions NO - Go to step 9. 9. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7 and ECM/PCM terminal E23. Is there continuity? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3372 YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (E23). After repairing the wire, check the DTC with the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester and go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). Make sure the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is disconnected from the DLC. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and No.7. Is there 0 V? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair short to power in the wire between the DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (E23). After repairing the wire, check the DTC with the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester, and go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3376 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3385 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3386 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3387 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3388 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3394 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3395 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3396 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3397 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3398 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3399 111. ELD Unit (USA) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3400 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3405 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3406 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3407 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3408 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3409 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3410 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3411 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3412 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3413 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3414 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3415 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3416 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3417 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3418 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3419 Engine Control Module: Locations Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3420 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3421 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3424 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3425 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3426 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3427 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3428 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3429 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3430 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3431 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3432 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3433 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3434 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3435 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3436 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3437 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3438 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3439 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3440 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3441 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3442 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3443 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3444 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3445 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3446 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 228. ECM/PCM Part 1 228. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3447 228. ECM/PCM Part 3 228. ECM/PCM Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3448 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3449 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3450 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3451 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3452 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3453 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3454 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3455 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Electrostatic Discharge Damage Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. - An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat. - Charge by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentary touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: - Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. - Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. - Before removing the pan: from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. - If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3458 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3459 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3460 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3461 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3462 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3463 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3464 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter (C). 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P ECM/PCM wire harness connector from the ECM/PCM mounting bracket. Remove the ECM/PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the ECM/PCM (B). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3467 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or disconnect its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the Honda PGM Tester does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - Remove the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 battery (80A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove PGM-FI main relay 1. - Remove any of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect any of the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the G2 terminal from the transmission housing. - Disconnect the G1 terminal from the body. - Disconnect the G101 terminal from the water passage. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear defogger, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 3. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3468 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Monitors, Trips, and/or Drive Cycle (Readiness Codes) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emissions test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set readiness codes from incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code. Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from incomplete to complete. - The readiness code will not switch to complete until all the enable criteria are met. - If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault. Enable Criteria - ECT at 158 °F (70 °C) or higher. - Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 °F (-7 °C) or higher. - Vehicle speed is steady, and vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more then 25 mph (40 km/h). Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Control System Monitor and Readiness code NOTE: - All readiness code are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - The enable criteria must be repeated if the intake air temperature (IAT) drops lower then 36 °F (2 °C) from its value at engine start up. Enable Criteria - At engine start up, ECT and IAT are higher than 32 °F (O °C), but lower than 95 °F (35 °C). - At engine start up, the ECT and IAT are within 12 °F (7 °C) of each other. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 2.5 miles (4 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3469 ECT at 140 °F (60 °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air/Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor Readiness Code NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 3. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the procedure. Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because misfiring is continuously monitored. - Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if the vehicle is driven over a rough road. - Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the throttle position changes more than a predetermined value, or if driving conditions fall outside the range of any related enable criteria. Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because the fuel system is continuously monitored during closed loop operation. - Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active. - Monitoring also pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when the enable criteria is again being met. Comprehensive Component Monitor and Readiness Code This readiness code is always set to available because the comprehensive component monitor is continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running. EGR Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness Codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria - ECT at 176 °F (80 °C) or higher Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the CVT and A/T in D position or M/T in 4th gear, 50 - 62mph (80 - 100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds. 4. With the CVT and A/Tin D position or M/T in 4th gear, decelerate from 62 mph (100km/h) or above by completely releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again. 5. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3470 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) - P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest version, replace the ECM/PCM. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original ECM/PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Cut Control Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Cut Control Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Cut-off Control During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy at speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,900 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. With A/T model, when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 How to Tell a Bad FTP Sensor From an EVAP Leak Troubleshooting a '01-05 Civic with DTC P0497 (EVAP system low purge flow)? When the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor doesn't respond to vacuum testing, it's really easy to think you've got a leak in the FVAP system. Here's an simple way to tell if the problem is just a bad FTP sensor or an actual system leak: 1. Connect the HDS to the 16P DLC. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 2. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN (if you're asked) and the odometer reading. 3. From the Select Mode screen, select Honda Systems. From the System Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. From the Mode Menu, select All Data List. 4. Disconnect the two FTP sensor vacuum lines. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. ^ If the value doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, check the electrical connections. If you find any problems, fix them, then go to step 5. If the circuits are OK, replace the FTP sensor, then go to step 5. 5. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value now reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, reconnect the vacuum lines and disconnect the HDS. Return the vehicle to your customer. ^ If the value still doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the larger FTP sensor hose (the smaller hose is the FTP vent) Slowly squeeze the pump handle to pull a vacuum on the FTP sensor. Look at the sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value changes, continue troubleshooting for DTC P0497. ^ If the value stays the same, the FTP sensor has a leak. Replace the sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3478 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3479 163. Under Left Side Of Floor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3480 114. FTP Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3481 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Locations Idle Air Control Valve: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Air Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3487 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3488 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3489 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3490 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3491 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3492 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3493 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3494 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3495 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3496 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3497 Idle Air Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3498 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3499 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3500 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520 117. IAC Valve Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3521 Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in response to an electrical signal from the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3525 Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description Information Bus: Description and Operation System Description System Descriptions The Multiplex Control System has four internal functions: - Multiplexing (send multiple signals over shared wires) - Wake up/sleep (runs at full power only on demand to reduce battery draw) - Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals) - Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system. Mode 2 for input lines) The system controls the function of these circuits: - Entry light control (ignition key light and ceiling light) - Wiper/washer (including intermittent wipe and park functions) - Interlock system - Keyless/power Door Lock - Key-in reminder - Meter assembly, temperature gauge, and indicator lights - HVAC (compressor and fan control) Multiplex Communication To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals are sent via shared multiplex communication lines rather than sending normal electrical signals through individual wires. - The input signals from each switch are converted to digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU). - The digital signals are sent from the transmitting unit to the receiving unit as serial signals. - The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal at the receiving unit, and it operates the related component or monitors a switch. - There are exclusive communication lines between the ECM/PCM, the gauge assembly, and the under-dash fuse/relay box, Wake-up and Sleep The multiplex control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the ignition switch is OFF. - In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. - As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode immediately wakes up and begins to function. - When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's or front passenger's door is opened, then closed, there is about a 10 second delay before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. - If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function. - If a key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will not function. - When in sleep mode, the draw is reduced from 70 - 80 mA to less than 10 mA. Fail-safe To prevent improper operation, the multiplex control system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is any CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit and allows the system to operate normally. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 3528 Information Bus: Description and Operation Circuit Description How the Circuit Works The conventional portion of the electrical system carries DC (or A/C) power through separate wires to each component. The multiplex portion of the system, however, sends digital signals between control units through shared wires to reduce the number and weight of wire harnesses. The signals from each switch are converted to digital signals within the receiving multiplex control unit. The digital signals are sent from one multiplex control unit to another as serial data over dedicated communication lines. When the appropriate control unit receives the digital signal, it converts it back to a switch signal and operates the related components. The multiplex control system schematic shows its power, grounds, and communication lines. The ignition key light is also shown because it is used to blink DTCs in the system's self-diagnosis function. The rest of the multiplex control system wiring is shown in the following circuit schematics: - Charging System - Horns - HVAC - Fans - Low Oil Pressure Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Lights-on Reminder - Key-in Reminder - Key Light Timer - Gauges and Indicators - A/T Gear Position Indicator - Wiper/Washers - Headlights - Trunk Light, Ceiling Light and Spotlights - Entry Light Control System - Power Door Locks - Keyless Security Alarm System - Interlock System Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Mode 1 Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Check the No.9 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the No.10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled, the seatbelt reminder will chime 6 times. 4. Set the ceiling light to the center position and close all the doors. 5. Connect the special tool to the multiplex inspection connector. 6. After about 5 seconds the spotlight and ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blink on for 0.2 second to show the system is now in mode 1. Did the spotlight and ceiling light indicate mode 1? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Go to step 7. 7. Check for continuity between terminal 4 of the under-dash fuse/relay box connector J and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. NO - Repair the open in the wire. If the wire is ok, repair G301. 8. If the are DTCs present, the spotlight and ceiling light will blink to indicate the DTC(s). If more than one DTC is present, the DTCs will be displayed in ascending order. If there are not DTCs the spotlight and ceiling light will no blink again after the mode 1 indication. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 3531 Are there any DTCs? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to the Mode 2 test. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 3532 9. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in the order indicated using the shown charts. If a faulty control unit is suspected, substitute it with a known good part and recheck for DTCs. - If the DTC(s) is still present, go to the next step instead for the DTC. - If the DTC(s) is no longer present, replace the original part. Note: Before replacing a Faulty ECM/PCM make sure it has the latest software revision. Update if necessary before swapping or replacing. Made 2 Test 1. From Mode 1, disconnect the special tool from the multiplex inspection connector for 5 to 10 seconds, and then reconnect it. 2. The spotlight and ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blink twice, 0.2 seconds each time. The system is now in mode 2. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 3533 3. Operate the switches listed. If the circuit is ok, the spotlight and ceiling lights will blink once. If the circuit is faulty, the lights will not blink. Tip: Operate the switches most closely related to the problem you are diagnosing is a quick way of testing the circuits integrity. 4. If all inputs were confirmed, or multiple circuits failed at the same time in mode 2, go to the multiplex sleep mode test. If a single switch fails in mode 2, troubleshoot its circuit. Multiplex Sleep Mode Test 1. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to terminal 10 of the under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (YEL) or K (WHT/GRN) and the negative lead to body ground. 2. Connect ammeter between the negative battery cable and the negative battery post. 3. Remove the special tool from the multiplex inspection connector. 4. Close the doors, the hatch, turn the headlights off, turn off the ignition switch and remove the key. 5. Within 1 minute the voltage on the communication wire (E10 or K10) should change from approx 4 - 10 V to battery voltage and the amperage at the negative battery terminal should drop from approx. 70 - 80 mA to less than 10 mA. 6. Record your findings and go to the Multiplex Wake-up Test. Multiplex Wake-up Test 1. From the sleep mode. Wake-up the multiplex system by performing one of the following operations: 2. As the system shifts to its active (wake-up) mode, communication wire voltage will return to 4 - 10 V and the battery terminal current will return to 70 - 80 mA. 3. If the system does not go into sleep mode or wake-up properly, perform the Multiplex Control Unit Input Test. NOTE: If multiple circuits fail to respond in the mode 2 tests and/or the multiplex circuit fails to go into sleep mode or wake-up, it may mean that a control unit failed without triggering a DTC in mode 1. Perform the Multiplex Control Unit Input Test. If the input test confirms that all the inputs are working properly, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit, gauge assembly or ECM one at a time. If after swapping one of the above components the system works properly, replace the original component, it is faulty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 3534 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Multiplex Control Unit Input Test Multiplex Control Unit Input Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Unbolt the under-dash fuse/relay box and pull it down. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 3535 5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3539 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3541 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3542 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3546 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3547 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3548 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3549 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3550 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3551 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3555 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures to set them in this section. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3556 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Connect an OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and read the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. Does the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to troubleshooting "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". 3. Check the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for DTCs. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and watch the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on and stay on for more than 20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II)? YES - If the MIL always comes on and stays on, go to step 74. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E29) and the data link connector (DLC). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. NO - If the MIL is always off, go to step 6. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. A loose No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A loose No.20 IG (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal E31. - An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the throttle position (TP) sensor, knock sensor, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A5) and the knock sensor. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the low oil pressure light on? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Inspect the No.10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse and the gauge assembly. Also replace the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse. 9. Inspect the No.20 IGN (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the gauge assembly. If the wires are OK, test the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3557 NO - Repair short in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.20 IG (40A) fuse. 10. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Go to step 14. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E31 to body ground with a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. Also check for a blown MIL bulb. If the wires and the bulb are OK, replace the gauge assembly. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Inspect the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Remove the blown No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box 17. Remove the glove box and PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3558 18. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.4 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 19. 19. Disconnect each of the components or connectors connector below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Idle air control (IAC) valve 3P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 20. NO - Replace the component that made continuity to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 20. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Injectors - Idle air control (IAC) valve - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3559 21. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 22. Inspect the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 34. NO - Go to step 23. 23. Remove the blown No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 24. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 25. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 26. NO - Replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3560 26. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 27. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9), or the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Remove the rear seat cushion. 29. Remove the access panel from the floor. 30. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 31. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 32. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3561 32. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 33. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it as necessary. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 36. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals E9 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 37. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9). 37. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3562 38. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E7 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 42. NO - Go to step 39. 39. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 40. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 41. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3563 41. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E7. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1. If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (E7). 42. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 43. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 44. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 51. NO - Go to step 45. 45. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 46. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 47. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3564 48. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 49. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 1. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (A2, A3). 51. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A23, and A24 individually. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (A4, A5, A23, A24). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3565 52. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 59. NO - Go to step 53. 53. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 54. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 with the ignition switch ON (II). Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the sensor that restored 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 55. 55. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 56. Disconnect the 3P connector from the following sensors. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 57. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3566 58. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 59. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 66. NO - Go to step 60. 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 with the ignition switch ON (II). Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3567 YES - Replace the sensor that restored about 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 62. 62. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 63. Disconnect the 3P connectors from the following sensors. - Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) 64. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 65. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the EGR valve position sensor, knock sensor, TP sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT), or repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A8) and the knock sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 66. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Go to step 67. 67. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 68. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 3P connector. 69. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3568 70. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the FTP sensor. NO - Go to step 71. 71. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 72. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 73. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 74. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 75. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 76. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there about 5 V (or battery voltage)? YES - Go to step 80. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 3569 NO - Go to step 77. 77. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 78. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 79. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the DLC and the ECM/PCM (E29). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 80. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 81. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 82. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ECM/PCM (E31). If the wires are OK, replace the gauge assembly. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3573 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3574 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3575 120. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3576 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3577 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3581 D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3584 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3585 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 10. Middle Of Engine 11. Middle Of Engine (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3586 17. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3587 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 130. A/F Sensor 140. HO2S, Primary (GX; '01-'03: EX, DX, LX) Or Secondary (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3588 141. HO2S, Secondary (except HX) Or Third (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Primary Oxygen Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (D17A1, D17A2 engines) The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary HO2S is installed in the three way catalytic converter (TWC) (D17A1 engine) or in the exhaust manifold (D17A2 engine). By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary HO2S and secondary HO2S, the deterioration of the primary HO2S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3591 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) sensor (D17A6 engine) The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed in the exhaust manifold. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3592 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the TWC and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which checks the efficiency of the TWC. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The secondary HO2S is installed in the TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3593 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) (D17A6 engine) The third HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalytic Converter (NOX Adsorptive TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The third HO2S is installed behind the NOX Adsorptive TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the primary HO2S or A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the primary HO2S or A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the primary HO2S or A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3596 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together (D17A6 engine except '01 model) 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3597 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Third HO2S Replacement Third HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together. 1. Disconnect the third HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the third HO2S (B). 2. Install the third HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3601 95. Behind Glove Box (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3602 155. A/F Sensor Relay (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3606 Power Steering Pressure Signal: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3607 Power Steering Pressure Signal: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a Jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3608 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch andG201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM,then recheck. If the symptom/indication Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3609 goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3610 Power Steering Pressure Signal: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3614 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3615 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3616 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3617 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3618 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3619 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3625 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3626 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3627 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3628 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3629 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3630 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3631 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3632 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3633 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3634 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3635 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3636 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3637 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3638 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3639 Engine Control Module: Locations Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3640 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3641 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3644 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3645 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3646 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3647 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3648 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3649 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3650 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3651 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3652 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3653 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3654 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3655 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3656 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3657 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3658 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3659 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3660 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3661 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3662 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3663 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3664 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3665 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3666 Engine Control Module: Connector Views 228. ECM/PCM Part 1 228. ECM/PCM Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3667 228. ECM/PCM Part 3 228. ECM/PCM Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3668 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3669 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3670 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3671 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3672 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3673 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 3674 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3675 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Electrostatic Discharge Damage Electronic components used in the PCM are often designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel even the zap of a static discharge. There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and induction. - An example of charging by friction is a person sliding across a vehicle seat. - Charge by induction occurs when a person with well insulated shoes stands near a highly charged object and momentary touches ground. Charges of the same polarity are drained off leaving the person highly charged with the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, therefore it is important to use care when handling and testing electronic components. NOTE: To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, follow these guidelines: - Do not touch the PCM connector pins or soldered components on the PCM circuit board. - Do not open the replacement part package until the part is ready to be installed. - Before removing the pan: from the package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. - If the part has been handled while sliding across the seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or while walking a distance, touch a known good ground before installing the part. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM/PCM Terminal Values ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3678 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector A (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3679 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector B (24P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3680 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3681 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector C (22P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3682 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3683 ECM/PCM Inputs And Outputs At Connector E (31P) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > ECM/PCM Terminal Values > Page 3684 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection How to Troubleshoot Circuits At the ECM/PCM How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM Special Tools Required - Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) 1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital multimeter (C). 2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal. 3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the connector and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the connector. NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent electrical connections. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P ECM/PCM wire harness connector from the ECM/PCM mounting bracket. Remove the ECM/PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the ECM/PCM (B). 6. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3687 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or disconnect its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM. NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the Honda PGM Tester does not require you to do the idle learn procedure. - Remove the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 battery (80A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove PGM-FI main relay 1. - Remove any of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect any of the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Disconnect the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the G2 terminal from the transmission housing. - Disconnect the G1 terminal from the body. - Disconnect the G101 terminal from the water passage. Procedure: 1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear defogger, lights, etc.) are off. 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C). 3. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed. NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5 minutes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3688 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Monitors, Trips, and/or Drive Cycle (Readiness Codes) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the emissions test, or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set readiness codes from incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code. Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from incomplete to complete. - The readiness code will not switch to complete until all the enable criteria are met. - If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault. Enable Criteria - ECT at 158 °F (70 °C) or higher. - Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 °F (-7 °C) or higher. - Vehicle speed is steady, and vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more then 25 mph (40 km/h). Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Control System Monitor and Readiness code NOTE: - All readiness code are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. - The enable criteria must be repeated if the intake air temperature (IAT) drops lower then 36 °F (2 °C) from its value at engine start up. Enable Criteria - At engine start up, ECT and IAT are higher than 32 °F (O °C), but lower than 95 °F (35 °C). - At engine start up, the ECT and IAT are within 12 °F (7 °C) of each other. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 2.5 miles (4 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3689 ECT at 140 °F (60 °C) or higher. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 4. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Air/Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor Readiness Code NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete. 3. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the procedure. Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because misfiring is continuously monitored. - Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if the vehicle is driven over a rough road. - Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the throttle position changes more than a predetermined value, or if driving conditions fall outside the range of any related enable criteria. Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code - This readiness code is always set to available because the fuel system is continuously monitored during closed loop operation. - Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are active. - Monitoring also pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when the enable criteria is again being met. Comprehensive Component Monitor and Readiness Code This readiness code is always set to available because the comprehensive component monitor is continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running. EGR Monitor and Readiness Code NOTE: - Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure. - All readiness Codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester. Enable Criteria - ECT at 176 °F (80 °C) or higher Procedure 1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the tool's generic OBD II mode. 2. Start the engine. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the CVT and A/T in D position or M/T in 4th gear, 50 - 62mph (80 - 100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds. 4. With the CVT and A/Tin D position or M/T in 4th gear, decelerate from 62 mph (100km/h) or above by completely releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again. 5. If the readiness code is still set to incomplete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met; repeat the procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 3690 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) - P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the ECM/PCM can be damaged. How to Update the ECM/PCM NOTE: - To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update system. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest version, replace the ECM/PCM. How to Substitute the ECM/PCM 1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original ECM/PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Cut Control Unit > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Cut Control Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Cut-off Control During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy at speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,900 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. With A/T model, when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3697 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3698 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3699 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3700 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3701 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3702 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations Oxygen Sensor Relay: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3706 95. Behind Glove Box (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3707 155. A/F Sensor Relay (HX; '04-'05: DX, EX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0171 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Got a DTC P0171? Check the Short-Term Fuel Trim APPLIES TO: 03-04 Accord 01-04 Civic 02-04 CR-V 03-04 Element 02-04 Odyssey 03-04 Pilot SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that purrs like a kitten but it sets a DTC P0171 (fuel system too lean)? Check the short-term fuel trim (ST FUEL TRIM B1). If the value reads higher than 1.05, then check the MAP SENSOR value with the engine turned off and the ignition switch turned to ON (II). - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values match, the MAP sensor is working OK. Do the normal troubleshooting for DTC P0171. - If the MAP SENSOR and BARO SENSOR values don't match, install a known-good MAP sensor, and retest. If the sensor values now match, clear the DTC, and make sure the ST FUEL TRIM B1 value is normal (it reads about 1.0). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that the ECM/PCM uses to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3719 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3720 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3721 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3722 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3726 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3727 39. ECT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3728 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3729 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ECT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the ECT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3733 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3734 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3735 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3736 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3737 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3741 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: Customer Interest Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3750 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3751 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3752 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3753 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3759 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3760 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3761 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electric Load Sensor: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 3762 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3763 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3764 111. ELD Unit (USA) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3765 Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Since the early 1990's, Honda vehicles have come with an electrical load detector (ELD) unit in the under-hood fuse/relay box. This unit allows the ECM/PCM to regulate the alternator (switch it between high output and low output) to provide the best combination of fuel economy and electrical system operation. The ELD sends a signal to the ECM/PCM that's proportional to the electrical demand. The ECM/PCM switches the alternator between high output and low output depending on several factors, which include electrical demand, battery charge level, and the driving cycle. When the alternator is in low output, the engine load is reduced and fuel economy improves. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - FTP Sensor Diagnostics/DTC P0497 How to Tell a Bad FTP Sensor From an EVAP Leak Troubleshooting a '01-05 Civic with DTC P0497 (EVAP system low purge flow)? When the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor doesn't respond to vacuum testing, it's really easy to think you've got a leak in the FVAP system. Here's an simple way to tell if the problem is just a bad FTP sensor or an actual system leak: 1. Connect the HDS to the 16P DLC. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 2. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN (if you're asked) and the odometer reading. 3. From the Select Mode screen, select Honda Systems. From the System Selection Menu, select PGM-FI. From the Mode Menu, select All Data List. 4. Disconnect the two FTP sensor vacuum lines. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. ^ If the value doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, check the electrical connections. If you find any problems, fix them, then go to step 5. If the circuits are OK, replace the FTP sensor, then go to step 5. 5. Look at the FTP Sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value now reads between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, reconnect the vacuum lines and disconnect the HDS. Return the vehicle to your customer. ^ If the value still doesn't read between 2.45 and 2.55 volts, go to step 6. 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the larger FTP sensor hose (the smaller hose is the FTP vent) Slowly squeeze the pump handle to pull a vacuum on the FTP sensor. Look at the sensor value on the display screen. ^ If the value changes, continue troubleshooting for DTC P0497. ^ If the value stays the same, the FTP sensor has a leak. Replace the sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3770 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3771 163. Under Left Side Of Floor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3772 114. FTP Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3773 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3777 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3778 53. IAT Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3779 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3780 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair IAT Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector. 2. Remove the IAT sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3786 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3787 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3791 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3792 36. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3793 120. MAP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3794 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Description and Operation Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor <--> [Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3795 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor: Service and Repair MAP Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 2. Remove the MAP sensor (A). 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Oxygen Sensor: Specifications D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3799 D17A1 / D17A2 Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3802 PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3803 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations 10. Middle Of Engine 11. Middle Of Engine (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3804 17. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3805 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams 130. A/F Sensor 140. HO2S, Primary (GX; '01-'03: EX, DX, LX) Or Secondary (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3806 141. HO2S, Secondary (except HX) Or Third (HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Primary Oxygen Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (D17A1, D17A2 engines) The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary HO2S is installed in the three way catalytic converter (TWC) (D17A1 engine) or in the exhaust manifold (D17A2 engine). By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary HO2S and secondary HO2S, the deterioration of the primary HO2S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3809 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Air Fuel (A/F) Ratio Sensor Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) sensor (D17A6 engine) The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed in the exhaust manifold. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3810 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the TWC and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which checks the efficiency of the TWC. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The secondary HO2S is installed in the TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Primary Oxygen Sensor > Page 3811 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) Third Heated Oxygen Sensor (Third HO2S) (D17A6 engine) The third HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalytic Converter (NOX Adsorptive TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The third HO2S is installed behind the NOX Adsorptive TWC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the primary HO2S or A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the primary HO2S or A/F sensor (B). 2. Install the primary HO2S or A/F sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3814 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Secondary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together (D17A6 engine except '01 model) 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary HO2S (B). 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Primary HO2S and A/F Sensor Replacement > Page 3815 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Third HO2S Replacement Third HO2S Replacement Special Tools Required O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available NOTE: The secondary HO2S and the third HO2S must be replaced together. 1. Disconnect the third HO2S 4P connector (A), then remove the third HO2S (B). 2. Install the third HO2S in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3819 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3820 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3821 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3822 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3823 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3824 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3828 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3829 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3830 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3834 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3837 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3838 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3839 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3840 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3841 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3842 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3843 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3844 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3845 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3846 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3847 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3848 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3849 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3852 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3853 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3854 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3855 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3856 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3857 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3858 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3859 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3860 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3861 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3862 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3863 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3864 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3865 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3866 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3867 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3868 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3869 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3870 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3871 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3872 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3873 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3874 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3875 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3876 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations 13. Middle Of Engine (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3880 93. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3881 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the resonator (see step 5). 2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B) securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting pipe. 4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector, then remove the VTEC oil Pressure switch (A). 5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3886 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3887 20. Transmission Housing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3888 128. VSS (except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3889 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a pulsed signal from an input of 1 volts. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3890 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Special Tools Required: Test Harness 07LAJ-PT3020A Before testing, inspect the No.4 (10 A) and No.10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (A). 2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire harness. 3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and green (D) test harness leads with protective tape (E). 4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness clip and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS and G101. 5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED test harness clip (C) to the negative probe. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the VSS and the under-dash fuse/relay box. 7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3891 8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the positive probe of a voltmeter. Is there 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short or open in the BLU/WHT or WHT/GRN wire between the VSS and the cruise control unit, or the ECM/PCM. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the VSS(B). 11. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 14. NO - Replace the VSS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3892 14. Disconnect the 22P connector "A" from the gauge assembly. 15. Touch a probe to the BLU/WHT wire, and connect it to body ground through a voltmeter. 16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Replace the speedometer assembly. NO - Repair open in the BLU/WHT wire between the VSS and the speedometer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3893 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VSS Replacement 1. Remove the intake resonator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (B). 3. Remove the mounting bolt, then remove the VSS. 4. Install the VSS in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3897 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3898 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3899 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3903 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3906 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3907 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3908 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3909 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3910 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3911 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3912 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3913 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3914 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3915 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3916 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3917 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3918 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3919 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3920 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3921 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3922 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3923 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3924 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3925 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3926 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3927 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3928 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3929 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3930 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3931 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3932 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3933 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3934 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3935 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3936 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3937 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3938 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3939 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3940 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3941 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3942 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3943 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3944 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3945 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3950 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3951 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3952 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3953 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3954 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3955 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3956 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3957 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3958 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3959 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3960 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3961 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3962 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3963 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3964 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3965 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3966 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3967 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3968 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3969 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3970 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3971 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3972 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3973 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3974 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3975 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3976 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 31 (EX, HX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3984 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3985 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve moves, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations 13. Middle Of Engine (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3989 93. VTEC Oil Pressure Switch (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3990 Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch: Service and Repair VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the resonator (see step 5). 2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B) securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. 3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting pipe. 4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector, then remove the VTEC oil Pressure switch (A). 5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O-ring (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations VTEC - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3995 14. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3996 17. VTEC Solenoid Valve (EX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3997 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection VTEC Solenoid Valve Test 1. Remove the resonator. 2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid valve connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3998 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4003 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4004 20. Transmission Housing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4005 128. VSS (except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4006 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a pulsed signal from an input of 1 volts. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4007 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Special Tools Required: Test Harness 07LAJ-PT3020A Before testing, inspect the No.4 (10 A) and No.10 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (A). 2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire harness. 3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and green (D) test harness leads with protective tape (E). 4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness clip and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS and G101. 5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (B) to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED test harness clip (C) to the negative probe. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the VSS and the under-dash fuse/relay box. 7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4008 8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the positive probe of a voltmeter. Is there 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short or open in the BLU/WHT or WHT/GRN wire between the VSS and the cruise control unit, or the ECM/PCM. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the VSS(B). 11. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Go to step 14. NO - Replace the VSS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4009 14. Disconnect the 22P connector "A" from the gauge assembly. 15. Touch a probe to the BLU/WHT wire, and connect it to body ground through a voltmeter. 16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel blocked. Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more? YES - Replace the speedometer assembly. NO - Repair open in the BLU/WHT wire between the VSS and the speedometer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4010 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VSS Replacement 1. Remove the intake resonator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (B). 3. Remove the mounting bolt, then remove the VSS. 4. Install the VSS in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Voltage Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Voltage Signal: Testing and Inspection Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the alternator. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and B13. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 13 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Reconnect the alternator 4P connector. 6. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and B13. Does the voltage decrease when the headlights and rear window defogger are turned on? YES - The alternator FR signal is OK. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P). 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Voltage Signal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4014 12. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B13. Is there continuity? YES - Test the alternator (see step 1). NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) 15. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B13. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator. NO - Update the ECM/PCM jilt does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise > Page 4020 Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converter - Rotten Egg Smell SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Rotten Egg Smell? Could Be the Catalytic Converter APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining of a rotten egg smell, but you can't find anything wrong with their vehicles to account for it [there's no DTC(s) set, no driveability problems reported, nothing damaged or broken]? Then it could well be coming from the catalytic converter. That smell is a release of built up hydrogen sulfide (H2S) from the reaction of organic sulfur compounds in the gasoline with the catalyst in the converter. Almost all gasoline contains some amount of organic sulfur compounds, and that amount varies by region. The more sulfur there is in the gasoline, the more H2S is built up and released by the catalytic converter, so the stronger the smell. In California, where low-sulfur gasoline is actually required by state law, sulfur smell complaints are few and far between. The folks at the Environmental Protection Agency have issued a requirement for the phasing-in of low-sulfur gasoline nationwide between 2004 and 2006. This low-sulfur gasoline should go a long way toward making complaints of rotten egg smell a thing of the past. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4021 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalytic Converter System NOX Adsorptive Three Way Catalyst (NOX Adsorptive TWC) (D17A6 engine) The NOx adsorptive TWC absorbs NOx created during lean burn running when the oxygen concentration is high. Then the engine is put into a richer running mode where the oxygen concentration and NOx levels are low, and the absorbed NOx is released, keeping the average NOx emissions low. Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen (N2), and water vapor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4026 EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4027 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views 41. EVAP Canister Purge Valve (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 4030 Vacuum Hose Routing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4031 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Purge Valve When the engine coolant temperature is below 158 °F (70 °C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Volume Control Valve > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Volume Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4038 163. Under Left Side Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Volume Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4039 (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Volume Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4040 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Two Way Valve and EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve The EVAP two way valve is installed between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister line. The EVAP two way valve sends fuel vapor to the EVAP canister corresponding to the pressure inside the fuel tank and prevents excessive vacuum in the fuel tank by drawing in fresh air through the EVAP canister. The EVAP bypass solenoid valve opens to bypass the two way valve when doing the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set 08-016 March 18, 2008 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic 2/4-Door-ALL 2002-05 Civic 3-Door - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid ULEV ALL 2002-04 CR-V - ALL MIL Comes On With DTC P1457 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P1457 (EVAP control system leakage). PROBABLE CAUSE The EVAP solenoid valve (fuel vent module) is blocked or restricted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install an EVAP solenoid valve kit. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 17380-55A-A32 H/C 7083124 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4049 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Is DTC P1457 stored? Yes - Clear the DTC, then go to step 2. No - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Follow the HDS screen prompts, and do the EVAP Function Test. Did the EVAP solenoid valve pass the test? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. No - If you're working on a Civic, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. If you're working on a CR-V, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure: ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FUEL PRESSURE, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving from the list. 2. Drain the fuel, then remove the fuel tank: ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TANK, and select Fuel Tank Replacement from the list. 3. Remove the EVAP solenoid valve: ^ Remove pressure sensor tube B; it will be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube B; it will not be reused. ^ Disconnect fuel vent tube C from the EVAP solenoid valve. The tube will be reused. ^ Disconnect the 2P connector from the EVAP solenoid valve. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4050 ^ Remove the EVAP solenoid valve (two bolts). The bolts will be reused. The valve will not be reused. 4. Attach the tubes and the joint from the kit onto the new EVAP solenoid valve as shown. 5. Install the new EVAP solenoid valve using the original bolts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4051 6. Connect the original hoses and the new tubes as shown. 7. Reinstall the fuel tank. 8. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket and a new locknut. 9. Reinstall the fuel line to the tank with a new fuel feed retainer. 10. Refill the tank with the fuel you removed in step 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Relieve the fuel pressure: ^ Refer to page 11-161 of the 2002-2004 CR-V Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FUEL PRESSURE, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving from the list. 2. Drain the fuel, then remove the fuel tank: ^ Refer to page 11-171 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TANK, and select Fuel Tank Replacement from the list. 3. Remove the EVAP canister: ^ Refer to page 11-217 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword CANISTER, and select EVAP Canister Replacement from the list. 4. Remove the EVAP solenoid valve from the EVAP canister: ^ Remove pressure sensor tube B; it will not be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube C; it will not be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube D; it will not be reused. ^ Disconnect the 2P connector. ^ Remove the EVAP solenoid valve bolts. The bolts will be reused. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4052 ^ Disconnect the remaining hoses connected to the EVAP solenoid valve, then remove the valve. The valve will not be reused. 5. Attach the tubes, the vacuum chamber, the joint, and the clips from the kit onto the new EVAP solenoid valve as shown. 6. Install the new EVAP solenoid valve on the EVAP canister using the original bolts. 7. Reinstall the EVAP canister. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4053 8. Connect the original hoses and the new tube as shown. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank. 10. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket and a new locknut. 11. Reinstall the fuel line to the tank with a new fuel feed retainer. 12. Refill the tank with the fuel you removed in step 2. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set 08-016 March 18, 2008 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic 2/4-Door-ALL 2002-05 Civic 3-Door - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid ULEV ALL 2002-04 CR-V - ALL MIL Comes On With DTC P1457 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on with DTC P1457 (EVAP control system leakage). PROBABLE CAUSE The EVAP solenoid valve (fuel vent module) is blocked or restricted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install an EVAP solenoid valve kit. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 17380-55A-A32 H/C 7083124 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4059 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (data link connector), and check for DTCs. Is DTC P1457 stored? Yes - Clear the DTC, then go to step 2. No - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Follow the HDS screen prompts, and do the EVAP Function Test. Did the EVAP solenoid valve pass the test? Yes - This service bulletin does not apply; continue with normal troubleshooting. No - If you're working on a Civic, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. If you're working on a CR-V, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure: ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FUEL PRESSURE, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving from the list. 2. Drain the fuel, then remove the fuel tank: ^ Refer to the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TANK, and select Fuel Tank Replacement from the list. 3. Remove the EVAP solenoid valve: ^ Remove pressure sensor tube B; it will be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube B; it will not be reused. ^ Disconnect fuel vent tube C from the EVAP solenoid valve. The tube will be reused. ^ Disconnect the 2P connector from the EVAP solenoid valve. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4060 ^ Remove the EVAP solenoid valve (two bolts). The bolts will be reused. The valve will not be reused. 4. Attach the tubes and the joint from the kit onto the new EVAP solenoid valve as shown. 5. Install the new EVAP solenoid valve using the original bolts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4061 6. Connect the original hoses and the new tubes as shown. 7. Reinstall the fuel tank. 8. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket and a new locknut. 9. Reinstall the fuel line to the tank with a new fuel feed retainer. 10. Refill the tank with the fuel you removed in step 2. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Relieve the fuel pressure: ^ Refer to page 11-161 of the 2002-2004 CR-V Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keywords FUEL PRESSURE, and select Fuel Pressure Relieving from the list. 2. Drain the fuel, then remove the fuel tank: ^ Refer to page 11-171 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword TANK, and select Fuel Tank Replacement from the list. 3. Remove the EVAP canister: ^ Refer to page 11-217 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword CANISTER, and select EVAP Canister Replacement from the list. 4. Remove the EVAP solenoid valve from the EVAP canister: ^ Remove pressure sensor tube B; it will not be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube C; it will not be reused. ^ Remove fuel vent tube D; it will not be reused. ^ Disconnect the 2P connector. ^ Remove the EVAP solenoid valve bolts. The bolts will be reused. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4062 ^ Disconnect the remaining hoses connected to the EVAP solenoid valve, then remove the valve. The valve will not be reused. 5. Attach the tubes, the vacuum chamber, the joint, and the clips from the kit onto the new EVAP solenoid valve as shown. 6. Install the new EVAP solenoid valve on the EVAP canister using the original bolts. 7. Reinstall the EVAP canister. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 4063 8. Connect the original hoses and the new tube as shown. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank. 10. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket and a new locknut. 11. Reinstall the fuel line to the tank with a new fuel feed retainer. 12. Refill the tank with the fuel you removed in step 2. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4064 EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4065 Evaporative Check Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Two Way Valve and EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve The EVAP two way valve is installed between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister line. The EVAP Two way valve sends fuel vapor to the EVAP canister corresponding to the pressure inside the fuel tank and prevents excessive vacuum in the fuel tank by drawing in fresh air through the EVAP canister. The EVAP bypass solenoid valve opens to bypass the two way valve when doing the EVAP leak check. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4066 Evaporative Check Valve: Testing and Inspection EVAP Two Way Valve Test Special Tools Required - Vacuum pump/Gauge, 0 - 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX - Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 - 4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve (A). Connect it to a fitting (B) from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump as shown. 3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize momentarily at 0.8 - 2.1 kPa (6 - 16 mmHg, 0.2 0.6 in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.8 kPa (6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum fining to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure side (A) as shown. 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The pressure should stabilize momentarily above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg). - If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), the valve is OK. - If the pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set Canister Vent Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set 02-026 May 28, 2002 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 2002 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-02 Civic and 2002 CR-V: MIL Comes On With DTC P1457 (Supersedes 02-026, dated April 16, 2002) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The MIL is on and DTC P1457 [leak detected in EVAP control system (EVAP control canister system)] is set. This condition usually occurs during cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE The EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve response is too slow. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set > Page 4076 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 17380-S5A-A31 H/C 6451397 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Check the vehicle repair history before starting repair: ^ If the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve has been replaced, do Service Bulletin 02-007, EVAP System Function Testing and Diagnostics With the PGM Tester, found under Fuel and Emissions, for proper diagnosis and repair. ^ If the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve has not been replaced, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Visually inspect all of the evaporative emissions components, electrical connections, and hose connections for proper fit or damage. 3. Repair or replace any defective or damaged components. 4. Note the positioning and location of the hoses that connect to the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. 5. Civic only: Remove the EVAP canister vent filter hose from its mounts. 6. Disconnect the hoses from the EVAP two-way/ bypass solenoid valve. 7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. 8. Replace the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 9. Reconnect the 2P connector and the hoses to the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set > Page 4077 10. Civic only: Reinstall the EVAP canister vent filter hose to its mounts. 11. Lower the vehicle, and connect the PGM Tester to the data link connector. Clear the DTC. 12. Use the PGM Tester to do the EVAP function test. ^ If the vehicle passes the EVAP function test, the repair is complete. ^ If the PGM Tester indicates a fault in the evaporative emissions system, refer to Service Bulletin 02-007, EVAP System Function Testing and Diagnostics With the PGM Tester, found under Fuel and Emissions, for proper diagnosis and repair. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set Canister Vent Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set 02-026 May 28, 2002 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 2002 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-02 Civic and 2002 CR-V: MIL Comes On With DTC P1457 (Supersedes 02-026, dated April 16, 2002) Updated information is shown with black bars. SYMPTOM The MIL is on and DTC P1457 [leak detected in EVAP control system (EVAP control canister system)] is set. This condition usually occurs during cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE The EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve response is too slow. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set > Page 4083 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 17380-S5A-A31 H/C 6451397 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: C99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Check the vehicle repair history before starting repair: ^ If the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve has been replaced, do Service Bulletin 02-007, EVAP System Function Testing and Diagnostics With the PGM Tester, found under Fuel and Emissions, for proper diagnosis and repair. ^ If the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve has not been replaced, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Visually inspect all of the evaporative emissions components, electrical connections, and hose connections for proper fit or damage. 3. Repair or replace any defective or damaged components. 4. Note the positioning and location of the hoses that connect to the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. 5. Civic only: Remove the EVAP canister vent filter hose from its mounts. 6. Disconnect the hoses from the EVAP two-way/ bypass solenoid valve. 7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. 8. Replace the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. Torque the two mounting bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 9. Reconnect the 2P connector and the hoses to the EVAP two-way/bypass solenoid valve. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Canister Vent Valve: > 02-026 > May > 02 > Emissions - MIL ON With DTC P1457 (EVAP) Set > Page 4084 10. Civic only: Reinstall the EVAP canister vent filter hose to its mounts. 11. Lower the vehicle, and connect the PGM Tester to the data link connector. Clear the DTC. 12. Use the PGM Tester to do the EVAP function test. ^ If the vehicle passes the EVAP function test, the repair is complete. ^ If the PGM Tester indicates a fault in the evaporative emissions system, refer to Service Bulletin 02-007, EVAP System Function Testing and Diagnostics With the PGM Tester, found under Fuel and Emissions, for proper diagnosis and repair. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4085 42. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Fuel Vapor Return Hose > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations Evaporative Shut Valve: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4092 164. Under Right Side of Floor (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4093 (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations 163. Under Left Side of Floor (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4097 40. EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4102 Refueling Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test Special Tools Required Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX Float Test 1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel tank pressure, then reinstall the cap. 3. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the vapor recirculation tube. 4. Plug the line (B). 5. Apply vacuum to the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube. - If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor control valve. - If the vacuum does not hold, the float is OK. Do the valve test. Valve Test 1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor signal tube (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4103 4. Disconnect the vacuum hoses (A) from the EVAP canister (B), then plug the ports with plugs (C). 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose ID, from the EVAP canister vent shut valve (E), and connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose. 6. Pump the vacuum pump 80 times. - If the vacuum holds, go to step 7. - If the vacuum does not hold, go to step 10. 7. Connect a second vacuum pump to the fuel tank vapor signal tube (A). 8. Apply vacuum (1 pump) to the fuel tank vapor signal tube (A), then check the vacuum on the pump in step 6. - If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor control valve. - If the vacuum is released, go to step 9. 9. Fill the fuel tank with fuel, then check for fuel in the EVAP two way valve (A), and fuel tank vapor recirculation hose (B). NOTE: At either location, tiny droplets of fuel are normal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4104 - If fuel runs out of the hoses at either location, replace the fuel tank vapor control valve. - If the fuel does not run out of the hoses, the fuel tank vapor system function is normal. 10. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor quick disconnect from the EVAP canister, then plug the port on the canister. Reapply vacuum (80 pumps). - If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank control valve. - If the vacuum does not hold, inspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve O-ring. If the O-ring is OK, replace the EVAP canister and repeat step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4105 Refueling Control Valve: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve (A) from the fuel tank (B). 3. Install the fuel tank vapor control valve. 4. Install the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4110 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4111 EGR Valve: Description and Operation The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4115 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Separator: Service and Repair Oil/Air Separator Installation 1. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces. 2. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the oil/air separator and to the inner threads of the bolt holes. NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue. 3. Install the oil/air separator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Inspection and Test 1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and connections for leaks or restrictions. 2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your fingers or pliers. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle Of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Valve Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4127 172. EGR Valve And EGR Valve Position Sensor (EX, HX; '04-'05: DX, LX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure at idle .................................................................................................................................... 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4132 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4133 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, step 5. - If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4137 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed With no-load conditions: USA model: M/T .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 700 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT .................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Canada model: M/T .............................................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm A/T .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) With load conditions: M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 720 ± 50 rpm A/T, CVT ........................................................ ................................................................................................................... 720 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 4141 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Idle Control System When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system. Idle Control System Diagram The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve: - After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed. - When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 4142 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Idle Speed Inspection NOTE: - Leave the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connected. - Before checking the idle speed, check these items: The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up, start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve 2P connector. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in neutral) unit the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. 5. Idle the engine for 1 minute with the heater fan switch on HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see the Symptom Chart. 6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Page 4143 Idle Speed: Service and Repair Idle Learn Procedure The idle learn procedure must be done so that the the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions: - Disconnect the battery. - Replace the ECM/PCM or unplug its connector. - Reset the ECM/PCM with the PGM tester. NOTE: Erasing the DTCs does not require the idle learn procedure to be done again. - Remove the No.6 (15 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the No.19 (60 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - Remove the PGM-FI main relays 1 and 2 (behind the glove box). - Remove either of the wires from the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug any of the connectors from the back of the under-hood fuse/relay box terminal. - Unplug the connector between the engine compartment wire harness and the ECM/PCM wire harness. - Disconnect the ground G1 from the transmission housing. To complete the idle learn procedure, do this: 1. Make sure all the electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. 2. Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). 3. Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Injection Timing > System Information > Description and Operation Injection Timing: Description and Operation Injector Timing and Duration The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge duration at various engine speeds and manifold pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being read out from the memory, is further modified by signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final discharge duration. By monitoring long term fuel trim, the ECM/PCM detect long term malfunctions in the fuel system and set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Locations > Page 4151 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement 1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C). 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Specifications Fuel: Specifications UNLEADED gasoline with 86 pump octane number or higher Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel: Technician Safety Information WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4157 Fuel: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Your vehicle must use unleaded fuel only. Using leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter and affect the warranty coverage validity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Relieving Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment. 1. Make sure you have the antitheft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Remove the glove box, then remove the PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it is stalls. NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel pressure in the fuel tank. 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-connect fining covers (C). 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean if necessary. 10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4165 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed line or hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel. - Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts. - Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Information not supplied by Manufacturer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4170 Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Information not supplied by Manufacturer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4171 Fuel Injector: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index 46. Middle of Engine (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4174 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4175 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4176 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4177 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4178 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4179 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4180 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4181 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4182 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4183 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4184 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4185 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4186 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4187 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4188 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4189 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4190 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4191 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4192 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4193 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4194 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4195 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4196 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4197 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4198 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4199 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4200 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4201 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4202 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4203 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4204 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4205 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4206 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4207 47. Injectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4208 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Injector Replacement 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A), the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (B), the evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge valve (C), and the throttle position (TP) sensor (D). 4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (E). 5. Disconnect the hoses from the fuel rail (F). 6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) from the fuel rail. 7. Remove the injector clip (H) from the injector. 8. Remove the injector from the fuel rail. 9. Coat the new O-rings (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C). 10. Install the injector clip (D). 11. Coat the injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4209 12. Install the injectors into the injector base. 13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts. 14. Connect the connectors on the injectors, the MAP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, and the TP sensor. 15. Connect the quick-connect fittings. 16. Install the air cleaner. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4213 Fuel Line Coupler: Service Precautions Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution The fuel line/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail (A) to fuel feed line (B), the fuel feed line (B) to the fuel pipe (C), and the fuel line (D) to the fuel tank unit (E). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to the following: - The fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E) are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E) are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E), be careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged. A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4214 Replace the retainer when - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel pressure regulator. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4215 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precaution The fuel line/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail (A) to fuel feed line (B), the fuel feed line (B) to the fuel pipe (C), and the fuel line (D) to the fuel tank unit (E). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to the following: - The fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E) are not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E) are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hose (B), fuel line (D), and quick-connect fittings (E), be careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged. A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4216 Replace the retainer when - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel pressure regulator. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fittings Removal 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and clean them if necessary. 3. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release the tabs from the locking pawls (C). Pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt and damage. - If the surface is dirty, clean it. - If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump, fuel filter, or fuel feed line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4217 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line end with plastic bags (A). NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the pipe. Replace the retainer when replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel pressure regulator. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - it has been removed from the line. - it is damaged. Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fittings Installation 1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt and damage, and clean if necessary. 2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after - replacing the fuel rail. - replacing the fuel feed line. - replacing the fuel pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4218 - replacing the fuel filter. - replacing the fuel pressure regulator. - replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. - removing the retainer from the line. 3. Before connecting a new fuel line/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from the mating line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Locations > Page 4219 4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer (B) locking pawls with the connector (C) grooves. Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound. NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line end. 5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and by pulling the connector. 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat 2 or 3 times, and check that there are no fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Regulator: Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4223 18. Right Side of Engine Compartment (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4224 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 1. Remove the fuel pump. 2. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (A). 3. Install the part in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure at idle .................................................................................................................................... 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4229 Fuel Pressure: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4230 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Test Special Tools Required - Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A - Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine and let it idle. - If the engine starts, go to step 5. - If the engine does not start, go to step 4. 4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the pump runs, step 5. - If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting. 5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be 270 - 320 kPa (2.8 - 3.3 kgf/sq.cm, 40 - 47 psi) - If the pressure is OK, the test is complete. - If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter, then recheck the fuel pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4236 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4237 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4238 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4239 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4240 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4241 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4242 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4243 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4244 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4245 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4246 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4247 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4248 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4249 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4250 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4251 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4252 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4253 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4254 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4255 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4256 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4257 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4258 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4259 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4260 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4261 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4262 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4263 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4264 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4265 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4266 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4267 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4268 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4269 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4270 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4271 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4272 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4279 Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4280 Fuel Line Inspection Part 2 Fuel Line Inspection Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4284 Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection Fuel Line Inspection Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4285 Fuel Line Inspection Part 2 Fuel Line Inspection Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations Evaporative Shut Valve: Locations EVAP System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4290 164. Under Right Side of Floor (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Evaporative Shut Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4291 (Except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness Technical Service Bulletin # 01-059 Date: 010619 Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness 01-059 June 19, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Fill Hose Clamps (Supersedes 01-059, dated June 5, 2001) Updated information is shown by black bars and asterisks. BACKGROUND * The clamps for the hose between the fuel fill pipe and the fuel tank may not have been tightened properly. In a severe collision, fuel leakage could occur and, if there is an ignition source, could result in a fire.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some of the affected vehicles are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. * Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that the vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the supplied tools to inspect the hose clamps for proper tightness. Tighten any hose clamp that does not pass inspection. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 310502 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 17652-S5A-941 H/C 6567507 Defect Code: 917 Contention Code: L28 Template ID: 01-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4300 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover. 3. Insert the supplied tool marked FS under the tail of the hose clamp that is around the fuel fill pipe. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp reaches the end of the tool or extends past the end, the hose clamp is properly tightened. Go to step 5. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp does not reach the end of the tool, go to step 4. 4. Use a pair of vise grip pliers to tighten the hose clamp until the end of the tail reaches the end of the tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4301 5. Insert the supplied tool marked TS under the tail of the hose clamp that is around the fuel tank pipe. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp reaches the end of the tool or extends past the end, the hose clamp is properly tightened. Go to step 7. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp does not reach the end of the tool, go to step 6. 6. Use a pair of vise grip pliers to tighten the hose clamp until the end of the tail reaches the end of the tool. 7. Reinstall the fuel fill pipe cover. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4302 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness Technical Service Bulletin # 01-059 Date: 010619 Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness 01-059 June 19, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Fill Hose Clamps (Supersedes 01-059, dated June 5, 2001) Updated information is shown by black bars and asterisks. BACKGROUND * The clamps for the hose between the fuel fill pipe and the fuel tank may not have been tightened properly. In a severe collision, fuel leakage could occur and, if there is an ignition source, could result in a fire.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some of the affected vehicles are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. * Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that the vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the supplied tools to inspect the hose clamps for proper tightness. Tighten any hose clamp that does not pass inspection. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation Number: 310502 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 17652-S5A-941 H/C 6567507 Defect Code: 917 Contention Code: L28 Template ID: 01-059A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4308 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover. 3. Insert the supplied tool marked FS under the tail of the hose clamp that is around the fuel fill pipe. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp reaches the end of the tool or extends past the end, the hose clamp is properly tightened. Go to step 5. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp does not reach the end of the tool, go to step 4. 4. Use a pair of vise grip pliers to tighten the hose clamp until the end of the tail reaches the end of the tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4309 5. Insert the supplied tool marked TS under the tail of the hose clamp that is around the fuel tank pipe. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp reaches the end of the tool or extends past the end, the hose clamp is properly tightened. Go to step 7. ^ If the tail of the hose clamp does not reach the end of the tool, go to step 6. 6. Use a pair of vise grip pliers to tighten the hose clamp until the end of the tail reaches the end of the tool. 7. Reinstall the fuel fill pipe cover. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 01-059 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Fill Hose Clamp Tightness > Page 4310 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Filler Neck: > NHTSA01V182000 > Jun > 01 > Recall 01V182000: Fuel Filler Neck Defect Fuel Filler Neck: Recalls Recall 01V182000: Fuel Filler Neck Defect Vehicle Description: Sedans and coupes. The hose clamps on the filler neck tube have insufficient clamping force. In a collision, the tube could disconnect from the fuel tank, resulting in fuel leakage. Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire. Dealers will check the hose clamps for proper torque and tighten them correctly, if necessary. Owner notification began June 4, 2001. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > NHTSA01V182000 > Jun > 01 > Recall 01V182000: Fuel Filler Neck Defect Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 01V182000: Fuel Filler Neck Defect Vehicle Description: Sedans and coupes. The hose clamps on the filler neck tube have insufficient clamping force. In a collision, the tube could disconnect from the fuel tank, resulting in fuel leakage. Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire. Dealers will check the hose clamps for proper torque and tighten them correctly, if necessary. Owner notification began June 4, 2001. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4324 Fuel Filler Neck: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement 1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4329 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4330 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4331 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4332 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from minimum to maximum position and then returns to the minimum position, the gauge is OK. Go to step 3. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep from minimum to maximum position and then return to the minimum position, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion. 5. Remove the access panel from the floor. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 7. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 7. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground. - an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G551). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4333 9. Install a 2 Ohms resistor between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F". - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicates "F", replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom on the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. 11. Relieve the fuel pressure. 12. Remove the fuel fill cap. 13. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel pump. 14. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4334 15. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the shown readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4335 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the seat cushion. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4336 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the stopper (O). Release the hook (P) and remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. When connecting the fuel tank unit, make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). 11. Install in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (I) and new O-rings (J), then check these items: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (K) is firmly locked into the place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist the connector excessively. - When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the fuel tank (M) and the fuel tank unit (N). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Locations Fuel Supply System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Fuel Tank Unit: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4342 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4343 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4344 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4345 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4346 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4347 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4348 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4349 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4350 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4351 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4352 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4353 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4354 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4355 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4356 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4357 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4358 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4359 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4360 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4361 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4362 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4363 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 4364 161. Fuel Tank Unit (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Locations Idle Air Control Valve: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Air Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4370 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4371 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4372 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4373 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4374 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4375 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4376 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4377 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4378 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4379 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4380 Idle Air Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4381 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4382 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4383 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4384 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4385 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4386 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4387 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4388 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4389 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4390 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4391 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4392 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4393 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4394 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4395 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4396 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4397 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4398 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4399 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4400 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4401 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4402 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4403 117. IAC Valve Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4404 Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in response to an electrical signal from the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4408 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4409 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4410 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4411 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4412 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4413 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4420 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4421 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4422 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4423 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4424 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4425 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4426 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4427 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4428 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4429 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4430 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4431 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4432 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4433 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4434 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4435 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4436 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4437 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4438 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4439 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4440 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4441 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4442 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4443 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4444 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4445 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4446 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4447 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4448 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4449 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4450 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4451 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4452 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4453 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4454 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4455 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4456 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4460 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4461 166. PGM-FI Main Relays 1 And 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4462 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2 The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is running. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4463 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4464 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4465 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Locations > Page 4469 Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Replacement 1. Remove the bolts (A). 2. Remove the throttle cable (B) from the bracket (C). 3. Remove the resonator (D). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4474 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4475 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4476 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4480 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body The throttle body is a single-barrel down draft type. The side portion of the idle air control (IAC) valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4481 Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection Throttle Body Test NOTE: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the factory. - If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). 1. With the engine off, check the throttle cable movement. The cable should move without binding or sticking. - If the cable moves OK, go to step 2. - If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing. - If the cable is faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it, then go to step 2. 2. Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the throttle valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight. - If there is excessive play in the throttle valve shaft, or any binding in the throttle valve at the fully closed position, replace the throttle body. - If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 3. 3. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. The reading should be about 10 % when the throttle is fully closed and about 90 % when the throttle is fully opened. If the throttle position is correct, the throttle body is OK. - If the throttle position is not correct, replace the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation Throttle Body: Service and Repair Removal/Installation Throttle Body Removal/installation NOTE: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. - After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable and the throttle cable. - The Throttle Position (TP) sensor is not removable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal/Installation > Page 4484 Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations Intake Air System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations > Page 4488 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Adjustments 1. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable free play (A) should be 10 - 12 mm (3/8 - 1/2 in.). 2. If free play (A) is not within spec (10 - 12 mm, 3/8 - 1/2 in.), loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut (C) until the free play (A) is as specified, then retighten the locknut. 3. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Locations > Page 4489 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Throttle Cable Removal/Installation 1. Fully open the throttle valve, then remove the throttle cable (A) from the throttle link (B). 2. Remove the cable housing (C) from the cable bracket (D). 3. Remove the throttle cable (A) from the accelerator pedal (B). 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. 5. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 6. Hold the cable, removing all slack from it. 7. Set the locknut on the cable bracket (A). Adjust the adjusting nut (B) so that its free play is 0 mm. 8. Remove the cable from the cable bracket (A). Reset the adjusting nut and tighten the locknut (C). 9. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4493 48. Middle Of Engine (except GX) 49. Middle Of Engine (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4494 125. TP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4495 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order Firing Order Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Gasoline Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4510 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4511 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4512 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4513 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4517 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4518 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4519 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4520 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4521 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications Ignition coil Rated voltage 12V Firing order 1-3-4-2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4525 118. Ignition Coils Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4526 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Removal/Installation 1. Remove the ignition coil cover (A), then remove the ignition coils (B). 2. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4533 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4534 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4535 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4536 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4545 39. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4546 124. CMP (TDC) Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4547 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) The CMP (TDC) sensor detects the position of the No.1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4548 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C). 3. Remove the CMP (TDC) sensor from the cylinder head. 4. Install the CMP (TDC) sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4552 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4553 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4554 104. CKP Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4555 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor detects engine speed, and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4556 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CKP Sensor Replacement 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, and disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TDC)) sensor connector (B). 2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector, then remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump. 4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 4562 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations PGM-FI System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4566 160. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4567 119. Knock Sensor (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4568 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4569 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then remove the knock sensor. 3. Install the knock sensor and oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) Starting and Charging Electrical 1.7L (Gasoline Engine) ITEM MEASUREMENT / QUALIFICATION STANDARD / SPECIFICATION SERVICE LIMIT Spark Plug Type NGK: PFR6F-11 DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11 Gap 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) 1.3 mm (0.051 in) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4573 Ignition System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4574 Spark Plug: Application and ID NGK ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PZFR6F-11 DENSO ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... PKJ20CR-M11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................. 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 18 N.m (13 lb.ft) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4575 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too hot - Insufficient cooling Fouled plug may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too cold - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coils 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4576 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13 lbf.ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations 4. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 4580 88. Test Tachometer Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4587 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4588 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 25. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4589 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector. STANDARD: About 5.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt. 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B move. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check valve movement. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (c). 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4590 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 3. Install the new filter/gasket (c) in the solenoid valve assembly body groove. 4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket. 5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4594 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4595 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4596 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4597 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4602 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4603 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4604 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4605 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4610 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4611 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4612 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4613 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Solenoid: Component Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4622 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4623 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test > Page 4626 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Solenoid Valve Test - Continuously Variable Transmission Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect solenoid harness connector (BP). 2. Measure CVT speed change control valve assembly resistance between solenoid harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 3. Measure CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 2 and No. 6. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 4. Measure CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 4 and No. 8. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 5. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between terminal No. 5 and body ground. STANDARD: 11.7 - 21.0 Ohms 6. Replace the CVT speed change control valve assembly or CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly, if the measurements are out of standard. Replace the lower valve body assembly, if the measurements of CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly or inhibitor solenoid are out of standard. 7. If all of the resistance are within the standard, a clicking sound should be heard when connecting the battery terminals to the solenoid harness connector terminals below. ^ CVT speed change control valve assembly No. 3 to battery positive terminal No. 7 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly No. 2 to battery positive terminal No. 6 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly No. 4 to battery positive terminal No. 8 to battery negative terminal ^ Inhibitor solenoid No.5 to battery positive terminal and body ground to negative terminal 8. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the lower valve body assembly, and check the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4627 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4631 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4632 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4633 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4634 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Locations Automatic Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission > Page 4641 Shift Indicator: Locations Continuously Variable Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4651 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4652 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4653 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4654 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4655 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4656 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4657 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4658 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4661 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4662 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4663 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4664 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4665 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4666 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4667 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4668 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4669 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4670 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4671 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4672 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4676 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4677 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Automatic Transmission Circuit Diagram Continuously Variable Transmission Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4678 Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between All terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [A position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission > Page 4681 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any-other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the R position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4682 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) in the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4690 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4691 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4695 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4702 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4703 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4707 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4714 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4715 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4716 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4717 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4724 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4727 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4728 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4729 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4730 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4745 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4746 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4747 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4748 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4749 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4750 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4751 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4752 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4753 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4754 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4755 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4756 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4757 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4758 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4759 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4760 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4761 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4762 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4763 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4764 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4765 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4766 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4771 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4772 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4773 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 4776 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4782 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4783 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 4786 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4787 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4794 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 4797 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 4798 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4799 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4800 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4801 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4806 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4807 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4808 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4809 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 04-036 January 7, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Vehicle Does Not Move in Drive; MIL Comes On or D Indicator Blinks With A/T DTC P0730 (Supersedes 04-036, dated September 24, 2004) SYMPTOM The vehicle does not move when you select Drive. The MIL comes on ('01-03 models) or the D indicator blinks ('04 models) with "A" DTC P0730 (shift control system) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive wear in the 2nd clutch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the A/T. Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PGM software ('01-03 models only). TOOL INFORMATION To do the repair procedure, you need these items: ^ Interactive Network (iN) CD (July '04 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 [This is the same cable you use to connect the PCM Tester to the iN workstation when updating software or when downloading DTCs to American Honda. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.] ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 (This is the same adapter used by the PGM Tester.) To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or A/C adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Central Time. You can also order through the iN. Click on SERVICE, Service Bay, and then Tool and Equipment, or click on eMail and then Tool and Equipment Program. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 > Page 4818 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the A/T. See S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, for detailed requirements of the A/T ordering, removal, and installation process. 2. '01-03 models only: Make sure you have the iN CD (July '04 or later) loaded into your iN master terminal. If not, load the CD using the instructions that come with it. Also, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. [Low voltage or turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) can permanently damage the PCM.] 3. '01-03 models only: Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM software. Refer to S/B 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. 4. Use the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to clear the DTC. 5. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it reach normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle with the throttle closed for 10 minutes. 6. 2001 Civic 2-door EX, LX models from VIN 1HGEM2... 1L000001 thru 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 > Page 4819 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 02-083 > Feb > 04 > Engine Controls - Occasional Stalling When Stopping PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Occasional Stalling When Stopping 02-083 February 20, 2004 *Applies To: *2001-02 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX - ALL* 2001-02 Civic: Stalls Intermittently After a Stop (Supersedes 02-083, dated December 23, 2002) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The engine occasionally stalls after the vehicle comes to a stop. PROBABLE CAUSE Ignition timing and the idle air control (IAC) valve response time may be insufficient when the engine idle speed falls below the PCM's learned idle speed value. CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the software in the ECM/PCM. TOOL INFORMATION You will need these tools and equipment items: ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 * This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.* ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N: VET-02002426 This is the adapter needed for the HIM. These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-PLR-L55 H/C 7064371 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09302* Template ID: 02-083B Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 02-083 > Feb > 04 > Engine Controls - Occasional Stalling When Stopping > Page 4824 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. *If not already done, load the February 2004 or later iN (Interactive Network) CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included in the CD mailing. 2. Update the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). For instructions, refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-077 > Oct > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set 03-077 October 24, 2003 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic DX, HX, LX, and EX - ALL MIL Is On With "Unknown" DTC SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and when you try to retrieve the DTC with the HDS, "Unknown" is displayed. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software does not properly communicate the DTC to the HDS. When this happens, "Unknown" is displayed on the HDS screen. CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (with September 2003 or later software) to update the ECM/PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-PLR-L55 H/C 7064371 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 03-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. If not already done, load the September 2003 or later iN (Interactive Network) CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included in the CD's mailing. 2. Update the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). For instructions, refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. 3. Check if the MIL comes on: ^ If the MIL comes on, retrieve the DTC(s), and do the appropriate troubleshooting. ^ If the MIL stays off, return the vehicle to the customer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-077 > Oct > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set > Page 4829 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 04-036 January 7, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Vehicle Does Not Move in Drive; MIL Comes On or D Indicator Blinks With A/T DTC P0730 (Supersedes 04-036, dated September 24, 2004) SYMPTOM The vehicle does not move when you select Drive. The MIL comes on ('01-03 models) or the D indicator blinks ('04 models) with "A" DTC P0730 (shift control system) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive wear in the 2nd clutch. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the A/T. Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PGM software ('01-03 models only). TOOL INFORMATION To do the repair procedure, you need these items: ^ Interactive Network (iN) CD (July '04 or later) ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 [This is the same cable you use to connect the PCM Tester to the iN workstation when updating software or when downloading DTCs to American Honda. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.] ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N VET-02002426 (This is the same adapter used by the PGM Tester.) To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or A/C adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Central Time. You can also order through the iN. Click on SERVICE, Service Bay, and then Tool and Equipment, or click on eMail and then Tool and Equipment Program. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 > Page 4835 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Replace the A/T. See S/B 98-061, Automatic Transmission In-Warranty Exchange Program, for detailed requirements of the A/T ordering, removal, and installation process. 2. '01-03 models only: Make sure you have the iN CD (July '04 or later) loaded into your iN master terminal. If not, load the CD using the instructions that come with it. Also, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. [Low voltage or turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) can permanently damage the PCM.] 3. '01-03 models only: Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the PCM software. Refer to S/B 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. 4. Use the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to clear the DTC. 5. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine, and let it reach normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle with the throttle closed for 10 minutes. 6. 2001 Civic 2-door EX, LX models from VIN 1HGEM2... 1L000001 thru 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-036 > Jan > 05 > A/T - Vehicle Won't Move/MIL ON/DTC P0730 > Page 4836 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 02-083 > Feb > 04 > Engine Controls - Occasional Stalling When Stopping PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Occasional Stalling When Stopping 02-083 February 20, 2004 *Applies To: *2001-02 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX - ALL* 2001-02 Civic: Stalls Intermittently After a Stop (Supersedes 02-083, dated December 23, 2002) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The engine occasionally stalls after the vehicle comes to a stop. PROBABLE CAUSE Ignition timing and the idle air control (IAC) valve response time may be insufficient when the engine idle speed falls below the PCM's learned idle speed value. CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to update the software in the ECM/PCM. TOOL INFORMATION You will need these tools and equipment items: ^ iN Workstation ^ Honda Interface Module (HIM): T/N EQS05A35570 ^ PC Interface Cable (RS232): T/N VET-02002832 * This is the same cable you use to connect the HIM to the iN workstation. The cable is blue with an attached adapter.* ^ AC Adapter (110 VAC/12 VDC Power Supply): T/N: VET-02002426 This is the adapter needed for the HIM. These tools are already at your dealership. To order additional HIMs, interface cables, or AC adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-PLR-L55 H/C 7064371 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09302* Template ID: 02-083B Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 02-083 > Feb > 04 > Engine Controls - Occasional Stalling When Stopping > Page 4841 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. *If not already done, load the February 2004 or later iN (Interactive Network) CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included in the CD mailing. 2. Update the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). For instructions, refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-077 > Oct > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set 03-077 October 24, 2003 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic DX, HX, LX, and EX - ALL MIL Is On With "Unknown" DTC SYMPTOM The MIL is on, and when you try to retrieve the DTC with the HDS, "Unknown" is displayed. PROBABLE CAUSE The ECM/PCM software does not properly communicate the DTC to the HDS. When this happens, "Unknown" is displayed on the HDS screen. CORRECTIVE ACTION Use the Honda Interface Module (with September 2003 or later software) to update the ECM/PCM. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 123503 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 37820-PLR-L55 H/C 7064371 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03203 Template ID: 03-077A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. If not already done, load the September 2003 or later iN (Interactive Network) CD onto the iN master terminal. Loading instructions are included in the CD's mailing. 2. Update the ECM/PCM with the Honda Interface Module (HIM). For instructions, refer to Service Bulletin 01-023, Using the Honda Interface Module to Update Control Units/Modules. 3. Check if the MIL comes on: ^ If the MIL comes on, retrieve the DTC(s), and do the appropriate troubleshooting. ^ If the MIL stays off, return the vehicle to the customer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 03-077 > Oct > 03 > Engine Controls - MIL ON with 'Unknown' DTC Set > Page 4846 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4853 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4854 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 25. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4855 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector. STANDARD: About 5.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt. 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B move. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check valve movement. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (c). 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4856 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 3. Install the new filter/gasket (c) in the solenoid valve assembly body groove. 4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket. 5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4860 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4861 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4862 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4863 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4868 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4869 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4870 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4871 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4876 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4877 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4878 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4879 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Solenoid: Component Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4888 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4889 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test > Page 4892 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Solenoid Valve Test - Continuously Variable Transmission Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect solenoid harness connector (BP). 2. Measure CVT speed change control valve assembly resistance between solenoid harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 3. Measure CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 2 and No. 6. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 4. Measure CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 4 and No. 8. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 5. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between terminal No. 5 and body ground. STANDARD: 11.7 - 21.0 Ohms 6. Replace the CVT speed change control valve assembly or CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly, if the measurements are out of standard. Replace the lower valve body assembly, if the measurements of CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly or inhibitor solenoid are out of standard. 7. If all of the resistance are within the standard, a clicking sound should be heard when connecting the battery terminals to the solenoid harness connector terminals below. ^ CVT speed change control valve assembly No. 3 to battery positive terminal No. 7 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly No. 2 to battery positive terminal No. 6 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly No. 4 to battery positive terminal No. 8 to battery negative terminal ^ Inhibitor solenoid No.5 to battery positive terminal and body ground to negative terminal 8. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the lower valve body assembly, and check the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4893 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4897 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4898 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4899 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 4900 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4906 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4907 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 25. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4908 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector. STANDARD: About 5.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt. 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B move. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check valve movement. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (c). 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4909 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 3. Install the new filter/gasket (c) in the solenoid valve assembly body groove. 4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket. 5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4913 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4914 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4915 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4916 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4921 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4922 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4923 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4924 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4929 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4930 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4931 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4932 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Band Apply Servo: Specifications Servo body Shift fork shaft bore I.D. Standard or new 14.000 - 14.010 mm Shift fork shaft valve bore I.D. Standard or new 37.000 - 37.039 mm Service limit 37.045 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4941 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 4942 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4946 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4947 Differential: Service and Repair A/T Differential Backlash Inspection 1. Install both axles in the differential, and place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A). 2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C). STANDARD: 0.05 - 0.15 mm (0.002 - 0.006 inch) 3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the differential carrier. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4948 Differential Carrier Replacement 1. Remove the snap ring (A) from the differential assembly (B). 2. Remove the speedometer drive gear (B). 3. Remove final driven gear bolts, then separate the final driven gear and the differential carrier. The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads. 4. Install the final driven gear (A) on the new differential carrier (B) with the chamfered side on the inner bore facing the differential carrier. 5. Tighten the bolts to 103 Nm (10.5 kgf-cm, 75.9 ft. lbs.) in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4949 6. Install the speedometer drive gear (A) with its chamfered side facing the carrier. 7. Align the hooked end (B) of the snap ring (C) with the spring pin (D) in the pinion shaft (E), then install the snap ring in the differential carrier groove. Final Driven Gear Replacement 1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier. The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side on the inner bore (A) facing the differential carrier. 3. Tighten the bolts to 103 Nm (10.5 kgf-cm, 75.9 ft. lbs.) in a crisscross pattern. Carrier Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 1. Remove the bearings (A) with a commercially available bearing puller (B) and stepper adapter (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4950 2. Install the new bearings with the special tool and a press. Press the bearing on until it bottoms. Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools Required Driver 07749-0010000 - Driver Attachment 07NAD-PX40100 - Driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101 1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission housing (B). 2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter housing (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4951 3. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing with the special tools. 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter housing with the special tools. Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection Special Tools Required Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4952 1. Install the 80 mm set ring (A) in the transmission housing (B). 2. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque converter housing (B) using the special tool. 3. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft with the transmission housing groove (B) by turning the control shaft (C). NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If the tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or position due to the play between the control shaft and the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4953 4. Install the three dowel pins (D) and the gasket (E) on the torque converter housing (F). 5. Place the transmission housing (G) on the torque converter housing. 6. Install the housing bolts along with the transmission hanger (H) and connector bracket (I). Tighten the bolts in two or more steps to 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-cm, 33 ft. lbs.) in a crisscross pattern. 7. Measure the clearance between the 80 mm set ring and carrier bearing outer race with a feeler gauge. 8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 80 mm set ring, and measure its thickness. 9. Select and install a new set ring, then recheck the clearance and make sure it is within the standard. SET RING, 80 mm No. Part Number Thickness 1 90414-689-000 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) 2 90415-689-000 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) 3 90416-689-000 2.70 mm (0.106 inch) 4 90417-689-000 2.80 mm (0.110 inch) 5 90418-689-000 2.90 mm (0.114 inch) 6 90419-PH8-000 3.00 mm (0.118 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications ATF Change ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 2.7L (2.9 Qt) Overhaul .................................................. .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.0L (6.3 Qt) CVT fluid Change ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................. 3.1L (3.3 Qt) Overhaul .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... 5.6L (6.0 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4960 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Honda ATF-Z1 Honda Service News Notice: If you're replacing transmission fluid in a CVT-equipped vehicle, or just topping it off, make sure you're using the new CVT fluid (P/N 08200-9006). From here on, DON'T put ATF-Z1 in a CVT. If you're topping off a CVT that's already got ATF-Z1, there's no need for concern; this fluid is compatible with ATF-Z1. All CVT-equipped Hondas starting with the 2006 models and onward will be factory-filled with the new CVT fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper mark (B) and lower mark (C). 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 4963 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF Cooler Flushing. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 5. Refill transmission with the recommended fluid into dipstick hole to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.7 L (2.9 US qt) at changing 6.0 L (6.3 US qt) at overhaul Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Fixing A/T Banjo Bolt Leaks APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got ATF leaking from any of the A/T banjo bolts? The first thing you need to do is replace the sealing washers. Next, start threading the banjo and line bracket bolts in their holes. Finally, torque the banjo bolt to 31 Nm (22 lb-ft) and the line bracket bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft.). NOTE: The banjo bolt torque spec we're recommending is slightly higher than what's listed in the S/M. This is intentional. If you torque just the banjo bolt, you won't really fix the leak. ATF leaks at the banjo bolt stem from the line bracket getting tightened before the banjo bolt. This can misalign the banjo joint, causing the banjo bolt sealing washers not to contact their mating surfaces evenly. Once the sealing washers have been used, you must replace them. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4968 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (C) as shown. 2. Install the clamp (D) on the cooler hoses. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications CVT ATF pan/bolts Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Locations Automatic Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission > Page 4977 Shift Indicator: Locations Continuously Variable Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4980 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4981 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4982 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4983 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4984 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4985 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4986 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4987 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4988 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4989 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4990 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4991 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4992 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4993 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4994 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4995 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4996 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4997 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4998 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4999 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5000 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5001 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5002 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5003 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5004 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5005 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5006 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5007 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5008 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5009 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5010 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5011 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5012 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5013 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Automatic Transmission Circuit Diagram Continuously Variable Transmission Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5014 Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between All terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [A position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission > Page 5017 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any-other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the R position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5018 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) in the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5022 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5023 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 25. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5024 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector. STANDARD: About 5.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt. 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B move. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check valve movement. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (c). 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5025 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 3. Install the new filter/gasket (c) in the solenoid valve assembly body groove. 4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket. 5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5032 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5033 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5037 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5043 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5044 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5045 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5046 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5053 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5056 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5057 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5058 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5059 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5060 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5061 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5062 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5063 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5064 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5065 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5066 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5067 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5068 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5069 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5070 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5071 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5072 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5073 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5074 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5075 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5076 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5077 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5078 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5079 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5080 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5081 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5082 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5083 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5084 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5085 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5086 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5087 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5088 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5089 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5090 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5091 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5092 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5093 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5094 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5095 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5100 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5101 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5102 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5105 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5110 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5111 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5112 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5113 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5118 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5119 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5120 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5121 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5126 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5127 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5128 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5129 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Removal Shift Lever Removal 1. Shift the transmission into the N position. 2. Remove the center console panel and center console. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5134 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) (A) and park pin switch connector (4P) (B). 6. Remove the four bolts, then remove the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5135 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Installation Shift Lever Installation 1. Install the shift lever assembly. 2. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) (A) and park pin switch connector (4P) (B). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator comes on. 4. Install the shift cable to the shift lever. If necessary, adjust the shift cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5136 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Cable Adjustment 1. Shift the transmission into the N position. 2. Remove the center console panel and center console. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (D). 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift position is in N. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator comes on. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5141 8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) through the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever assembly. The shift lever is secured in the N position. 9. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) with the slot in the cable bracket base (C), then slide the holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the shift cable. NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (H). 10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5142 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base. 12. Install and tighten the nut. 13. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 14. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 16. Reinstall the center console, console panel, and related parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5143 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Cable Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the transmission into the N position. 3. Remove the center console panel and center console. 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 5. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). 6. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and grommet (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5144 7. Remove the shift cable covers (A), then remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (B). 8. Remove the lock bolt securing the control lever (c), then remove the shift cable (D) with the control lever from the control shaft (E). 9. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. 10. Verify that the transmission is in the N position on the control shaft. 11. Install the control lever with the shift cable on the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 12. Secure the shift cable holder with the bolts on the transmission. 13. Install the lock bolt with a new lock washer (G), then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt head. 14. Install the shift cable covers. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator comes on. 16. Install the shift cable to the shift lever. If necessary, adjust the shift cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Stator Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Stator Shaft: Specifications Stator shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact area ATF pump side Standard or new 29.000 29.013 mm Service limit When worn or damaged Torque converter side Standard or new 27.000 - 27.021 mm Service limit When worn or damaged Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-049 > May > 01 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set 01-049 May 15, 2001 Applies T0: 2001 Civic with A/T - See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0740 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on and A/T DTC P0740 (problem in lock-up control system) sets. PROBABLE CAUSE The paper material on the torque converter piston is deteriorating. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the transmission and replace the torque converter. Test-drive the vehicle; if the MIL comes on, continue with normal troubleshooting. PARTS INFORMATION Torque Converter: P/N 26000-PLM-315, H/C 6773337 Drain Plug Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1 (11.6 quarts): P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 26000-PLM-305 H/C 6452353 Defect Code: 034 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-049 > May > 01 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set > Page 5156 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the transmission with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear, and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Replace the torque converter (see the Automatic Transmission section of the 2001 Civic Service Manual). NOTE: This step does not require ATF cooler flushing. 14. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 15. Refill the transmission with Honda ATF-Z1. 16. Use the PGM Tester with SN131 or later software to clear any DTCs. 17. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 18. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the MIL does not come on. If the MIL comes on, continue with normal troubleshooting. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > SN050407 > Apr > 05 > A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Keep Torque Converter on Mainshaft to Avoid Damage APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to keep the torque converter in place when you're handling or installing a reman A/T. If the torque converter slips off the mainshaft, and you don't put it back on the shaft exactly right, you could cut the O-ring. This could result in loss of lock-up control and ATF leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 01-049 > May > 01 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set 01-049 May 15, 2001 Applies T0: 2001 Civic with A/T - See VEHICLES AFFECTED MIL Comes On With A/T DTC P0740 SYMPTOM The MIL comes on and A/T DTC P0740 (problem in lock-up control system) sets. PROBABLE CAUSE The paper material on the torque converter piston is deteriorating. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Flush the transmission and replace the torque converter. Test-drive the vehicle; if the MIL comes on, continue with normal troubleshooting. PARTS INFORMATION Torque Converter: P/N 26000-PLM-315, H/C 6773337 Drain Plug Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1 (11.6 quarts): P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 26000-PLM-305 H/C 6452353 Defect Code: 034 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 01-049 > May > 01 > A/T - MIL ON/DTC P0740 Set > Page 5166 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Drain the ATF 3. Refill the transmission with Honda ATF-Z1. 4. Start the engine. 5. Press the brake pedal, move the shift lever to D, and release the brake pedal. 6. Press the accelerator pedal so the speedometer reads 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into 4th gear, and the torque converter locks up. Release the accelerator pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal to stop the front wheels. 8. Move the shift lever to R, and then to N. Release the brake pedal. 9. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 5 through 8) four more times. 10. Turn off the engine. 11. Drain the ATF 12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 two more times. 13. Replace the torque converter (see the Automatic Transmission section of the 2001 Civic Service Manual). NOTE: This step does not require ATF cooler flushing. 14. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 15. Refill the transmission with Honda ATF-Z1. 16. Use the PGM Tester with SN131 or later software to clear any DTCs. 17. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 18. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure the MIL does not come on. If the MIL comes on, continue with normal troubleshooting. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > SN050407 > Apr > 05 > A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Keep Torque Converter on Mainshaft to Avoid Damage APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to keep the torque converter in place when you're handling or installing a reman A/T. If the torque converter slips off the mainshaft, and you don't put it back on the shaft exactly right, you could cut the O-ring. This could result in loss of lock-up control and ATF leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5172 Torque Converter: Specifications Torque converter Stall speed Standard or new 2,830 rpm Check with vehicle on level ground Service limit 2,680 - 2,980 rpm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5177 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5178 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5179 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5180 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5185 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information 89-022 May 16, 2008 Applies To: Vehicles With an In-Radiator ATF Cooler - ALL ATF Cooler Cleaner (Supersedes 89-022, dated June 18, 2004, to update the information marked by asterisks) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured A/T, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat A/T failure. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (PIN GTHTTCF6H) is a portable, electrically operated special tool that cleans the ATF cooler with high- pressure, heated ATF. This cleaning action melts down waxy varnish residue left by burnt ATF and purges metal particles, clutch material, and other contaminants. The ATF Cooler Cleaner has these features: ^ Quick-connect fittings and color-coded hoses for easy hookup. ^ Uses about 9.5 gallons of Honda ATF-Z1, which gets filtered and recirculated. ^ Heats ATF to a temperature of 1400 to 150°F and then pumps it through the ATF cooler at high pressure (100 psi) using a pulsating action and air purging. Switching the hoses cleans the ATF cooler in the reverse direction. ^ Two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters to trap purged contaminants. ^ Built-in tool tray. This service bulletin gives you information for ordering and servicing this special tool, and guides you through the entire ATF cooler cleaning process. *REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001 Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter: T/N GTHNBP12 (12-pack) T/N GTHNBP2 (6-pack) T/N GTHGNBP22 (2-pack) ORDERING INFORMATION Additional ATF cooler cleaners or magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order on the iN, click on SERVICE, then Service Bay, then Tool and Equipment Program. From the Tool and Equipment Program menu, click on the Online Catalog tab, and then search for the desired filter pack by part number.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5186 TOOL DESCRIPTION CLEANING PROCEDURE The cleaning procedure involves hot fluid under high pressure. Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow all instructions in this bulletin. 1. Plug the ATF cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light cord; you would damage the unit. 2. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5187 3. Connect the appropriate fittings to the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line going to the external filter). Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 4. Connect a shop air hose to the air purge valve. NOTICE The quick connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 5. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 6. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 7. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler, then connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 8. Connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 9. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. 10. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 11. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 12. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 13. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 14. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. TOOL MAINTENANCE Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: *^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters every 20 hours, based on hour meter reading. For more information on filter replacement, see the January 2008 Honda ServiceNews article, Hour Meter Tells You When to Replace ATF Cooler Cleaner Filters.* ^ Fill the tank so the ATF is 4.5 inches from the top of the filler hole; do not overfill. NOTE: If the fluid level is low, the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on and the tank heater will not work. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5188 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5189 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5190 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Leak From Cooler Line Banjo Bolt SOURCE: Honda Service News December 2003 TITLE: ATF Leaks From Cooler Line Banjo Bolt APPLIES TO: 1998-04 Accords, 2001-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 1999-04 Odysseys, 2003-04 Pilots SERVICE TIP: The banjo bolts and sealing washers on the ATF cooler lines are delicate and can be easily damaged if the line or the banjo bolt gets hit. Any movement of the line or the banjo bolt crushes the two sealing washers and lets ATF leak past the seals. Before you install an A/T or try finding an ATF leak, check the banjo bolt torque on the ATF cooler lines. If a banjo bolt is loose, remove the bolt along with the sealing washers. And if the cooler line has a bracket, remove that bolt too. Inspect the sealing surface on the A/T housing. If the surface is OK, reinstall the banjo bolt with new sealing washers, and torque the bolt to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft). Reinstall the bolt for the line bracket (if applicable), and torque the bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5191 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Cleaning Special Tools Required ^ ATF Cooler Cleaner GHITTCF6H ^ Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-on Filter GTHGNBP2 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission failure. The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1 delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. WARNING: ^ Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. ^ Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow this procedure. 1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. Use only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE: Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light; you would damage the unit. 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too low for the tank heater to work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5192 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner. 5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line that normally goes to the external filter on the transmission). 6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTICE: The quick-connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. Tool Maintenance Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5193 Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: ^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters once a year or when you notice a restriction in the ATF flow. Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank before each use. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5200 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5204 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5207 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5208 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5209 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5210 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5211 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5212 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5213 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5214 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5215 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5216 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5217 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5218 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5219 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5220 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5221 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5222 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5223 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5224 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5225 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5226 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5227 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5228 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5241 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5242 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5243 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5244 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5245 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5246 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5251 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5252 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5253 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5256 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Valve Body: Specifications Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter side Standard or new 27.000 - 27.021 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump side Standard or new 29.000 - 29.013 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump gear thrust clearance Standard or new 0.03 - 0.06 mm Service limit 0.07 mm ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear Standard or new 0.105 - 0.1325 mm Driven gear Standard or new 0.0350 - 0.625 mm ATF pump driven gear I.D. Standard or new 14.016 - 14.034 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. Standard or new 13.980 - 13.990 mm Service limit When worn or damaged Regulator valve body Sealing ring contact I.D. Standard or new 35.000 - 35.025 mm Service limit 35.050 mm Main valve body springs Relief valve spring Wire diameter 1.1 mm O.D. 8.6 mm Free length 37.1 mm No. of coils 13.4 Modulator valve spring Wire diameter 1.4 mm O.D. 9.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 10.9 CPB valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 40.9 mm No. of coils 16.2 1-2 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 41.3 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5260 No. of coils 16.3 2nd orifice control valve spring Wire diameter 0.7 mm O.D. 6.6 mm Free length 34.8 mm No. of coils 22.0 Servo control valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 52.1 mm No. of coils 20.8 Regulator valve body springs Stator reaction spring Wire diameter 4.5 mm O.D. 35.4 mm Free length 30.3 mm No. of coils 1.9 Regulator valve spring A Wire diameter 1.9 mm O.D. 14.7 mm Free length 77.4 mm No. of coils 15.2 Regulator valve spring B Wire diameter 1.8 mm O.D. 9.6 mm Free length 44.0 mm No. of coils 12.6 Cooler relief valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 8.2 Torque converter check valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 8.2 Lock-up control valve spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm O.D. 6.0 mm Free length 38.4 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5261 No. of coils 30.3 Secondary valve body springs 3-4 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 57.0 mm No. of coils 26.8 2-3 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 57.0 mm No. of coils 26.8 4th exhaust valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 6.1 mm Free length 36.4 mm No. of coils 19.5 3-4 orifice control valve spring Wire diameter 0.7 mm O.D. 6.6 mm Free length 37.5 mm No. of coils 24.6 Servo body springs 1st accumulator spring Wire diameter 2.1 mm O.D. 16.0 mm Free length 89.1 mm No. of coils 16.2 4th accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.6 mm O.D. 17.0 mm Free length 88.4 mm No. of coils 14.2 4th accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.3 mm O.D. 10.2 mm Free length 51.6 mm No. of coils 13.8 3rd accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.8 mm O.D. 17.5 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5262 Free length 94.3 mm No. of coils 15.9 3rd accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.1 mm O.D. 31.0 mm Free length 38.2 mm No. of coils 2.6 2nd accumulator spring C Wire diameter 2.2 mm O.D. 14.5 mm Free length 68.0 mm No. of coils 13.9 2nd accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.4 mm O.D. 29.0 mm Free length 39.0 mm No. of coils 2.9 Lock-up valve body springs Lock-up shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 73.7 mm No. of coils 32.0 Lock-up timing valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 80.7 mm No. of coils 54.2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Valve Body: Exploded Views Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5265 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5266 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5267 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5268 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Disc: Specifications Pressure plate Warpage .............................................................................................................................................. ............................ 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) maximum Height of diaphragm spring fingers Measure with feeler gauge and special tool .................................................................................................................. 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) maximum Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) max. Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5275 4. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks, and burning. 5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5276 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): '01 model: 8.3 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) max. '02-03 models: 8.5 - 9.1 mm (0.34 - 0.36 inch) max. Service Limit: '01 model: 5.7 mm (0.22 inch) '02-03 models: 5.8 mm (0.23 inch) 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): 1.65 - 2.25 mm (0.065 - 0.089 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5277 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Flywheel Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5278 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Flywheel Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Replacement NOTE: Do not disassemble the flexible plate from the flywheel. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). 4. Drive the new bearing into the flywheel using the special tools as shown. Apply a light coat of oil to the outside of the bearing surface. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5279 5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5280 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B) finger-tight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5281 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5282 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Release Bearing Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing with a new one. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5283 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid ..................................................................................................................................... Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid (P/N 08798-9008) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5296 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5297 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5298 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5304 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5305 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5306 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5307 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Removal NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint, if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 2. If the master cylinder is equipped with the retaining clip holder (A) remove it. Remove the retaining clip 3. Disconnect the clutch line (C) and reservoir hose (D). Plug the end of the clutch line and reservoir hose with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming out. 4. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B) out of the yoke. Remove the nuts (C). 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5308 6. Remove the O-ring (A) and the clutch master cylinder seal (B) from the master cylinder (C). Clutch Master Cylinder Installation NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint, if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Fit to the clutch master cylinder (A) a new O-ring (B) and a clutch master cylinder seal (C). 2. Remove the clutch line (A) from the clutch hose clip (B) (2 places). 3. Fit to the master cylinder (A) the reservoir hose (B), the clutch line (C) and a new retaining clip (D). If the master cylinder was equipped with a retaining clip holder (E), reinstall it on the master cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5309 Some types Some types 4. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry to open the tip of the retaining clip (B) with a screwdriver. 5. Install the clutch master cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5310 6. Attach the clutch line (A) to the clutch line clip (B). 7. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. 8. Fill brake fluid up to the MAX line on the reservoir. Push back the diaphragm in the reservoir to the initial condition, and after fitting it, attach the cap. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Slave Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint, if brake does contact the paint, wash it off immediately water. 1. Remove the mounting bolts (A) and the slave cylinder (B). 2. Remove the roll pins (C). Disconnect the clutch line (D), and remove the O-ring (E). Plug the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid coming out. 3. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Install the new O-ring (A). 4. Pull the boot (B) back, and apply brake assembly lube to the boot and slave cylinder rod (C). Reinstall the boot. 5. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the push rod of the slave cylinder. Tighten the slave cylinder mounting bolts to 22 Nm (2.2 kgf-cm, 16 ft. lbs.). 6. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. ^ Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and suspended the hose in a container of brake fluid. ^ Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid at the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the bleeder hose. ^ Tighten the bleed screw to 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-cm, 6 ft. lbs.); do not overtighten it. ^ Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when done. Always use only Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5322 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5323 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5324 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel 02-002 January 11, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Squeak at the Clutch Pedal (Supersedes 02-002, dated September 21, 2004) SYMPTOM A squeak, a twang, or a notchy feel when the clutch pedal is pressed. PROBABLE CAUSE The clutch master cylinder spring is rubbing on the outer diameter of the piston when the pedal is pressed, or the master cylinder quick connect is moving. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5330 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder, and apply a thin film of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting. REQUIRED MATERIALS Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M, H/C 6110928 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008, H/C 4423802 PARTS INFORMATION Civic/Civic Hybrid Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-S5A-G04, H/C 7569452 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element Master Cylinder: P/N 46920-57A-A02, H/C 7604507 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 211101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour (All Civics) 0.8 hour (Accord/CR-V/Element) Failed Part: Civic/Civic Hybrid: P/N 46920-55A-G01 H/C 6571103 Accord/Civic Si/CR-V/Element: P/N 46920-S7A-A01 H/C 6729031 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 04201 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5331 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Have an assistant press the clutch pedal while you grasp the clutch line at the clutch master cylinder, and then at the slave cylinder. If you feel a vibration through the clutch line when you hear the noise or the noise stops, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. If you feel no vibration or the noise does not stop, look for other causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTICE Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder. Refer to the appropriate service manual: 2003-04 Accord (L4): page 12-6 2003-04 Accord (V6): page 12-8 2001-04 Civic: page 12-5 2002-04 Civic Si: page 12-5 2003-04 Civic Hybrid: page 13-5 2002-04 CR-V: page 12-5 2003-04 Element: page 12-6 Enter keyword CLUTCH MASTER, and select Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Install the new clutch master cylinder, but do not attach the clutch line fitting. 3. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the clutch line fitting and to the opening in the clutch master cylinder. Do not use silicone spray; it could damage the 0-ring. 4. Connect the clutch line fitting to the clutch master cylinder. 5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system, then top off the reservoir with brake fluid. 6. Check to see if the noise is gone when pressing the clutch pedal. ^ If the noise is gone, the repair is complete. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 5332 ^ If the noise is still present, look for other causes. 7. Test-drive the vehicle to check for proper clutch operation. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications Clutch pedal Height from the floor Standard or new 198 mm Stroke Standard or new 130 - 140 mm Play Standard or new 8 - 18 mm Disengagement height from the floor Standard or new 113 mm minimum Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5336 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.1 - 5.5 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 inch) 3. Tighten locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C).. 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten locknut (A). 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch (1) 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (1) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten locknut (H). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5340 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5341 32. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5342 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector. 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5343 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.1 - 5.5 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 inch) 3. Tighten locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C).. 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten locknut (A). 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch (1) 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (1) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten locknut (H). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) max. Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5348 4. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks, and burning. 5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5349 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): '01 model: 8.3 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) max. '02-03 models: 8.5 - 9.1 mm (0.34 - 0.36 inch) max. Service Limit: '01 model: 5.7 mm (0.22 inch) '02-03 models: 5.8 mm (0.23 inch) 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): 1.65 - 2.25 mm (0.065 - 0.089 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5350 Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Flywheel Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5351 Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Flywheel Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Replacement NOTE: Do not disassemble the flexible plate from the flywheel. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). 4. Drive the new bearing into the flywheel using the special tools as shown. Apply a light coat of oil to the outside of the bearing surface. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5352 5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5353 Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B) finger-tight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5354 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5355 Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Release Bearing Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing with a new one. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5356 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Pressure plate Warpage .............................................................................................................................................. ............................ 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) maximum Height of diaphragm spring fingers Measure with feeler gauge and special tool .................................................................................................................. 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) maximum Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) max. Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5362 4. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks, and burning. 5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5363 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): '01 model: 8.3 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) max. '02-03 models: 8.5 - 9.1 mm (0.34 - 0.36 inch) max. Service Limit: '01 model: 5.7 mm (0.22 inch) '02-03 models: 5.8 mm (0.23 inch) 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): 1.65 - 2.25 mm (0.065 - 0.089 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5364 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Flywheel Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5365 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Flywheel Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Replacement NOTE: Do not disassemble the flexible plate from the flywheel. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). 4. Drive the new bearing into the flywheel using the special tools as shown. Apply a light coat of oil to the outside of the bearing surface. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5366 5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5367 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B) finger-tight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5368 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5369 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Release Bearing Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing with a new one. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5370 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Solenoid: Component Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5380 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5381 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test > Page 5384 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Solenoid Valve Test - Continuously Variable Transmission Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect solenoid harness connector (BP). 2. Measure CVT speed change control valve assembly resistance between solenoid harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 3. Measure CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 2 and No. 6. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 4. Measure CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 4 and No. 8. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 5. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between terminal No. 5 and body ground. STANDARD: 11.7 - 21.0 Ohms 6. Replace the CVT speed change control valve assembly or CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly, if the measurements are out of standard. Replace the lower valve body assembly, if the measurements of CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly or inhibitor solenoid are out of standard. 7. If all of the resistance are within the standard, a clicking sound should be heard when connecting the battery terminals to the solenoid harness connector terminals below. ^ CVT speed change control valve assembly No. 3 to battery positive terminal No. 7 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly No. 2 to battery positive terminal No. 6 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly No. 4 to battery positive terminal No. 8 to battery negative terminal ^ Inhibitor solenoid No.5 to battery positive terminal and body ground to negative terminal 8. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the lower valve body assembly, and check the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5385 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5389 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5390 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5391 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5392 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5398 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5399 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5403 Differential: Service and Repair Component Location Index Backlash Inspection 1. Install both axles in the differential, and place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A). 2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a dial indicator (C). STANDARD: 0.08 - 0.15 mm (0.003 - 0.006 inch) 3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the differential carrier. Differential Carrier/Final Driven Gear Replacement Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5404 1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier. The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side on the inner bore (A) facing the differential carrier. 3. Tighten the bolts to 98 Nm (10.0 kgf-cm, 72 ft. lbs.) in a crisscross pattern. Carrier Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 1. Remove the bearings (A) with a commercially available bearing puller (B), and adapter (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5405 2. Install the new bearings with the special tool and a press. Press the bearing on until it bottoms. Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools Required Driver 07749-0010000 - Driver attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 - Driver attachment, 58 mm 07JAD-PH80101 1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission housing (B). 2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the flywheel housing (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5406 3. Install the oil seal in the transmission housing with the special tools. 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter housing with the special tools. Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection Special Tools Required Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 1. Install the 80 mm set ring (A) in the transmission housing (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5407 2. Install the differential assembly (A) in the transmission housing (B) using the special tool. 3. Install the three dowel pins (A) and the gasket (B) on the transmission housing (C). 4. Place the flywheel housing (D) on the transmission housing. 5. Install the housing bolts (20 bolts), and tighten the bolts in two or more steps to 29 Nm (3.0 kgf-cm, 22 ft. lbs.) in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5408 6. Measure the clearance between the 80 mm set ring and carrier bearing outer race with a feeler gauge. 7. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 80 mm set ring, and measure its thickness. 8. Select and install a new set ring, then recheck the clearance and make sure it is within the standard. SET RING, 80 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - CVT: Capacity Specifications ATF Change ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 2.7L (2.9 Qt) Overhaul .................................................. .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.0L (6.3 Qt) CVT fluid Change ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................. 3.1L (3.3 Qt) Overhaul .......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .... 5.6L (6.0 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5415 Fluid - CVT: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Honda ATF-Z1 Honda Service News Notice: If you're replacing transmission fluid in a CVT-equipped vehicle, or just topping it off, make sure you're using the new CVT fluid (P/N 08200-9006). From here on, DON'T put ATF-Z1 in a CVT. If you're topping off a CVT that's already got ATF-Z1, there's no need for concern; this fluid is compatible with ATF-Z1. All CVT-equipped Hondas starting with the 2006 models and onward will be factory-filled with the new CVT fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair ATF Level Check ATF Level Check NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level within 60 - 90 seconds after the engine is turned off. The dipstick should read between the upper mark (A) and the lower mark (B) on the HOT side of the gauge (C). Do not check the level on the COLD side of the gauge (D) when the ATF warmed up. NOTE: Some dipsticks have only the HOT gauge, in which case they might or might not have HOT stamped into the dipstick. 6. If the level is below the lower mark (B), check for fluid leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints, and cooler lines. 7. If the level exceeds the upper mark (A), drain the fluid for proper level. 8. Pour the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 9. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > ATF Level Check > Page 5418 Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair ATF Replacement ATF Replacement NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. Change Intervals: Replace at 48,000 miles (80,000 km) or 48 months, then replace every 36,000 miles (60,000 km) or 36 months in normal conditions Replace every 24,000 miles (40,000 km) or 24 months in severe conditions 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. 2. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF Cooler Flushing. 3. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 4. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the dipstick hole (A). Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using non Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 3.1 L (3.3 US qt) at changing 5.6 L (5.9 US qt) at overhaul 5. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark (E) and lower mark (F) on COLD gauge (D), if the dipstick has COLD gauge. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission. 7. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 8. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark (A) and lower mark (B) on HOT gauge (C). Do not check the level with COLD gauge (D) when the ATF wormed up. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid Filter - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - CVT: Service and Repair CVT ATF Filter Installation 1. Install the ATF filter brackets (A) on the ATF filter (B). 2. Install the ATF filter and bracket on the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid Line/Hose, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fixing Banjo Bolt Leaks SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Fixing A/T Banjo Bolt Leaks APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got ATF leaking from any of the A/T banjo bolts? The first thing you need to do is replace the sealing washers. Next, start threading the banjo and line bracket bolts in their holes. Finally, torque the banjo bolt to 31 Nm (22 lb-ft) and the line bracket bolt to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft.). NOTE: The banjo bolt torque spec we're recommending is slightly higher than what's listed in the S/M. This is intentional. If you torque just the banjo bolt, you won't really fix the leak. ATF leaks at the banjo bolt stem from the line bracket getting tightened before the banjo bolt. This can misalign the banjo joint, causing the banjo bolt sealing washers not to contact their mating surfaces evenly. Once the sealing washers have been used, you must replace them. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid Line/Hose, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5426 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement 1. Connect the ATF cooler inlet hose (A) to the cooler inlet line (B) with the dot (C) on the hose facing the dipstick (D). 2. Connect the cooler hoses to the line, ATF filter (E), and ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (F) as shown. 3. Install the cooler hose clamps on the white line on the cooler inlet hoses. 4. Install the radiator hose/ATF cooler hose clamp. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid Pan, CVT > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications CVT ATF pan/bolts Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5439 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5440 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5444 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5450 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5451 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5454 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5455 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5462 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5465 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5466 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5467 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5468 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5469 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5474 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5475 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5476 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5477 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Shift Cable Adjustment 1. Shift the transmission into the N position. 2. Remove the center console panel and center console. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (D). 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift position is in N. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator comes on. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5482 8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin (A) through the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever assembly. The shift lever is secured in the N position. 9. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) with the slot in the cable bracket base (C), then slide the holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the shift cable. NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (H). 10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B). 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5483 the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base. 12. Install and tighten the nut. 13. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever. 14. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch. 15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases. 16. Reinstall the center console, console panel, and related parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5484 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Shift Cable Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift the transmission into the N position. 3. Remove the center console panel and center console. 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 5. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). 6. Disconnect the third HO2S connector, and remove the exhaust pipe A and the heat shield (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Linkage, CVT > Shift Cable, CVT > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5485 7. Remove the shift cable guide brackets (A) and grommet (B). 8. Remove the spring clip (A), washer (B) and plastic washer (C) from the control lever (D). 9. Loosen the locknut, then remove the shift cable (E). 10. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole, then install the shift cable guide brackets and grommet. 11. Verify that the transmission is in the [A position on the control lever. 12. Align the socket on the shift cable with the slot in the shift cable bracket (F), then install the socket in the bracket and the shift cable end to the control lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively. 13. Tighten the locknut. 14. Install the plastic washer then the steel washer, and install the spring clip (H) in the direction shown. 15. Install the heat shield and the exhaust pipe A, then connect the third HO2S connector. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator light comes on. 17. Install the shift cable to the shift lever. If necessary, adjust the shift cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5490 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5491 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5492 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5493 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5498 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5499 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5502 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5503 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Solenoid: Component Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5508 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5509 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test > Page 5512 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Solenoid Valve Test - Continuously Variable Transmission Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect solenoid harness connector (BP). 2. Measure CVT speed change control valve assembly resistance between solenoid harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 3. Measure CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 2 and No. 6. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 4. Measure CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 4 and No. 8. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 5. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between terminal No. 5 and body ground. STANDARD: 11.7 - 21.0 Ohms 6. Replace the CVT speed change control valve assembly or CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly, if the measurements are out of standard. Replace the lower valve body assembly, if the measurements of CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly or inhibitor solenoid are out of standard. 7. If all of the resistance are within the standard, a clicking sound should be heard when connecting the battery terminals to the solenoid harness connector terminals below. ^ CVT speed change control valve assembly No. 3 to battery positive terminal No. 7 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly No. 2 to battery positive terminal No. 6 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly No. 4 to battery positive terminal No. 8 to battery negative terminal ^ Inhibitor solenoid No.5 to battery positive terminal and body ground to negative terminal 8. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the lower valve body assembly, and check the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5513 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Shift Lever Removal Shift Lever Removal 1. Shift the transmission into the N position. 2. Remove the center console panel and center console. 3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the cable end from the shift lever assembly. 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift cable bracket base (C). NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting the shift cable Guide (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5518 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) (A) and park pin switch connector (4P) (B). 6. Remove the four bolts, then remove the shift lever assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5519 Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Shift Lever Installation Shift Lever Installation 1. Install the shift lever assembly. 2. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) (A) and park pin switch connector (4P) (B). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the N position indicator comes on. 4. Install the shift cable to the shift lever. If necessary, adjust the shift cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Removal > Page 5520 Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Torque Converter, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Do Not Remove Torque Converter From Mainshaft SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Keep Torque Converter on Mainshaft to Avoid Damage APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to keep the torque converter in place when you're handling or installing a reman A/T. If the torque converter slips off the mainshaft, and you don't put it back on the shaft exactly right, you could cut the O-ring. This could result in loss of lock-up control and ATF leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Torque Converter, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5525 Torque Converter: Specifications Torque converter Stall speed Standard or new 2,830 rpm Check with vehicle on level ground Service limit 2,680 - 2,980 rpm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5530 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Avoiding Fluid Contamination SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Avoiding Comebacks From A/T Contamination APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Installing a reman A/T? Here are some important tips to keep in mind to ensure a first-time fix and to avoid any come-backs: - If the vehicle has an ATF cooler, make sure you clean the cooler with the ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H). See S/B 89-022, ATF Cooler Cleaner, for details. - If the reman A/T kit includes an in-line filter, don't forget to install it. If the vehicle already has an in-line filter from an earlier A/T replacement, then remove the existing filter, and install the new one. - Spray the driveshaft splines with solvent and compressed air before installing them in the reman A/T. If the failed A/T had a speed sensor, make sure it's clean before you install it. Debris from the failed A/T can catch in the driveshaft splines or on the speed sensor and contaminate the reman A/T. - If the reman A/T comes with a heater/cooler, make sure you install the reman A/T with that heater/cooler. Never install the heater/cooler from the failed A/T; you could contaminate the reman A/T. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5531 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair ATF Cooler Cleaning Special Tools Required ^ ATF Cooler Cleaner GHITTCF6H ^ Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-on Filter GTHGNBP2 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission failure. The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1 delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. WARNING: ^ Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. ^ Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow this procedure. 1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. Use only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE: Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light; you would damage the unit. 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too low for the tank heater to work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5532 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner. 5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line that normally goes to the external filter on the transmission). 6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTICE: The quick-connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5 minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the filler/breather tube vents. 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve. 14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. Tool Maintenance Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5533 Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: ^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters once a year or when you notice a restriction in the ATF flow. Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank before each use. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5540 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5544 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5547 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5548 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5549 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5550 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5551 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5556 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5557 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5558 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5559 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Specifications Valve Body: Specifications Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter side Standard or new 27.000 - 27.021 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump side Standard or new 29.000 - 29.013 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump gear thrust clearance Standard or new 0.03 - 0.06 mm Service limit 0.07 mm ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear Standard or new 0.105 - 0.1325 mm Driven gear Standard or new 0.0350 - 0.625 mm ATF pump driven gear I.D. Standard or new 14.016 - 14.034 mm Service limit When worn or damaged ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. Standard or new 13.980 - 13.990 mm Service limit When worn or damaged Regulator valve body Sealing ring contact I.D. Standard or new 35.000 - 35.025 mm Service limit 35.050 mm Main valve body springs Relief valve spring Wire diameter 1.1 mm O.D. 8.6 mm Free length 37.1 mm No. of coils 13.4 Modulator valve spring Wire diameter 1.4 mm O.D. 9.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 10.9 CPB valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 40.9 mm No. of coils 16.2 1-2 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 41.3 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5563 No. of coils 16.3 2nd orifice control valve spring Wire diameter 0.7 mm O.D. 6.6 mm Free length 34.8 mm No. of coils 22.0 Servo control valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 52.1 mm No. of coils 20.8 Regulator valve body springs Stator reaction spring Wire diameter 4.5 mm O.D. 35.4 mm Free length 30.3 mm No. of coils 1.9 Regulator valve spring A Wire diameter 1.9 mm O.D. 14.7 mm Free length 77.4 mm No. of coils 15.2 Regulator valve spring B Wire diameter 1.8 mm O.D. 9.6 mm Free length 44.0 mm No. of coils 12.6 Cooler relief valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 8.2 Torque converter check valve spring Wire diameter 1.0 mm O.D. 8.4 mm Free length 33.8 mm No. of coils 8.2 Lock-up control valve spring Wire diameter 0.8 mm O.D. 6.0 mm Free length 38.4 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5564 No. of coils 30.3 Secondary valve body springs 3-4 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 57.0 mm No. of coils 26.8 2-3 shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 57.0 mm No. of coils 26.8 4th exhaust valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 6.1 mm Free length 36.4 mm No. of coils 19.5 3-4 orifice control valve spring Wire diameter 0.7 mm O.D. 6.6 mm Free length 37.5 mm No. of coils 24.6 Servo body springs 1st accumulator spring Wire diameter 2.1 mm O.D. 16.0 mm Free length 89.1 mm No. of coils 16.2 4th accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.6 mm O.D. 17.0 mm Free length 88.4 mm No. of coils 14.2 4th accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.3 mm O.D. 10.2 mm Free length 51.6 mm No. of coils 13.8 3rd accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.8 mm O.D. 17.5 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5565 Free length 94.3 mm No. of coils 15.9 3rd accumulator spring B Wire diameter 2.1 mm O.D. 31.0 mm Free length 38.2 mm No. of coils 2.6 2nd accumulator spring C Wire diameter 2.2 mm O.D. 14.5 mm Free length 68.0 mm No. of coils 13.9 2nd accumulator spring A Wire diameter 2.4 mm O.D. 29.0 mm Free length 39.0 mm No. of coils 2.9 Lock-up valve body springs Lock-up shift valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 7.6 mm Free length 73.7 mm No. of coils 32.0 Lock-up timing valve spring Wire diameter 0.9 mm O.D. 8.1 mm Free length 80.7 mm No. of coils 54.2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Valve Body: Exploded Views Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5568 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5569 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5570 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 5571 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5572 Valve Body: Service and Repair CVT Lower Valve Body Assembly Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely. 3. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector (8P). 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 5. Remove the ATF pan (A) (14 bolts). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Valve Body, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5573 6. Remove the ATF strainer (B) (two bolts). 7. Remove the lower valve body assembly (C) (eight bolts). 8. Remove the bolt securing the solenoid harness connector (D) with holding the lower valve body assembly, and remove the connector and valve body assembly. Lower Valve Body Assemble Installation 1. Install the solenoid harness connector (A) with holding the lower valve body assembly (B). 2. Install the lower valve body assembly (eight bolts). 3. Install the ATF strainer (C) (two bolts). 4. Install the ATF pan (D) with the two dowel pins (E) and new gasket (F). 5. Check the solenoid harness connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. 6. Refill the transmission with ATF. 7. Perform the start clutch calibration procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation 98-018 July 22, 2003 Applies To: ALL Models Driveshaft Boot Band Tool (Supersedes 98-018, Boot Band Tool, dated April 14, 1998) Updated information is shown by asterisks. The replacement boot bands for the driveshaft CV joint boots have changed. The replacement bands are a double loop type that require a special tool for proper installation. * TOOL INFORMATION Boot Band Tool: T/N KD-3191 This tool is already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old boot band(s). Take care not to damage the boot. 2. Remove and inspect the boot. Replace the boot if it is worn or damaged. 3. Install the boot, and fill it with the specified amount and type of grease. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual for the grease amount and type. 4. Adjust the driveshaft to the proper length. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 5. Install the replacement boot band onto the large end of the boot with the end of the band facing toward the front of the vehicle. 6. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, and hold the boot band in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 5580 7. Measure and mark the band with a felt-tip pen at the specified distance from the clip: ^ If you are installing a new boot, mark the band approximately 10 to 14 mm (0.4 to 0.6 in.) from the clip. ^ If you are reinstalling the original boot, mark the band 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the clip. 8. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the boot band tool and into the slot on the winding mandrel. 9. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, then slowly turn the winding mandrel with a wrench. Tighten the band until the mark you made in step 7 meets the edge of the clip. 10. Raise up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees, then center-punch the clip to hold the band temporarily. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 5581 11. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.4 in.) from the clip. 12. Secure the end of the boot band by tapping it down over the clip with a hammer. 13. Make sure that the boot band and clip do not interfere with anything and that the band does not move. 14. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 13 to install the boot band on the small end of the boot. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel bearings End play Front 0 - 0.05 mm Rear 0 - 0.05 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 5587 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5588 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the wheels. 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc or drum securely against the hub. 3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as shown, and measure the bearing end play moving the brake disc or drum inward and outward. Bearing end play: Standard: Front/Rear: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 - Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 - Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 - Driver 07749-0010000 - Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5591 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5592 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5593 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5594 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5595 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. - Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. - Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5596 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Hub Bearing Unit Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5597 3. Remove the hub cap (A), raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 4. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 5. Remove the brake drum (A), and remove the hub bearing unit (B) from the spindle. If the brake drum has stuck to the hub bearing unit, pull them out together. Do not tap on the aluminum brake drum. 6. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. - Use a new hub cap on reassembly. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transmission Flex Plate: Specifications Automatic Transmission Drive Plate Tighten the six bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transmission > Page 5606 Flex Plate: Specifications Continuously Variable Transmission Drive Plate Tighten the six bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Flex Plate: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Drive Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft. 2. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the six bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission > Page 5609 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Continuously Variable Transmission Drive Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft. 2. Install the drive plate, and install the washer in the direction shown on the engine crankshaft. 3. Tighten the six bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface Standard or New ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) maximum Service Limit .................................................................................... ......................................................................................... 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) Torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5613 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Flywheel: Service and Repair Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the height is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.02 inch) max. Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. Install the special tools. 3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the pressure plate (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5616 4. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks, and burning. 5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for wear at the release bearing contact area. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate (C). If the warpage is more than the service limit, replace the pressure plate. Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools. 8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or oil soaked, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5617 9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): '01 model: 8.3 - 9.0 mm (0.33 - 0.35 inch) max. '02-03 models: 8.5 - 9.1 mm (0.34 - 0.36 inch) max. Service Limit: '01 model: 5.7 mm (0.22 inch) '02-03 models: 5.8 mm (0.23 inch) 10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc. Standard (New): 1.65 - 2.25 mm (0.065 - 0.089 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5618 Flywheel: Service and Repair Flywheel Inspection Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the engine installed. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the runout. Standard (New): 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5619 Flywheel: Service and Repair Flywheel Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Flywheel Replacement NOTE: Do not disassemble the flexible plate from the flywheel. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B). 4. Drive the new bearing into the flywheel using the special tools as shown. Apply a light coat of oil to the outside of the bearing surface. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5620 5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5621 Flywheel: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 077 49-0010000 Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation 1. Install the ring gear holder. 2. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then install the clutch disc using the special tools. 3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts (B) finger-tight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5622 4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping the diaphragm spring. 5. Remove the special tools. 6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the same height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5623 Flywheel: Service and Repair Release Bearing Replacement Clutch Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110 ^ Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A ^ Remover handle 07936-3710100 ^ Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 ^ Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 Release Bearing Replacement 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch housing (B). 2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring (D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E). 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release bearing with a new one. NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do not wash it in solvent. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal > Page 5624 4. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the shaded areas. 5. With the release fork slid between the release bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the hole in the clutch housing. 6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release fork bolt, then press the release fork over the release fork bolt squarely. 7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot seals around the release fork and clutch housing. 8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Locations Automatic Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission > Page 5631 Shift Indicator: Locations Continuously Variable Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5634 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5635 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5636 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5637 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5638 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5639 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5640 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5641 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5642 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5643 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5644 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5645 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5646 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5647 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5648 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5649 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5650 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5651 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5652 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5653 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5654 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5655 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5656 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5657 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5658 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5659 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5660 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5661 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5662 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Automatic Transmission Circuit Diagram Continuously Variable Transmission Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between All terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [A position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission > Page 5671 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any-other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the R position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5672 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) in the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Case: Customer Interest M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5682 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5683 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5684 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5685 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5686 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Case: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5692 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5693 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5694 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5695 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5696 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Counter Gear Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Counter Gear Bearing: Service and Repair Countershaft Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required - Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm 07736-A01000B - Driver 07749-0010000 - Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 1. Remove the needle bearing using the special tool, then remove the oil guide plate C. 2. Position the oil guide plate C and new needle bearing (A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Countershaft: Specifications Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact area (clutch housing side) Standard or new 34.000 - 34.015 mm Service limit 33.95 mm Diameter of ball bearing contact area (transmission housing side) Standard or new 24.980 - 24.993 mm Service limit 24.93 mm Diameter of 1st gear contact area Standard or new 37.984 - 38.000 mm Service limit 37.934 mm Runout Standard or new 0.02 mm Service limit 0.05 mm Countershaft 1st gear I.D. Standard or new 43.009 - 43.025 mm Service limit 43.070 mm End play Standard or new 0.03 - 0.10 mm Service limit 0.22 mm Thickness Standard or new 26.91 - 26.94 mm Countershaft 2nd gear I.D. Standard or new 45.009 - 45.025 mm Service limit 45.070 mm End play Standard or new 0.04 - 0.12 mm Service limit 0.24 mm Thickness Standard or new 27.41 - 27.46 mm Countershaft 2nd gear spacer collar I.D. Standard or new 34.000 - 34.010 mm Service limit 34.040 mm O.D. Standard or new 39.989 - 40.000 mm Service limit 39.930 mm Length Standard or new 27.53 - 27.56 mm Service limit 27.51 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Countershaft Inspection Countershaft: Testing and Inspection Countershaft Inspection Countershaft Inspection 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the countershaft at points A, B, and C. If any part of the countershaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one. Standard: A (Ball bearing surface): 24.980-24.993 mm (0.9835-0.9840 in.) B (Needle bearing surface): 37.984-38.000 mm (1.4954-1.4961 in.) C (Needle bearing surface): 34.000-34.015 mm (1.3386-1.3392 in.) Service Limit: A: 24.93 mm (0.981 in.) B: 37.934 mm (1.493 in.) C: 33.95 mm (1.337 in.) 2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the countershaft. Rotate the countershaft 2 complete revolutions when measuring the runout. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the countershaft with a new one. Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Countershaft Inspection > Page 5705 Countershaft: Testing and Inspection Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection 1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A) and the countershaft (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step2. Standard: 0.03-0.12 mm (0.001-0.005 in.) Service Limit: 0.22mm (0.009 in.) 2. Measure the thickness of the 1st gear. - If the thickness of 1st gear is less than the service limit, replace 1st gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. Standard: '01 model: 26.91-26.94 mm (1.059-1.061 in.) '02 model: 26.89-26.94 mm (1.058-1.061 in.) Service Limit: '01 model: 26.86 mm (1.057 in.) '02 model: 26.86 mm (1.057 in.) 3. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step 4. Standard: 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Countershaft Inspection > Page 5706 Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 in.) 4. Measure the thickness of the spacer collar. - If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. - If the thickness is within the service limit, go to step 5. Standard: 27.53-27.56 mm (1.084-1.085 in.) Service Limit: 27.51 mm (1.083 in.) 5. Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear. - If the thickness of 2nd gear is less than the service limit, replace 2nd gear with new one. - If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. Standard: 27.41-27.46 mm (1.079-1.081 in.) Service Limit: 27.36 mm (1.077 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Countershaft: Service and Repair Disassembly Countershaft Disassembly 1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks. 2. Use a chisel (A) to raise the locknut tab (B) from the groove in the countershaft. 3. Remove the locknut (A) and the spring washer (B). 4. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (F) out of the ball bearing (F). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5709 5. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (E) out of the 4th gear. 6. Support 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the countershaft (F) out of the 3rd gear. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5710 Countershaft: Service and Repair Reassembly Countershaft Reassembly Exploded View Special Tools Required - Driver 07749-0010000 - Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 - Seal driver 07947-6890100 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. 1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to all contact surfaces. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5711 2. Install the and the needle bearing (A) onto the countershaft (B). Assemble the friction damper (C) and 1st gear (D) together and install them on the countershaft, then install the synchro ring (E) and the synchro spring (F). 3. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub (A) by aligning the fingers on the friction damper (B) with 1st/2nd synchro hub grooves. 4. Install reverse gear, 2nd gear synchro spring, and the double cone synchro assembly. 5. Install the friction damper (A) on the spacer (B) using the special tools and a press. 6. Install the friction damper and spacer, and the 2nd gear bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5712 7. Install 2nd gear (A) by aligning the synchro cone fingers (B) with 2nd gear grooves (C). 8. Install 3rd gear, 4th gear, and 5th gear. 9. Install the needle bearing (A) and the ball bearing (B) using the special tool and a press (C). 10 Install the spring washer (A),and loosely install the new locknut (B). 11. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench vise with wood blocks. 12. Torque the new locknut to 108 Nm (11 kgf-m, 79 lbf-ft), then loosen it and torque it again to the same value. Stake the locknut tab into the groove. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Carrier Assembly, M/T > Carrier Bearings, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments Carrier Bearings: Adjustments Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment Special Tool Required Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 1. Install the 80 mm shim that's the same size as the one you removed. 2. Install the differential assembly into the clutch housing. 3. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch housing, then tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. 8 x 1.25mm Torque: 27 Nm (2.8 kgf-m, 20 lbf-ft) 4. Use the special tool to bottom the differential assembly in the clutch housing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Carrier Assembly, M/T > Carrier Bearings, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5718 5. Measure clearance between 80 mm shim and bearing outer race in transmission housing with a feeler gauge. Standard: 0-0.10 mm (0-0.004 in.) 6. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a new 80 mm shim from the following table. If the clearance measured in step 5 is within the standard, go to step 9. 7. Remove the bolts and transmission housing. 8. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 6, then recheck the clearance. 9. Reinstall the transmission. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Pinion Gear, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Pinion Gear: Specifications M/T differential pinion gear Backlash Standard or new 0.05 - 0.15 mm I.D. Standard or new 18.042 - 18.066 mm Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance Standard or new 0.059 - 0.095 mm Service limit 0.150 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications M/T Fluid Change ................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 1.5L (1.6 Qt) Overhaul .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................................. 1.6L (1.7 Qt) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5729 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications M/T Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................ Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF): P/N 08798-9016 If not available you may use 10W-30 or 10W-40 motor oil as a temporary replacement. An SG grade is preferred, but an SH or SJ grade may be used if SG grade is not available. Replace with Honda MTF as soon as it is convenient. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5730 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Inspection and Replacement 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine OFF. 2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B), check the condition of the fluid, and make sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 3. If the transmission fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (D) and drain the fluid. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level. Oil Capacity 1.5 L (1.6 US qt) at fluid change 1.6 L (1.7 US qt) at overhaul Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with anew washer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Synchronizer Hub: Customer Interest M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5740 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5741 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5742 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5743 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Synchronizer Hub: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5749 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5750 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5751 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Hub: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5752 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5753 Synchronizer Hub: Testing and Inspection Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection and Reassembly 1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate wear. 2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro sleeve (B), and check for freedom of movement. Be sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub. Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the 1st/2nd synchro hub slots (E) because it will damage the spring ring. NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Synchronizer Ring: Customer Interest M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5762 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5763 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5764 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5765 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Synchronizer Ring: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5771 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5772 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5773 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Synchronizer Ring: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5774 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5775 Synchronizer Ring: Testing and Inspection Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection 1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear. Inspect the teeth (B) on each synchro ring for wear (rounded off). 2. Inspect the teeth (C) on each synchro sleeve and matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off). 3. Inspect the thrust surface (D) on each gear hub for wear. 4. Inspect the cone surface (E) on each gear hub for wear and roughness. 5. Inspect the teeth on all gears (F) for uneven wear, scoring, galling, and cracks. 6. Coat the cone surface of each gear (E) with oil, and place its synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro ring, making sure that it does not slip. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5776 7. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and its synchro ring (B) all the way around. Hold the synchro ring against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and gear. Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance Standard: 0.85-1.10 mm (0.033-0.043 in.) Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Double Cone Synchro-to-Gear Clearance Standard: (1):Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Synchro Cone (C) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.02-0.04 in.) (2):Synchro Cone (C) to Gear (A) 0.5-1.0 mm (0.02-0.04 in.) (3):Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Gear (A) 0.95-1.68 mm (0.037-0.066 in.) Service Limit: (1):0.3 mm (0.01 in.) (2):0.3 mm (0.01 in.) (3):0.6 mm (0.02 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Service and Repair Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools Required - Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm 07736-A01000B - Driver 07749-0010000 - Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch housing (B) using the special tool. 3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch side. 4. Drive the new oil seal in from the transmission side using the special tools. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5780 5. Drive the new ball bearing (A) in from the transmission side using the special tools. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > M/T Mainshaft Reassembly Manual Revision Mainshaft: Technical Service Bulletins M/T Mainshaft Reassembly Manual Revision SOURCE: Honda Service News January 2004 TITLE: S/M Fix: M/T Mainshaft Reassembly APPLIES TO: 2001-04 Civic SERVICE TIP: The synchro ring order for 5th gear is wrong in the Exploded View on page 13-28. It shows the synchro ring with nine teeth per segment mating to 5th gear and the synchro ring with four teeth per segment mating to the tapered cone ring. If you install the synchro rings in this order, the M/T locks up in 5th gear. To ensure proper reassembly of 5th gear, refer to this exploded view. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5785 Mainshaft: Specifications Mainshaft End play Standard or new 0.11 - 0.18 mm Service limit Adjust Diameter of ball bearing contact area (clutch Standard or new 25.977 - 25.990 mm housing side) Service limit 25.92 mm Diameter of spacer collar contact area Standard or new 28.980 - 28.993 mm Service limit 28.93 mm Diameter of needle bearing contact area Standard or new 34.984 - 35.000 mm Service limit 34.93 mm Diameter of ball bearing contact area Standard or new 25.987 - 26.000 mm (transmission housing side) Service limit 25.930 mm Runout Standard or new 0.02 mm maximum Service limit 0.05 mm Mainshaft 3rd and 4th gears I.D. Standard or new 39.009 - 39.025 mm Service limit 39.070 mm End play 3rd gear Standard or new 0.06 - 0.21 mm Service limit 0.33 mm 4th gear Standard or new 0.06 - 0.19 mm Service limit 0.31 mm Thickness 3rd gear Standard or new 27.92 - 27.97 mm Service limit 27.85 mm 4th gear Standard or new 27.02 - 27.07 mm Service limit 26.95 mm Mainshaft 5th gear I.D. Standard or new 39.009 - 39.025 mm Service limit 39.070 mm End play Standard or new 0.06 - 0.19 mm Service limit 0.31 mm Thickness Standard or new 28.92 - 28.97 mm Service limit 28.85 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5786 Mainshaft 4th and 5th gears spacer collar I.D. Standard or new 29.002 - 29.012 mm Service limit 29.060 mm O.D. Standard or new 34.989 - 35.000 mm Service limit 34.930 mm Length A Standard or new 51.97 - 52.03 mm B Standard or new 24.03 - 24.06 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mainshaft Inspection Mainshaft: Testing and Inspection Mainshaft Inspection Mainshaft Inspection 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B, and C. If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one. Standard: A (Ball bearing surface): 25.987-26.000 mm (1.0231-1.0236 in.) B (Spacer collar surface): '01 model: 28.980-28.993 mm (1.1409-1.1415 in.) '02 model: 28.992-29.005 mm (1.1414-1.1419 in.) C (Needle bearing surface): 34.984-35.000 mm (1.3773 - 1.3780 in.) D (Ball bearing surface): 25.977-25.990 mm (1.0227-1.0232 in.) Service Limit: A: 25.93 mm (1.021 in.) B:'01 model: 28.93 mm (1.139 in.) '02 model: 28.94 mm (1.139 in.) C: 34.93 mm (1.375 in.) D: 25.92 mm (1.020 in.) 2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete revolutions when measuring the runout. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the mainshaft with a new one. Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mainshaft Inspection > Page 5789 Mainshaft: Testing and Inspection Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set. 1. Support the bearing inner race with a socket (A), and push down on the mainshaft (B). Standard: 0.06-0.21 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) Service Limit: 0.33 mm (0.013 in.) 2. Measure the clearance between 2nd (C) and 3rd (D) gears with a feeler gauge (E). - If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step 3. - If the clearance is within the service limit, go to step4. 3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear. - If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. Standard: 27.92-27.97 mm (1.099-1.101 in.) Service Limit: 27.85 mm (1.096 in.) 4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and the spacer collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step 5. Standard: 0.06-0.19 mm (0.002-0.007 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mainshaft Inspection > Page 5790 Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 in.) 5. Measure distance (1) on the spacer collar. - If distance (1) is not within the standard, replace the spacer collar with a new one. - If distance (1) is within the standard, go to step 6. Standard: 24.03-24.06 mm (0.946-0.947 in.) 6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear. - If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service limit, replace 4th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. Standard: 27.02-27.07 mm (1.063-1.066 in.) Service Limit: 26.95 mm (1.061 in.) 7. Measure the clearance between the spacer collar (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step8. Standard: 0.06-0.19 mm (0.002-0.007 in.) Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mainshaft Inspection > Page 5791 8. Measure distance (2) on the spacer collar. - If distance (2) is not within the standard, replace the spacer collar with a new one. - If distance (2) is within the standard, go to step 9. Standard: 24.03-24.06 mm (0.946-0.947 in.) 9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear - If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service limit, replace 5th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one. Standard: 28.92-28.97 mm (1.139-1.141 in.) Service Limit: 28.85 mm (1.136 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5792 Mainshaft: Adjustments Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment Special Tools Required - Mainshaft base 07GAJ-PG20130 - Base collar 07GAJ-PG20120 - Mainshaft holder 07GAJ-PG20110 1. Remove the 72 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate M from the transmission housing (B). 2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A), the spacer collar (B), the 5th synchro hub (C), the spacer (D) and ball bearing (E) on the mainshaft (F), then install the assembled mainshaft in the transmission housing (G). 3. Install the washer (H) on the mainshaft. 4. Measure distance (1) between the end of the transmission housing and washer with a straight edge and vernier caliper. Measure at three locations and average the reading. 5. Measure distance (2) between the end of the clutch housing (A) and bearing inner race (B) with a straight edge and depth gauge. Measure at three locations and average the readings. Shim Selection Formula: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5793 6. Select the proper 72 mm shim from the chart. Follow the example above and use the measurements you made in steps 4 and 5: - Add distance (2) (step 5) to distance (1) (step 4). - From this number, subtract 0.95 (which is the midpoint of the flex range of the clutch housing bearing spring washer). - Take this number and compare it to the available shim sizes in the chart. - Try the 1.68 mm (0.0661 in.) shim. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5794 7. Install the 72 mm shim (A) selected and oil guide plate M in the transmission housing (B). 8. Throughly clean the spring washer (A) and washer (B) before installing them on the ball bearing (C). Note the installation direction of the spring washer. 9. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing. 10. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft and onto the clutch housing. 11. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with several 8 mm bolts. NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings. 12. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer. 13. Slide the special tools over the mainshaft (A). 14. Attach the special tool to the mainshaft as follows: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5795 - Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt (A) and loosen the two hex bolts (B). - Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is toward the transmission. - Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten the hex bolts. 15. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a plastic hammer. 16. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base. 17. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft. 18. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop turning when the dial gauge (A) has reached its maximum movement. The reading on the dial gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play. Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60° after the needle of the dial gauge stops moving, this may damage the transmission. 19. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance is correct. If the reading is not within the standard, recheck the shim thickness. Standard: 0.11 -0.18 mm (0.004-0.007 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Mainshaft: Service and Repair Disassembly Mainshaft Disassembly 1. Remove the angular ball bearing (A) and the tapered cone ring (B) using a commercially available bearing separator (C) and a commercially available bearing puller (D). Be sure the bearing separator is under the tapered cone ring. 2. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft Out of the 5th synchro hub (B). Use of a jaw-type puller can damage the gear teeth. 3. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B). Use of a jaw-type puller can damage the gear teeth. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5798 Mainshaft: Service and Repair Reassembly Mainshaft Reassembly Exploded View Special Tools Required - Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 - Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. 1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th and 5th synchro hubs. 2. Install the 3rd gear, its bearing, and the 3rd gear synchro ring and synchro spring on the shaft. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5799 3. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks, then install the 3rd/4th synchro hubs (B) using the special tools and a press (C). 4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub. After installing, check the operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set. 5. Install the 4th gear synchro spring and ring, 4th gear and its bearing, the spacer collar, and 5th gear and its bearing on the shaft. 6. Install the 5th synchro hub (A) using the special tools and a press (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5800 7. Install the 5th synchro sleeve. 8. Install the ball bearing (A) using the special tools and a press (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Reverse Idler Gear: Customer Interest M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5809 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5810 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5811 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5812 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear Reverse Idler Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear 03-009 June 10, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, LX, HX, EX with M/T - ALL 2003 Civic Hybrid - From VIN JHMES95..3S000001 thru JHMES95..3S018631 Clicking Noise While Driving in 2nd (Supersedes 03-009, dated April 1, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM * While driving in 2nd gear, a clicking noise occurs when turning right (DX, LX, HX, and EX) or when turning left (Civic Hybrid).* PROBABLE CAUSE The reverse idler gear is contacting the 1st/2nd hub sleeve set. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the reverse idler gear, the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve set, and the reverse gear holder. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (1.7 quarts required): P/N 08798-9016, H/C 4928271 Liquid Gasket: P/N 08718-0001, H/C 2963817 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 213110 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5818 Flat Rate Time: 4.0 hours Failed Part: P/N 24230-PLW-000 H/C 6568653 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 03-009A (DX, LX, EX) 03-009B (HX) 03-009C (Hybrid) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. * Remove the transmission. See page 13-4 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-18. Then remove the housing. See page 13-16 of the 2001-2003 Civic Service Manual; for the Hybrid, see page 13-32.* 2. * Remove the reverse idler shaft and the reverse idler gear; discard the gear. See page 13-17 (13-32 for Hybrid) of the service manual.* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5819 3. Remove and discard the shift fork. 4. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, then remove the mainshaft and shift forks as an assembly from the clutch housing. 5. Disassemble the countershaft assembly; see page 13-32 (13-45 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5820 6. Replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub/sleeve, and reassemble the countershaft; see page 13-34 (13-48 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 7. Check the countershaft clearance; see page 13-30 (13-44 for Hybrid) of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Reverse Idler Gear: > 03-009 > Jun > 03 > M/T - Clicking Noise Driving in 2nd Gear > Page 5821 8. Reassemble the transmission; see page 13-43 (13-59 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 9. Install the new shift fork holder. Check the reverse shift fork clearance; see page 13-19 (13-34 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 10. Reinstall the transmission; see page 13-9 (13-23 for Hybrid) of the service manual. 11. Fill the transmission with MTF. 12. * Test-drive the car; make several right turns (left turns for Hybrid), and check that the clicking noise is gone.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5822 Reverse Idler Gear: Specifications Reverse idler gear I.D. Standard or new 15.016 - 15.043 mm Service limit 15.080 mm Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance Standard or new 0.032 - 0.077 mm Service limit 0.140 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Shift Fork: Customer Interest M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5831 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5832 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5833 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5834 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5835 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Shift Fork: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5841 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5842 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5843 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5844 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Fork: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5845 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5846 Shift Fork: Specifications Shift fork Finger thckness 1st-2nd and 3rd-4th forks Standard or new 7.4 - 7.6 mm 5th forks Standard or new 6.7 - 6.9 mm Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance Standard or new 0.35 - 0.65 mm Service limit 1.00 mm Reverse shift fork Pawl groove width Standard or new 13.8 - 14.1 mm Service limit 15.5 mm Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance Standard or new 1.6 - 2.2 mm Service limit 2.8 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Forks Clearance Inspection Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection Shift Forks Clearance Inspection Shift Forks Clearance Inspection NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be replaced as a set. 1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A) and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2. Standard: 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in.) Service Limit: 1.00 mm (0.039 in.) 2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers. - If the thickness of the shift fork finger is not within the standard, replace the shift fork with a new one. - If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a new one. Standard: 1st/2nd, 3rd/4th, shift forks: 7.4-7.6 mm (0.29-0.30 in.) 5th shift forks: 6.7-6.9 mm (0.26-0.27 in.) 3. Measure the clearance between the shift fork (A) and the shift arm (B). If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 4. Standard: 0.2-0.5 mm (0.008-0.020 in.) Service Limit: 0.62 mm (0.024 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Forks Clearance Inspection > Page 5849 4. Measure the width of the shift arm. - If the width of the shift arm is not within the standard, replace the shift arm with a new one. - If the width of the shift arm is within the standard, replace the shift fork or shift piece with a new one. Standard: 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Forks Clearance Inspection > Page 5850 Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Inspection Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Inspection 1. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step 2. Standard: '01 model: 1.6-2.2 mm (0.063-0.087 in.) '02 model: 1.2-1.8 mm (0.047-0.071 in.) Service Limit: '01 model: 2.8 mm (0.110 in.) '02 model: 2.8 mm (0.110 in.) 2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork. - If distance is more than the service limit, replace the reverse shift fork with a new one. - If distance is within the service limit, replace the reverse gear with a new one. Standard: '01 model: 13.8-14.1 mm (0.543-0.555 in.) '02 model: 13.4-13.7 mm (0.528-0.539 in.) Service Limit: '01 model: 15.5 mm (0.610 in.) '02 model: 15.5 mm (0.610 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5851 Shift Fork: Service and Repair Shift Forks Disassembly/Reassembly Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter M/T: > 02-039 > Jul > 02 > M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting Shifter M/T: Customer Interest M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting 02-039 July 16, 2002 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic With M/T - ALL Shift Lever Is Difficult to Move SYMPTOM Shifting into any gear is difficult. PROBABLE CAUSE Lack of lubrication in the shift lever pivot ball. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the shift lever housing assembly. PARTS INFORMATION Shift Lever Housing: P/N 54100-55A-003, H/C 6469910 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 212101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 54100-55A-003 H/C 6469910 Defect Code: 005 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 02-039A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center console. Refer to page 20-64 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual. 2. Remove the shift cables from the shift lever. Refer to page 13-45 of the service manual. 3. Remove the shift lever housing. 4. Install the new shift lever housing. Torque the bolts to 22 N~m (16 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the center console. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter M/T: > 02-039 > Jul > 02 > M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting > Page 5860 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter M/T: > 02-039 > Jul > 02 > M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting Shifter M/T: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting 02-039 July 16, 2002 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic With M/T - ALL Shift Lever Is Difficult to Move SYMPTOM Shifting into any gear is difficult. PROBABLE CAUSE Lack of lubrication in the shift lever pivot ball. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the shift lever housing assembly. PARTS INFORMATION Shift Lever Housing: P/N 54100-55A-003, H/C 6469910 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 212101 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 54100-55A-003 H/C 6469910 Defect Code: 005 Contention Code: B02 Template ID: 02-039A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the center console. Refer to page 20-64 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual. 2. Remove the shift cables from the shift lever. Refer to page 13-45 of the service manual. 3. Remove the shift lever housing. 4. Install the new shift lever housing. Torque the bolts to 22 N~m (16 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the center console. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter M/T: > 02-039 > Jul > 02 > M/T - Shift Lever Difficult to Move/Hard Shifting > Page 5866 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5867 Shifter M/T: Specifications Shift arm I.D. Standard or new 13.973 - 14.000 mm Shift fork diameter at contact area Standard or new 12.9 - 13.0 mm Shift arm-to-shaft lever clearance Standard or new 0.2 - 0.5 mm Service limit 0.62 mm Select lever Finger width Standard or new 14.75 - 14.95 mm Shift lever Shaft-to-select lever clearance Standard or new 0.05 - 0.40 mm Service limit 0.6 mm Groove (to select lever) Standard or new 15.00 - 15.15 mm Shaft-to-shift arm clearance Standard or new 0.013 - 0.07 mm Service limit 0.1 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5868 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5869 Shifter M/T: Testing and Inspection Shift Lever Clearance Inspection 1. Measure the clearance between shift lever (A) and the select lever (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is more than the service limit, go to step 2. Standard: '01 model: 0.05-0.40 mm (0.002-0.016 in.) '02 model: 0.05-0.35 mm (0.002-0.014 in.) Service Limit: '01 model: 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) '02 model: 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) 2. Measure the groove of the shift lever. - If distance is not within the standard, replace the shift lever with a new one. - If distance is within the standard, replace the select lever with a new one. Standard: '01 model: 15.00-15.15 mm (0.591-0.596 in.) '02 model: 13.00-13.15 mm (0.512-0.518 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5870 Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact surface. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Shift Cable: Customer Interest M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5880 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5881 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5882 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5883 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5884 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear Shift Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear 01-081 October 9, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 2-door - From 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L081628 2001 Civic 4-door - From 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L055439 2001 Civic 4-door - From 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES.....1H582767 Manual Transmission Shifts Stiff or Pops Out of Gear (Supersedes 01-081, dated September 11, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The shift lever feels hard to move from gear to gear, or the manual transmission pops out of 2nd or 5th gear, usually during deceleration. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable end is corroded at the transmission, which causes a stiff feeling when shifting (this may also cause the transmission to pop out of gear). The clearance between the interlock and transmission case wall is too large, and 2nd or 5th gear tooth contact length is too short, causing the transmission to pop out of gear. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the cable bushings if corroded, or replace the transmission case housing, 1-2 shift fork, 2nd gear set, 1st gear, and 5th gear. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In Warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5890 PARTS INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS Test-drive the vehicle. Shift through all five gears and then back down to 2nd, and check if it is difficult to shift into gear. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission only has a stiff feel when shifting, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A. ^ If the transmission only pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, do REPAIR PROCEDURE A first, and then do REPAIR PROCEDURE B if needed. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Remove the cotter pin from the shift lever assembly on the transmission. Remove the two washers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5891 3. Remove the cable from the shift lever assembly, spray lubricant on the bushing, then push out the bushing and discard it. 4. Clean off all the corrosion from the shift lever assembly stud and the bushing eyelet at the end of the shifter cable. 5. Lubricate the bushing eyelet with high-temperature urea grease, and install the bushing. 6. Install the cable on the shift lever assembly, install the two washers, and install a new cotter pin. 7. Install the air cleaner assembly. 8. If you did REPAIR PROCEDURE A because the transmission has a stiff feel when shifting and pops out of gear, test-drive the vehicle. Accelerate at wide open throttle in 2nd or 5th gear, and quickly release the gas pedal; do this several times. ^ If the transmission still pops out of gear, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. ^ If the transmission does not pop out of gear, return the car to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 2. Disassemble the transmission (see page 13-15 of the service manual). 3. Disassemble the countershaft (see page 13-32 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5892 *4. Replace 1st gear, 5th gear, and the 2nd gear set with the new parts, and then reassemble the countershaft assembly (see page 13-34 of the service manual). Install the new locknut, but do not stake the locknut tab into the groove until you have checked the countershaft clearance (see page 13-30 of the service manual). Torque the locknut to 108 N.m (79 lb-ft), then stake it.* 5. Remove the studs, the drain bolt and washer, and the fill bolt and washer from the old transmission housing. Replace the washers, and install the parts into the new transmission housing. 6. Check the mainshaft thrust clearance (see page 13-40 of the service manual). 7. Check the differential thrust clearance (see page 13-53 of the service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5893 8. Install new axle seals (see page 13-52 of the service manual) and the mainshaft seal (see page 13-39 of the service manual). 9. Using the new 1-2 shift fork, reassemble the transmission (see page 13-43 of the service manual). 10. Install the transmission (see page 13-9 of the service manual), and fill it with 1.7 quarts of Honda MTF. 11. Do the Idle Learn Procedure (see page 11-133 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 12. If you are working on a 2001 Civic 2-door EX or LX, do the Cruise Control Learn Procedure. ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Continue driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 01-081 > Oct > 01 > M/T - Stiff Shifting/Pops Out Of Gear > Page 5894 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5902 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5903 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5907 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5914 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 5915 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5919 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5926 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5927 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5928 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5929 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5936 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5939 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5940 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5974 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5975 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5976 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5977 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5978 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5983 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5984 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5985 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 5988 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5994 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 5995 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 5998 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5999 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6006 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 6009 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 6010 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6011 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6012 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6013 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6018 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6019 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6020 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6021 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6028 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6029 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams 25. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A 26. A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6030 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector. STANDARD: About 5.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt. 7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B move. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check valve movement. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (c). 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6031 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing. 3. Install the new filter/gasket (c) in the solenoid valve assembly body groove. 4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket. 5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect them securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6035 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6036 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6037 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6038 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6043 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6044 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6045 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6046 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6051 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6052 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6053 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6054 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Solenoid: Component Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6063 23. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6064 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams 185. CVT Control Valves And Inhibitor Solenoid Assembly 73. Shift Solenoid Valve A And B (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test 1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B connector. 2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and body ground, and measure shift solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no clicking sound is heard when either terminal is connected to the battery terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test > Page 6067 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Solenoid Valve Test - Continuously Variable Transmission Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect solenoid harness connector (BP). 2. Measure CVT speed change control valve assembly resistance between solenoid harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 3. Measure CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 2 and No. 6. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 4. Measure CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly resistance between terminals No. 4 and No. 8. STANDARD: 3.8 - 6.8 Ohms 5. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between terminal No. 5 and body ground. STANDARD: 11.7 - 21.0 Ohms 6. Replace the CVT speed change control valve assembly or CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly, if the measurements are out of standard. Replace the lower valve body assembly, if the measurements of CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly or inhibitor solenoid are out of standard. 7. If all of the resistance are within the standard, a clicking sound should be heard when connecting the battery terminals to the solenoid harness connector terminals below. ^ CVT speed change control valve assembly No. 3 to battery positive terminal No. 7 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT pulley pressure control valve assembly No. 2 to battery positive terminal No. 6 to battery negative terminal ^ CVT start clutch pressure control valve assembly No. 4 to battery positive terminal No. 8 to battery negative terminal ^ Inhibitor solenoid No.5 to battery positive terminal and body ground to negative terminal 8. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the lower valve body assembly, and check the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6068 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/ replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the harness clamp (c) form the clamp bracket (D). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid valves A and B. 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage. 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then reconnect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6072 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6073 72. Shift Lock Solenoid (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6074 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P). 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the P position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the P position, and make sure it locks. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when the shift lock release is released. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - CVT > Shift Interlock Solenoid, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6075 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base. 3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B) to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the shift lock solenoid. 4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint (F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G) of the shift lock stop. 6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and install it on the shift lever bracket base. 7. Install the center console and console panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Locations Automatic Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission > Page 6082 Shift Indicator: Locations Continuously Variable Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Automatic Transmission Circuit Diagram Continuously Variable Transmission Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119 Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between All terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [A position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission > Page 6122 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any-other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the R position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6123 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) in the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 6131 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 6132 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Position Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6136 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Locations Control Module: Locations Electronic Controls Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM Control Module: Service and Repair How to Remove the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and discard it. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the gray 20P PCM wire harness connector from the PCM mounting bracket. Remove the PCM mounting bolt (A) and the bracket. 5. Remove the nuts, then remove the PCM (B). 6. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 6143 Control Module: Service and Repair How to Substitute the PCM How to Substitute the PCM 1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle. 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle. 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the Honda PGM Tester; It allows you to start the engine. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS Tester again. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Control Module, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > How to Remove the PCM > Page 6144 Control Module: Service and Repair Updating the ECM/PCM PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing Special Tools Required Honda Interface Module (HIM) P/N EQS05A35570 Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating; the PCM can be damaged. How to Update the PCM NOTE: To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. - Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully charged. - To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows, moon roof, door locks, etc.) during the update. - If you need to diagnose the Honda Interface Module (HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM from the Data Link Connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 2. Connect the HIM to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of dashboard. 3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the software in the PCM is the latest version, replace the PCM. How to End a Troubleshooting Session This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC(s) with the Scan Tool or HDS, or reset the PCM by removing the No. 6 (PCM) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fans come on). 4. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (50 km/h) or in freeze data range. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - CVT > Transmission Position Relay, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6148 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6155 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6156 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6157 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Interlock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6158 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B) 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Component Location Index, A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6165 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6202 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6203 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6204 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6205 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (B). 5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and install the new switch. 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in the N position. If necessary, move the shift lever to the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6206 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) with holding the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6207 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch cover. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and cheek the transmission range switch synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6212 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 22. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) 19. Transmission Housing (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6213 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6214 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 34. Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) 57. Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B) and mainshaft speed sensor washer (C). NOTE: The mainshaft speed sensor washer is equipped on the SLXA automatic transmission; the BMXA does not have it. 4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement > Page 6217 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement Countershaft Speed Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A). 3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B). 4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Shift Interlock Switch: Component Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6223 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6224 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be no continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 6227 Shift Interlock Switch: Testing and Inspection Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Test 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P). 3. Shift to the P position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity. 4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be continuity. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Shift Interlock Switch, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6228 Shift Interlock Switch: Service and Repair Park Pin Switch Replacement 1. Remove the center console panel and center console. 2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever knob (B). 3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light (c) from the A/T gear position indicator panel. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and panel bracket as an assembly (D). 5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E), and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F). 6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H). 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket base, then remove the park pin switch (B). 8. Install the new park pin switch. 9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Mode Switch, CVT > Component Information > Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Electronic Controls Location, CVT 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Locations > Page 6235 195. Tranmission Range Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector. There should be continuity between terminals below listed for each switch position. 3. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the transmission range switch. 4. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 6238 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Transmission Range Switch Test Transmission Range Switch Test 1. Remove the transmission range switch harness connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Check for continuity between terminals at the harness connector. There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each switch position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 8 ^ No. 3 and No. 8 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 9 In the N position and between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 3 ^ No. 1 and No. 10 ^ No. 3 and No. 10 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 4 ^ No.2 and No.4 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 2 ^ No. 1 and No. 5 ^ No.2 and No.5 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Continuously Variable Transmission > Page 6239 3. If there is no continuity between any terminal, remove the transmission range switch cover, and disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the switch connector (c). There should be continuity between the terminals listed for each position. In the P position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 6 ^ No. 5 and No. 6 In the R position, between terminals: ^ No. 1 and No. 4 In the N position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 5 ^ No. 4 and No. 7 ^ No.5 and No.7 In the D position, between terminals: ^ No.2 and No.4 ^ No. 2 and No. 10 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 In the D3 position, between terminals: ^ No. 4 and No. 8 ^ No. 4 and No. 10 ^ No. 8 and No. 10 In the 2 position, between terminals: ^ No.3 and No.4 5. If there is no continuity between any terminals, adjust the transmission range switch installation. If the transmission range switch installation is OK, replace the switch. 6. If the transmission range switch continuity check was OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch harness. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6240 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range Switch Replacement 1. Remove the intake air duct and resonator. 2. Shift to the N position. 3. Remove the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 4. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector (A). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (B). 6. Make sure that the control lever is in the N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6241 7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) feeler gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the N Position. NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade or equivalent to hold the switch in the N position. 8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the control shaft (B) while holding it in the N position with the 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) blade (C). 9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch while you continue to hold the N position. Do not move the transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6242 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the transmission range switch shaft cap (A). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and check the transmission range switch is synchronization with the A/T gear position indicator. 12. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 13. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the engine. 14. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and verify the following: ^ The engine will not start in any position other than N or P. ^ The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in the R position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6247 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 25. Transmission Housing (CVT) 26. Transmission Housing (CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6248 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6249 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams 105. CVT Drive Pulley Speed Sensor 106. CVT Driven Pulley Speed Sensor 107. CVT Speed Sensor 1 108. CVT Speed Sensor 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6250 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensors Replacement 1. Disconnect connectors from the drive pulley speed sensor (A), driven pulley speed sensor (B), CVT speed sensor (C), and CVT speed sensor 2 (D). 2. Remove the 6 mm bolts, then remove the speed sensors. Remove the sensor washer (E) from the vehicle speed sensor (C). 3. Replace the O-rings (F) with new ones before installing the speed sensors. 4. Install the sensor washer on the CVT speed sensor 2, and install them. 5. Install the drive pulley speed sensor, driven pulley speed sensor, and CVT speed sensor. 6. Check the speed sensor connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connectors securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6256 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6257 Braking Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6258 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the brake lights. Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal? YES - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Press the brake pedal. Do the brake lights come on? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 4. 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E22 with the brake pedal pressed. Is there battery voltage? YES - The brake pedal position switch signal is OK. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch. 4. Inspect the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Replace the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6259 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector, turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet (B). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (C) from the middle of the right side of the pedal pad (D). Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 184 mm (7 4/16 inch) A/T: 188 mm (7 6/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Pedal Free Play Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6260 4. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 0.4 - 3.0 mm (0.016 - 0.118 inch) 5. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. 6. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch clockwise to lock it. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 7. Check the brake pedal free play. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 223. ABS Modulator-Control Unit (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6264 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Control Unit Main Control The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. Self-diagnosis Function 1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub-CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems. 2. The CPUs check the circuit of the system. 3. The ABS control unit turns on the ABS indicator when the unit detects a problem and the unit stops the system. 4. The self-diagnosis can be classified into these two categories: ^ Initial diagnosis ^ Regular diagnosis On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6265 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 31P Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6266 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Pull up the lock (C) of the ABS control unit 31P connector (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the two 8 mm nuts. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (A). Installation 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 8 mm nuts. 2. Align the connecting surface of the ABS control unit 31P connector. 3. Push in the lock of the ABS control unit 31P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 4. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 5. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations 40. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 6270 223. ABS Modulator-Control Unit (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations 145. Right Side Of Floor (EX) 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6274 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment 165. Under Left Side Of Floor (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6275 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front (EX, GX) 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear (EX, GX) 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6276 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6277 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensors The wheel sensors are the magnetic contact less type. As the gear purser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6278 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Inspect the front and rear pursers for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the purser all the way around while rotating the purser. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), check for a bent suspension arm. Standard: Front: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Rear: 0.2 - 1.0 mm (0.01 - 0.04 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6279 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Fluid type Genuine Honda DOT3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 6283 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a container of new brake fluid. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 6284 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brake Pedal - Click Or Pop When Depressed Brake Pedal Assy: Technical Service Bulletins Brake Pedal - Click Or Pop When Depressed SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2004 TITLE: Click or Pop When Pressing the Brake Pedal APPLIES TO: 2003-04 Accord or 2001-05 Civic SERVICE TIP: Got a 2003-04 Accord or 2001-05 Civic in your shop that clicks or pops when you press the brake pedal? The culprit could be the brake pedal position switch. The switch plunger doesn't fit squarely into the switch casing. When you press the brake pedal, the plunger rubs the side of the casing and makes noise. There's a simple fix for this problem: Just turn the switch around so the connector lock now faces the 5 o'clock position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6289 Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Brake pedal Pedal height (Carpet removed) M/T 184 mm CVT, A/T 188 mm Free play 0.4 - 3.0 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6290 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector, turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet (B). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (C) from the middle of the right side of the pedal pad (D). Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 184 mm (7 4/16 inch) A/T: 188 mm (7 6/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Pedal Free Play Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6291 4. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 0.4 - 3.0 mm (0.016 - 0.118 inch) 5. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. 6. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch clockwise to lock it. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 7. Check the brake pedal free play. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6302 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6303 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6304 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6305 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6306 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6307 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6308 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6309 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6310 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6311 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6312 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6313 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6314 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6315 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Front Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Replacement 1. Remove the bolt (B), and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 2. Remove the pad shim (A) and pads (B). 3. Remove the pad retainers (A). 4. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 5. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 6. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 grease to the retainers on their mating surfaces against the caliper bracket. 7. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the retainers. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6336 8. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 or Daikalub 528D grease to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of the pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the shim. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. 9. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. Install the pads with the wear indicators (C) on the inside. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 10. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 11. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being careful not to damage the pin boots, install the bolt (B), and tighten it to the specified torque. 12. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brake works, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 13. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6337 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disassembly and Reassembly Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. Do not mix different brands of brake fluid, as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits Brake Pad: Specifications Standards and Service Limits Brake pads Thickness Standard or New ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.5 - 10.5 mm (0.37 - 0.41 inch) Service Limit ........................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits > Page 6342 Brake Pad: Specifications Brakes Pad friction surface area Front 35 cm2 x 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6343 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Inspection 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate. Brake pad thickness: Standard: 9.5 - 10.5 mm (0.37 - 0.41 inch) Service limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) 3. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the pads as a set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6344 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Replacement 1. Remove the bolt (B), and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 2. Remove the pad shim (A) and pads (B). 3. Remove the pad retainers (A). 4. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 5. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 6. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 grease to the retainers on their mating surfaces against the caliper bracket. 7. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the retainers. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6345 8. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 or Daikalub 528D grease to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of the pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the shim. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. 9. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. Install the pads with the wear indicators (C) on the inside. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 10. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 11. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being careful not to damage the pin boots, install the bolt (B), and tighten it to the specified torque. 12. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brake works, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 13. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 6350 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 6351 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 6352 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Before you use the brake lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure the tips are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. If a tip is worn, rotate the bit, and use a new tip. A worn tip produces a poor finish and may cause chattering. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 6353 Reinstall the tool bed on the brake lathe with the top of the cutting bits facing up and the feed knobs facing down. Adjust the tool bed until the brake disc is centered between the cutting bits. For proper refinishing, the brake disc must turn toward the top of the cutting bits. Do not set the cutting depth on the brake lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). This is two divisions on the cutting knob. Make sure you start your cut at least 3 mm (0.12 in.) beyond the worn area on the brake disc. If you are cutting larger diameter brake discs, make sure you use the 150 cutting bit holders. These bit holders, available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION), supersede the original bit holders and provide better cutting coverage for larger diameter brake discs. Each bit holder is clearly marked for proper installation on the tool holder. Cutting the Brake Disc To get the smoothest cut and the best brake disc finish, always use the slowest feed speed on the tool bed feed motor. Place the drive belt on the smallest pulley of the feed motor and on the largest pulley of the hand wheel. Make sure the lower toggle switch on the power drive system drive motor assembly is set to the proper rotation to turn the brake disc toward the top of the cutting bits. Plug the tool bed feed motor into the power outlet on the drive motor assembly, then turn on the drive motor with the upper toggle switch on the assembly. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure the transmission is in 1st gear (2nd gear on Preludes with ATTS) or Reverse and the engine is idling, but not at a fast idle. If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Turn on the tool bed feed motor, and snap it into place; there should be tension on the feed belt. Cut the brake disc until the cutting bits clear the outer edge of the disc. The cutting bits should produce a smooth, consistent finish with no chatter marks or grooves. If the disc did not clean up entirely on the first pass, reset the brake lathe and make a second pass. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 6354 Finishing the Job Remove the vibration damper and the protective band (if used). Use a micrometer to measure the thickness of the brake disc. Make sure the thickness is within the service manual specifications. Clean the brake disc with soapy water or brake cleaner, then wipe it dry. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust or chips, but do not use compressed air. Unplug the tool bed feed motor from the drive motor assembly, and remove the mounting yoke from the brake disc. Remove the speed mount from the steering knuckle. Apply a small amount of Molykote 77 grease to the brake pad shims. Reinstall the caliper assembly. (If you did not use the power drive system, use the brake pad spreader to push the pistons back into the caliper.) Torque the nuts and bolts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Refinish the other front brake disc using the same guidelines. Check the brake fluid level, then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake pedal is firm and does not pulsate. Lightly apply the brakes about 20 times during the test-drive to seat the brake pads. REAR BRAKE DISCS It is possible to use an on-car lathe on some models if the rear caliper mounts are low enough to clear the vehicle body. A power driver is needed for front drive models. Refinish rear brake discs on bench-mounted equipment if necessary. Follow the same guidelines you used for refinishing front brake discs, noting these differences: ^ Mount the brake lathe to the rear knuckle with the Honda 2-Piece Adapter (P/N KWY-1 08102504). You can order the 2-piece adapter through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6355 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake disc Thickness Standard or New ...................................................................................................................................................... 20.9 - 21.8 mm (0.82 - 0.86 inch) Service Limit ........................................................................................... .................................................................................... 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) Runout Service Limit ........................................................................................................................................ ..................................... 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Parallelism Service Limit ........................................................................................................................................ ................................. 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6356 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front Brake Disc Inspection Runout 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 4. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. 5. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown, and measure the runout at 5 mm (0.2 inch) from the outer edge of the disc. Brake Disc Runout: Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc. Max. Refinish Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) NOTE: ^ If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. ^ A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). Thickness and Parallelism 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 inch) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake Disc Thickness: Standard: 20.9 - 21.8 mm (0.82 - 0.86 inch) Max. Refinishing Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Brake drum I.D. Service Limit ................................................................................................................................................... 199.9 - 200.0 mm (7.870 - 7.874 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6361 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection Rear Drum Brake Inspection CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. NOTE: ^ Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability. ^ Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle. 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake drum. 3. Check the wheel cylinder (A) for leakage. 4. Check the brake linings (B) for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination. 5. Measure the brake lining thickness (C). Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness. Brake Lining Thickness: Standard: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6362 6. If the brake lining thickness is less than the service limit, replace the brake shoes as a set. 7. Check the hub bearing for smooth operation. If it requires servicing, replace it. 8. Measure the inside diameter of the brake drum with inside vernier calipers. Drum Inside Diameter: Standard: 199.9 - 200 mm (7.870 - 7.874 inch) Service Limit: 201 mm (7.91 inch) 9. If the inside diameter of the brake drum is more than the service limit, replace the brake drum. 10. Check the brake drum for scoring, grooves, corrosion, and cracks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits Brake Shoe: Specifications Standards and Service Limits Brake shoes Lining thickness Service Limit ........................................................................................................................................ ......................................... 4.0 mm (0.16 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits > Page 6367 Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake Shoe friction surface area Rear 67 cm2 x 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6368 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Rear Brake Shoes Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. NOTE: Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability. - Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle. Removal/Disassembly 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing each retainer spring (B) and turning the pins. 3. Remove the lower return spring (A), and remove the shoe assembly over the hub. 4. Remove the upper return spring (B), and disassemble the brake shoe assembly. 5. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever, and remove the brake shoe. 6. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and pivot pin (C), and separate the parking brake lever (D) from the brake shoe (E). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6369 Reassembly 1. Connect the parking brake cable to the parking brake lever. 2. Apply MolyKote grease 44MA on the sliding surfaces as illustrated. Wipe off any excess. Do not get grease on the brake linings. 3. Install the parking brake lever (A) on the rear brake shoe (B), and secure it with the pivot pin (C), wave washer (D), and a new U-clip (E). Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent it from coming off. 4. Install the self-adjuster (C) and self-adjuster spring (D) on the front brake shoe (E). 5. Assemble the brake shoes with clevis A, adjuster bolt (F), clevis B. and the upper return spring (G). NOTE: Thread the adjuster bolt fully into clevis A. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6370 6. Apply Molykote 44MA grease onto the sliding surfaces as illustrated. Wipe off any excess. Do not get grease on the brake linings. 7. Install the shoe assembly on the backing plate by fitting the top of the shoes onto the wheel cylinder pistons and the bottom of the shoes onto the locating plate. 8. Install the tension pins (A) and the retainer springs (B) by pushing in on each spring and turning each pin. 9. Install the lower return spring. 10. Install the brake drum and rear wheel. 11. If the wheel cylinder has been removed, bleed the brake system. 12. Press the brake pedal several times to set the self adjusting brake. 13. Adjust the parking brake. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Use only a genuine Honda wheel cylinder special bolt. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). 3. Remove the bolt (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. 4. Apply Three Bond 1109G sealant or equivalent (E) between the wheel cylinder (B) and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder. 5. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Check for leaks at the line joint and bleed screw, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Fluid type Genuine Honda DOT3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 6378 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a container of new brake fluid. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications > Page 6379 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Front Inspection and Replacement CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Replacement 1. Remove the bolt (B), and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 2. Remove the pad shim (A) and pads (B). 3. Remove the pad retainers (A). 4. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 5. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 6. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 grease to the retainers on their mating surfaces against the caliper bracket. 7. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the retainers. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6385 8. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 or Daikalub 528D grease to both sides of the pad shim (A), the back of the pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the shim. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. 9. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. Install the pads with the wear indicators (C) on the inside. If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency. 10. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 11. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being careful not to damage the pin boots, install the bolt (B), and tighten it to the specified torque. 12. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brake works, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 13. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6386 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disassembly and Reassembly Overhaul CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health. ^ Avoid breathing dust particles. ^ Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner. Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. ^ When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. Do not mix different brands of brake fluid, as they may not be compatible. ^ Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Geniune Honda Brake Fluid ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... Dot 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6390 Brake Fluid: Service Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Brake fluid may be irritating to the skin or eyes. In case of contact, take the following actions: * Eye Contact - rinse eyes thoroughly with water. * Skin Contact - wash skin with soap and water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6391 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Brake Bleeding; Service and Repair. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6395 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6396 31. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6397 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (A) with the float in the down position and the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to MAX (upper) level (B). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications Fluid type Genuine Honda DOT3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6401 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection 1. Inspect the brake hoses, for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting. 2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leakage. Also check for bent brake lines. 3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. 4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator unit (if equipped) for damage and leakage. NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6402 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Hose Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ To prevent dripping, cover disconnected line joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. 1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks. 2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B) using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C). 3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and remove the brake hose brackets from the damper. 4. Remove and discard the hose clip (B). 5. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and remove the brake hose from the caliper. 6. Install the brake hose bracket (A) on the damper with the flange bolt (B) first, then connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6403 7. Install the hose onto the hose bracket on the body with a new hose clip (A). 8. Connect the brake line to the brake hose. 9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system. 10. Do the following checks: ^ Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. ^ Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations 40. Left Side Of Engine Compartment (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Locations > Page 6407 223. ABS Modulator-Control Unit (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0 - 0.4 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6411 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6412 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Inspection NOTE: ^ Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. ^ Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with a new part if necessary. Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the brake fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6413 Brake Master Cylinder: Adjustments Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment Special Tools Required Pushrod adjustment gauge 07JAG-SD40100 NOTE: Brake booster pushrod-to-piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing the master cylinder. 1. Set the special tool (A) on the master cylinder body (B), push in the center shaft (C) until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston (D) by turning the adjusting nut (E). 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool (A) backwards on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts (B), and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge (C) 0 - 101 kPa (0 - 760 mm Hg, 30 inch Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mm Hg, 20 inch Hg) vacuum. 5. With a feeler gauge (A), measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut (B) as shown. If the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut is 0 mm, the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch) or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and rechecked. Clearance: 0 - 0.4 mm (0 - 0.0015 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6414 6. If the clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut (A), and turn the adjuster (B) in or out to adjust. ^ Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. ^ Hold the clevis (C) while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. 8. Remove the special tool (D). 9. Check the pushrod length (A) as shown if the booster is removed. If the length is incorrect, loosen the pushrod locknut (B), and turn the clevis (C) in or out to adjust. 10. Install the master cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6415 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir. 2. Remove the brake fluid level sensor connector (A). 3. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and washers. 5. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster (E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. 6. Remove the rod seal (F) from the brake booster or master cylinder. 7. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Replace all the rubber parts with new ones whenever the master cylinder is removed. ^ Check the pushrod clearance before installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary. ^ Use a new rod seal on reassembly. ^ Coat the inner bore lip and outer circumference of the new rod seal with the recommended seal grease in the master cylinder set. Install the rod seal onto the brake booster with its grooved side toward the master cylinder. ^ Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Use only a genuine Honda wheel cylinder special bolt. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). 3. Remove the bolt (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. 4. Apply Three Bond 1109G sealant or equivalent (E) between the wheel cylinder (B) and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder. 5. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Check for leaks at the line joint and bleed screw, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6423 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Check and Adjustment Check 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20.0 kgf, 44.1 lbs.) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified number of clicks (B). Lever locked clicks: 6 - 7 2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever clicks are not within the specification. Adjustment NOTE: After servicing the rear brake shoes, loosen the parking brake adjusting nut, start the engine, and press the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake. 1. Block the front wheels, then raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the console cover. 3. Pull the parking brake lever up one click. 4. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned. 5. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary. 6. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied when the parking brake lever is pulled up fully. 7. Reinstall the console cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6424 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the brake drum and shoes, and disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake shoe. 2. Remove the flange bolts (A) and parking brake cable (B) from the backing plate (C). 3. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the brake drum. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake drum and inside of the wheel. ^ Adjust the parking brake. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Lever: Specifications Parking brake lever Distance travelled when pulled with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs.) of force 6 - 7 clicks Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6431 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6432 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6433 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Test Functional Test 1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press the pedal hard and hold it for 15 seconds. If the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system (master cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning valve, calipers, or wheel cylinders) is leaking. 2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the booster or check valve is faulty. 3. With the engine running, press the brake pedal lightly. If the brake pedal sinks more than 10 mm (3/8 inch) in 3 minutes, the master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal height when the A/C compressor cycles on and off is normal. (The A/C compressor load changes the vacuum available to the booster.) Leak Test 1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary, check the booster check valve. 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (check valve built-in) (A) at the booster (B) side. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and retest. 5. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster vacuum hose between the check valve and the booster. 6. Turn the engine off and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. ^ If the pedal position does not vary, replace the brake booster. ^ If the pedal position varies, replace the brake booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6438 Vacuum Brake Booster: Adjustments Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment Special Tools Required Pushrod adjustment gauge 07JAG-SD40100 NOTE: Brake booster pushrod-to-piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing the master cylinder. 1. Set the special tool (A) on the master cylinder body (B), push in the center shaft (C) until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston (D) by turning the adjusting nut (E). 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool (A) backwards on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts (B), and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge (C) 0 - 101 kPa (0 - 760 mm Hg, 30 inch Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mm Hg, 20 inch Hg) vacuum. 5. With a feeler gauge (A), measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut (B) as shown. If the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut is 0 mm, the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch) or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and rechecked. Clearance: 0 - 0.4 mm (0 - 0.0015 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6439 6. If the clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut (A), and turn the adjuster (B) in or out to adjust. ^ Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. ^ Hold the clevis (C) while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. 8. Remove the special tool (D). 9. Check the pushrod length (A) as shown if the booster is removed. If the length is incorrect, loosen the pushrod locknut (B), and turn the clevis (C) in or out to adjust. 10. Install the master cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6440 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Replacement 1. Remove the master cylinder. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake booster. 3. Remove the air conditioner hose (B) and power steering hose (C) from their respective holders. 4. Remove the flange bolts ID) and throttle cable holder (E). 5. Remove the brake lines (A) from the ABS modulator (B). 6. Remove the under-dash cover and fuse/relay box in the passenger compartment. 7. Remove the clip (A) and the joint pin (B), and disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal. 8. Remove the brake booster mounting flange nuts (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6441 9. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine compartment. 10. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Adjust the pushrod clearance before installing the brake booster. ^ Use a new clip whenever installing. ^ After installing the brake booster and master cylinder, fill the reservoir with new brake fluid, bleed the brake system, and adjust the brake pedal height and free play. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Booster Check Valve Test 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (check valve built-in) (A) at the booster (B) side. 2. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and retest. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams 223. ABS Modulator-Control Unit (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6449 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation ABS Control Unit Main Control The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying. Self-diagnosis Function 1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub-CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems. 2. The CPUs check the circuit of the system. 3. The ABS control unit turns on the ABS indicator when the unit detects a problem and the unit stops the system. 4. The self-diagnosis can be classified into these two categories: ^ Initial diagnosis ^ Regular diagnosis On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6450 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 31P Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6451 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. ^ To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. Removal 1. Pull up the lock (C) of the ABS control unit 31P connector (B), then disconnect the connector. 2. Disconnect the six brake lines. 3. Remove the two 8 mm nuts. 4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (A). Installation 1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 8 mm nuts. 2. Align the connecting surface of the ABS control unit 31P connector. 3. Push in the lock of the ABS control unit 31P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector. 4. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels. 5. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off. 6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6456 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6457 31. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6458 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (A) with the float in the down position and the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to MAX (upper) level (B). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6462 136. Brake Pedal Position Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6463 Braking Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6464 Braking Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the brake lights. Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake pedal? YES - Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Press the brake pedal. Do the brake lights come on? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 4. 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E22 with the brake pedal pressed. Is there battery voltage? YES - The brake pedal position switch signal is OK. NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch. 4. Inspect the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Replace the No.7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6465 Braking Sensor/Switch: Adjustments Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment Pedal Height 1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector, turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise and pull it back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. Lift up the carpet (B). At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (C) from the middle of the right side of the pedal pad (D). Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 184 mm (7 4/16 inch) A/T: 188 mm (7 6/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed. Pedal Free Play Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6466 4. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 0.4 - 3.0 mm (0.016 - 0.118 inch) 5. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. 6. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake pedal position switch clockwise to lock it. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 7. Check the brake pedal free play. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6470 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6471 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6472 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations 145. Right Side Of Floor (EX) 159. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6476 162. Right Side Of Engine Compartment 165. Under Left Side Of Floor (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6477 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams 95. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front (EX, GX) 96. Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear (EX, GX) 97. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6478 98. Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear (EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6479 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Wheel Sensors The wheel sensors are the magnetic contact less type. As the gear purser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6480 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Inspect the front and rear pursers for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and the purser all the way around while rotating the purser. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), check for a bent suspension arm. Standard: Front: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) Rear: 0.2 - 1.0 mm (0.01 - 0.04 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6481 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Replacement NOTE: Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the wires. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6487 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6488 32. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6489 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector. 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6490 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.1 - 5.5 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 inch) 3. Tighten locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C).. 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten locknut (A). 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch (1) 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (1) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten locknut (H). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 6496 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6500 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6501 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6506 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6507 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair Jump Starting Jump Starting with an Auxiliary (Booster) Battery CAUTION: Never push or tow the vehicle in an attempt to start it. Serious damage to the emission system as well as other vehicle parts will result. Treat both the discharged battery and the booster battery with great care when using jumper cables. Carefully follow the jump starting procedure, being careful at all times to avoid sparking. WARNING: FAILURE TO CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING: 1. Serous personal injury, particularly to your eyes. 2. Property damage from a battery explosion, battery acid, or an electrical fire. 3. Damage to the electronic components of one or both vehicles particularly. Never expose the battery to an open flame or electrical spark. Gas generated by the battery may catch fire or explode. Remove any rings, watches, or other jewelry before working around the battery. Protect your eyes by wearing an approved set of goggles. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with your eyes or skin. Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with fabrics or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a highly corrosive acid. Should battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin, fabric, or a painted surface, immediately and thoroughly rinse the affected area with clean tap water. Never allow metal tools or jumper cables to come in contact with the positive battery terminal, or any other metal surface of the vehicle. This will protect against a short circuit. Always keep batteries out of reach of young children. Jump Starting Procedure 1. Set the vehicle parking brake. If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the selector level in the "PARK" position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the shift lever in the "NEUTRAL" position. Turn "OFF" the ignition. Turn "OFF" all lights and any other accessory requiring electrical power. 2. Look at the built-in hydrometer. If the indication area of the built-in hydrometer is completely clear, do not try to jump start. 3. Attach the end of one jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. This will cause a ground connection, effectively neutralizing the charging procedure. Be sure that the booster battery has a 12 volt rating. 4. Attach one end of the remaining cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the same cable to a solid engine ground (such as the air conditioning compressor bracket or the generator mounting bracket) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. The ground connection must be at least 450 mm (18 in.) from the battery of the vehicle whose battery is being charged. WARNING: NEVER ATTACH THE END OF THE JUMPER CABLE DIRECTLY TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE DEAD BATTERY. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery. Make sure that all unnecessary electrical accessories have been turned "OFF". 6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 7. To remove the jumper cables, follow the above directions in reverse order. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6512 Be sure to first disconnect the negative cable from the vehicle with the discharged battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Battery Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Replacing a Battery? Don't Disconnect the Cables With the Engine Running When replacing a battery, many service techs disconnect the battery cables with the engine running to keep the data alive in volatile memory. This practice worked fine back in the day when vehicles were pretty much a box on wheels, but with so many of today's vehicles sporting a impressive array of cool, high tech hardware, it's not recommended. Here's why: ^ The battery works as a capacitor to prevent sudden swings in voltage. With the battery cables disconnected, the alternator voltage regulator tries to stabilize the system voltage, but it can only do so by turning the alternator on and off. ^ When solenoids or relays are turned on and of{ they produce a very high voltage spike that travels through the 12-volt system. This voltage spike can fry sensitive solid state components or corrupt the data that's stored in volatile memory for such components as the gauge control module, the radio, and the various control units. The best way to keep data alive in volatile memory when replacing a battery is to hook up a Honda Computer Memory Saver to the 16P data link connector (DLC). This portable tool works as a secondary 12-volt source. It saves you the hassle of writing down your customer's audio presets, resetting the clock, or even doing the idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions > Page 6517 The Honda Computer Memory Saver is indeed a real time saver, but here's a word of caution: Don't let the positive battery cable touch any body ground. It will cause a short that will either blow the fuse in the tool or cause a drop in system voltage resulting in the loss of any data that 5 in volatile memory. The Honda Computer Memory Saver is available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order one, just call and ask for FZRMS4000H. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Won't Start - Check Alternator Bolts Alternator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Won't Start - Check Alternator Bolts SOURCE: Honda Service News August 2004 TITLE: Engine Won't Start? Check for Loose Alternator Bolts APPLIES TO: 2001-04 Civic SERVICE TIP: Got a 2001-04 Civic in your shop with any or all of these symptoms? - The engine cranks but it won't start. - The MIL comes on. - The immobilizer indicator blinks while the engine cranks. - The HDS can't communicate with the ECM/PCM. Check for loose alternator bolts. If these bolts are loose for any reason such as the alternator was R&R;'ed or an accessory A/C was installed on a DX model at the dealership, the alternator can overcharge and fry the ECM/PCM. If the alternator bolts are loose, tighten them, and try restarting the engine. If the engine still won't start, then check the ECM/PCM connector for battery voltage and ground. If you're reading battery voltage and ground at the connector, then replace the ECM/PCM. Keep in mind, though, any ECM/PCM damage that's caused by loose alternator bolts from A/C installation or body repair isn't covered by warranty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Won't Start - Check Alternator Bolts > Page 6523 Alternator: Technical Service Bulletins Alternator - Bolt Tightening Sequence Manual Update 00-074 October 17, 2000 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL Service Manual Update: Alternator Bolt Tightening Sequence The 2001 Civic has a new style alternator bracket. This bracket makes the alternator bolt tightening sequence and bolt torque critical. Improper tightening will cause noise. The bolt tightening sequence and torque specifications in the service manual need to be changed. Update your 2001 Civic Service Manual by crossing out steps 2 thru 6 at the bottom of both columns on page 4-33. Then write a note saying "Refer to S/B 00-074 for the new procedure." SPECIAL TOOL REQUIRED Belt Tension Gauge: T/N 07JGG-001000A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. PROCEDURE Use this procedure whenever you do any work that requires the alternator, alternator belt, or alternator bolts to be loosened or removed. 1. Loosely install the alternator mounting bolt, the bracket mounting bolt, and the lock bolt. 2. Torque the alternator mounting bolt to 19 Nm (14 lb-ft). 3. Set the alternator belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt and checking the belt with belt tension gauge T/N 07JGG001000A. New belt tension: 830 to 980 N (85-100 kgf, 190-220 lbf) Used belt tension: 390 to 540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-120 lbf) 4. Torque the lock bolt to 24 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Torque the alternator mounting bolt to 44 Nm (33 lb-ft). 6. Torque the bracket mounting bolt to 44 Nm (33 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Won't Start - Check Alternator Bolts > Page 6524 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Alternator Output at 13.5 V and normal engine temperature ......................................................................................................................................... 70 A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 6527 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6528 45. Left Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Alternator Overhaul - Exploded View Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 6531 134. Alternator Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6532 Alternator: Description and Operation Alternator Control The alternator signals the Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) during charging. The ECM/PCM then controls the voltage generated at the alternator according to the electrical load determined by the Electrical Load Detector (ELD) and driving mode. This reduces engine load to improve fuel economy. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Alternator: Testing and Inspection Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the alternator. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and B13. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Go to step 13 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Reconnect the alternator 4P connector. 6. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and B13. Does the voltage decrease when the headlights and rear window defogger are turned on? YES - The alternator FR signal is OK. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P). 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. 11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting > Page 6535 12. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B13. Is there continuity? YES - Test the alternator (see step 1). NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) 15. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B13. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator. NO - Update the ECM/PCM jilt does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Adjustments > With A/C Alternator: Adjustments With A/C Alternator-A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt Tension Gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and lock bolt (B). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the belt tension. 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Adjustments > With A/C > Page 6538 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and lock bolt (C). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the belt tension. 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Adjustments > With A/C > Page 6539 Alternator: Adjustments Without A/C Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment Special Tools Required Belt Tension Gauge 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge Method Inspection 1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and measure the tension. Follow the gauge manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and lock bolt (B). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the belt tension. 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Deflection Method Inspection 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection at the mid point (A) between the alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, go to step 2. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Adjustments > With A/C > Page 6540 Adjustment 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and lock bolt (C). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting bolt. 4. Recheck the belt tension. 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specification. 6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement Alternator: Service and Repair Replacement Alternator Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Remove the adjust plate mounting bolt (A), locknut (B), and mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump without disconnecting the P/S hoses. 4. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and alternator cable (B) from the alternator. 5. Loosen the adjusting bolt (A), and remove the lock bolt (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the alternator belt and alternator. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. 7. Adjust the alternator belt tension or the alternator compressor belt tension. 8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6543 9. Set the clock. 10. Perform the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6544 Alternator: Service and Repair Overhaul Alternator Overhaul Alternator Overhaul - Exploded View Exploded View Special Tools Required - Handle driver 07749-0010000 - Driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. 1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them. 2. Remove the alternator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6545 3. Remove the four through bolts. 4. Heat the rear bearing seat with a 1,000 W hair drier for about 5 minutes (50 - 60 °C, 129 - 140 °F). 5. Separate the rear housing from the drive-end housing by inserting a flat tip screwdriver into the openings and prying them a part. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the stator with the tip of the screwdriver. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6546 6. Separate the rear housing (A) and drive-end housing (B) with the stator (C) attached to the rear housing. 7. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or rear bearing, go to step 15. Clamp the rotor in a soft-jawed vise, then remove the pulley locknut. 8. Remove the rotor using a puller as shown. 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the drive-end housing for seizure marks. - If either the rotor or drive-end housing is damaged, replace the alternator. - If both the rotor and the drive-end housing are OK, go to step 10. 10. Remove the rear bearing using the puller as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6547 11. Use a hand press to install the new rear bearing. Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid damaging the bearing. 12. Remove the front bearing retainer plate. 13. Support the drive-end housing in a vise, and drive out the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6548 14. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new front bearing in the drive-end housing. Alternator Brush Inspection 15. Measure the length of both brushes with a vernier caliper. - If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the rear housing assembly. - If brush length is OK, go to step 16. Rotor Slip Ring Test 16. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings(A). - If there is continuity, go to step 17. - If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly. 17. Check that there is no continuity between each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C). - If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing assembly, go to step 18. - If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly. Alternator Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6549 18. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive-end housing, then tighten its locknut to 111 N.m (11.3 kgf.m, 81.7 lbf.ft). 19. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings. 20. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B) (about 1.8 mm (0.77 in.) diameter) to hold them there. 21. Heat the rear bearing seat with a 1,000 W hair drier for about 5 minutes (129 140 °F, 50 - 60 °C). 22. Put the rear housing assembly (A) and drive-end housing/rotor assembly (B) together, tighten the four through bolts (C) and pull put the pin (D). 23. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by hand to make sure the rotor rotates smoothly and without noise. 24. Reinstall the alternator, and adjust its belt tension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6550 Engine Electrical - Special Tools Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6555 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6556 32. Clutch Interlock Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6557 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Interlock Switch Test 1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector. 2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch. - If OK, install clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6558 Clutch Switch: Adjustments Clutch Pedal, Clutch Pedal Position Switch, and Clutch Interlock Switch Adjustment NOTE: ^ To check the clutch pedal position switch. ^ To check the clutch interlock switch. ^ Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting the clutch pedal. ^ The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. ^ If there is no clearance between the master cylinder piston and push rod, the release bearing is held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the clutch pedal (C). 2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at the clutch pedal. Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130 - 140 mm (5.1 - 5.5 inch) Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 inch) 3. Tighten locknut (D). 4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the clutch pedal (C).. 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an additional 3/4 to 1 turn. 6. Tighten locknut (A). 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch (1) 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 inch) from the fully depressed position, and hold it there. Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (1) so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in this position. 10. Tighten locknut (H). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch > Page 6568 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Keys Gets Warm While Driving SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2003 TITLE: Ignition Key Gets Warm While Driving APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: Are owners of complaining of the ignition key getting warm while driving? The key interlock solenoid in the ignition switch is the likely culprit. This solenoid is energized anytime the shift lever isn't in Park, so the heat from the solenoid gets transferred to the ignition key. This is a normal characteristic of the vehicle, and can't be fixed by replacing the key interlock solenoid, the ignition lockset, or any other component. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6576 107. Behind A/T Shift Lever (except M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6577 143. Park Pin/Shift Switch (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations 24. Right Side of Engine Compartment (CVT Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6581 Starter Motor: Diagrams Starter Overhaul For M/T, CVT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6582 Starter Overhaul For A/T Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6583 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Starter Performance Test 1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the M terminal. 2. Make the connections as described using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. 3. Connect the battery as shown. Be sure to disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly. 4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the solenoid is working properly. 5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. 6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6584 7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in the diagram, and confirm that the motor starts and keeps rotating. Specifications 8. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement Starter Motor: Service and Repair Replacement Starter Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable. 3. Remove the resonator. M/T, CVT A/T 4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (B) from the S terminal. 5. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then remove the starter. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing out. 7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 8. Start the engine to make sure the start works properly. 9. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 10. Set the clock. 11. Perform the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6587 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Overhaul Starter Overhaul Starting System - Starting Overhaul Part 1 Disassembly/Reassembly - M/T, CVT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6588 Starting System - Starting Overhaul Part 2 Disassembly/Reassembly - A/T Armature Inspection and Test 1. Remove the starter. 2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6589 3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the armature. 4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe within the given specifications, or recondition with # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B). 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6590 6. Measure the commutator (A) runout. - If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. - If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. 7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). 8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If an open circuit exists between any segments, replace the armature. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6591 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature. 10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the armature. Starter Brush Inspection 11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the service limit, replace the armature housing assembly (M/T, CVT), or the brush holder assembly (A/T). Starter Field Winding Test (M/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6592 12. Check for continuity between the brushes (A). If there is no continuity, replace the armature housing (B). 13. Check for continuity between each brush (A) and the armature housing (B). If there is continuity, replace the armature housing. Starter Brush Holder Test M/T, CVT A/T 14. Check that there is no continuity between the (+) brush holder (A) and ( - ) brush holder (B). If there is no continuity, replace the brush holder assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6593 15. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact with the commutator, then attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush. 16. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there. 17. Install the armature in the housing, and install the brush holder. Next, pry back each brush spring again, and push the brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush. NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or # 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the commutator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Replacement > Page 6594 18. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush holder (B). Overrunning Clutch Inspection 19. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Replace it if it does not slide smoothly. M/T, CVT A/T 20. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. Does it lock in one direction and rotate smoothly in reverse ? If it does not lock in either direction or it locks in both directions, replace it. 21. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separately. Check the condition of the flywheel or torque converter ring gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged. 22. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of disassembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6598 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6599 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations 24. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (CVT Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6603 16. Starter Solenoid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6604 Starter Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Starter Solenoid Test 1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, go to step 2. - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. 2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and M terminal. There should be continuity. - If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK. - If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations 77. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6611 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6612 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6613 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6614 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6615 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6616 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6617 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6618 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6619 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6620 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6621 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6622 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6623 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6624 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6625 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6626 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6627 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6628 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6629 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6630 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6631 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6632 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6633 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6634 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6635 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6636 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6637 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6638 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6639 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6640 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6641 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6642 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6643 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6644 27. Accessory Power Socket Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6645 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6646 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the accessory power socket (A) out from the center lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be battery voltage. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: poor ground (G502). - an open in the wire. - blown No.18 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6647 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the accessory power socket (A) out from the center lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be battery voltage. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: poor ground (G502). - an open in the wire. - blown No.18 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Specifications Fuse: Specifications Electrical ratings Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 80A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A, 7.5A Under-dash fuse/relay box 20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6653 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6654 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6655 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6656 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6657 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6658 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6661 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6662 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Fuse and Relay Box Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6667 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6668 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6669 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6670 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6671 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6672 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6673 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6674 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6675 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6676 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6677 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6678 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6679 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6680 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6681 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6682 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 71. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6683 69. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6684 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6685 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6688 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6689 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6690 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6691 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6692 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6693 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6694 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6695 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Grounding Point: Application and ID Ground To Components Index (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6699 Ground To Components Index (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 01-060 Date: 010612 Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion 01-060 June 12, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - From VIN 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES....1H556387 Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Pump Connector BACKGROUND During inspection and installation of the fuel tank, water may have been left in the fuel pump connector on the top of the fuel filter. Over time, this water could corrode the terminals in the connector, causing the engine not to start or to stall while driving. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some vehicles affected by this recall are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, those vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the connector for moisture or corrosion. If necessary, replace the fuel filter and any corroded terminals. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Filter Kit: P/N 16010-S5A-999AH, H/C 6821094 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench: 07XAA-001010A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 16010-S5A-932 H/C 6655831 Defect Code: 927 Contention Code: L27 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6708 2. Remove the access panel from the rear floor. 3. Disconnect the fuel pump connector from the top of the fuel filter. 4. Use compressed air to check for moisture in the connector well. Carefully inspect the five terminals in the fuel filter and in the fuel pump connector for any corrosion. ^ If you find corrosion on any of the terminals or moisture in the connector well, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you find no corrosion or moisture, reinstall all removed parts and center-punch the VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code (EX only). Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Remove the glove box stops and swing the glove box down. 3. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. 4. Start the engine. Let it idle until it stalls. Then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6709 7. Remove the mounting bracket and the quick disconnect covers from the fuel line quick disconnect on the engine compartment bulkhead. 8. Wrap a shop towel around the quick disconnect so you do not get sprayed with fuel. 9. Squeeze the tabs on the quick disconnect, then pull the halves apart. Use your hands only, do not use tools. 10. Disconnect the fuel line quick disconnect from the fuel filter. 11. Use the special tool to remove the fuel tank locknut. 12. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6710 13. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the fuel filter. 14. Slide back the fuel pressure regulator to remove the fuel line connector from the case. Use a small screwdriver to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pressure regulator. 15. Disconnect the other fuel line from the case. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6711 16. Remove the fuel filter from the case. 17. Install the new fuel filter on the case. Make sure the arms snap into place and that the assembly pivots freely on the case. The arms are spring-loaded. Compressing and suddenly releasing an arm could cause it to come apart and be damaged. Do not compress the arms until the filter is installed on the case. 18. Install the fuel lines to the case and the fuel pressure regulator. Use new 0-rings from the kit. 19. Use a small screwdriver to slightly bend out the tang on the 1 P connector, then snap the connector into the fuel filter. Make sure it is locked in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6712 20. Connect the remaining two electrical connectors to the fuel filter. Make sure the wires are routed under the clips on the case. 21. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket from the kit. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit with the marks on the fuel tank, then install the locknut. Torque the locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). Install the quick disconnect fitting from the kit on the fuel filter outlet tube. 22. Inspect the female terminals in the harness side fuel pump connector for corrosion. ^ If any terminals are corroded, go to step 23. ^ If the terminals are not corroded, go to step 28. 23. Use a small screwdriver to pry the blue plastic end piece off the connector. 24. Use a miniature screwdriver to release the lock tabs on the connector. Separate the halves of the connector. 25. Use the appropriate pin tool to remove the corroded terminal(s) from the connector. 26. Refer to service bulletin 00-099, Terminal Replacement Instructions, for the terminal replacement procedure. NOTE: The replacement terminals in the kit are not all the same size. Match the wire color of the terminal you are replacing to the markings on the plastic bags. 27. Reassemble the connector. 28. Reconnect the fuel pump connector and the quick disconnect for the fuel line. Reinstall the access cover. 29. Reconnect the quick disconnect for the fuel line under the hood. Reinstall the quick disconnect fitting covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6713 30. Reinstall all other removed parts. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 31. Make sure all electrical items (audio system, heater, lights, etc.) are turned off. Start the engine. After the engine reaches normal operating temperature, let it idle for 10 minutes. 32. Turn off the engine. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the tenth character (1) of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6714 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 01-060 Date: 010612 Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion 01-060 June 12, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - From VIN 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES....1H556387 Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Pump Connector BACKGROUND During inspection and installation of the fuel tank, water may have been left in the fuel pump connector on the top of the fuel filter. Over time, this water could corrode the terminals in the connector, causing the engine not to start or to stall while driving. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some vehicles affected by this recall are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, those vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the connector for moisture or corrosion. If necessary, replace the fuel filter and any corroded terminals. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Filter Kit: P/N 16010-S5A-999AH, H/C 6821094 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench: 07XAA-001010A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 16010-S5A-932 H/C 6655831 Defect Code: 927 Contention Code: L27 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6720 2. Remove the access panel from the rear floor. 3. Disconnect the fuel pump connector from the top of the fuel filter. 4. Use compressed air to check for moisture in the connector well. Carefully inspect the five terminals in the fuel filter and in the fuel pump connector for any corrosion. ^ If you find corrosion on any of the terminals or moisture in the connector well, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you find no corrosion or moisture, reinstall all removed parts and center-punch the VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code (EX only). Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Remove the glove box stops and swing the glove box down. 3. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. 4. Start the engine. Let it idle until it stalls. Then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6721 7. Remove the mounting bracket and the quick disconnect covers from the fuel line quick disconnect on the engine compartment bulkhead. 8. Wrap a shop towel around the quick disconnect so you do not get sprayed with fuel. 9. Squeeze the tabs on the quick disconnect, then pull the halves apart. Use your hands only, do not use tools. 10. Disconnect the fuel line quick disconnect from the fuel filter. 11. Use the special tool to remove the fuel tank locknut. 12. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6722 13. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the fuel filter. 14. Slide back the fuel pressure regulator to remove the fuel line connector from the case. Use a small screwdriver to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pressure regulator. 15. Disconnect the other fuel line from the case. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6723 16. Remove the fuel filter from the case. 17. Install the new fuel filter on the case. Make sure the arms snap into place and that the assembly pivots freely on the case. The arms are spring-loaded. Compressing and suddenly releasing an arm could cause it to come apart and be damaged. Do not compress the arms until the filter is installed on the case. 18. Install the fuel lines to the case and the fuel pressure regulator. Use new 0-rings from the kit. 19. Use a small screwdriver to slightly bend out the tang on the 1 P connector, then snap the connector into the fuel filter. Make sure it is locked in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6724 20. Connect the remaining two electrical connectors to the fuel filter. Make sure the wires are routed under the clips on the case. 21. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket from the kit. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit with the marks on the fuel tank, then install the locknut. Torque the locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). Install the quick disconnect fitting from the kit on the fuel filter outlet tube. 22. Inspect the female terminals in the harness side fuel pump connector for corrosion. ^ If any terminals are corroded, go to step 23. ^ If the terminals are not corroded, go to step 28. 23. Use a small screwdriver to pry the blue plastic end piece off the connector. 24. Use a miniature screwdriver to release the lock tabs on the connector. Separate the halves of the connector. 25. Use the appropriate pin tool to remove the corroded terminal(s) from the connector. 26. Refer to service bulletin 00-099, Terminal Replacement Instructions, for the terminal replacement procedure. NOTE: The replacement terminals in the kit are not all the same size. Match the wire color of the terminal you are replacing to the markings on the plastic bags. 27. Reassemble the connector. 28. Reconnect the fuel pump connector and the quick disconnect for the fuel line. Reinstall the access cover. 29. Reconnect the quick disconnect for the fuel line under the hood. Reinstall the quick disconnect fitting covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6725 30. Reinstall all other removed parts. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 31. Make sure all electrical items (audio system, heater, lights, etc.) are turned off. Start the engine. After the engine reaches normal operating temperature, let it idle for 10 minutes. 32. Turn off the engine. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the tenth character (1) of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6726 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6727 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams 217. C102 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6728 220. C103 (Junction Connector) 221. C104 (Junction Connector) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How To Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6731 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6732 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6733 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6734 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6735 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6736 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6737 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6738 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6739 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repainng, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6740 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6741 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6742 the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6743 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6744 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > How To Replace Connector Terminals > Page 6745 Multiple Junction Connector: Service and Repair Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6751 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6752 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6753 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6754 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6755 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6756 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6757 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6758 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6759 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6760 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6761 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6762 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6763 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6764 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6765 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6766 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6767 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6768 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6769 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6770 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6771 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6772 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6773 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6774 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6775 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6776 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6779 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6780 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6785 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6786 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6787 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6788 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6789 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6790 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6791 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6792 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6793 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6794 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6795 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6796 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6797 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6798 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6799 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6800 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6801 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6802 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6803 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6804 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6805 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6806 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6807 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6808 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6809 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 6810 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6813 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6814 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6823 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6824 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6825 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6826 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6827 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6828 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6829 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6830 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6840 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6841 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6842 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6843 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6844 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6845 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6846 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 6847 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > Page 6848 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. ^ The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. ^ Do not reuse the drained fluid. ^ Always use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system. ^ Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A). 2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a container of new brake fluid. 3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. 4. Starting at the left front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > Page 6849 6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations 77. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6876 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6877 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6878 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6879 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6880 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6881 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6882 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6883 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6884 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6885 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889 27. Accessory Power Socket Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 155 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6891 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the accessory power socket (A) out from the center lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be battery voltage. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: poor ground (G502). - an open in the wire. - blown No.18 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6892 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the accessory power socket (A) out from the center lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the socket. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be battery voltage. - If there is no battery voltage, check for: poor ground (G502). - an open in the wire. - blown No.18 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Specifications Fuse: Specifications Electrical ratings Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 80A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A, 7.5A Under-dash fuse/relay box 20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Locations Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6898 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6899 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6900 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6901 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6902 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6903 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6906 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6907 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Fuse and Relay Box Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6912 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6913 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6914 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6915 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6916 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6917 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6918 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6919 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6920 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6921 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6922 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6923 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6924 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6925 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6926 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6927 Fuse Block: Connector Locations 71. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6928 69. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6929 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6930 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6933 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6934 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6935 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6936 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6937 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6938 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6939 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6940 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID Grounding Point: Application and ID Ground To Components Index (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6944 Ground To Components Index (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 01-060 Date: 010612 Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion 01-060 June 12, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - From VIN 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES....1H556387 Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Pump Connector BACKGROUND During inspection and installation of the fuel tank, water may have been left in the fuel pump connector on the top of the fuel filter. Over time, this water could corrode the terminals in the connector, causing the engine not to start or to stall while driving. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some vehicles affected by this recall are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, those vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the connector for moisture or corrosion. If necessary, replace the fuel filter and any corroded terminals. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Filter Kit: P/N 16010-S5A-999AH, H/C 6821094 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench: 07XAA-001010A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 16010-S5A-932 H/C 6655831 Defect Code: 927 Contention Code: L27 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6953 2. Remove the access panel from the rear floor. 3. Disconnect the fuel pump connector from the top of the fuel filter. 4. Use compressed air to check for moisture in the connector well. Carefully inspect the five terminals in the fuel filter and in the fuel pump connector for any corrosion. ^ If you find corrosion on any of the terminals or moisture in the connector well, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you find no corrosion or moisture, reinstall all removed parts and center-punch the VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code (EX only). Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Remove the glove box stops and swing the glove box down. 3. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. 4. Start the engine. Let it idle until it stalls. Then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6954 7. Remove the mounting bracket and the quick disconnect covers from the fuel line quick disconnect on the engine compartment bulkhead. 8. Wrap a shop towel around the quick disconnect so you do not get sprayed with fuel. 9. Squeeze the tabs on the quick disconnect, then pull the halves apart. Use your hands only, do not use tools. 10. Disconnect the fuel line quick disconnect from the fuel filter. 11. Use the special tool to remove the fuel tank locknut. 12. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6955 13. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the fuel filter. 14. Slide back the fuel pressure regulator to remove the fuel line connector from the case. Use a small screwdriver to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pressure regulator. 15. Disconnect the other fuel line from the case. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6956 16. Remove the fuel filter from the case. 17. Install the new fuel filter on the case. Make sure the arms snap into place and that the assembly pivots freely on the case. The arms are spring-loaded. Compressing and suddenly releasing an arm could cause it to come apart and be damaged. Do not compress the arms until the filter is installed on the case. 18. Install the fuel lines to the case and the fuel pressure regulator. Use new 0-rings from the kit. 19. Use a small screwdriver to slightly bend out the tang on the 1 P connector, then snap the connector into the fuel filter. Make sure it is locked in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6957 20. Connect the remaining two electrical connectors to the fuel filter. Make sure the wires are routed under the clips on the case. 21. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket from the kit. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit with the marks on the fuel tank, then install the locknut. Torque the locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). Install the quick disconnect fitting from the kit on the fuel filter outlet tube. 22. Inspect the female terminals in the harness side fuel pump connector for corrosion. ^ If any terminals are corroded, go to step 23. ^ If the terminals are not corroded, go to step 28. 23. Use a small screwdriver to pry the blue plastic end piece off the connector. 24. Use a miniature screwdriver to release the lock tabs on the connector. Separate the halves of the connector. 25. Use the appropriate pin tool to remove the corroded terminal(s) from the connector. 26. Refer to service bulletin 00-099, Terminal Replacement Instructions, for the terminal replacement procedure. NOTE: The replacement terminals in the kit are not all the same size. Match the wire color of the terminal you are replacing to the markings on the plastic bags. 27. Reassemble the connector. 28. Reconnect the fuel pump connector and the quick disconnect for the fuel line. Reinstall the access cover. 29. Reconnect the quick disconnect for the fuel line under the hood. Reinstall the quick disconnect fitting covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6958 30. Reinstall all other removed parts. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 31. Make sure all electrical items (audio system, heater, lights, etc.) are turned off. Start the engine. After the engine reaches normal operating temperature, let it idle for 10 minutes. 32. Turn off the engine. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the tenth character (1) of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6959 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat-back - Rear seat cushion - Side trim panel 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary. 3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove the cushion tape (B), then release the harness from the middle cross-member gusset (C). 4. Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6962 5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. - Replace the damaged cushion tape (P/N 91902-SB2-003). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 01-060 Date: 010612 Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion 01-060 June 12, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - From VIN 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES....1H556387 Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Pump Connector BACKGROUND During inspection and installation of the fuel tank, water may have been left in the fuel pump connector on the top of the fuel filter. Over time, this water could corrode the terminals in the connector, causing the engine not to start or to stall while driving. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some vehicles affected by this recall are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, those vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the connector for moisture or corrosion. If necessary, replace the fuel filter and any corroded terminals. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Filter Kit: P/N 16010-S5A-999AH, H/C 6821094 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench: 07XAA-001010A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 16010-S5A-932 H/C 6655831 Defect Code: 927 Contention Code: L27 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6972 2. Remove the access panel from the rear floor. 3. Disconnect the fuel pump connector from the top of the fuel filter. 4. Use compressed air to check for moisture in the connector well. Carefully inspect the five terminals in the fuel filter and in the fuel pump connector for any corrosion. ^ If you find corrosion on any of the terminals or moisture in the connector well, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you find no corrosion or moisture, reinstall all removed parts and center-punch the VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code (EX only). Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Remove the glove box stops and swing the glove box down. 3. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. 4. Start the engine. Let it idle until it stalls. Then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6973 7. Remove the mounting bracket and the quick disconnect covers from the fuel line quick disconnect on the engine compartment bulkhead. 8. Wrap a shop towel around the quick disconnect so you do not get sprayed with fuel. 9. Squeeze the tabs on the quick disconnect, then pull the halves apart. Use your hands only, do not use tools. 10. Disconnect the fuel line quick disconnect from the fuel filter. 11. Use the special tool to remove the fuel tank locknut. 12. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6974 13. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the fuel filter. 14. Slide back the fuel pressure regulator to remove the fuel line connector from the case. Use a small screwdriver to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pressure regulator. 15. Disconnect the other fuel line from the case. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6975 16. Remove the fuel filter from the case. 17. Install the new fuel filter on the case. Make sure the arms snap into place and that the assembly pivots freely on the case. The arms are spring-loaded. Compressing and suddenly releasing an arm could cause it to come apart and be damaged. Do not compress the arms until the filter is installed on the case. 18. Install the fuel lines to the case and the fuel pressure regulator. Use new 0-rings from the kit. 19. Use a small screwdriver to slightly bend out the tang on the 1 P connector, then snap the connector into the fuel filter. Make sure it is locked in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6976 20. Connect the remaining two electrical connectors to the fuel filter. Make sure the wires are routed under the clips on the case. 21. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket from the kit. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit with the marks on the fuel tank, then install the locknut. Torque the locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). Install the quick disconnect fitting from the kit on the fuel filter outlet tube. 22. Inspect the female terminals in the harness side fuel pump connector for corrosion. ^ If any terminals are corroded, go to step 23. ^ If the terminals are not corroded, go to step 28. 23. Use a small screwdriver to pry the blue plastic end piece off the connector. 24. Use a miniature screwdriver to release the lock tabs on the connector. Separate the halves of the connector. 25. Use the appropriate pin tool to remove the corroded terminal(s) from the connector. 26. Refer to service bulletin 00-099, Terminal Replacement Instructions, for the terminal replacement procedure. NOTE: The replacement terminals in the kit are not all the same size. Match the wire color of the terminal you are replacing to the markings on the plastic bags. 27. Reassemble the connector. 28. Reconnect the fuel pump connector and the quick disconnect for the fuel line. Reinstall the access cover. 29. Reconnect the quick disconnect for the fuel line under the hood. Reinstall the quick disconnect fitting covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6977 30. Reinstall all other removed parts. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 31. Make sure all electrical items (audio system, heater, lights, etc.) are turned off. Start the engine. After the engine reaches normal operating temperature, let it idle for 10 minutes. 32. Turn off the engine. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the tenth character (1) of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Recalls for Multiple Junction Connector: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 6978 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 6981 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 6982 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth 01-057 February 22, 2005 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic EX - ALL 2003-04 Civic EX and LX - ALL Updated information is shown by a black bar. Driver's Seat Rocks (Supersedes 01-057, dated November 9, 2004) SYMPTOM The driver's seat rocks back and forth during normal driving. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn bushings in the height adjustment mechanism. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install new seat bushings, nuts, and spacers. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Link Bushing (six required): P/N 90502-S3N-013, H/C 6690440 8/18 mm Nut Washer (six required): P/N 90321-SCV-A11, H/C 7952138 Spacer (four required): P/N 90503-53N-003, H/C 6852578 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81536-55P-A71 H/C 6526230 Defect Code: 00503 Symptom Code: 07302 Template ID: 01-057A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 6991 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat from the vehicle. Refer to page 20-109 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual. 4. Remove the recline handle by pulling it forward. 5. Remove the center cap from the height knob. Remove the C-clip that holds the height knob. Then remove the knob. 6. Remove the screw and clips from the recline cover. Remove the recline cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 6992 7. Remove and discard the three nuts, and remove the washers from the outboard link and from the outboard seat track. 8. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the outboard link. 9. Remove and discard the old bushings. 10. Install the new bushings, and add one spacer as shown. 11. Reassemble the outboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 12. Install the recline cover, height knob, and recline handle. 13. Remove the seat belt buckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 6993 14. Remove the three nuts and washers from the inboard link and the inboard seat track. Remove and discard the old bushings. 15. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the inboard link. 16. Install the new bushings. 17. Install three spacers on the rear mounting stud for the seat track. 18. Reassemble the inboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the seat track mounting nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the seat belt buckle mounting bolt to 32 N.m (23 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 6994 19. Install the seat. 20. Confirm that the problem is resolved. If the driver's seat still rocks, look for other causes. 21. Reconnect the battery. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the SRS indicator. If the indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then turns off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator stays on, check for codes, and do normal troubleshooting. 23. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and then enter the customer's radio station presets. 24. Set the clock. 25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 26. For 2001 2-doors up to VIN 1L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes at over 40 mph with the cruise control on. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth 01-057 February 22, 2005 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic EX - ALL 2003-04 Civic EX and LX - ALL Updated information is shown by a black bar. Driver's Seat Rocks (Supersedes 01-057, dated November 9, 2004) SYMPTOM The driver's seat rocks back and forth during normal driving. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn bushings in the height adjustment mechanism. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install new seat bushings, nuts, and spacers. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Link Bushing (six required): P/N 90502-S3N-013, H/C 6690440 8/18 mm Nut Washer (six required): P/N 90321-SCV-A11, H/C 7952138 Spacer (four required): P/N 90503-53N-003, H/C 6852578 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81536-55P-A71 H/C 6526230 Defect Code: 00503 Symptom Code: 07302 Template ID: 01-057A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 7000 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat from the vehicle. Refer to page 20-109 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual. 4. Remove the recline handle by pulling it forward. 5. Remove the center cap from the height knob. Remove the C-clip that holds the height knob. Then remove the knob. 6. Remove the screw and clips from the recline cover. Remove the recline cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 7001 7. Remove and discard the three nuts, and remove the washers from the outboard link and from the outboard seat track. 8. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the outboard link. 9. Remove and discard the old bushings. 10. Install the new bushings, and add one spacer as shown. 11. Reassemble the outboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 12. Install the recline cover, height knob, and recline handle. 13. Remove the seat belt buckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 7002 14. Remove the three nuts and washers from the inboard link and the inboard seat track. Remove and discard the old bushings. 15. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the inboard link. 16. Install the new bushings. 17. Install three spacers on the rear mounting stud for the seat track. 18. Reassemble the inboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the seat track mounting nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the seat belt buckle mounting bolt to 32 N.m (23 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 7003 19. Install the seat. 20. Confirm that the problem is resolved. If the driver's seat still rocks, look for other causes. 21. Reconnect the battery. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the SRS indicator. If the indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then turns off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator stays on, check for codes, and do normal troubleshooting. 23. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and then enter the customer's radio station presets. 24. Set the clock. 25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 26. For 2001 2-doors up to VIN 1L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes at over 40 mph with the cruise control on. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion Technical Service Bulletin # 01-060 Date: 010612 Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion 01-060 June 12, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - From VIN 2HGES....1H500001 thru 2HGES....1H556387 Safety Recall: Civic Fuel Pump Connector BACKGROUND During inspection and installation of the fuel tank, water may have been left in the fuel pump connector on the top of the fuel filter. Over time, this water could corrode the terminals in the connector, causing the engine not to start or to stall while driving. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Some vehicles affected by this recall are still in dealer inventory. According to Federal law, those vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. Not all of the vehicles in the listed VIN range are affected by this campaign. Before beginning work, verify that vehicle is eligible by checking at least one of the following: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on a VIN Status Inquiry on DCS. CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the connector for moisture or corrosion. If necessary, replace the fuel filter and any corroded terminals. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel Filter Kit: P/N 16010-S5A-999AH, H/C 6821094 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench: 07XAA-001010A WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 16010-S5A-932 H/C 6655831 Defect Code: 927 Contention Code: L27 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7009 2. Remove the access panel from the rear floor. 3. Disconnect the fuel pump connector from the top of the fuel filter. 4. Use compressed air to check for moisture in the connector well. Carefully inspect the five terminals in the fuel filter and in the fuel pump connector for any corrosion. ^ If you find corrosion on any of the terminals or moisture in the connector well, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you find no corrosion or moisture, reinstall all removed parts and center-punch the VIN. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the audio system anti-theft code (EX only). Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Remove the glove box stops and swing the glove box down. 3. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. 4. Start the engine. Let it idle until it stalls. Then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Remove the fuel fill cap. 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7010 7. Remove the mounting bracket and the quick disconnect covers from the fuel line quick disconnect on the engine compartment bulkhead. 8. Wrap a shop towel around the quick disconnect so you do not get sprayed with fuel. 9. Squeeze the tabs on the quick disconnect, then pull the halves apart. Use your hands only, do not use tools. 10. Disconnect the fuel line quick disconnect from the fuel filter. 11. Use the special tool to remove the fuel tank locknut. 12. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7011 13. Disconnect the three electrical connectors from the fuel filter. 14. Slide back the fuel pressure regulator to remove the fuel line connector from the case. Use a small screwdriver to disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pressure regulator. 15. Disconnect the other fuel line from the case. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7012 16. Remove the fuel filter from the case. 17. Install the new fuel filter on the case. Make sure the arms snap into place and that the assembly pivots freely on the case. The arms are spring-loaded. Compressing and suddenly releasing an arm could cause it to come apart and be damaged. Do not compress the arms until the filter is installed on the case. 18. Install the fuel lines to the case and the fuel pressure regulator. Use new 0-rings from the kit. 19. Use a small screwdriver to slightly bend out the tang on the 1 P connector, then snap the connector into the fuel filter. Make sure it is locked in place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7013 20. Connect the remaining two electrical connectors to the fuel filter. Make sure the wires are routed under the clips on the case. 21. Reinstall the fuel tank unit with a new base gasket from the kit. Align the marks on the fuel tank unit with the marks on the fuel tank, then install the locknut. Torque the locknut to 93 N.m (69 lb-ft). Install the quick disconnect fitting from the kit on the fuel filter outlet tube. 22. Inspect the female terminals in the harness side fuel pump connector for corrosion. ^ If any terminals are corroded, go to step 23. ^ If the terminals are not corroded, go to step 28. 23. Use a small screwdriver to pry the blue plastic end piece off the connector. 24. Use a miniature screwdriver to release the lock tabs on the connector. Separate the halves of the connector. 25. Use the appropriate pin tool to remove the corroded terminal(s) from the connector. 26. Refer to service bulletin 00-099, Terminal Replacement Instructions, for the terminal replacement procedure. NOTE: The replacement terminals in the kit are not all the same size. Match the wire color of the terminal you are replacing to the markings on the plastic bags. 27. Reassemble the connector. 28. Reconnect the fuel pump connector and the quick disconnect for the fuel line. Reinstall the access cover. 29. Reconnect the quick disconnect for the fuel line under the hood. Reinstall the quick disconnect fitting covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7014 30. Reinstall all other removed parts. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 31. Make sure all electrical items (audio system, heater, lights, etc.) are turned off. Start the engine. After the engine reaches normal operating temperature, let it idle for 10 minutes. 32. Turn off the engine. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the tenth character (1) of the engine compartment VIN. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-060 > Jun > 01 > Recall - Fuel Pump Connector Corrosion > Page 7015 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7018 156. A/T Reverse Relay (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7021 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7022 31. Brake Fluid Level Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7023 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Check for continuity between the terminals (A) with the float in the down position and the up position. ^ Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be continuity. ^ Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to MAX (upper) level (B). With the float up, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7027 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7028 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7029 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity or system .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 500 - 550 g (17.6 - 19.4 oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7032 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... HFC-134 a (R-134 a) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information Service Procedures The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun. Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone depletion. When CFC's are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules. Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage. Upper Level vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and vegetation. Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat. Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all developed countries. As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased. Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle air conditioning systems. Alternative Refrigerants The introduction of alternative refrigerants, primarily the hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) 134a, aims at preventing further ozone layer depletion. Because 134a is chlorine free, it is deemed ozone safe. Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling certification include: National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2 Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/ International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX 76147-2000 Phone: (817) 338-1100 Fax: (817) 338-1451 Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041 Phone: 215-679-2220 Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/ Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 7035 Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information WARNING ! ! * SHOULD HFC-134A CONTACT YOUR EYE(S), CONSULT A DOCTOR IMMEDIATELY. * DO NOT RUB THE AFFECTED EYE(S). INSTEAD, SPLASH QUANTITIES OF FRESH COLD WATER OVER THE AFFECTED AREA TO GRADUALLY RAISE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE REFRIGERANT ABOVE THE FREEZING POINT. * OBTAIN PROPER MEDICAL TREATMENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. * SHOULD THE HFC-134A TOUCH THE SKIN, THE INJURY MUST BE TREATED THE SAME AS SKIN WHICH HAS BEEN FROSTBITTEN OR FROZEN. IMPORTANT: * Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working on refrigerant systems. * Beware of the danger of carbon monoxide fumes caused by running the engine. * Beware of discharged refrigerant in enclosed or improperly ventilated garages. * Always disconnect the negative battery cable and discharge and recover the refrigerant whenever repairing the air conditioning system. CAUTION: Avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant-134a and lubricant vapor and mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. To remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. IMPORTANT: * Do not mix R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant, even in the smallest amounts. R12 and R-134a are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. * Use only the specified lubricant (PAG) for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If you use lubricants other than those specified, compressor failure is likely to occur. Coat all the fittings and the O-ring seals with clean 525 viscosity refrigerant oil in order to provide a leak-proof seal and in order to aid in assembly and disassembly. * Do not store or heat the refrigerant containers above 52 °C (125 °F). * Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame. If the container must be warmed, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. * Do NOT intentionally do the following to the refrigerant containers: Drop - Puncture - Incinerate * Refrigerant will displace oxygen. Work in well ventilated areas in order to prevent suffocation. * Do NOT introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component. Contamination will occur. * If you must carry a container of DOT CFR Refrigerant-134a in a vehicle, do not carry the refrigerant in the passenger compartment. All of the Refrigerant-134a disposable, blue containers are shipped with a heavy metal screw cap in order to protect the valve and the safety plug of the container from damage. Replace the cap after each use of the container in order to continue the protection. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7036 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Air conditioning systems contain HFC-134a. This is a chemical mixture which requires special handling procedures to avoid personal injury. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test Pressure Test Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 7039 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Leak Test Refrigerant Leak Test Special Tool Required Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM, commercially available WARNING: - Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a combustible vapor. - The vapor can burn or explode causing serious injury. - Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning system. CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to the specified capacity, then close the supply valve, and remove the charging system couplers. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year or better. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), recover the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 7040 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must be evacuated. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 7043 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Evacuation System Evacuation CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J221 0 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. When an A/C system has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.) 2. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system. 3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 7044 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Charging System Charging CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Evacuate the system. 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only SANDEN SP-10 refrigerant oil. 4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-1 34a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor will be damaged. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 5. Check for refrigerant leaks. 6. Check for system performance. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7047 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7048 208. DRL Control Unit (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7049 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test - Canada The DRL indicator light in the gauge assembly will come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the headlight switch off and the parking brake set. If should go off when you turn on the headlight switch, release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, do the control unit input test. NOTE: When the daytime running lights are on, the high beam indicator will glow at half its normal intensity. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. '01-03 models Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7050 4. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. '04 model Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 7051 5. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7057 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7058 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7059 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7060 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7061 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7062 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7063 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7064 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7065 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7066 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7067 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7068 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7069 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7070 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7071 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7072 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7073 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7074 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7075 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7076 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7077 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7078 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7079 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7080 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7081 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7082 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 7085 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 7086 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Relay Box Locations Starting System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7091 Charging System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7092 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7093 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7094 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7095 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7096 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7097 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7098 Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7099 67. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7100 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7101 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7102 1. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7103 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7104 Under-hood Fuse And Relay Box (4-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7105 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (2-door) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7106 Relay Box: Connector Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7107 69. Under Left Side Of Dash 70. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7108 71. Under Left Side Of Dash Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7109 Relay Box: Diagrams 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7110 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7111 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 3 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7112 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 4 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7113 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 5 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7114 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 6 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7115 234. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 7 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 7116 235. Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Part 8 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 7119 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 7120 Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Removal 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box. 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove the fuse/relay box. NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock type. Installation 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal and connect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Install the dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable to the battery. 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. 5. Confirm that all systems work properly. 6. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7129 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7130 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7131 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7132 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7133 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7134 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7135 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7136 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7142 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7143 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7144 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7145 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7146 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7147 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7148 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 7149 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7159 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7160 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7161 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7162 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7163 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7164 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7165 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7166 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7167 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7173 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7174 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7175 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7176 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7177 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7178 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7179 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7180 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 7181 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 7186 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > SN030915 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds > Page 7192 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7193 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7194 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7195 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7196 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7197 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7198 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7199 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7200 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7201 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7202 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # SN030915 Date: 030901 Suspension - Drifting & Pulling At Highway Speeds SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2003 TITLE: Drifting and Pulling at Highway Speeds APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Got a customer complaining that the vehicle drifts or pulls when driving at highway speeds? Use this handy procedure to diagnose and repair the problem. NOTE: Before doing the procedure in this article, check ISIS for related S/Bs and other S/N articles for the model you're working on. 1. Check if your customer has original equipment wheels and tires and that the ride height hasn't been modified. - If the wheels, tires, and ride height are OK, go to step 2. - If the wheels or tires aren't original equipment or the ride height was modified, stop here. Aftermarket wheels or tires or a ride height that's been modified pose challenges that this article doesn't cover. Resolve these issues with your customer before going further. 2. Set the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. 3. Find a straight stretch of 4-lane road where you can safely (and legally) go 60 mph for several minutes. Ideally, you want a road that's perfectly flat, but most roads have a crown that¡C■s anywhere from 1.5° to 1.75° so they can drain. Flat Road - While driving at 60 mph, use a stopwatch to time how long it takes to drift one full lane from center to center. Record the time. Repeat this, driving in the opposite direction to cancel the effects of wind, then average the two times you recorded. If the vehicle drifts one full lane from center to center in less than 6 seconds, go to step 4. If not, return the vehicle to your customer. Crowned Road - While driving at 60 mph, check if the vehicle climbs the crown. Do this for both a left- and right-crowned road. A drift to the right on a right-crowned road and a drift to the left on left-crowned road are considered normal. If the vehicle climbs the crown or it drifts to the right on a left crowned road, go to step 4. 4. Record the original toe, camber, and caster readings. On Passports, set the ride height to spec if needed. Refer to Ride Height Adjustment in S/B 99-043, Steering Wheel Shimmy or Chassis Vibration. 5. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts, and move the rear beam (it¡C■s the entire front subframe on some models) to get the maximum amount of caster and equal side-to-side camber. (As little as 0.4° of camber stagger can cause the vehicle to pull.) 6. Make sure the steering wheel is centered, then set the front and rear toe to the maximum toe-in spec. (Toe-in improves vehicle stability and reduces the tendency to drift or pull.) 7. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec, go to step 8. 8. Swap the front and rear tires on each side of the vehicle, then adjust the tire pressures to the recommended cold inflation values listed on the doorjamb sticker. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7203 9. Test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap each rear tire back to the front, one at a time, and test-drive the vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Replace the bad tire, then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec after swapping the front and rear tires, go to step 10. 10. Test-drive a known-good donor vehicle on the same road you used earlier, and check its pull. 11. Swap all four tires from the donor vehicle with the tires on your customer¡C■s vehicle. 12. Test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. - If the drift is now within spec, swap the tires back to the donor vehicle one at a time, and test-drive your customer¡C■s vehicle on the same road you used earlier. Do this until the drift comes back. Replace the bad tire(s), then return the vehicle to your customer. - If the drift is still out of spec using the donor vehicle tires, contact Tech Line for further action. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7204 TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7205 During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7206 NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7207 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7208 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7209 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7210 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7211 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 7212 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Alignment: Specifications Alignment Wheel alignment Camber Front .................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 0°00' ± 45' Rear ........................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ -0°45' ± 45' Caster, Front '01-02 models ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 1°33' ± 1° '03-04 models ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 2°14' ± 1° Total toe Front .................................................................................................................................................... ............................. 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch) Rear ............................................................................... .................................................................................. IN 2 [2/1] mm (0.08 [0.08/0.04] inch) Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel w/o P195/60R15 tire.............................................................. ...................................................................................................... 40°00' ± 2° Inside wheel w P195/60R15 tire.................................................................................................................................... ................................... 38°00' ± 2° Outside wheel w/o P195/60R15 tire ................................................................................................................................................... 31°00' (Reference) Outside wheel w P195/60R15 tire ...................................................................................................................................................... 30°00' (Reference) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment > Page 7215 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Honda Motor Company does not list ride height/trim height specifications. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 7216 Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments are interrelated to each other. For example, when you adjust toe, the camber changes. Therefore, you must adjust the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber or toe. Pre-Alignment Checks For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks: 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement. 2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 3. Check the tire size and tire pressure. Tire size: Front/rear: P185/70R14 87S P185/65R15 86H P195/60R15 87H Tire pressure: Front/rear:210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi) 4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires. 5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling). 6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the suspension. Front Caster Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the caster angle. If the caster angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front caster angle: 1°33' ± 1° for '01-02 models 2°14' ± 1° for '03-04 models Front Camber Inspection Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within the specification, adjust the camber. Front camber angle: 0°00' ± 45' Front Camber Adjustment The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or both of the damper pinch bolts with the smaller diameter adjusting bolt(s). The difference between the adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows a small range of adjustment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 7217 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Loosen the damper pinch nuts and bolts (A), and adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play 3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 4. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. 5. Check the camber angle. If it is within the specification, check the front toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 6. 6. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 7. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. NOTE: The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 15' (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 30' by replacing both upper and lower damper pinch bolts with the adjusting bolts. 8. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. 9. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. 10. Check the camber angle. if it is within the specification, check the front toe, and adjust it if necessary. If it is not within the specification, readjust, and recheck. If the camber angle cannot be adjusted to the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Rear Camber Inspection Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Rear camber angle: - 0°45' ± 45' Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Center the steering wheel spokes. 2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 3. Front toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 inch) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 7218 3. Loosen the locknut (A) while holding the tie-rod arm (B). 4. Turn the tie-rod end (C) until the toe is correct. NOTE: Adjust both the right and left wheels at the same time by the same amount in opposite directions to obtain the correct toe. 5. After adjusting, tighten the locknut while holding the tie-rod arm. Make sure the toe setting does not change. Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go to step 3. Rear toe-in: 2 [+2/-1] mm (0.08 [+0.08/-0.04] inch) 3. Loosen the self-locking nut (A) while holding the adjusting bolt (B). NOTICE: Do not loosen the special bolts (C) on the lower arm to adjust the alignment. 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it. NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever you loosened it. 5. Turn the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct. 6. Tighten the self-locknut to the specified torque while holding the adjusting bolt. Turning Angle Inspection Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 7219 1. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left while applying the brake, and check the turning angles of both front wheels. If the turning angle is not within the specification or the inward turning angles differ between the right and left side, go to step 2. 2. Check the toe. If it is correct, but the turning angle is not within the specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7225 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7226 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7227 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7228 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7229 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7230 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7240 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7241 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7242 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7243 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7249 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7250 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7251 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7252 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7253 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 ^ Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7256 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7257 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7258 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7259 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7260 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7261 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the brake drum and hub bearing unit. 3. Disconnect the brake pipe (A) from the wheel cylinder. 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) and drum brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Remove the flange bolts (C) and brake hose bracket (D). 7. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A) to support it. 8. Remove the flange bolt (B), and disconnect the upper arm (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7262 9. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 10. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the knuckle. 11. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B) with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten all the mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum ^ Use a new hub cap on reassembly. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type Honda Power Steering Fluid Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7268 Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power steering fluid Capacity For fluid change ................................................................................................................................... ......................................... 0.4 L (0.42 US qt.) For system overhaul .................................................... ................................................................................................................... 1.0 L (1.06 US qt.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7269 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type ........................................................................................................................................................ Honda Power Steering Fluid Do not use ATF Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7270 Power Steering Fluid: Service Precautions Use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid, or another brand of power steering fluid as a temporary replacement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7271 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7272 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C). 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 01-086 > Oct > 01 > Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning 01-086 October 2, 2001 Applies To: Noisy or Stiff Steering (Supersedes 01-086, dated September 4, 2001) Updated information is shown by a black bar. SYMPTOM The steering makes a grinding noise or feels stiff when you turn the wheel. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty power steering pump. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power steering pump. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 512100 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 56110-PLA-013 H/C 6572176 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 01-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Pump: > 01-086 > Oct > 01 > Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning > Page 7284 1. Pull the power steering reservoir off its mounting bracket. Disconnect the return hose from the reservoir, and drain the fluid into a suitable container. Be careful not to spill any fluid on the body or other parts; wipe off spilled fluid immediately. Properly dispose of the fluid. 2. Attach a length of suitable-diameter hose to the return hose. Insert the hose end into a suitable container placed under the vehicle. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When the fluid stops running out of the hose, turn off the engine. Properly dispose of the fluid. 4. Detach the hose from the return hose, then reconnect the return hose to the reservoir. Push the reservoir onto its mounting bracket. 5. Refill the reservoir to the upper level line with Honda Power Steering Fluid. 6. Repeat steps 1 thru 4 to flush the system. This leaves the system empty of fluid except for the power steering pump. 7. Replace the power steering pump (see steps 3 thru 10 on page 17-16 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 8. Refill the reservoir to the upper level line with Honda Power Steering Fluid. 9. Start the engine, hold it at 2,000 rpm, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to bleed any air from the system. 10. Check the fluid level in the reservoir, and add more fluid if needed. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 01-086 > Oct > 01 > Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning 01-086 October 2, 2001 Applies To: Noisy or Stiff Steering (Supersedes 01-086, dated September 4, 2001) Updated information is shown by a black bar. SYMPTOM The steering makes a grinding noise or feels stiff when you turn the wheel. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty power steering pump. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power steering pump. PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 512100 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 56110-PLA-013 H/C 6572176 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 01-086A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Pump: > 01-086 > Oct > 01 > Steering Wheel - Feels Stiff/Grinding Noise When Turning > Page 7290 1. Pull the power steering reservoir off its mounting bracket. Disconnect the return hose from the reservoir, and drain the fluid into a suitable container. Be careful not to spill any fluid on the body or other parts; wipe off spilled fluid immediately. Properly dispose of the fluid. 2. Attach a length of suitable-diameter hose to the return hose. Insert the hose end into a suitable container placed under the vehicle. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When the fluid stops running out of the hose, turn off the engine. Properly dispose of the fluid. 4. Detach the hose from the return hose, then reconnect the return hose to the reservoir. Push the reservoir onto its mounting bracket. 5. Refill the reservoir to the upper level line with Honda Power Steering Fluid. 6. Repeat steps 1 thru 4 to flush the system. This leaves the system empty of fluid except for the power steering pump. 7. Replace the power steering pump (see steps 3 thru 10 on page 17-16 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual). 8. Refill the reservoir to the upper level line with Honda Power Steering Fluid. 9. Start the engine, hold it at 2,000 rpm, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to bleed any air from the system. 10. Check the fluid level in the reservoir, and add more fluid if needed. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications Power steering pump belt Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs.) applied mid-way Used belt 13.0 16.5 mm Adjust a new belt to the new belt specification, run the engine for 5 between pulleys minutes, then readjust it to the used belt specification. New belt 9.0 - 11.0 mm Tension Used belt 390 - 540 N New belt 740 - 880 N Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7293 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve closed 7,600 - 8,300 kPa Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7294 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A Test Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-S040111 or 07RAK-S040110 ^ P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-001000A Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level and pump belt tension. 2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B). 3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully. 6. Start the engine and let it idle. 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at 158°F (70°C). 8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should be no more than 690 - 1,500 kPa (7 - 15 kgf/cm2, 100 - 214 psi). If it reads higher, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 290 - 1,100 kPa (3 - 11 kgf/cm2, 43 - 156 psi). If it reads less, repair or replace the pump. 9. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Close the pressure control valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. NOTICE: Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating. 10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,600 - 8,300 kPa (78 - 85 kgf/cm2, 1,110 - 1,210 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-001000A > Page 7297 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Test With T/N 07406-0010001 Test Special Tools Required ^ P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-S040111 or 07RAK-S040110 ^ P/S joint adapter those) 07RAK-S040122 ^ P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001 Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. 1. Check the power steering fluid level and pump belt tension. 2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install the P/S Joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B). 3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). 4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump). 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A). 6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B). 7. Start the engine and let it idle. 8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at 158°F (70°). 9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should be no more than 690 - 1,500 kPa (7 - 15 kgf/cm2, 100 - 214 psi). If it reads higher, check for: ^ Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the pump and gearbox. ^ Clogged valve body unit. Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 290 - 1,100 kPa (3 - 11 kgf/cm2, 43 - 156 psi). If it reads less, repair or replace the pump. 10. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure control valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. NOTICE: Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by overheating. 11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 7,600 - 8,300 kPa (78 - 85 kgf/cm2, 1,110 - 1,210 psi) ('01-03 models), or 7,800-8,500 kPa (80-87 kgf/cm2, 1,140-1,240 psi) ('04 model). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Replacement 1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir. 3. Remove the belt (A) by loosening the adjusting bolt (B), pump mounting nut (C), and pump locknut (D). 4. Cover the A/C compressor with several shop towels to protect it from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (E) and pump outlet hose (F) from the pump (G), and plug them. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 5. Remove the adjusting bolt, pump mounting bolt (H), pump mounting nut, pump locknut, and lock bolt (I), then remove the pump from the pump bracket. Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed. 6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the pump. 7. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose. Tighten the pump fittings securely. 8. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with the mounting bolt and lock bolt. 9. Install the pump belt. Note these item during belt installation: ^ Make sure that the power steering belt (A) is properly positioned on the pulleys (B). ^ Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the power steering belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation. 10. Adjust the pump belt adjustment 11. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7300 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Overhaul Overhaul Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged. Special Tools Required ^ Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 Disassembly NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure. 1. Remove the power steering pump. 2. Drain the fluid from the pump. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7301 3. Hold the steering pump (A) a vise with soft jaws (B), hold the pulley (C) with the special tool (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. 5. Remove the pressure control valve cap, O-ring, valve spring, and pressure control valve. 6. Remove the pump housing cap, O-ring, and pump preload spring. 7. Remove the pump cover, pump cover seal, and O-ring. 8. Pull out the roll pin. 9. Remove the outer case, cam ring, rotor, vanes, and side plate. 10. Remove the rubber seal and slipper seal from the outer case. 11. Remove the O-rings from the bottom of the housing. 12. Remove the snap-ring, then remove the drive shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer. 13. Remove the seal from the pump housing. Inspection 14. Check the pressure control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve. 15. Inspect the bore of the pressure control valve on the pump housing for scratches and wear. 16. Slip the pressure control valve back in the pump housing, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go to step 17; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not available separately. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7302 17. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the pressure control valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the pressure control valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent (C), and blow in the hose. ^ If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not available separately. ^ If the pressure control valve is OK, set it aside for reassembly later. 18. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and install a new one (B). 19. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the Exploded View; if any of them are worn or damaged, replace the pump as an assembly. Reassembly 20. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side facing in) into the pump housing (B) by hand first, then drive it in using the special tools until the seal is fully seated in the pump housing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7303 21. Position the pump drive shaft (A) in the pump housing, then drive it in with the appropriate size socket wrench (B) as shown. 22. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its radiused side facing out. 23. Coat the new 23.8 mm O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, then position it into the groove on the bottom of the pump housing. 24. Coat the new cover seal (A) and 13 mm O-ring (B) with the power steering fluid, then position them into the grooves on the cover (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7304 25. Install the outer case (A) by aligning the slot (B) inside the outer case with the cover roll pin hole (C). Be sure that the slit (D) on the outer case faces this direction shown. 26. Apply the power steering fluid to the rubber seal (E) black, and install it in the slot (F) of the outer case. 27. Apply power steering fluid to the slipper seal (G) (white), and install it on top of the rubber seal you lust installed. 28. Align the slot (A) in the outer case with the roll pin hole (B) on the cover. 29. Install the cam ring (C) by aligning the slot (D) with the slot (A) in the outer case. 30. Insert the roll pin (E) into the slots between the cam ring and outer case, then push the roll pin into the set hole. 31. Install the rotor (A) in the cam ring (B). 32. Set the 11 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor. Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7305 33. Place the side plate (A) on the cam ring with its "^" mark (B) facing upward, and align the roll pin set hole (C) in the side plate with the roll pin end (D). 34. Coat the new O-ring (F) with the power steering fluid, then position it into the groove on the side plate. 35. Install the pump housing (A) over the cover assembly (B). 36. Align the bolt holes in the cover (B) with the threaded holes in the pump housing. Install the five flange bolts (C) loosely first, then torque the flange bolts in 2 or more steps with sequence shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7306 37. Push in the cam ring (A) from the pump housing cap hole (B) with a flat blade screwdriver, to make sure the cam ring is fully seated against the outer case. 38. Install the pump preload spring (A) in the pump housing. 39. Coat the new 12.7 mm O-ring (B) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing cap (C). 40. Install the pump housing cap (C) on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. 41. Coat the pressure control valve (A) with power steering fluid, and install pressure control valve and spring (B) on the pump housing. 42. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and install it on the flow control valve cap (D). 43. Install the pressure control valve cap (D) on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque. 44. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B). 45. Install the inlet joint (B) on the pump housing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7307 46. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws (C). Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. 47. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten the pulley nut. 48. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley. If it turns hard, loosen the five flange bolts ('01-03 models) or four flange bolts ('04 model) on the cover, then try retightening them again in the same manner as in the step 36. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Idle Control System - Component Location Index 34. Left Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7312 65. PSP Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7313 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7314 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to step 6. 3. Start the engine. 4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. 5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - The PSP switch signal is OK. NO - Go to step 13. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. 10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 11. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7315 12. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and ECM/PCM (E16). NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G201. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and E16. Is there battery voltage? YES - Replace the PSP switch. NO - Go to step 17. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7316 symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7317 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement Note these items during installation: ^ Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. ^ Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary. ^ Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 7324 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 7325 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 7326 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 7329 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 7330 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 7331 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 7332 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7335 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7336 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7337 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Key Reminder Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7342 Key Reminder Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7343 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7344 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7347 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7348 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7349 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7350 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7356 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7357 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7358 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7359 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7360 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7373 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7374 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7375 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7376 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7377 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7378 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7379 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7380 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7381 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7382 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7383 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the circuit diagram and input test. When the ignition key is in the ignition switch the multiplex control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch and sounds the beeper. 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Lock Replacement 1. Remove the steering column. 2. Center punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 inch) drill bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when removing the shear bolts. 3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body. 4. Install the switch body without the key inserted. 5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B) twist off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Adjustments Tilt Wheel Handle: Adjustments Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/Adjustment On Vehicles Manufactured In Suzuka Plant: - Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper movement. If any bearing noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly. - Check the sliding capsules (C) for distortion and breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering column as an assembly. On Vehicles Manufactured In Other Plants: - Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly. - Check the absorbing plates (C), absorbing plate guides (D), stop (E), and coating plates (F) for distortion and breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering column as an assembly. 1. Move the tilt lever (A) from the loose position to the lock position 3 to 5 times; then measure the tilt lever preload 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the end of the tilt lever. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7390 2. If the measurement is out of the specification, adjust the preload using the following procedures. - Loosen the tilt lever, and set the steering column in the neutral position. - Remove the 6 mm lock bolt (B), and remove the stop (C). Be careful not to loosen the tilt lever when installing the stop or tightening the 6 mm lock bolt. - Adjust the preload by turning the tilt lock bolt (D) left or right. - Pull up the tilt lever to the uppermost position, and install the stop. Check the preload again. If the measurement is still out of specification, repeat the above procedures to adjust. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened from locked position 20 deg Maximum Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7394 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7395 Steering Gear: Adjustments Rack Guide Adjustment Special Tools Required Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07916-SA50001 1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B). 3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw, and apply new sealant all around the threads (C). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox. 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.). then loosen it. 5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (0.4 kgf-cm, 2.9 ft. lbs.), then back it off to specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 20° Max. 6. Tighten the locknut (B) while holding the rack guide screw. 7. Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning travel. 8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the power assist. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Steering Gearbox Removal Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Note these items during removal: ^ Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit, its lines, and the end of the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. ^ Be sure to remove the steering wheel before disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable reel can occur. 1. Raise the front of vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the driver's airbag and the steering wheel. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower covers. 5. Remove the steering joint bolts, and disconnect the steering joint by moving the steering joint (A) toward the column. 6. Remove the air cleaner (A) and resonator (B). 7. Open the heater valve cable clamp, and disconnect the heater valve cable. Remove the heater valve (A) from the bulkhead, and move it aside. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7398 8. Above the steering gearbox, remove the feed line clamp (A). 9. Disconnect the feed line (A) and return line (B) from the valve body unit. 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint nut (B), and loosen the nut. 11. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and damper steering arm using the special tool. 12. Under the steering gearbox, remove the return hose clamp. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7399 13. Remove the engine wire harness (A) from the harness bracket (B). 14. Remove the steering rack guard (C) by removing the three clips. 15. Remove the steering gearbox attaching nut and washer on the right gearbox mounting bracket. 16. Remove the steering gearbox attaching bolts and washers on the left gearbox mounting bracket. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7400 17. Pull on the steering gearbox to free it from the mounting stud (A) on the right gearbox mounting bracket (B). Remove the three mounting bolts and bracket. 18. Lower the steering gearbox, and rotate it so the pinion shaft points upward. 19. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) and tie-rods (B) as an assembly toward the passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the heater hoses. Remove the steering gearbox through the wheel well opening on the passenger's side. 20. Remove the pinion shaft grommet (C) from the top of the valve body unit. Steering Gearbox Installation 1. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). 2. Pass the valve body unit side of the steering gearbox (B) together with the tie-rods (C) through the wheel well opening on the passenger's side. 3. Carefully move the steering gearbox toward the driver's side until the pinion shaft clears the heater hoses. Continue moving the gearbox toward the driver's side until the steering gearbox is in position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7401 4. Install the right gearbox mounting bracket (A) on the frame. 5. Slip the right side of the steering gearbox over the mounting stud (A) on the right gearbox mounting bracket. Install the washer (B) and the gearbox mounting nut (C) and lightly tighten. 6. Insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead, and install the left gearbox mounting bolts (A) anal washer (B), and tighten them to the specified torque. Then tighten the right side of the gearbox mounting nut to the specified torque value. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7402 7. Install the steering rack guard (A). 8. Install the engine wire harness (B) on the harness bracket (C). 9. Under the steering gearbox, install the return hose clamp (A) on the gearbox. 10. Above the steering gearbox, connect the feed line (A) securely, and tighten the 14 mm flare nut (B). 11. Connect the return line (C) securely, and tighten the 16 mm flare nut (D). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7403 12. Install the feed line clamp (A) on the gearbox. Make sure that there is no interference between the feed and return lines any other parts. 13. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. Then reconnect the tie-rod end (A) to the damper steering arms. Install the 10 mm nut (B) and tighten it. 14. Install the new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown. 15. Reinstall the heater valve (A) in its original position, and connect the heater valve cable to the valve arm. Install the heater hoses on the hose clamps securely. 16. Install the air cleaner (A) and resonator (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7404 17. Install the steering joint (A), and reconnect the steering shaft (B) and pinion shaft (C). Make sure the steering joint is connected as follows: ^ Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the steering shaft (line up the bolt hole (D) with the flat portion (E) on the shaft). ^ Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole (F) with the groove (G) around the shaft), and loosely install the lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. ^ Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated. Then install the upper joint bolt and tighten it. 18. Install the driver's dashboard lower covers. 19. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and half turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel. 20. Install the front wheels. 21. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system. 22. After installation, perform the following checks: ^ Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks. ^ Perform the front toe inspection. ^ Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by turning the right and left tie-rods equally, if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7405 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Overhaul Steering Gearbox Overhaul Special Tools Required ^ Cylinder end seal remover attachment 07NAD-SR30200 or 07NAD-SR3020A ^ Driver, 27 mm 07ZAF-S5A0100 ^ Valve seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR30900 or 07NAD-SR3020A ^ Sleeve seal ring guide 07YAG-S2X0100 ^ Sleeve seal ring sizing tool, 36 mm 07ZAG-S5A0100 ^ Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Piston seal ring guide 07GAG-SD40100 or 07GAG-SD4010A ^ Piston seal ring sizing tool 07GAG-SD40200 or 07GAG-SD4020A ^ Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100 ^ Locknut wrench 07ZAA-S5A0100 ^ Driver handle 07NAD-SR30101 ^ Seal slider 07974-6890801 ^ Valve seal ring guide 07ZAG-S5A0200 ^ Pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially available. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7406 NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure. Removal 1. Remove the steering gearbox. Disassembly 2. Unbend the lock washer (A). 3. Hold the bracket (A) with one wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (B) with another wrench. Remove the lock washers. 4. Remove cylinder lines (A) from the gearbox. 5. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7407 6. Remove the stop washer (A), the 12 mm flange bolts (B), O-rings (C), and bracket (D) from the steering gearbox. 7. Remove the boot guard (A) by removing the 8 mm flange bolt (C) on the rack end. 8. Remove the boot band (D) and clip (E). Pull the boot B away from the end of the steering gearbox. Remove the rack end plug (F) 9. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide screw (B), spring (C), and rack guide (D) from the steering gearbox. 10. Remove the snap ring (A) and backup ring (B) from the cylinder of the steering gearbox. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7408 11. Remove the valve body unit (A) from the steering gearbox. Remove the O-ring (B) and discard it. 12. Remove the two boot bands (B) from boot A. Compress boot A by hand, and apply vinyl tape (C) so the boots stay collapsed and pulled back. 13. Attach the yoke (A) of a universal puller to the steering gearbox mounts with bolts. Securely clamp the yoke in a vise with jaws as shown. Do not clamp the gearbox housing in the vise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7409 14. Set the special tool (A) on the lock washer (B) securely, then loosen and remove the lock washer from inside of the gearbox housing (C). 15. Remove the special tool. 16. Pull on the cylinder to remove it from the gearbox housing. Remove boot A and the slider guide (B) from the cylinder. 17. Check the slider guide for damage and cracks. Using vernier calipers to measure the thickness of the slider guide. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the slider guide. 18. Remove and discard the stop ring (A) on the cylinder by expanding it with snap ring pliers. Remove and discard the lock washer (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7410 19. Set the cylinder housing (A) in a press so the cylinder side points downward, then press the cylinder end seal (B) and steering rack (C) out of the cylinder. Hold the rack to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 20. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering rack. 21. Insert the special tools into the cylinder. Make sure the attachment (A) of the special tools is securely positioned on the bushing edges (B). 22. Place the cylinder in a press, then remove the cylinder end seal (C), backup ring (D), and bushing (B) from the cylinder by pressing on the special tool end. Note the items when pressing the cylinder end seal: ^ Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it, if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal. ^ Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool; striking the tool would break the cylinder end seal, and the seal would remain in the cylinder. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7411 23. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring. 24. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft. 25. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/ valve using a press. 26. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it. NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the valve housing only if the wall is stepped. 27. Check for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve. NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced, replace both parts as a set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7412 28. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the pinion shaft. 29. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and the outer surface when removing the seal rings. 30. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the groove (C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring. 31. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B) from the pinion shaft. Note these items during disassembly: ^ Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer race slowly. If there is any excessive play, replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an assembly. ^ The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do not intermix old and new pinion shafts and sleeves. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7413 32. Press the valve oil seal (A) and bushing (B) out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool. Reassembly 33. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 34. Install the wave washer (B). Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal (C) with power steering fluid, and install the seal with its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to damage its sealing lip (D). Remove the vinyl tape. 35. Install the special tool over the pinion, and coat the surface of the tool with the power steering fluid. Slip the new O-ring (A) and new valve seal ring (B) over the special tool, and expand them. 36. Fit the O-ring and in the groove of the pinion shaft. Then slide the valve seal ring over the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft. 37. Remove the special tool, and apply power steering fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring (A). 38. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring, and move the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7414 special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove. 39. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring. Move it up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft groove. 40. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the special tool. Slip two new seal rings (A) over the special tool from the smaller diameter end, and expand them. Install only two rings at a time from each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B). Note these items when installing the seal ring: ^ Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal rings using the special tool (sizing tool). ^ There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black: and brown. Do not mix the different types of rings as they are not compatible. 41. Align the special tool with each groove in the sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each groove. After installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers temporarily. 42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the special tool. 43. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Be sure that the seal rings are not twisted. 44. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside of the sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion shaft groove. Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring when inserting the sleeve. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7415 45. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and special tools. Install the seal with its grooved side (C) facing the tool. 46. Press the bushing (D) into the valve housing with a hydraulic press and special tool. 47. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. 48. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C). 49. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then remove any residue from the tape adhesive. 50. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it. 51. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7416 52. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down toward the big end of the tool. Note these items during reassembly: ^ Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool). ^ Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set. 53. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the O-ring. 54. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the special tool with power steering fluid, then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring. 55. Move the special tool back and forth several times to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston. 56. Set the new bushing (A) on the special tool, and insert the special tools into the cylinder housing (B). 57. Set the cylinder in a press, and install the bushing (A) into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the tool with press. Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it may damage the new bushing. 58. Coat the sliding surface of the special tool (A) and new cylinder end seal (B) with power steering fluid. Place the seal on the special tool with its grooved side (C) facing opposite the special tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7417 59. Apply a thin coat of grease to the inside of the special tool. 60. Install the cylinder end seal (A) onto the steering rack (B) with its grooved side (C) toward the piston (D). Make sure the gap is special tool is opposite of rack teeth. 61. Separate the cylinder end seal from the special tool, then remove the special tool. 62. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack, then place the backup ring and cylinder end seal (B) against the piston (C). 63. Mark (A) a position on the steering rack surface with a felt-tip marker, 14.5 mm (0.57 inch) from the rack end edges. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7418 64. Apply multipurpose grease to the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack (A) into the cylinder (B). Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall and bushing with the rack edges. 65. Set the cylinder (A) in a press, then press the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of the cylinder until the mark (C) on the rack meets the edges (D) of the cylinder. 66. Coat the inside and outside surfaces of the new cylinder end seal (A) with power steering fluid. 67. Install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack (B) with its grooved side (C) toward the piston. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. 68. Place the backup ring (D) on the cylinder end seal with its flat side facing upward. Then drive the backup ring in with the appropriate size socket wrench until the its surface is below the circlip groove (E). install the snap ring (F) in the groove. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7419 69. Install the new lock screw (A) on the cylinder. 70. Install the new stop ring (B) in the groove (C) on the cylinder by expanding it with snap ring pliers. Be careful not to scratch or damage on the cylinder surface with the stop ring edges. 71. Set the new boot bands (B) on the band installation grooves of the boot A by aligning the tabs (C) with the holes (D} of the band. Do not close the ear portion of the boot band in this step. 72. Compress the boot A by hand, and apply vinyl tape (E) to the bellows so the boots stay collapsed and pulled back. Pass boot A over the cylinder so the smaller diameter end of the boot faces the gearbox housing. 73. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of the slider guide (A). Slide the steering rack all the way to left, and place the slider guide on the steering rack by aligning the bolt holes (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7420 74. Attach the yoke (A) of a universal puller to the gearbox housing (B) with bolts, then securely clamp the yoke in a vise with jaws. Do not clamp the gearbox housing in a vise. 75. Push the cylinder (A) into the gearbox housing (B) so the notch (C) is aligned with the pin (D) inside of the gearbox housing. 76. Tighten the lock screw (A) by hand first, then install the special tool (B) on the lock screw. Lightly tighten the lock screw. Do not tighten the lock screw to specified torque yet. 77. Remove the special tool and yoke from the steering gearbox. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7421 78. Coat the new O-ring (A) with multipurpose grease, and carefully fit it on the valve housing. 79. Apply multipurpose grease to the needle bearing (B) in the gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of the line connections). Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque. 80. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox housing. Wipe the grease off the threaded section of the housing. 81. Apply sealant all around the threads on the rack guide screw (B), then install the spring (C), rack guide screw, and locknut (D). 82. Center the steering rack within its stroke, and align the slider guide (B) with the holes (C) in boot A. Fit the slider guide to boot A by pressing around the edges of the holes securely. 83. Before installing the bracket (D), clean the mating surface of the 12 mm flange bolts (E) and bracket. Coat the new O-rings (F) with multipurpose grease, and install them on the 12 mm flange bolts. 84. Loosely install the bracket on the steering rack by tightening the 12 mm flange bolts to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7422 85. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp, then install the special tool on the lock screw (A). Retighten the lock screw to specified torque values. 86. Remove the special tool. Retighten the 12 mm flange bolts (A) to specified torque values. After tightening the 12 mm flange bolts, install a new lock washer (B) over one of bolt the heads (C). Be sure the tabs (D) of the lock washer are aligned with the flat surfaces (E) of the bolt head. 87. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves around on the housing. 88. Expand boot (A) by removing the vinyl tape, and fit the boot ends (B) in the installation grooves on the cylinder housing. 89. Close the ear portion (A) of the bands (B) with a commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7423 90. Install the rack end plug (A). 91. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves (C) around on the housing. 92. Install boot B. and set the boot end in the installation grooves in the cylinder housing and rack end plug properly. 93. Install the clip (D) and boot guard (E). Install the new boot band (F) in the band grooves of boot B by aligning the tabs (G) with the holes (H) in the band. 94. Close the ear portion (A) of the band (B) with a commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent (C). 95. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted. 96. Install the new lock washer (A) on the tie-rod (B) with the radiused side of the washer toward the tie-rod, and screw the tie-rod on the bracket (C). Repeat this step for the other tie-rod. Hold the bracket with one wrench, and tighten both tie-rods) to the specified torque with another wrench. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7424 97. Bend the lock washer against the flat spots on the bracket with a large pair of pliers. 98. Install the cylinder lines. Note these items during reassembly: ^ Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. The joints must be free of foreign material. ^ Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 99. Adjust the rack guide screw. After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding it right and left. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits Steering Wheel: Specifications Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside edge With engine running Standard or new 0 10 mm Starting load measured at outside edge With engine running Standard or new 30 N Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Standards and Service Limits > Page 7429 Steering Wheel: Specifications Steering wheel diameter 380 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7430 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7431 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7432 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the driver's airbag from the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the horn switch connector (A) and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (B), and loosen the steering wheel bolt (C) or nut. 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel from the steering column shaft by turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller. Note these items when removing the steering wheel: ^ Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. ^ If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt. 6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the steering wheel bolt (nut) and steering wheel from the steering column. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7433 Disassembly/Reassembly Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise about two and a half turns. The arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label point should point straight up. 2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal cancelling sleeve (B) as shown, and install the steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7434 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A) or nut and tighten it. 4. Connect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector. 5. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the system is operating properly 6. Check the horn and turn signal cancelling for proper operation. 7. Reconnect the battery and do the following: ^ PCM idle learn procedure. ^ Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ^ Reset the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement Special Tools Required Attachment, 42 mm 07QAD-P0A0100 1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin. 2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh multipurpose grease. 3. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease. Note these items when installing new grease: ^ Keep grease off the boot installation section (D) and the tapered section (E) if the ball pin. ^ Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The boot must not have a gap at the boot installation sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination, and wipe it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Lower Ball Joint Replacement Ball Joint: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Lower Ball Joint Replacement 04-079 December 21, 2004 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic (except 3-Door) - ALL Lower Ball Joint Replacement BACKGROUND Previously, if a lower ball joint was worn, you had to replace the knuckle assembly. To reduce repair costs, replacement lower ball joints are now available. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51210-S5A-J20 H/C 7233885 Defect Code: 00503 Symptom Code: 07302 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Lower Ball Joint Replacement > Page 7444 2. Check for the letters "OS" on the top of the lower ball joint. ^ If "OS" is not stamped on the ball joint, go to step 3. ^ If "OS" is stamped on the ball joint, the ball joint has already be replaced, and the knuckle is not usable for another ball joint replacement. Replace the knuckle. Replacement knuckles include a new ball joint. 3. Remove the knuckle on the affected side: ^ Refer to page 18-12 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual. ^ Enter keyword KNUCKLE, and select Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement for the appropriate vehicle from the list. 4. Remove the dust boot from the lower ball joint. 5. Clamp the knuckle in a bench vise. 6. Insert pilot adapter G into the C-frame press. 7. Install the remover/installer adapter A over the threaded end of the ball joint, and loosely install the castle nut to the ball joint to hold the adapter in place. 8. Clean the area around the ball joint, then position the base remover adapter C. 9. Position the remover/installer adapter H and the C-frame press. 10. Tighten the C-frame press to press the ball joint out of the knuckle. 11. Clean the knuckle bore with brake cleaner. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Lower Ball Joint Replacement > Page 7445 12. Insert the ball joint bore gauge into the knuckle bore in the four positions shown: ^ If the bore gauge does not fit through the bore at any point, go to step 13. ^ If the bore gauge fits through the knuckle at any point, the knuckle is not usable for ball joint replacement. Replace the knuckle. Replacement knuckles include a new ball joint. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Lower Ball Joint Replacement > Page 7446 13. Install the new ball joint into the knuckle. 14. Install the thread protector onto the ball joint. 15. Insert the base installer adapter B into the C-frame press. 16. Position adapter A over the ball joint, and position adapter H and the C-frame press. 17. Tighten the C-frame press to press the ball joint into the knuckle. 18. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new lock pin in the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut. ^ Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. 19. Check the wheel alignment. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7447 Ball Joint: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nut Lower ................................................................................................................................. .................................. 59 - 69 Nm (43 - 51 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal Ball Joint: Service and Repair Ball Joint Removal Removal Special Tools Required Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 NOTICE: Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball joint pin. 2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal > Page 7450 3. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt (B). 4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head of the adjusting bolt (A) is in the position shown to allow the jaw (C) to pivot. 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the steering arm or knuckle. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin. 6. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the steering arm or knuckle. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ball Joint Removal > Page 7451 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Ball Joint Boot Replacement Replacement Special Tools Required Driver attachment 07QAD-P0A0100 1. Remove the boot. 2. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with fresh grease. Do not contaminate the lower collar of the boot (B) with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the tapered section of the pin (C), and pack fresh grease onto the base (D). 4. Install the boot onto the ball joint pin, then squeeze it gently to force out any air. Do not let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot. 5. Press the boot with the special tool until the bottom seats on the knuckle (A) evenly around. 6. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the exposed portion of the ball joint pin. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak Control Arm Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak 03-039 April 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL Knock, Pop, or Squeak From the Front Suspension (Supersedes 03-039, dated July 29, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A knock, pop, or squeak comes from the front of the vehicle. The noise occurs when driving over rough roads. PROBABLE CAUSE Cracking or tearing of the front, lower control arm bushing (compliance bushing). CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the defective front compliance bushing(s). TOOL INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51391-S5A-024 H/C 6571475 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7461 *Defect Code: 02101 Symptom Code: 04201* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE *Look for signs of contact (scrape marks) between the two lower coils on each front spring. ^ If you see scrape marks (missing paint), refer to service bulletin 01-054, Front Suspension Noise. ^ If you do not see scrape marks, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, then remove the front wheel from the appropriate side of the vehicle. 2. Remove the lower control arm from the vehicle. Refer to page 18-19 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. *NOTE: Use the Ball Joint Thread Protector (T/N 07AAF-SDAA100) and the Ball Joint Remover (T/N 07MAC-SL00200) when disconnecting the ball joint from the lower arm. Do not use a hammer to loosen the ball joint.* 3. Mark the position of the arrows on the old compliance bushing onto the lower control arm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7462 4. Using a hydraulic press, the compliance bushing driver, and the compliance bushing receiver, remove the old compliance bushing. Discard the bushing. 5. Clean the inside of the bushing mating surface on the lower control arm. 6. Align the arrow marks on the new compliance bushing with the marks you made on the lower control arm. Using a hydraulic press, the compliance bushing driver, the compliance bushing receiver, and the spacer ring, press the bushing into the arm. The bushing will stop when it contacts the spacer ring. 7. Install the lower control arm onto the vehicle. Refer to page 18-19 of the service manual. 8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Refer to page 18-4 of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7463 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Control Arm Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7468 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7469 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7470 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7471 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak Control Arm Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak 03-039 April 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL Knock, Pop, or Squeak From the Front Suspension (Supersedes 03-039, dated July 29, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A knock, pop, or squeak comes from the front of the vehicle. The noise occurs when driving over rough roads. PROBABLE CAUSE Cracking or tearing of the front, lower control arm bushing (compliance bushing). CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the defective front compliance bushing(s). TOOL INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51391-S5A-024 H/C 6571475 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7477 *Defect Code: 02101 Symptom Code: 04201* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE *Look for signs of contact (scrape marks) between the two lower coils on each front spring. ^ If you see scrape marks (missing paint), refer to service bulletin 01-054, Front Suspension Noise. ^ If you do not see scrape marks, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, then remove the front wheel from the appropriate side of the vehicle. 2. Remove the lower control arm from the vehicle. Refer to page 18-19 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. *NOTE: Use the Ball Joint Thread Protector (T/N 07AAF-SDAA100) and the Ball Joint Remover (T/N 07MAC-SL00200) when disconnecting the ball joint from the lower arm. Do not use a hammer to loosen the ball joint.* 3. Mark the position of the arrows on the old compliance bushing onto the lower control arm. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7478 4. Using a hydraulic press, the compliance bushing driver, and the compliance bushing receiver, remove the old compliance bushing. Discard the bushing. 5. Clean the inside of the bushing mating surface on the lower control arm. 6. Align the arrow marks on the new compliance bushing with the marks you made on the lower control arm. Using a hydraulic press, the compliance bushing driver, the compliance bushing receiver, and the spacer ring, press the bushing into the arm. The bushing will stop when it contacts the spacer ring. 7. Install the lower control arm onto the vehicle. Refer to page 18-19 of the service manual. 8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Refer to page 18-4 of the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 03-039 > Apr > 04 > Suspension - Front Suspension Knock, Pop or Squeak > Page 7479 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Control Arm Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7484 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7485 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7486 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Arm Bushing: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7487 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat-back - Rear seat cushion - Side trim panel 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary. 3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove the cushion tape (B), then release the harness from the middle cross-member gusset (C). 4. Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7491 5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. - Replace the damaged cushion tape (P/N 91902-SB2-003). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Front Steering Knuckle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7500 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7501 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7502 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7503 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises 02-070 September 30, 2003 Applies To: *2001-02 Civic - ALL* Squeak From the Rear Suspension (Supersedes 02-070, dated May 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A squeak from the rear of the vehicle when driving slowly or going over a speed bump. You can hear the noise by bouncing the rear of the vehicle up and down while parked on a level surface. PROBABLE CAUSE *Worn lower front bushing on the rear knuckle.* CORRECTIVE ACTION *Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. If the bushings have a rubber collar, and are worn, replace the bushings. If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin and replace the rear knuckles.* PARTS INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Lower Front Bushing (left or right): P/N: 52365-S5A-802, H/C 7315849 TOOL INFORMATION Rear Knuckle Bushing Remover/Installer Kit: T/N 07AAF-S5AA150, H/C 7218266 (This kit contains separate remover and installer tools. The installer tool is not used for this repair.) C-Frame Tool: OTC P/N 7248, H/C 6279186 Bushing Installer: T/N 07AAF-S5AA120, H/C 7360811 (Contains adapters A and B for the C-frame tool.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 418109 Flat Rate Time: 1.0 hour Failed Part: P/N 52365-S5A-024 H/C 6571616 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7509 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. *Raise the vehicle on a lift. 2. Inspect the lower front bushings on both rear knuckles. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar overhangs on either knuckle, the rubber has worn away or deteriorated. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the bushings have a rubber collar, and the rubber collar is flush with each knuckle, the bushing is OK. Look for other possible causes for the noise. ^ If the bushings have a steel collar, and you suspect them to be the source of the noise, disregard this service bulletin. Refer to page 18-26 of the 2001-03 Civic Service Manual, and replace the rear knuckles. NOTICE Do not attempt the repair procedure in this service bulletin if the bushings have a steel collar. Attempting to remove a steel-collared bushing from the rear knuckle with the special tool would damage the tool and the knuckle.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7510 2. Carefully mark the cam position at the end of the adjusting bolt by making a line across the trailing arm onto the adjusting cam. (The marks are used to reset the rear toe to its original position.) 3. Remove the self-locking nut, the adjusting cam, and the adjusting bolt from the lower rear bushing. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the lower front bushing. 5. Loosen the flange bolt on the upper bushing at the brake drum. 6. Lift the rear knuckle, and support it with a 2 x 4-inch block of wood, 8 inches long. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7511 7. Install the bushing removal tool on the rear knuckle. ^ Remove the cup and adapter tip from the drive bolt. Lubricate the threads and the tip of the bolt with a moly-based grease. ^ Insert the ball-tip end of the drive bolt through the back of the lower rear bushing. Thread the cup onto the drive bolt, then snap on the adapter tip. ^ Turn the hex-end of the drive bolt until the adapter tip seats in the opening of the lower front bushing. Turn the cup until it is snug against the lower rear bushing. 8. Put on proper eye protection (safety glasses, goggles, etc.). Use a 1/2-inch drive impact wrench to push the lower front bushing out of the knuckle. Discard the old bushing. 9. Remove the tool. Use a clean shop towel to remove any rust or dirt from the inner surface of the knuckle. 10. Lubricate the new lower front bushing with a moly-based grease, then set it into the knuckle. 11. Lubricate the threads of the C-frame tool with a moly-based grease. Snap adapter A onto the end of the drive bolt, and snap adapter B onto the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-070 > Sep > 03 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Squeaking Noises > Page 7512 other side of the C-frame tool. Install the tool over the new bushing and knuckle as shown. 12. Use a ratchet to seat the new bushing fully into the knuckle. Do not use pneumatic tools. Remove the C-frame tool. 13. Reinstall the lower front bushing with the original flange bolt. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 14. Reinstall the lower rear bushing with the original adjusting bolt and adjusting cam. Align the cam position with the marks you made in step 2. Reinstall the self-locking nut. Hand-tighten only; do not torque. 15. Place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the weight of the vehicle. Torque the flange bolts on the upper bushing and the lower front bushing and the self-locking nut on the lower rear bushing to 59 N.m (43 lb-ft). 16. Reinstall the rear wheel. 17. Repeat steps 1 thru 16 for the other lower front bushing. 18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM Electric Load Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM 05-006 May 6, 2005 Updated information is noted by asterisks. Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL *2002-04 CR-V - ALL* DTC P1298 Is Stored in the ECM/PCM (Supersedes 05-006, dated February 25, 2005, to change the CR-V model-year range) SYMPTOM DTC P1298 (electrical load detector (ELD) circuit high voltage) is stored in the ECM/PCM. PROBABLE CAUSE The electronic load detector (ELD) has a faulty solder joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the ELD. NOTE: Previously, if an ELD required replacement, you had to replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. To reduce repair costs, replacement ELDs are now available. PARTS INFORMATION Electronic Load Detector: P/N 38255-S5A-003, H/C 7987571 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 121195 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: Civic P/N 38250-S5A-A03 H/C 7472277 CR-V P/N 38250-S9A-A01 H/C 6890594 Defect Code: 06402 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 05-006A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7518 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7519 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7520 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7521 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7527 REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio unit. Write down the customer's audio presets. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover. 4. Release the three clips, and remove the under- hood fuse/relay box from the holder. CR-V only: Release the wire harness clip from the fuse/relay box holder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7528 5. Remove the lower cover from the fuse/relay box. 6. Disconnect the 3P ELD connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7529 7. Remove the four screws that hold the two fuses, and remove the fuses. 8. Release the tab that holds the ELD, and pull up on the ELD to remove it. 9. Remove the bus bar from the ELD, and insert the bar into the new ELD. 10. Install the new ELD and bus bar into the fuse/relay box. 11. Reinstall the two fuses. 12. Reinstall the 3P ELD connector and the lower fusel relay box cover. 13. Reinstall the fuse/relay box onto its holder. CR-V only: Reinstall the wire harness clip onto the holder. 14. Reinstall the fuse/relay box cover. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Electrical - DTC P1298 Stored in ECM/PCM > Page 7530 ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 17. CR-V only: Reset the power window control unit: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch until the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the audio unit anti-theft code, and set the clock. Enter the audio presets. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7531 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required ^ Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 ^ Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 ^ Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 ^ Driver 07749-0010000 ^ Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7534 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7535 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7536 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7537 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7538 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. ^ Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. ^ Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. ^ Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7539 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Rear Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the brake drum and hub bearing unit. 3. Disconnect the brake pipe (A) from the wheel cylinder. 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) and drum brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Remove the flange bolts (C) and brake hose bracket (D). 7. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A) to support it. 8. Remove the flange bolt (B), and disconnect the upper arm (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7540 9. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 10. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the knuckle. 11. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B) with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten all the mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum ^ Use a new hub cap on reassembly. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Knuckle Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the brake drum and hub bearing unit. 3. Disconnect the brake pipe (A) from the wheel cylinder. 4. Remove the flange bolts (B) and drum brake assembly (C) from the knuckle. 5. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 6. Remove the flange bolts (C) and brake hose bracket (D). 7. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A) to support it. 8. Remove the flange bolt (B), and disconnect the upper arm (C) from the knuckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7544 9. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B), then remove the self-locking nut (C), adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut. 10. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the knuckle. 11. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components, and lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a floor jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and adjusting cam (B) with the marked positions when tightening. ^ Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. ^ Tighten all the mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. ^ Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. ^ Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum. ^ Use a new hub cap on reassembly. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Removal/Installation 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 3. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar and lower arm with the joint pins set at the center of each moving range. 4. Install the self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them. NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. 5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm ball joint, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. NOTICE: Do not place the jack against the flat section of the lower arm. Lifting the arm in this area might bend it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7550 6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D). 7. After 5 minutes, re-tighten the self-locking nut again with the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7551 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 3. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar and trailing arm with the joint pins set at the center of each moving range. 4. Install the self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them. NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly. 5. Place a jack under the trailing arm at the knuckle side end, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7552 6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding the respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D). 7. After 5 minutes, re-tighten the self-locking nut again to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7556 - Cut and remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the front wheelhouse. - Check the front damper extension and damper housing position, and check for damage. If necessary, remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the damper housing and front damper extension as an assembly, if possible. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7557 - Replace the front damper extension, damper housing, and damper housing extension as an assembly. Installation 1. Set the new damper housing assembly, front wheelhouse, and front bulkhead into position, and measure the front compartment diagonally. Check the body dimensions. 2. Tack weld the clamped position. 3. Temporarily install the front sub-frame, and check the front side frame position. 4. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, and check for difference in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 5. Do the main welding. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7558 - Weld the damper housing and front side frame. - Weld the front damper extension and dashboard upper side member. - From the passenger compartment side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower, damper housing extension, and front damper extension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7559 - From the wheelhouse side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard upper and damper housing extension. - Weld the front wheelhouse, damper housing, and front side - Weld the wheelhouse upper member. When replacing the front wheelhouse only, but weld the wheelhouse upper member. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 7564 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7565 Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Replacement Subframe Torque After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 01-054 Date: 011120 Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise 01-054 November 20, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Suspension Noise (Supersedes 01-054, dated August 7, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM When driving over bumps, a popping, crunching, or knocking noise is heard. PROBABLE CAUSE The lower coils of the front spring are coming into contact with one another. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the front spring(s). VEHICLES AFFECTED Canada - Produced Vehicles: 4-door LX A/T: Up to VIN 2HGES165.1H585712 4-door EX A/T: Up to VIN 2HGE5267.1H585650 Japan-Produced Vehicles: 4-door LX A/T: Up to VIN JHMES1...1S007465 4-door EX A/T: Up to VIN JHMES2...1S003416 US-Produced Vehicles: 2-door EX A/T: Up to VIN 1HGEM....1L086364 4-door EX/LX A/T: Up to VIN 1HGES....1L058297 TOOL INFORMATION Ball Joint Remover: T/N 07MAC-5L00200 Strut Compressor: Model No. BRN-7200 (available through The Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857) PARTS INFORMATION Front Spring: P/N 51401-55A-A41, H/C 6775373 Locknut: P/N 90213-5J6-004, H/C 5411202 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51401-55A-G33 H/C 6560445 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7574 Defect Code: 012 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Inspect the lower two coils of each front spring for an indication of contact with one another. ^ If you see scrape marks where paint is missing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no scrape marks, proceed with normal troubleshooting. Disclaimer Repair Procedure 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the front wheel. 3. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end. 4. Loosen the hex nut on the tie-rod end, and make the nut flush with the end to prevent damage to the threads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7575 5. Apply grease on the ball joint remover at the areas shown to ease installation of the tool and to prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 6. Use the ball joint remover to disconnect the tie-rod end from the steering arm on the damper. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 7. Remove the wheel sensor harness bracket and the brake hose bracket from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector or the brake hose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7576 8. Remove the damper pinch bolts and nuts. 9. Remove the flange nuts from the top of the damper. 10. Lower the lower arm, and remove the damper assembly. 11. Compress the spring with the strut compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions. Remove the locknut while holding the damper shaft Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7577 with a hex wrench. Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the locknut. 12. Release the pressure from the strut compressor, then remove and discard the old spring. 13. Install the new spring. 14. Install all the parts except the locknut onto the damper unit. Seat the end of the spring in the stepped part of the lower spring seat as shown. 15. Align the hole in the upper spring seat with the arrow on the damper mounting base. Position the hole and the arrow so they point toward the knuckle mounting area. 16. Compress the spring with the strut compressor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7578 17. Install a new locknut onto the damper shaft. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench while *tightening the nut to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). Remove the damper assembly from the strut compressor.* 18. Lower the lower arm, and position the damper assembly in the body. 19. Loosely install the flange nuts onto the top of the strut. 20. Position the bottom of the damper on the knuckle. Install the damper pinch bolts and nuts, and lightly tighten the nuts. 21. Place a floor jack under the lower arm ball joint, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. Do not place the jack against the flat section of the lower arm because it might bend the arm. 22. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 23. Tighten the damper pinch nuts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft). 24. Connect the tie-rod end to the steering arm. Tighten the nut to 43 N.m (32 lb-ft). Install the cotter pin. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7579 25. Install the brake hose bracket. Tighten the bolt to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). 26. Install the wheel sensor harness bracket. Tighten the bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 27. Install the front wheel. 28. If necessary, repeat steps 2 thru 27 for the other front spring. 29. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it it necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 01-054 Date: 011120 Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise 01-054 November 20, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Front Suspension Noise (Supersedes 01-054, dated August 7, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM When driving over bumps, a popping, crunching, or knocking noise is heard. PROBABLE CAUSE The lower coils of the front spring are coming into contact with one another. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the front spring(s). VEHICLES AFFECTED Canada - Produced Vehicles: 4-door LX A/T: Up to VIN 2HGES165.1H585712 4-door EX A/T: Up to VIN 2HGE5267.1H585650 Japan-Produced Vehicles: 4-door LX A/T: Up to VIN JHMES1...1S007465 4-door EX A/T: Up to VIN JHMES2...1S003416 US-Produced Vehicles: 2-door EX A/T: Up to VIN 1HGEM....1L086364 4-door EX/LX A/T: Up to VIN 1HGES....1L058297 TOOL INFORMATION Ball Joint Remover: T/N 07MAC-5L00200 Strut Compressor: Model No. BRN-7200 (available through The Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857) PARTS INFORMATION Front Spring: P/N 51401-55A-A41, H/C 6775373 Locknut: P/N 90213-5J6-004, H/C 5411202 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51401-55A-G33 H/C 6560445 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7585 Defect Code: 012 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Inspect the lower two coils of each front spring for an indication of contact with one another. ^ If you see scrape marks where paint is missing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no scrape marks, proceed with normal troubleshooting. Disclaimer Repair Procedure 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. 2. Remove the front wheel. 3. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end. 4. Loosen the hex nut on the tie-rod end, and make the nut flush with the end to prevent damage to the threads. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7586 5. Apply grease on the ball joint remover at the areas shown to ease installation of the tool and to prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 6. Use the ball joint remover to disconnect the tie-rod end from the steering arm on the damper. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it. 7. Remove the wheel sensor harness bracket and the brake hose bracket from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector or the brake hose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7587 8. Remove the damper pinch bolts and nuts. 9. Remove the flange nuts from the top of the damper. 10. Lower the lower arm, and remove the damper assembly. 11. Compress the spring with the strut compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions. Remove the locknut while holding the damper shaft Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7588 with a hex wrench. Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the locknut. 12. Release the pressure from the strut compressor, then remove and discard the old spring. 13. Install the new spring. 14. Install all the parts except the locknut onto the damper unit. Seat the end of the spring in the stepped part of the lower spring seat as shown. 15. Align the hole in the upper spring seat with the arrow on the damper mounting base. Position the hole and the arrow so they point toward the knuckle mounting area. 16. Compress the spring with the strut compressor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7589 17. Install a new locknut onto the damper shaft. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench while *tightening the nut to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). Remove the damper assembly from the strut compressor.* 18. Lower the lower arm, and position the damper assembly in the body. 19. Loosely install the flange nuts onto the top of the strut. 20. Position the bottom of the damper on the knuckle. Install the damper pinch bolts and nuts, and lightly tighten the nuts. 21. Place a floor jack under the lower arm ball joint, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. Do not place the jack against the flat section of the lower arm because it might bend the arm. 22. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 23. Tighten the damper pinch nuts to 103 N.m (76 lb-ft). 24. Connect the tie-rod end to the steering arm. Tighten the nut to 43 N.m (32 lb-ft). Install the cotter pin. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): > 01-054 > Nov > 01 > Front Suspension - Popping/Crunching/Knocking Noise > Page 7590 25. Install the brake hose bracket. Tighten the bolt to 22 N.m (16 lb-ft). 26. Install the wheel sensor harness bracket. Tighten the bolt to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 27. Install the front wheel. 28. If necessary, repeat steps 2 thru 27 for the other front spring. 29. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it it necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 7593 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Damper/Spring Replacement Special Tools Required Strut spring compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent, commercially available Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7596 2. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and remove the nut (B). 3. Disconnect the tie-rod end from the steering arm on the damper using the special tool. 4. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the wheel sensor harness bracket (B) and brake hose bracket (C) from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7597 6. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the damper. 7. Lower the lower arm, and remove the damper assembly (B). Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring. 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7598 1. Install all the parts except the self-locking nut onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B) as illustrated. The hole in the upper spring seat and the arrow on the damper mounting base must point toward the knuckle mounting area. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (C). 3. Compress the damper spring with the strut spring compressor. 4. Install a new self-locking nut (A) on the damper shaft. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation 1. Lower the lower arm, and position the damper assembly in the body. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (A) onto the top of the damper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7599 3. Position the damper bottom on the knuckle, and install the damper pinch bolts (A) and nuts (B), and lightly tighten the nuts. 4. Place the floor jack under the lower arm ball joint, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. NOTICE: Do not place the jack against the flat section of the lower arm. Lifting the arm in this area might bend it. 5. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to the specified torque. 6. Tighten the damper pinch nuts to the specified torque. 7. Connect the tie-rod end to the steering arm, and tighten the nut (A) to the specified torque. Install the cotter pin (B) after tightening, and bend its end as shown. 8. Install the brake hose bracket and the flange bolt onto the damper, and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7600 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Damper/Spring Removal and Installation Removal 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7601 2. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the damper. 3. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the damper in the trunk. 4. Remove the damper assembly from the body. Disassembly/Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7602 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring. 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding during these tests. Reassembly 1. Install all the parts except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B), and align the damper mounting base as shown. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (C). 3. Compress the damper spring with the strut spring compressor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7603 4. Install the washer (A) and a new self-locking nut (B) on the damper shaft. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation 1. Position the damper assembly in the body. Note the direction of the damper mounting base so that the small hole dot on it is toward the front and inside of the vehicle. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (A) onto the top of the damper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7604 3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. 4. Raise the suspension with a floor jack to load the vehicle's weight, and tighten the nuts and bolt to the specified torque values. 5. Clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel. 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Front Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Front TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Damper Shaft Nut ................................................................................................................................ ............................... 44 N.m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 lbf-ft) Upper Flange Nut ............................................................................................................................................................ 59 N.m ((6.0 kgf-m, 43 ft. lbs.) Damper Pinch Bolt 01-02 models.................................................................................................................................. 103 N.m (10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 ft-lb) Damper Pinch Bolt 03 model ......................................................................................................................................... 157 N.m (16.0 kgf-m, 116 ft-lb) Brake Hose Bracket Bolt ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 N.m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 lbf-ft) Wheel Sensor Bracket ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 lbf-ft) Tie-rod End to Steer Arm ................................................................................................................................................ 44 N.m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 lbf-ft) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 7609 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Rear TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Damper Shaft Nut ................................................................................................................................ ................................ 29 N.m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 lbf-ft) Upper Flange Nut .................................................. .............................................................................................................................. 59 N.m (43 ft. lbs.) Rear Lower Bolt ................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 61 N.m (45 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 7612 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Damper/Spring Replacement Special Tools Required Strut spring compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent, commercially available Removal 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the front wheels. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7615 2. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and remove the nut (B). 3. Disconnect the tie-rod end from the steering arm on the damper using the special tool. 4. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the wheel sensor harness bracket (B) and brake hose bracket (C) from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7616 6. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the damper. 7. Lower the lower arm, and remove the damper assembly (B). Disassembly/Inspection 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring. 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests. Reassembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7617 1. Install all the parts except the self-locking nut onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B) as illustrated. The hole in the upper spring seat and the arrow on the damper mounting base must point toward the knuckle mounting area. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (C). 3. Compress the damper spring with the strut spring compressor. 4. Install a new self-locking nut (A) on the damper shaft. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation 1. Lower the lower arm, and position the damper assembly in the body. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (A) onto the top of the damper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7618 3. Position the damper bottom on the knuckle, and install the damper pinch bolts (A) and nuts (B), and lightly tighten the nuts. 4. Place the floor jack under the lower arm ball joint, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. NOTICE: Do not place the jack against the flat section of the lower arm. Lifting the arm in this area might bend it. 5. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to the specified torque. 6. Tighten the damper pinch nuts to the specified torque. 7. Connect the tie-rod end to the steering arm, and tighten the nut (A) to the specified torque. Install the cotter pin (B) after tightening, and bend its end as shown. 8. Install the brake hose bracket and the flange bolt onto the damper, and tighten the bolt to the specified torque. 9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7619 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Damper/Spring Removal and Installation Removal 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7620 2. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the damper. 3. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the damper in the trunk. 4. Remove the damper assembly from the body. Disassembly/Inspection Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7621 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially available strut spring compressor (A) according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the Exploded View. 3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring. 4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced. 5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding during these tests. Reassembly 1. Install all the parts except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B), and align the damper mounting base as shown. 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially available strut spring compressor (C). 3. Compress the damper spring with the strut spring compressor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7622 4. Install the washer (A) and a new self-locking nut (B) on the damper shaft. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque. Installation 1. Position the damper assembly in the body. Note the direction of the damper mounting base so that the small hole dot on it is toward the front and inside of the vehicle. 2. Loosely install the flange nuts (A) onto the top of the damper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7623 3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. 4. Raise the suspension with a floor jack to load the vehicle's weight, and tighten the nuts and bolt to the specified torque values. 5. Clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel. 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair Trailing Arm: Service and Repair Removal/Installation 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the knuckle. 3. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A) to support it. 4. Remove the flange nut (B), and disconnect the stabilizer link (C) from the trailing arm. 5. Remove the flange bolt (D), and disconnect the damper (E) from the trailing arm. 6. Remove the trailing arm front mounting bolts (A). 7. Remove the trailing arm rear mounting bolt (A). Note: Do not loosen the special bolts (B) on the trailing arm. 8. Lower the jack, and remove the trailing arm. 9. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: ^ First install all the suspension components and lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a jack under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7627 to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque values. ^ Tighten all the mounting hardware to the specified torque values. ^ Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. ^ Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel bearings End play Front 0 - 0.05 mm Rear 0 - 0.05 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 7633 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7634 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the wheels. 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc or drum securely against the hub. 3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as shown, and measure the bearing end play moving the brake disc or drum inward and outward. Bearing end play: Standard: Front/Rear: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 - Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 - Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 - Driver 07749-0010000 - Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7637 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7638 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7639 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7640 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7641 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. - Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. - Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7642 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Hub Bearing Unit Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7643 3. Remove the hub cap (A), raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 4. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 5. Remove the brake drum (A), and remove the hub bearing unit (B) from the spindle. If the brake drum has stuck to the hub bearing unit, pull them out together. Do not tap on the aluminum brake drum. 6. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. - Use a new hub cap on reassembly. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lift and Support Points NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist. Frame Hoist 1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear support points (C). 2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently to be sure it is firmly supported. 3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift points for solid contact with the lift blocks. Safety Stands To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always use safety stands when working on or under any vehicle that is supported only by a jack. Floor Jack 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted. 3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the gearshift lever in reverse (or the automatic transmission in [P] position). 4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it. 5. Position the safety stands under the support points and adjust them so the vehicle will level. 6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 7656 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Tires: Mechanical Specifications Design Specifications Tires Size of front and rear tire U.S.: DX, HX, LX ................................................................................................................................. ........................................... P185/70R14 87S Canada: DX, LX .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... P185/70R14 87S U.S.: EX ........................................................................................................................................................ ................................... P185/65R15 86H Canada: SI .......................................................................... .............................................................................................................. P185/65R15 86H Size of spare tires U.S.: DX, HX, LX ................................................................................................................................. .......................................... T115/70D14 88M Canada: DX, LX ........................................................... ................................................................................................................... T115/70D14 88M U.S.: EX, LX with ABS .................................................................................................................................. ................................ T125/70D15 95M Canada: SI, DX, LX with ABS ....................................................................................................................................................... T125/70D15 95M Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7659 Tires: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Tire Pressure Front/rear 210 kPa Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7660 Tire Information Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7661 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (l) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications Wheels: Specifications Aluminum wheel Runout Axial Standard or new 0 - 0.7 mm Service limit 2.0 mm Radial Standard or new 0 - 0.7 mm Service limit 1.5 mm Steel wheel Runout Axial Standard or new 0 - 1.0 mm Service limit 2.0 mm Radial Standard or new 0 - 1.0 mm Service limit 1.5 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7665 Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7666 Wheels: Testing and Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the axial runout by turning the wheel. Front and Rear Wheel axial runout: Standard: Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and measure the radial runout. Front and Rear Wheel radial runout: Standard: Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Steel Wheel: 0 - 1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, cheek the wheel bearing end play. 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel bearings End play Front 0 - 0.05 mm Rear 0 - 0.05 mm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 7672 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7673 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection End Play Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Remove the wheels. 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the brake disc or drum securely against the hub. 3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as shown, and measure the bearing end play moving the brake disc or drum inward and outward. Bearing end play: Standard: Front/Rear: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement Special Tools Required Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100 - Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 - Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 - Driver 07749-0010000 - Support base 07965-SD90100 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7676 3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). 4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force. 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B), then remove and discard the nut. 6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A). 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7677 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. 9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E). 10. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and remove the castle nut (B). NOTE: During installation, insert the lock pin into the ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the lock pin from the inside to the outside of the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using the special too. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7678 12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts. 13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a plastic hammer while pulling the knuckle outward, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The driveshaft joint may come off. 14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. 15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially available bearing separator (C), and a press. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7679 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C). 17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a press. 18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. 19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7680 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B) using the special tools and a press. 23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle. - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it. - Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the new spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. - Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7681 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Hub Bearing Unit Replacement 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and rear wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7682 3. Remove the hub cap (A), raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C). 4. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a time to prevent cocking the drum excessively. 5. Remove the brake drum (A), and remove the hub bearing unit (B) from the spindle. If the brake drum has stuck to the hub bearing unit, pull them out together. Do not tap on the aluminum brake drum. 6. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. - Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the hub and the inside of the brake drum. - Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. - Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the spindle. - Use a new hub cap on reassembly. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake drum and the inside of the wheel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations 75. Behind Recir-A/C-Rear Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7694 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel and Push Switch Assembly Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), then remove the self-tapping screws and the heater control panel (B) from the center panel (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the push switch assembly (D) from the center panel. 3. Install the control panel and the push switch assembly in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly. 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7699 66. Under Left Side Of Dash 91. Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7702 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7703 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7704 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7705 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7706 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7707 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7708 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7709 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7710 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7711 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7712 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7713 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7714 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7715 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7716 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7717 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7718 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7719 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7720 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7721 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7722 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7723 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7724 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7725 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7726 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7727 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7728 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7729 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7730 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7731 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7732 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7733 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7734 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Connector Views 180. Air Mix Control Motor 183. Mode Control Motor 184. Recirculation Control Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7736 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The heater control unit-panel controls the blower controls, air delivery, and A/C compressor controls automatically. With the ignition switch in ON (II), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14. The control unit is grounded at G502. Air Delivery The heater control unit-panel controls the blower motor and supplies a 5 VDC reference voltage to the air mixture control motor. The air mix and mode control motors each receive inputs from the control unit. The air mix motor regulates the mixture of cold and hot air by varying the position of the heater-evaporator door. The mode control motor controls the direction and volume of outlet air. Use the mode control dial to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard corner vents in all modes. Both the air mix control motor and mode control motor are grounded by the control unit. The recirculation control motor receives battery voltage through fuse 14 when the ignition switch is ON (II). It regulates the position of the fresh/recirc door, and is controlled by the heater control unit-panel when the recirculation button is pressed at the recir-A/C-rear defogger switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Mix Control Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air mix control motor. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If the air mix control motor does not run, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement. If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor. - If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as needed, - If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 3. 3. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 k to 7.8 kOhm. 4. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No.3 and No.7 terminals. Max Cool - about 1 V Max Hot - about 4 V 6. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 7739 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Mode Control Motor Test Mode Control Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No.2 terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately. 3. If the mode control motor does not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. - If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4. 4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 kOhm range. With the mode control motor running as in step 2, check for continuity between the No.3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals and the No.7 terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal. 5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 7740 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.14 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of the recirculation control motor 7P connector and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.14 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the recirculation control motor. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Test the recirculation control motor. Is the recirculation control motor OK? YES - Go to step 7. NO - Go to step 12. 7. Disconnect heater control panel connector A (14P). 8. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.6 terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P) and body ground individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. NO - Go to step 9. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 7741 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same wires for voltage. Is there any voltage? YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the heater control panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the heater control panel. NO - Go to step 10. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the following terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P) and the recirculation control motor 7P connector. 14P: 7P: No.5 No.7 No.6 No.5 Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at heater control panel connector A (14P) and at the recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original heater control panel. NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the heater control panel and the recirculation control motor. 12. Remove the recirculation control motor. 13. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. Do the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly? YES - Replace the recirculation control motor. NO - Repair the recirculation control linkage or doors. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Air Mix Control Motor Test > Page 7742 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor Test 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation control motor. NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No.5 and No.7 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No.5 or No.7 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh or Recirculate. Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement. - If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. - If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Mix Control Motor Air Mix Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the air mix control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 7745 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Control Motor Mode Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws and the mode control motor from the heater unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pins on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 7746 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Recirculation Control Motor Recirculation Control Motor Replacement 1. Remove the ECM/PCM. 2. Remove the bolt and the bracket (A). Disconnect the 7P connector (B) and the harness clip (C) from the recirculation control motor (D). Remove the self-tapping screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Position Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: Customer Interest A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust 01-089 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL September 25, 2001 Center Vents Are Hard to Adjust PROBLEM The center vent adjustment tab comes off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the left and right center vents. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841145 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour (both center vents) Failed Part: P/N 77251-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6459010 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B01 Template ID: 01-089A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (six clips). Unplug the accessory power socket 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7758 2. Remove the center panel mounting bolts. Carefully remove the center panel by releasing the bottom clips first, then releasing the clips on the sides and the top (nine clips). 3. Unplug the hazard warning switch 10P connector. While holding the center panel, pack clean shop towels into the center panel opening to keep the instrument panel from getting scratched. Rest the center panel on the shop towels. 4. Remove the duct from the back of the center panel (four screws and two clips). 5. Replace the left and right center vents. 6. Reinstall the duct. 7. Make sure the antenna lead is still plugged in. 8. Remove the shop towels, then plug in the hazard warning switch 10p connector. 9. Reinstall the center panel. Torque the mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 10. Plug in the accessory power socket 2P connector. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover. 11. Check the operation of the radio and the center vents to make sure they work properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7759 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust 01-089 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL September 25, 2001 Center Vents Are Hard to Adjust PROBLEM The center vent adjustment tab comes off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the left and right center vents. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841145 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour (both center vents) Failed Part: P/N 77251-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6459010 Defect Code: 032 Contention Code: B01 Template ID: 01-089A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (six clips). Unplug the accessory power socket 2P connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7765 2. Remove the center panel mounting bolts. Carefully remove the center panel by releasing the bottom clips first, then releasing the clips on the sides and the top (nine clips). 3. Unplug the hazard warning switch 10P connector. While holding the center panel, pack clean shop towels into the center panel opening to keep the instrument panel from getting scratched. Rest the center panel on the shop towels. 4. Remove the duct from the back of the center panel (four screws and two clips). 5. Replace the left and right center vents. 6. Reinstall the duct. 7. Make sure the antenna lead is still plugged in. 8. Remove the shop towels, then plug in the hazard warning switch 10p connector. 9. Reinstall the center panel. Torque the mounting bolts to 5 N.m (4 lb-ft). 10. Plug in the accessory power socket 2P connector. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover. 11. Check the operation of the radio and the center vents to make sure they work properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 01-089 > Sep > 01 > A/C, Dash - Center Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7766 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Heater Blower Motor Gets Hot or Blows a Fuse APPLIES TO: 1990-04 Accords, 1992-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2000-04 Insights, 1995-04 Odysseys, 1996-02 Passports, 2003-04 Pilots, 1997-01 Preludes, and 2000-04 S2000s SERVICE TIP: A blocked cooling hose for the heater blower motor can cause the motor to overheat, draw more current, blow a fuse, or even melt its plastic impeller. Before you order a replacement blower motor, make sure the cooling hose isn't blocked. On some models, you'll find the cooling hose molded into the blower motor housing; on other models, it's a separate piece. Check the S/M for the vehicle you're working on to determine the actual location of the cooling hose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Blower Motor: Mechanical Specifications Air conditioning Blower Type Radial fan Motor input 190W/ 12V Speed control 9-speed Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7773 Blower Motor: Capacity Specifications Air conditioning Blower Maximum capacity 480 m3/h Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7774 Blower Motor: Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7775 99. Under Right Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7778 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7779 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7780 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7781 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7782 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7783 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7784 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7785 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7786 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7787 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7788 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7789 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7790 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7791 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7792 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7793 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7794 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7795 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7796 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7797 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7798 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7799 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7800 30. Blower Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7801 Blower Motor: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The heater control panel controls the blower controls, air delivery, and A/C compressor controls automatically. With the ignition switch in ON (II), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14. The control unit is grounded at G502. Blower Controls You can manually select the fan speed by turning the fan control dial clockwise, from the OFF position. Turning the dial further clockwise increases the fan's speed, which increases air flow. Battery voltage is applied through fuse 14 to the blower motor relay contacts at all times. With the ignition switch ON (II), the blower motor relay in the under-hood fuse/relay box is energized which feeds battery voltage to the blower motor. The blower power transistor controls the blower motor in all speeds except HIGH. The blower power transistor is controlled by the heater control panel. When the control panel requests HIGH blower speed, the blower power transistor grounds the blower motor which connects it directly to ground, making the blower run at high speed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Blower Unit Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover, the right kick panel, and the glove box. 2. Remove the bolt, then cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown. Remove and discard the plastic cross brace. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and the glove box frame (B). 4. Remove the ECM/PCM. 5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower motor, the power transistor, and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7804 6. Fold the carpet and pad back toward you. Remove the mounting bolts, the mounting nut, and the blower unit. 7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make sure that there is no air leakage. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7805 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Components Replacement Blower Unit Components Replacement Note these items when overhauling the blower unit: - The recirculation control motor (A), the power transistor (B), the blower motor (C), and the dust and pollen filters (with A/C) (D) can be replaced without removing the blower unit. - Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly. - After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7809 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7810 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7811 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement (With Air Conditioning) The dust and pollen filters should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever comes first. Replace the filters more often if the air flow is less than usual. 1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on each side, then hang the glove box down. 2. Remove the filter lid (A) from the blower unit, then pull out the first dust and pollen filter (B). Slide the second filter to the left, and pull it out. 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter. 4. Install the filters in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Cabin Ventilation Duct: Procedures Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7819 Cabin Ventilation Duct: Removal and Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B) Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Compressor Clutch: Electrical Specifications Air conditioning Compressor clutch Electrical power consumption at 68 deg F (20 deg C) 42W maximum at 12V Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 7825 Compressor Clutch: Mechanical Specifications Air conditioning Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive Pulley-to-Pressure Plate Clearance 0.020 +/- 0.006 in Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Compressor Clutch Check Compressor Clutch Check 1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. 2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. 3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A) and the armature plate (B) all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, remove the armature plate and add or remove shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance. Clearance: 0.5 ± 0.15 mm (0.020 ± 0.006 in.) NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm. 01 Model Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 7828 4. Release the field coil connector from the holder, then disconnect it (01 model). Check the thermal protector for continuity. If there is no continuity, replace the thermal protector. NOTE: The thermal protector will have no continuity above 252 to 262 °F (122 to 128 °C). When the temperature drops below 241 to 219 °F (116 to 104 °C), the thermal protector will have continuity. 5. Release the field coil connector from the holder, then disconnect it. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 7829 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Compressor Clutch Circuit Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting Note: Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also inoperative with the A/C on. refer to the Symptom Troubleshooting index. See: Testing and Inspection - Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for power train DTCs. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 1. Check the No.1 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.14 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. 2. Check the engine coolant temperature, throttle position, and idle speed (use the Honda PGM Tester PGM-FI data list if possible). Is the coolant temperature, throttle position, and idle speed okay? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Troubleshoot and repair the cause of the high engine coolant temperature, low idle, or excessively high throttle position sensor reading. 3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Is the relay OK? YES - Go to step 4. NO - Replace the compressor clutch relay. 4. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 7830 5. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper wire. Does the compressor clutch click ? YES - Go to step 6. NO - 01 Model: Go to step 14. 02-04 Model: Go to step 17. 6. Disconnect the jumper wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Measure the voltage between the No.3 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.14 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the compressor clutch relay. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay. 11. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage between the No.18 terminal of ECM/PCM connector E (31P) and body ground with the ECM/PCM Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Compressor Clutch Check > Page 7831 connectors connected. Is there battery voltage? YES - Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between the compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. 14. Disconnect the jumper wire. 15. Disconnect the compressor clutch 1P connector. 16. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the No.1 terminal of the compressor clutch 1P connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check the compressor clutch clearance, the thermal protector, and the compressor clutch field coil. NO - Repair open in the wire between the compressor clutch relay and the compressor clutch. 17. Disconnect the jumper wire. 18. Disconnect the compressor clutch 3P connector. 19. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the No.2 terminal of the compressor clutch 3P connector. Is there continuity? YES - Check the compressor clutch clearance and the compressor clutch field coil. NO - Repair open in the wire between the compressor clutch relay and the compressor clutch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7832 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Compressor Clutch Overhaul Special Tool Required A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, commercially available 1. Remove the center nut (A) while holding the armature plate with a commercially available A/C clutch holder (B). 2. Remove the armature plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the armature plate, and recheck its clearance. NOTE: The shims are available in four thickness: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm. 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley or the compressor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7833 4. Remove the bolt and holder (A), then disconnect the field coil connector (B). Loosen the clamp screw (c) to free the field coil wire. Remove the snap ring (d) with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (E). Be careful not to damage the field coil or the compressor. 5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: - Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the compressor. - Clean the rotor pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum solvent. - Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove. - Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. - Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the rotor pulley. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7837 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7838 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7839 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7840 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7841 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7842 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Condenser HVAC: Specifications Air conditioning Condenser Type Corrugated fin Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7846 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the front bumper. 3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge line (A) and the condenser line (B) from the condenser. Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination. 4. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the condenser by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the radiator or the condenser fins when removing the condenser. 5. Install the condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7847 - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Be careful not to damage the radiator or the condenser fins when installing the condenser. - Charge the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations 44. Behind A/C Condenser Fan Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7852 23. A/C Condenser Fan Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7856 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7857 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7858 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7859 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7860 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Assembly: Locations 74. Behind Heater Control Unit-Panel Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7866 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7867 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7868 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7869 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7870 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7871 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7872 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7873 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7874 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7875 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7876 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7877 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7878 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7879 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7880 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7881 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7882 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7883 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7884 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7885 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7886 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7887 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagnostic Aids > Page 7888 230. Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Control Assembly: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting 1. Check the No.14 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step2. NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. 2. Disconnect heater control panel connector A (14P). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Measure the voltage between the No.14 terminal of heater control panel connector A (14P) and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.14 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the heater control panel. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Check for continuity between the No.13 terminal of heater control panel connector A (14P) and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at heater control panel connector A (14P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original heater control panel. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the heater control panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G502. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 7891 Heater Control Panel Inputs And Outputs Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7892 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel and Push Switch Assembly Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), then remove the self-tapping screws and the heater control panel (B) from the center panel (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the push switch assembly (D) from the center panel. 3. Install the control panel and the push switch assembly in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly. 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7902 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7903 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7904 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7905 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7906 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7907 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7908 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7909 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7910 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7911 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7912 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7913 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7914 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7915 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7916 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7917 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7918 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7919 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7920 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7921 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7922 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7923 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7924 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7925 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7926 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7927 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7928 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7929 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Specifications > Design Specifications Evaporator Core: Specifications Air conditioning Evaporator Type Corrugated fin Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Specifications > Design Specifications > Page 7937 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7938 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Evaporator Core Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator core. 3. Remove the blower unit. 4. Remove the bolt and the ECM/PCM bracket (A). Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion valve cover (B). 5. Carefully pull out the evaporator core without bending the pipes. 6. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. - Charge the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet Evaporator Drain Tube: Customer Interest Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet 01-034 February 27, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic DX 4-door From VIN 2HGES1...1H513980 thru 2HGES1...1H521057 2001 Civic LX 4-door - From VIN 2HGES1...1H509287 thru 2HGES1...1H521445 2001 Civic EX 4-door From VIN 2HGES2...1H512645 thru 2HGES2...1H521206 Passenger's Side Carpet Gets Wet With the A/C On SYMPTOM The front passenger's footwell carpet gets wet when the air conditioning is used. PROBABLE CAUSE The A/C evaporator drain tube is blocked because of a casting error. CORRECTIVE ACTION Drill an opening in the drain tube. TOOL INFORMATION A specially designed drill bit is required to complete this repair. American Honda Special Tools is automatically shipping this drill bit to all dealers. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 7947 2 Remove the drain hose from the evaporator drain tube. 3. Wrap a piece of tape around the shank 3 inches from the tip of either a 7 mm or 19/64 in. drill bit. 4. Insert the drill bit into the drain tube. ^ If you can insert the drill bit into the drain tube up to the tape, the drain tube is not blocked. Troubleshoot other causes for the wet carpet. ^ If you cannot insert the drill bit up to the tape, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Insert the specially designed drill bit into the evaporator drain tube. 2. Use an air ratchet with a 12 mm flex socket and extension to reach through the suspension and connect to the drill bit. 3. Drill out the drain tube. Stop when the end of the drill bit reaches the end of the drain tube. Do not damage the end of the drain tube. 4. Remove the drill bit. Clean any debris out of the drain tube. 5. Reinstall the drain hose onto the drain tube. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 7948 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet Evaporator Drain Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet 01-034 February 27, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic DX 4-door From VIN 2HGES1...1H513980 thru 2HGES1...1H521057 2001 Civic LX 4-door - From VIN 2HGES1...1H509287 thru 2HGES1...1H521445 2001 Civic EX 4-door From VIN 2HGES2...1H512645 thru 2HGES2...1H521206 Passenger's Side Carpet Gets Wet With the A/C On SYMPTOM The front passenger's footwell carpet gets wet when the air conditioning is used. PROBABLE CAUSE The A/C evaporator drain tube is blocked because of a casting error. CORRECTIVE ACTION Drill an opening in the drain tube. TOOL INFORMATION A specially designed drill bit is required to complete this repair. American Honda Special Tools is automatically shipping this drill bit to all dealers. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 7954 2 Remove the drain hose from the evaporator drain tube. 3. Wrap a piece of tape around the shank 3 inches from the tip of either a 7 mm or 19/64 in. drill bit. 4. Insert the drill bit into the drain tube. ^ If you can insert the drill bit into the drain tube up to the tape, the drain tube is not blocked. Troubleshoot other causes for the wet carpet. ^ If you cannot insert the drill bit up to the tape, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Insert the specially designed drill bit into the evaporator drain tube. 2. Use an air ratchet with a 12 mm flex socket and extension to reach through the suspension and connect to the drill bit. 3. Drill out the drain tube. Stop when the end of the drill bit reaches the end of the drain tube. Do not damage the end of the drain tube. 4. Remove the drill bit. Clean any debris out of the drain tube. 5. Reinstall the drain hose onto the drain tube. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Drain Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Drain Tube: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 7955 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7960 82. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7961 43. Evapoator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7962 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The heater control panel controls the blower controls, air delivery, and A/C compressor controls automatically. With the ignition switch in ON (II), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14. The control unit is grounded at G502. Evaporator Temperature Sensor The evaporator temperature sensor is located on the evaporator housing. If the temperature at the evaporator gets too cold, the evaporator temperature sensor sends a signal to the heater control panel to turn off the A/C compressor clutch. This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking air delivery into the passenger compartment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7963 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance, 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7964 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Turn the evaporator temperature sensor counterclockwise to the stop, and carefully pull out it. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Expansion Valve: Service and Repair The expansion valve is located on the evaporator core. Refer to the Evaporator Core/Case for service and repair. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 7973 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7974 Heater Control Valve Cable: Adjustments Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). 2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C). 3. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool with the ignition switch ON (II). 4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C) to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cool Air At Idle Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cool Air At Idle Heater Blows Cool Air When Coming to a Stop or at Idle Got a 01-05 Civic with a heater that blows warm air while driving but starts blowing Cool air when coming to a stop or at idle? What's most likely causing this problem is air trapped in the heater core. To fix this problem, you've got to bleed the cooling system (replacing the thermostat won't do the trick). Here's how you do it: 1. Fill the reserve tank with Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 50 the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the tank. 2. Remove the radiator cap. Make sure the coolant level is up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if needed. 3. Loosely install the radiator cap. 4. Set the temperature control knob to maximum. 5. Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). Shut off the engine. 6. Remove the radiator cap. Make sure the coolant level is up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if needed. 7. Securely install the radiator cap. 8. Start the engine, and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7979 Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7980 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater core. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting bolt and the heater valve as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7981 8. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 9. Remove the dashboard. 10. Remove the blower unit. 11. Disconnect the drain hose (A), then remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit (B). 12. Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion valve cover (A). With air conditioning; carefully pull out the evaporator core (B) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. Remove the self-tapping screws and the flange cover (C), then remove the grommet (D), and carefully pull out the heater core (E) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. 13. Install the heater core and the evaporator core (with A/C) in the reverse order of removal. 14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7982 - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Be sure to connect the drain hose securely. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - With air conditioning, refer to evaporator core replacement. - Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7986 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Heater Unit/Core Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core. 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C) from the heater core. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 7. Remove the mounting bolt and the heater valve as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7987 8. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc. 9. Remove the dashboard. 10. Remove the blower unit. 11. Disconnect the drain hose (A), then remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit (B). 12. Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion valve cover (A). With air conditioning; carefully pull out the evaporator core (B) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. Remove the self-tapping screws and the flange cover (C), then remove the grommet (D), and carefully pull out the heater core (E) so you don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes. 13. Install the heater core and the evaporator core (with A/C) in the reverse order of removal. 14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 7988 - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Be sure to connect the drain hose securely. - Adjust the heater valve cable. - Make sure that there is no coolant leakage. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - With air conditioning, refer to evaporator core replacement. - Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7992 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Relief Valve Replacement 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the cover (A), the relief valve (B), and the O-ring (C). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the compressor oil from running out. 3. Clean the mating surfaces. 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it. 5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve. 6. Charge the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations 98. Under Right Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7999 135. Blower Power Transistor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Power Transistor HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8000 Power Transistor HVAC: Testing and Inspection Power Transistor Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power transistor. 2. Measure the resistance between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the power transistor. It should be about 1.4 - 1.5 kOhm. - If the resistance is within the specifications, go to step 3. - If the resistance is not within the specifications, replace the power transistor. 3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal (BLU/YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the terminal and insulate it from body ground. 4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor. 5. Supply 12 volts to the No.1 cavity with a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the blower motor runs. - If the blower motor does not run, replace the power transistor. - If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is OK. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 8005 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 8006 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 8007 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity or system .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 500 - 550 g (17.6 - 19.4 oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 8010 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... HFC-134 a (R-134 a) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information Service Procedures The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun. Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone depletion. When CFC's are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules. Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage. Upper Level vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and vegetation. Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat. Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all developed countries. As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased. Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle air conditioning systems. Alternative Refrigerants The introduction of alternative refrigerants, primarily the hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) 134a, aims at preventing further ozone layer depletion. Because 134a is chlorine free, it is deemed ozone safe. Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling certification include: National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2 Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/ International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX 76147-2000 Phone: (817) 338-1100 Fax: (817) 338-1451 Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041 Phone: 215-679-2220 Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/ Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 8013 Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information WARNING ! ! * SHOULD HFC-134A CONTACT YOUR EYE(S), CONSULT A DOCTOR IMMEDIATELY. * DO NOT RUB THE AFFECTED EYE(S). INSTEAD, SPLASH QUANTITIES OF FRESH COLD WATER OVER THE AFFECTED AREA TO GRADUALLY RAISE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE REFRIGERANT ABOVE THE FREEZING POINT. * OBTAIN PROPER MEDICAL TREATMENT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. * SHOULD THE HFC-134A TOUCH THE SKIN, THE INJURY MUST BE TREATED THE SAME AS SKIN WHICH HAS BEEN FROSTBITTEN OR FROZEN. IMPORTANT: * Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working on refrigerant systems. * Beware of the danger of carbon monoxide fumes caused by running the engine. * Beware of discharged refrigerant in enclosed or improperly ventilated garages. * Always disconnect the negative battery cable and discharge and recover the refrigerant whenever repairing the air conditioning system. CAUTION: Avoid breathing A/C Refrigerant-134a and lubricant vapor and mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, and throat. To remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. IMPORTANT: * Do not mix R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant, even in the smallest amounts. R12 and R-134a are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. * Use only the specified lubricant (PAG) for the R-134a A/C system and R-134a components. If you use lubricants other than those specified, compressor failure is likely to occur. Coat all the fittings and the O-ring seals with clean 525 viscosity refrigerant oil in order to provide a leak-proof seal and in order to aid in assembly and disassembly. * Do not store or heat the refrigerant containers above 52 °C (125 °F). * Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame. If the container must be warmed, place the bottom of the container in a pail of warm water. * Do NOT intentionally do the following to the refrigerant containers: Drop - Puncture - Incinerate * Refrigerant will displace oxygen. Work in well ventilated areas in order to prevent suffocation. * Do NOT introduce compressed air to any refrigerant container or refrigerant component. Contamination will occur. * If you must carry a container of DOT CFR Refrigerant-134a in a vehicle, do not carry the refrigerant in the passenger compartment. All of the Refrigerant-134a disposable, blue containers are shipped with a heavy metal screw cap in order to protect the valve and the safety plug of the container from damage. Replace the cap after each use of the container in order to continue the protection. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8014 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Air conditioning systems contain HFC-134a. This is a chemical mixture which requires special handling procedures to avoid personal injury. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test Pressure Test Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 8017 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Refrigerant Leak Test Refrigerant Leak Test Special Tool Required Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM, commercially available WARNING: - Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a combustible vapor. - The vapor can burn or explode causing serious injury. - Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning system. CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to the specified capacity, then close the supply valve, and remove the charging system couplers. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year or better. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), recover the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Pressure Test > Page 8018 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must be evacuated. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery Refrigerant Recovery CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 8021 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Evacuation System Evacuation CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J221 0 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. When an A/C system has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for several hours.) 2. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system. 3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Recovery > Page 8022 Refrigerant: Service and Repair System Charging System Charging CAUTION: - Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. - Be careful when connecting service equipment. - Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Evacuate the system. 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only SANDEN SP-10 refrigerant oil. 4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-1 34a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the compressor will be damaged. Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station. Refrigerant capacity: 500 to 550 g 0.50 to 0.55 kg 1.1 to 1.2 lbs 17.6 to 19.4 oz 5. Check for refrigerant leaks. 6. Check for system performance. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant oil Capacity of components Condenser ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 25 ml (5/6 fl oz) Evaporator ................................................................. .................................................................................................................... 45 ml (1 1/2 fl oz) Each line and hose ....................................................................................................................................... ..................................... 10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Receiver ............................................................................... ............................................................................................................. 10 ml (1/3 fl oz) Compressor . .............................................................................................................................................................. ..... 130 - 150 ml (4 1/3 - 5 fl oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 8027 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Type ................................................................................................................................... SANDEN: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH or 38899-P13-A01) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8028 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement Recommended PAG oil: SANDEN SP-10: - P/N 38897-P13-A01AH: 120 ml (4 fl.oz) - P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 ml (1 1/3 fl.oz) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8029 Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts. - To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off immediately. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8038 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8039 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8040 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8044 Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8045 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8046 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8047 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8048 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8049 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Locations Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8053 Air Conditioning Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8054 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8055 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8056 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8057 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8068 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8069 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8070 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8071 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8072 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8073 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8074 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8075 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8076 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8077 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8078 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8079 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8080 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8081 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8082 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8083 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8084 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8085 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations 75. Behind Recir-A/C-Rear Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8099 Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair Heater Control Panel and Push Switch Assembly Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Remove the dials (A), then remove the self-tapping screws and the heater control panel (B) from the center panel (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the push switch assembly (D) from the center panel. 3. Install the control panel and the push switch assembly in the reverse order of removal. After installation, operate the control panel controls to see whether it works properly. 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that there are no problems in the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Door Position Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations 12. Middle of Engine Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Heating Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8110 82. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8111 43. Evapoator Temperature Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8112 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The heater control panel controls the blower controls, air delivery, and A/C compressor controls automatically. With the ignition switch in ON (II), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 14. The control unit is grounded at G502. Evaporator Temperature Sensor The evaporator temperature sensor is located on the evaporator housing. If the temperature at the evaporator gets too cold, the evaporator temperature sensor sends a signal to the heater control panel to turn off the A/C compressor clutch. This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking air delivery into the passenger compartment. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8113 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance between its terminals. 2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance, 3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8114 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Evaporator Temperature Sensor Replacement 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector clip (C). Turn the evaporator temperature sensor counterclockwise to the stop, and carefully pull out it. 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > A/C Pressure Sensor/Switch - Cooling Fan > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8122 Thermal Limiting Fuse: Service and Repair Compressor Thermal Protector Replacement 1. Remove the bolt, the ground terminal (A), and the holder (B). Disconnect the field coil connector (C), then remove the thermal protector (D). 2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, and apply silicone sealant (B) to the bottom of the thermal protector. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Component Replacement/Inspection After Deployment NOTE: Before doing any SRS repairs, use the PGM Tester SRS menu method to check for DTCs; refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index for the less obvious deployed parts (seat belt tensioners, OPDS sensor, side airbag sensors, etc.) After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items: - Seat belt tensioners - Seat belt buckle tensioners - SRS unit - Front sensors After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed airbag(s) - Seat belt tensioners - Seat belt buckle tensioners - Front sensors After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items: - SRS unit - Deployed side airbag(s) - Side impact sensor(s) for side(s) deployed During the repair process, inspect these areas: - Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, don't repair, any damaged harnesses. - Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel. After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS airbag system is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the PGM Tester SRS Menu Method to read the DTC (s). If this doesn't retrieve any codes, use the Tester's SCS menu method. If the SCS method doesn't work, you may need to install a known-good SRS unit to read the DTC(s). If you still cannot retrieve a code, go to SRS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8133 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8134 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8135 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8138 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8139 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8140 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8141 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8144 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8145 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8146 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA11V260000 > Apr > 11 > Recall 11V260000: Potential Replacement Air Bag Defect Air Bag: Recalls Recall 11V260000: Potential Replacement Air Bag Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Acura/CL 2003 Acura/TL 2002-2003 Honda/Accord 2001-2002 Honda/Civic 2001-2002 Honda/CRV 2002-2003 Honda/Odyssey 2002 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: April 27, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V260000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 2,430 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2001-2002 Honda Accord, and Civic 2-door and 4-door, model year 2002-2003 CRV, model year 2002 Odyssey, model year 2003 Acura CL, and model year 2002-2003 Acura TL vehicles. This recall is related to a series of recalls on these vehicles in which Honda is replacing the inflators within the driver's side air bag to address a defective condition. this recall addresses approximately 2,430 air bags that may have been installed as replacement service parts in the event, for one example, a covered vehicle had been in a crash necessitating the replacement of the driver's air bag, and the replacement air bag installed was one that may have contained a defective inflator. CONSEQUENCE: In the event of a crash necessitating deployment of the driver's air bag, the inflator could produce excessive internal pressure that could cause the inflator to rupture with metal fragments striking and injuring the driver or other occupants. REMEDY: Owners of all vehicles on which a replacement service air bag may have been installed will be notified. Dealers will inspect vehicles, and where a defective air bag inflator is identified, the inflator will be replaced free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about June 27, 2011. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. This safety recall campaign is related to recalls 08V-593, 09V-259, and 10V-041. NOTES: OWNERS MAY ALSO CONTACT The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA10V041000 > Feb > 10 > Recall 10V041000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: Recalls Recall 10V041000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Acura/3.2CL 2003 Acura/3.2TL 2002-2003 Honda/Accord 2001-2002 Honda/Civic 2001-2003 Honda/CRV 2002 Honda/Odyssey 2002 Honda/Pilot 2003 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 09, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V041000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 379000 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2001-2002 Honda Accord and Civic, model year 2002 CR-V and Odyssey, model year 2002-2003 Acura 3.2TL and one vehicle for model year 2003 Honda Pilot, Civic and Acura 3.2CL passenger vehicles. The driver's airbag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected airbag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the airbag cushion material possibly causing injury or fatality to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the airbag inflator free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before February 25, 2010. Owners may contact Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda's recall No. Q96 & Acura's recall No. R13. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA09V259000 > Jun > 09 > Recall 09V259000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: Recalls Recall 09V259000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2001 Honda/Civic 2001 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 30, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V259000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: AIR BAGS: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module Potential Number of Units Affected: ? SUMMARY: Honda is recalling M/Y 2001 Civic and Accord vehicles. The driver's airbag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected airbag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the air bag cushion material possibly causing injury to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the airbag inflator free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA08V593000 > Nov > 08 > Recall 08V593000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: Recalls Recall 08V593000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2001 Honda/Civic 2001 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: November 11, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V593000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 3940 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling 3,940 M/Y 2001 Accord and Civic vehicles. The driver's air bag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected air bag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the air bag cushion material possibly causing injury to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the air bag inflator free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or before December 22, 2008. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q96. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > NHTSA11V260000 > Apr > 11 > Recall 11V260000: Potential Replacement Air Bag Defect Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 11V260000: Potential Replacement Air Bag Defect VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Acura/CL 2003 Acura/TL 2002-2003 Honda/Accord 2001-2002 Honda/Civic 2001-2002 Honda/CRV 2002-2003 Honda/Odyssey 2002 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: April 27, 2011 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 11V260000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 2,430 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2001-2002 Honda Accord, and Civic 2-door and 4-door, model year 2002-2003 CRV, model year 2002 Odyssey, model year 2003 Acura CL, and model year 2002-2003 Acura TL vehicles. This recall is related to a series of recalls on these vehicles in which Honda is replacing the inflators within the driver's side air bag to address a defective condition. this recall addresses approximately 2,430 air bags that may have been installed as replacement service parts in the event, for one example, a covered vehicle had been in a crash necessitating the replacement of the driver's air bag, and the replacement air bag installed was one that may have contained a defective inflator. CONSEQUENCE: In the event of a crash necessitating deployment of the driver's air bag, the inflator could produce excessive internal pressure that could cause the inflator to rupture with metal fragments striking and injuring the driver or other occupants. REMEDY: Owners of all vehicles on which a replacement service air bag may have been installed will be notified. Dealers will inspect vehicles, and where a defective air bag inflator is identified, the inflator will be replaced free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or about June 27, 2011. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. This safety recall campaign is related to recalls 08V-593, 09V-259, and 10V-041. NOTES: OWNERS MAY ALSO CONTACT The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > NHTSA10V041000 > Feb > 10 > Recall 10V041000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V041000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Acura/3.2CL 2003 Acura/3.2TL 2002-2003 Honda/Accord 2001-2002 Honda/Civic 2001-2003 Honda/CRV 2002 Honda/Odyssey 2002 Honda/Pilot 2003 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 09, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V041000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 379000 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling certain model year 2001-2002 Honda Accord and Civic, model year 2002 CR-V and Odyssey, model year 2002-2003 Acura 3.2TL and one vehicle for model year 2003 Honda Pilot, Civic and Acura 3.2CL passenger vehicles. The driver's airbag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected airbag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the airbag cushion material possibly causing injury or fatality to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the airbag inflator free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before February 25, 2010. Owners may contact Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda's recall No. Q96 & Acura's recall No. R13. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > NHTSA09V259000 > Jun > 09 > Recall 09V259000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V259000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2001 Honda/Civic 2001 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 30, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V259000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: AIR BAGS: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module Potential Number of Units Affected: ? SUMMARY: Honda is recalling M/Y 2001 Civic and Accord vehicles. The driver's airbag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected airbag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the air bag cushion material possibly causing injury to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the airbag inflator free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > NHTSA08V593000 > Nov > 08 > Recall 08V593000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V593000: Air Bag Inflator Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Honda/Accord 2001 Honda/Civic 2001 MANUFACTURER: Honda (American Honda Motor Co.) MFR'S REPORT DATE: November 11, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V593000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal: Driver Side Inflator Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 3940 SUMMARY: Honda is recalling 3,940 M/Y 2001 Accord and Civic vehicles. The driver's air bag inflator could produce excessive internal pressure. If an affected air bag deploys, the increased internal pressure may cause the inflator to rupture. CONSEQUENCE: Metal fragments could pass through the air bag cushion material possibly causing injury to vehicle occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the air bag inflator free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or before December 22, 2008. Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. NOTES: Honda recall No. Q96. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > SN040915 > Sep > 04 > Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2004 TITLE: Replace Drivers Air Bag Torx Bolts Properly APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: When replacing a drivers's side air bag, make sure you replace the torx bolts properly. When removing the bolts, use a high-quality bit, making sure the bit is aligned. DON'T USE AIR TOOLS. When installing bolts, always start the bolts by hand to avoid cross-treading, and torque the bolts to the value listed in the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Bag: > SN040915 > Sep > 04 > Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Driver's Air Bag - Replace Torx Bolts Properly SOURCE: Honda Service News September 2004 TITLE: Replace Drivers Air Bag Torx Bolts Properly APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: When replacing a drivers's side air bag, make sure you replace the torx bolts properly. When removing the bolts, use a high-quality bit, making sure the bit is aligned. DON'T USE AIR TOOLS. When installing bolts, always start the bolts by hand to avoid cross-treading, and torque the bolts to the value listed in the service manual. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8193 Air Bag: Specifications Airbag Assemblies Airbag Assemblies Drivers Side Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Passengers Side Lower Mounting Nut(s) 9.8 Nm Side Mounting Nut(s) 6.3 Nm Passenger Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8194 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8197 Air Bag: Connector Locations 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) 90. Under Right Side of Dash 100. Under Driver's Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8198 101. Under Front Passenger's Seat (passenger's similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8199 Air Bag: Diagrams 74. Side Airbag Inflator, Driver's 75. Side Airbag Inflator, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 76. Side Airbag Inflator, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8200 131. Airbag First And Second Inflators 132. Airbag First And Second Inflators, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 133. Airbag First And Second Inflators, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8201 Air Bag: Service Precautions Airbag / Seat Belt Tensioner Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble an airbag or a seat belt tensioner. They have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag or a seat belt tensioner have been deployed, they cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of an airbag or a seat belt tensioner during service, please observe the following precautions: * Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. The driver's/front passenger's airbag connectors and seat belt tensioner connectors have a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. * Store the removed airbag on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F/100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. * Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag and seat belt tensioner, making them inoperative. If you suspect the airbag and seat belt tensioner have been damaged, install new units and refer to the Deployment/Disposal Procedures for disposing of the damaged units. See: Service and Repair Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8202 Air Bag: Description and Operation Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor, the cable reel, the driver's airbag, the front passenger's airbag, side airbags, seat belt tensioners, and front impact sensors. Side Airbags The side airbags are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Deployment and Disposal Deploying the Airbags/Tensioner (Inside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying Airbags In the vehicle If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, and seat belt tensioner is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. Driver's Airbag: 4. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel (A), then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag: 5. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness B. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8205 Side Airbag: 6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side airbag (A) and the floor wire harness. Seat belt tensioner: 7. Disconnect the 2P connector between the seat belt tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. Seat belt buckle tensioner: 8. Disconnect the 4P connector between the seat belt buckle tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. 9. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8206 10. Cutoff each connector, strip the ends of the wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle. NOTE: The driver's airbag and the front passenger's airbag has four wires, two yellow and two red. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and connect an alligator clip to each pair. 11. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed. 12. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an component doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - During deployment the airbag can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after deployment before touching the airbag. 13. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Deploying the Airbags/Tensioner (Outside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8207 Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying the Components Out of the Vehicle If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows: 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure or on the tool label. 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or people. 3. Follow steps 10, 11, and 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure. Deployment Tool Check Procedure Deployment Tool Check 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Disposal of Damaged Components Disposal of Damaged Components 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbag, seat belt tensioner, and seat belt buckle tensioner. 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires. NOTE: The driver's and passenger's airbag each have four wires: twist each pair of like-colored wires together 3. Package the component in the same packaging that the new replacement part came in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" or "DAMAGED SEAT BELT BUCKLE TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8208 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbags. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag assembly. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200°F / 93°C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8209 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8210 Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Airbag Spring-Loaded Lock Connector Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors: Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector. Connecting 1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. 2. When the connector halves are completely connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-loaded sleeve locks the connector. Removal and Installation Driver's Airbag Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8211 2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. 3. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit. Then remove the driver's airbag (B). Installation 1. Place the new driver's airbag (A) in the steering wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8212 2. Connect the cable reel to the driver's airbag 4P connector (A), then install the access panel (B) on the steering wheel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. - Make sure the horn works. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8213 Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Airbag Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Lower the glove box. 3. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (B). 4. Remove the three mounting nuts (A) from the bracket. Cover the lid and dashboard with a cloth, and pry carefully with a screwdriver to lift the front passenger's airbag (B) out of the dashboard. NOTE: The airbag lid has pawls on its side which attach it to the dashboard. Installation Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8214 1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the dashboard. Tighten the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts (B). 2. Connect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) to the dashboard wire harness B, then reinstall the glove box. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8215 Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Airbag Spring-Loaded Lock Connector Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Side Airbag Connector: Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Removal and Installation Side Airbag Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8216 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector (A). 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side airbag (B). Installation NOTE: - If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the tape. - Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover. - Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque when you replace a side airbag. - Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed properly. Improper installation may prevent proper deployment. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new side airbag on the seat back-frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting nuts (B). 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Airbag Deployment and Disposal > Page 8217 other parts. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8221 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8222 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8223 SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8224 104. In Front Pass. Or Pass. Seat (Side Airbag) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8225 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8226 233. SRS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8227 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the DLC (16P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8228 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester/HDS (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu to ground the SCS line (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, if DTC 15-1 is indicated, repeat the initialization procedure. If another DTC is indicated, go to the appropriate DTC Troubleshooting Index. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/DTC List - Supplemental Restraint System 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 3. Disconnect the side airbag connectors. 4. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 5. Remove the dashboard center lower cover. 6. Pull down the carpet, then remove the Torx bolt (A) from the SRS unit. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the two Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. NOTE: When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their heads rest squarely on the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 8231 brackets. 2. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover. 3. Reconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 4. Reconnect the side airbag connectors. 5. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Initialize the OPDS unit. 8. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 8232 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Safety Switch/Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Safety Switch/Connector: Service and Repair When checking voltage or resistance on this type of connector the first time, you must remove the retainer to insert the tester probe from the wire side. NOTE: It is not necessary to reinstall the removed retainer; the terminals will stay locked in the connector housing. To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tip screwdriver (B) between the connector body and the retainer, then carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the connector. Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Front Airbag Connectors: Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Connecting Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Safety Switch/Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8236 1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector half, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector half in the direction shown. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve. 2. When the connector halves are completely connected, the pawl is released, and the springloaded sleeve locks the connector. Side Airbag Connector: Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Specifications Cable Reel Cable Reel Airbag Assembly Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Nut 38 Nm Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8240 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Locations 54. In Steering Column Cover 56. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8241 227. Cable Reel Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8242 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Steering-Related Precautions Cable Reel Alignment Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in the wiring, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. * Installation of the steering wheel * Installation of the cable reel * Installation of the steering column * Other steering-related adjustment or installation Do not disassemble the cable reel. Do not apply grease to the cable reel. If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace it with a new one. For example, it does not rotate smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8243 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Adjustments Steering-related Precautions Cable Reel Alignment Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in the wiring, making the SRS system and the horns inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever the following is performed. * Installation of the steering wheel * Installation of the cable reel * Installation of the steering column * Other steering-related adjustment or installation Do not disassemble the cable reel. Do not apply grease to the cable reel. If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace it with a new one. For example, it does not rotate smoothly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8244 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Cable Reel Replacement Removal 1. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Remove the driver's airbag. 4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cruise control set/resume switch, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B). 5. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when removing the steering wheel. 6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8245 7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C). 8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (C) from the cable reel (D). 9. Release the tab (A), then remove the cable reel from the column. Installation 1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8246 3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically. 4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect the 5P connector (B) to the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (D). 5. Install the steering column covers. 6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately 2 1/2 turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8247 7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering wheel with a new steering wheel bolt (A). 8. Install the driver's airbag. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. - After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the SRS indicator does not come on. - Make sure the horn works. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8252 67. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8253 58. MES Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8259 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 155. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8260 157. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8261 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8262 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 54. Impact Sensor, Left Front 55. Impact Sensor, Right Front 77. Side Impact Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8263 78. Side Impact Sensor, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 79. Side Impact Sensor, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Impact Sensor: Vehicle Damage Warnings SRS Unit, Front Impact Sensors, and Side Impact Sensors - Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. - During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. - After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors and/or side impact sensors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or the side impact sensors. - Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. - Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) - Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. - Store the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F/40 °C) and dry (less than 80 % relative humidity, no moisture) area. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the front sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the front sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag 2P, both seat belt tensioner 2P and both seat belt buckle tensioner 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front inner fender. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor(C). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 8268 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Side Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the side impact sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the side airbag 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. 2-door: Slide the front seat forward. 4-door: Remove the seat assembly. 3. 2-door: Remove the rear seat-backs and rear seat cushion. 4-door: Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel. 4. 2-door: Remove the front seat belt lower anchor slide bar. 5. 2-door: Remove the side trim panel. 6. 2-door: Remove the middle cross-member gusset. 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (B). 8. Remove the Torx bolt (C) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (B). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new side impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A) then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the side impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Install all remove parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8277 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8278 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8279 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8280 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8281 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8282 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8283 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8284 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8285 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8286 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8287 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8293 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8294 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8295 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8296 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8297 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8298 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8299 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8300 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8301 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8302 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8303 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8312 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8313 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8314 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8315 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8316 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8317 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8318 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8319 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8320 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8321 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8322 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: Customer Interest Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8328 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8329 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8330 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8335 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8336 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8337 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8338 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8339 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8340 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8341 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8342 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8343 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8349 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8350 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8351 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8352 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8353 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8354 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8355 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8356 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8357 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8358 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8359 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8364 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8365 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8366 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8371 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8372 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8373 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8374 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8375 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8376 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8377 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8378 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8379 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 8385 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 8386 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-002 > Jan > 05 > M/T - Clutch Pedal Squeak/Twang or Notchy Feel > Page 8387 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8393 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8394 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8395 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8396 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8397 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8398 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8399 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8400 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8401 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8402 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8403 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8404 Occupant Position Detection System: Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8405 104. In Front Passenger's or Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8406 OPDS Unit - Connectors A, B, C, D Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8407 Occupant Position Detection System: Description and Operation OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) The side airbag system also includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of Sensors (G) and a OPDS Unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, it will automatically disable the airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator When the side airbag is disabled, the Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off, alerting the driver that the side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. 5. Remove the two screws (C) and OPDS unit (D). Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation. Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8410 Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit are replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, and go to the appropriate page in the DTC Troubleshooting Index. 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8414 152. C555 (Side Airbag) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8415 Side Air Bag: Service Precautions Airbag / Seat Belt Tensioner Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble an airbag or a seat belt tensioner. They have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag or a seat belt tensioner have been deployed, they cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of an airbag or a seat belt tensioner during service, please observe the following precautions: * Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. The driver's/front passenger's airbag connectors and seat belt tensioner connectors have a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. * Store the removed airbag on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F/100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. * Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag and seat belt tensioner, making them inoperative. If you suspect the airbag and seat belt tensioner have been damaged, install new units and refer to the Deployment/Disposal Procedures for disposing of the damaged units. See: Air Bag/Service and Repair Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8416 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label on the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is deformed, it must be replaced. * Never put aftermarket accessories on the seat (cover, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Airbag Spring-Loaded Lock Connector Spring-loaded Lock Connector Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock. Side Airbag Connector: Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half. Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks. Removal and Installation Side Airbag Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8419 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector (A). 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side airbag (B). Installation NOTE: - If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the tape. - Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover. - Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque. - Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed properly. Improper installation may prevent proper deployment. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. 1. Place the new side airbag on the seat-back frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting nuts (B). 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8420 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8421 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbags/Seat Belt Tensioner Deployment and Disposal Deployment Tool Check Procedure Deployment Tool Check 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Inside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying Airbags In the vehicle If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, and seat belt tensioner is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. Driver's Airbag: 4. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel (A), then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8422 5. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag: 6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side airbag (A) and the floor wire harness. Seat belt tensioner: 7. Disconnect the 2P connector between the seat belt tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. Seat belt buckle tensioner: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8423 8. Disconnect the 4P connector between the seat belt buckle tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. 9. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it. 10. Cutoff each connector, strip the ends of the wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle. NOTE: The driver's airbag and the front passenger's airbag has four wires, two yellow and two red. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and connect an alligator clip to each pair. 11. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed. 12. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an component doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - During deployment the airbag can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after deployment before touching the airbag. 13. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Airbag > Page 8424 Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Outside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying the Components Out of the Vehicle If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows: 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure or on the tool label. 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or people. 3. Follow steps 10, 11, and 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure. Disposal of Damaged Components Disposal of Damaged Components 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbag, and seat belt tensioner. 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting together the two inflator wires. 3. Package the component in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED" or "DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Locations SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8430 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8431 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8432 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8433 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8434 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8435 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8436 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8437 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8438 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8439 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8440 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8441 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8442 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8443 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8444 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8445 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8446 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8447 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8448 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8449 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8450 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8451 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8452 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8453 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8454 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8455 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8456 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8457 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8458 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8459 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8460 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8461 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8462 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8463 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Electrical Diagrams SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8464 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation SRS Indicator Light / Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about six seconds if the system is operating normally. If the light does not come on, does not go off after six seconds, or it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For battery serviceability, the memory will store the cause of the malfunction, and the data link circuit passes on the information from the memory to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester connected to the DLC (16P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: Customer Interest Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8473 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8474 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8480 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 8481 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8482 Child Seat: Description and Operation Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. WARNING: Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. Additional information at Restraint Systems / Seat Belt Systems / Child Restraint. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8487 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8488 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8489 SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8490 104. In Front Pass. Or Pass. Seat (Side Airbag) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8491 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams 231. OPDS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8492 233. SRS Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8493 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the DLC (16P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8494 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester/HDS (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu to ground the SCS line (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, if DTC 15-1 is indicated, repeat the initialization procedure. If another DTC is indicated, go to the appropriate DTC Troubleshooting Index. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/DTC List - Supplemental Restraint System 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair SRS Unit Replacement SRS Unit Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 3. Disconnect the side airbag connectors. 4. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 5. Remove the dashboard center lower cover. 6. Pull down the carpet, then remove the Torx bolt (A) from the SRS unit. 7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the two Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit. Installation 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. NOTE: When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified torque after replacement, be careful to turn them in so that their heads rest squarely on the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 8497 brackets. 2. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover. 3. Reconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors. 4. Reconnect the side airbag connectors. 5. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors and both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Initialize the OPDS unit. 8. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > SRS Unit Replacement > Page 8498 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair OPDS Unit Replacement OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8507 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8508 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8509 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8510 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8511 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8512 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8513 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8514 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8515 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8516 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8517 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8523 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8524 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8525 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8526 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8527 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8528 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8529 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8530 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8531 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8532 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8533 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8540 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8541 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 8542 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8545 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8546 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8547 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 8548 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8551 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8552 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8553 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. WARNING: Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 8566 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 8567 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 8573 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 8574 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8575 Seat Belt: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8576 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8577 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8578 Seat Belt: Description and Operation Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8579 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before preforming repairs or service WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible injury, always disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector before removing the retractor. In-vehicle Seat Belt Inspection 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts, and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. CAUTION: Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the metal loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For each passenger's seat belt, make sure that the locking mechanism in the seat belt retractor will engage when the seat belt is pulled all the way out. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Front Seat Belt Front Seat Belt Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Front Seat Belt-2-door 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Slide the front seat forward fully. 4. '01-02 models: Remove the lower anchor bolts (A), then remove the slide bar (B). 5. '03 model: Remove the lower anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). 6. Remove the side trim panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8582 7. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). 8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (B), and the retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8583 10. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Do the ECM idle learn procedure. Front Seat Belt-4-door 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Slide the front seat forward fully. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8584 4. Pull the lower anchor cover (A) back, and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). 5. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel. 6. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). 7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the retractor mounting bolt (B), and the retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E). 8. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F). 9. Remove the B-pillar upper trim. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8585 10. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A). 11. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector (F) with a new one. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. - Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Do the ECM idle learn procedure. Front Seat Belt Buckle Front Seat Belt Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8586 NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Seat Belt Buckle 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Detach the seat belt switch connector clip (A),seat belt buckle tensioner connector clip (B), and harness clips (C). 5. On the driver's seat, adjust the seat cushion to its maximum height. 6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the seat belt buckle (B). 7. Pull the seat belt switch/tensioner harness (C) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat linkage (driver's seat), or the hole on the seat track (passenger's seat). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8587 8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Apply liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolt before reinstallation. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one. - Apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Do the ECM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8588 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Rear Seat Belt Rear Seat Belt Replacement NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Rear Seat Belt 1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A). 3. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the rear seat belt (C) and retractor (D). 5. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Rear Seat Belt Buckle Rear Seat Belt Replacement NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles 1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8589 2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). 3. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). 5. Remove the protector (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8590 6. Install the belt and buckles in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 02-004 Date: 020226 Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance 02-004 February 26, 2002 * Applies To: * 2000-01 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED* Noncompliance Recall: Civic Rear Seat Belt Buckles (Supersedes 02-004, Noncompliance Recall: Civic and Accord Rear Seat Belt Buckles, dated January 15, 2002) Updated information is shown by Asterisks and Black bars. BACKGROUND Seat belt buckles contain a lock bar that engages and locks the seat belt tongue to the buckle. On some 2000-01 Civics, the lock bars in the rear seat belt buckles were improperly made. This prevented the unlatching of some rear buckles during strength compliance tests performed by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The affected rear seat belts work properly and provide protection in a crash, but they may be difficult to unlatch after the crash. * VEHICLES AFFECTED * Not all 2000-01 Civics within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before you begin, check for vehicle eligibility by doing any of these checks: ^ Check the vehicle's VIN on your campaign responsibility report. ^ Do a VIN status inquiry on DCS. ^ Verify that the customer has a customer letter. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION * All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this recall in January. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the assembly number on all rear seat belt buckles. Replace any buckle that is affected by this recall. PARTS INFORMATION Refer to the Parts Catalog to order the correct type and color of seat belt buckle or seat belt/retractor assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8599 * WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION* Failed Part: P/N 04827-S01-A00ZA H/C 4836177 Defect Code: 58C Contention Code: L46 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Push the upholstery down so you can see the number stamped on each of the rear seat belt buckles. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8600 2. Look for the assembly number on the back of each buckle. You may need a light and a magnifying glass to see the number. ^ If any of the buckles have one of the assembly numbers, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If none of the buckles have an affected assembly number, go to step 3. 3. Center-punch a completion mark above the eighth character of the engine compartment VIN, then return the vehicle to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior. 1. Replace the affected rear seat belt buckle(s). NOTE: To replace the left buckle on some models, you also need to replace the seat belt/retractor assembly. ^ 2000 Civics: Refer to page 20-90 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual. ^ 2001 Civics: Refer to page 23-5 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual. 2. Center-punch a completion mark above the eighth character of the engine compartment VIN, then return the vehicle to the customer. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8601 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8602 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA01V380000 > Dec > 01 > Recall 01V380000: Rear Seat Belt Buckle Defect Seat Belt Buckle: Recalls Recall 01V380000: Rear Seat Belt Buckle Defect Noncompliance: Some sedans and coupes fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 209, "Seat Belt Assemblies." Certain rear seat belt buckles were improperly manufactured. The rear seat belts will work properly and provide protection in a crash, but the owner may experience difficulty unfastening the belt after the crash. Only buckles that are marked (on the back side of the buckle) with an assembly number beginning with 00185, 00186, or 00187 have the problem. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the vehicles and replace the seat belt assemblies that were improperly manufactured. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was expected to begin during January 2002. Owners who do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Dates of Manufacture: July -- September 2000 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 02-004 Date: 020226 Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance 02-004 February 26, 2002 * Applies To: * 2000-01 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED* Noncompliance Recall: Civic Rear Seat Belt Buckles (Supersedes 02-004, Noncompliance Recall: Civic and Accord Rear Seat Belt Buckles, dated January 15, 2002) Updated information is shown by Asterisks and Black bars. BACKGROUND Seat belt buckles contain a lock bar that engages and locks the seat belt tongue to the buckle. On some 2000-01 Civics, the lock bars in the rear seat belt buckles were improperly made. This prevented the unlatching of some rear buckles during strength compliance tests performed by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The affected rear seat belts work properly and provide protection in a crash, but they may be difficult to unlatch after the crash. * VEHICLES AFFECTED * Not all 2000-01 Civics within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before you begin, check for vehicle eligibility by doing any of these checks: ^ Check the vehicle's VIN on your campaign responsibility report. ^ Do a VIN status inquiry on DCS. ^ Verify that the customer has a customer letter. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION * All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this recall in January. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin.* CORRECTIVE ACTION Inspect the assembly number on all rear seat belt buckles. Replace any buckle that is affected by this recall. PARTS INFORMATION Refer to the Parts Catalog to order the correct type and color of seat belt buckle or seat belt/retractor assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8612 * WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION* Failed Part: P/N 04827-S01-A00ZA H/C 4836177 Defect Code: 58C Contention Code: L46 Skill Level: Repair Technician INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Push the upholstery down so you can see the number stamped on each of the rear seat belt buckles. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8613 2. Look for the assembly number on the back of each buckle. You may need a light and a magnifying glass to see the number. ^ If any of the buckles have one of the assembly numbers, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If none of the buckles have an affected assembly number, go to step 3. 3. Center-punch a completion mark above the eighth character of the engine compartment VIN, then return the vehicle to the customer. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior. 1. Replace the affected rear seat belt buckle(s). NOTE: To replace the left buckle on some models, you also need to replace the seat belt/retractor assembly. ^ 2000 Civics: Refer to page 20-90 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual. ^ 2001 Civics: Refer to page 23-5 of the 2001-02 Civic Service Manual. 2. Center-punch a completion mark above the eighth character of the engine compartment VIN, then return the vehicle to the customer. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8614 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 02-004 > Feb > 02 > Recall - Rear Seat Belt Buckle Non-Compliance > Page 8615 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA01V380000 > Dec > 01 > Recall 01V380000: Rear Seat Belt Buckle Defect Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 01V380000: Rear Seat Belt Buckle Defect Noncompliance: Some sedans and coupes fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 209, "Seat Belt Assemblies." Certain rear seat belt buckles were improperly manufactured. The rear seat belts will work properly and provide protection in a crash, but the owner may experience difficulty unfastening the belt after the crash. Only buckles that are marked (on the back side of the buckle) with an assembly number beginning with 00185, 00186, or 00187 have the problem. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the vehicles and replace the seat belt assemblies that were improperly manufactured. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was expected to begin during January 2002. Owners who do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Dates of Manufacture: July -- September 2000 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8620 Seat Belt Buckle: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8621 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8622 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8623 Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckles Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt Buckles Front Seat Belt Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures, in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Seat Belt Buckle 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the front seat. 4. Detach the seat belt switch connector clip (A),seat belt buckle tensioner connector clip (B), and harness clips (C). 5. On the driver's seat, adjust the seat cushion to its maximum height. 6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the seat belt buckle (B). 7. Pull the seat belt switch/tensioner harness (C) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat linkage (driver's seat), or the hole on the seat track (passenger's seat). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckles > Page 8626 8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Apply liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolt before reinstallation. - If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one. - Apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation. - Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. - Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. - Reset the clock. - Do the ECM idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckles > Page 8627 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt Buckle Rear Seat Belt Replacement NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles 1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B). 3. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door, 4-door. 4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the center belt (C) and retractor (D). 5. Remove the protector (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckles > Page 8628 6. Install the belt and buckles in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation. - Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions. - Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 100. Under Driver's Seat 101. Under Front Passenger's Seat (Passenger's Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8632 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 121. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 122. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 123. Seat Belt Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8638 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8639 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8640 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8641 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8642 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8643 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8644 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8645 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8646 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8647 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8648 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8649 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8650 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8651 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8652 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8653 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8654 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8655 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8656 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8657 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8658 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8659 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8660 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8661 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8662 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8663 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8664 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8665 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8666 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8667 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8668 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8669 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8670 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8671 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8672 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Inspection For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures. In the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Retractor 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8676 2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 ° from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40 °. Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. 3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. In-vehicle 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic locking retractor). This function is for securing child seats. -1 Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt should retract with a ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is normal. -2 To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend normally. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the seat belt for any reason. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 105. Left B-pillar (right similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8681 Seat Belt Tensioner: Connector Locations 100. Under Driver's Seat 101. Under Front Passenger's Seat (passenger's similar) 103. Under Front Passenger's Seat (GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Page 8682 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams 68. Seat Belt Tensioner, Driver's 69. Seat Belt Tensioner, Front Passenger's (sedan) 70. seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Page 8683 145. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner, Driver's 146. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 147. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Page 8684 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service Precautions Airbag / Seat Belt Tensioner Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble an airbag or a seat belt tensioner. They have no serviceable parts. Once an airbag or a seat belt tensioner have been deployed, they cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of an airbag or a seat belt tensioner during service, please observe the following precautions: * Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. The driver's/front passenger's airbag connectors and seat belt tensioner connectors have a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. * Store the removed airbag on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F/100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. * Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag and seat belt tensioner, making them inoperative. If you suspect the airbag and seat belt tensioner have been damaged, install new units and refer to the Deployment/Disposal Procedures for disposing of the damaged units. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Page 8685 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. IMPORTANT: You have to wait at least 3 MINUTES after disconnecting the battery cable for the airbags to DISARM. Failure to do so might result in deployment of the airbags or tensioners. Seat Belt Tensioner Remove the left and (or) right center pillar lower trim panels. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors > Page 8688 Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors > Page 8689 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Airbags/Seat Belt Tensioner Deployment and Disposal Deployment Tool Check Procedure Deployment Tool Check 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Damaged Airbag/Tensioner Disposal Procedure Disposal of Damaged Components 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag, front passenger's airbag, side airbag, seat belt tensioner and seat belt buckle tensioner. 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires. NOTE: The driver's and passenger's airbag each have four wires; twist each pair of like-colored wires together. 3. Package the component in the same packaging that the new replacement part come in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" or "DAMAGED SEAT BELT BUCKLE TENSIONER" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Inside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying Airbags In the vehicle If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, and seat belt tensioner is securely mounted. 3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. Driver's Airbag: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors > Page 8690 4. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel (A), then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag: 5. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag: 6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side airbag (A) and the floor wire harness. Seat belt tensioner: 7. Disconnect the 2P connector between the seat belt tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. Seat belt buckle tensioner: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors > Page 8691 8. Disconnect the 4P connector between the seat belt buckle tensioner (A) and floor wire harness. 9. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it. 10. Cutoff each connector, strip the ends of the wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A) to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle. NOTE: The driver's airbag and the front passenger's airbag has four wires, two yellow and two red. Twist each pair of unlike colored wires together, and connect an alligator clip to each pair. 11. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool. - If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the component. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed. 12. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an component doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal of Damaged Components. - During deployment the airbag can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after deployment before touching the airbag. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disconnecting Airbag and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors > Page 8692 13. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal it securely. Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Outside Vehicle) Airbag Disposal Special Tool Required Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500 Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. Deploying the Components Out of the Vehicle If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows: 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure or on the tool label. 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or people. 3. Follow steps 10, 11, and 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Impact Sensor: Component Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8699 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 155. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8700 157. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8701 105. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8702 Impact Sensor: Diagrams 54. Impact Sensor, Left Front 55. Impact Sensor, Right Front 77. Side Impact Sensor, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8703 78. Side Impact Sensor, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 79. Side Impact Sensor, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Impact Sensor: Vehicle Damage Warnings SRS Unit, Front Impact Sensors, and Side Impact Sensors - Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. - During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. - After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit, front impact sensors and/or side impact sensors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or the side impact sensors. - Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. - Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) - Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. - Store the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F/40 °C) and dry (less than 80 % relative humidity, no moisture) area. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Sensor Front Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the front sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the front sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag 2P, both seat belt tensioner 2P and both seat belt buckle tensioner 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Remove the front inner fender. 3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor(C). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Sensor > Page 8708 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Side Impact Sensor Replacement Removal NOTE: - Removal of the side impact sensor must be performed according to the precautions/procedures described before. - Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P connector(s), disconnect the side airbag 2P connector(s). - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. 2-door: Slide the front seat forward. 4-door: Remove the seat assembly. 3. 2-door: Remove the rear seat-backs and rear seat cushion. 4-door: Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel. 4. 2-door: Remove the front seat belt lower anchor slide bar. 5. 2-door: Remove the side trim panel. 6. 2-door: Remove the middle cross-member gusset. 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the side impact sensor (B). 8. Remove the Torx bolt (C) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (B). Installation NOTE: - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery cable while replacing the side impact sensor. 1. Install the new side impact sensor with a new Torx bolt (A) then connect the floor wire harness 2P connector (B) to the side impact sensor (C). 2. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 3. After installing the side impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II): the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. 4. Install all remove parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations 100. Under Driver's Seat 101. Under Front Passenger's Seat (Passenger's Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8712 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams 121. Seat Belt Switch, Driver's 122. Seat Belt Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 123. Seat Belt Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8721 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8722 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8723 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8724 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8725 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8726 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8727 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8728 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8729 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8730 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8731 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: Customer Interest Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8737 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8738 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8739 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8744 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8745 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8746 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8747 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8748 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8749 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8750 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8751 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8752 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8758 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8759 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8760 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8761 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8762 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8763 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8764 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8765 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8766 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8767 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8768 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8773 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8774 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-054 > Jul > 04 > Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON > Page 8775 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set Technical Service Bulletin # 02-034 Date: 020616 Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set 02-034 July 16, 2002 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED SRS Indicator Comes On With SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Replaces 00-080, SRS Unit Indicates DTC 15-1, dated December 5, 2000, and 01-030, SRS Indicator Comes On With DTC 15-3, dated May 29, 2001) SYMPTOM The SRS indicator is on, and one or more of these SRS DTCs are set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator light circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) PROBABLE CAUSE DTC 15-1 A faulty occupant position detection system (OPDS) unit. DTC 15-2 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ Side airbag cutoff indicator (SIDE AIRBAG; SIDE AIRBAG OFF in later models) is faulty. ^ Fuses in certain circuits (such as the odometer) blow or are removed while the ignition switch is ON (II) ^ Any part of the SRS circuit (particularly the gauge assembly) is disconnected while the ignition switch is in ON (II) DTC 15-3 ^ A faulty OPDS unit ^ OPDS sensor interference from an electrical appliance operating near the front passenger seat-back Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8780 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8781 Repair the vehicle as indicated by the DIAGNOSIS. TOOL INFORMATION PGM Tester with SN3OO or later software Autoprobe: P/N VET-02001373 (The Autoprobe is part of your dealer's PGM Tester kit It is commonly used to troubleshoot 1992-95 vehicles. If you need another Autoprobe, order it from the Honda Tool and Equipment Program or SCS Service Connector: T/N O7PAZ-OO1O1OO PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 51334-S0K-A61 H/C 6265555 Defect Code: 032 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8782 Contention Code: B03 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer Diagnosis Do the appropriate diagnosis based on what SRS DTC(s) are set. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-1 Use the PGM tester to clear the DTC: ^ If the DTC sets again, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-2 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Inspect the connections and wiring of the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit: ^ If the connections and wiring are OK, and the circuit components were not disconnected for some previous repair, and the DTC does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the connections or wiring are faulty, repair the circuit. If the DTC sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. Diagnosing SRS DTC 15-3 Use the PGM Tester to clear the DTC. Ask your customer if he or she uses an aftermarket electrical appliance (laptop computer, fluorescent map light, etc.) near the front passenger's seat-back. Some electrical appliances that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket-especially those using a power inverter/converter-can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set. ^ If your customer uses any of these appliances, operate the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. If the DTC sets again, clear the DTC, then return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her to avoid using the appliance near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these appliances, and the DTC does not set again after clearing, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the DTC sets again after clearing, disregard this service bulletin, and continue with normal troubleshooting. Repair Procedure 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8783 4. Accord models only: Remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom, then discard the two lower clips. 5. All models except Accord: Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 6. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster so you can access the OPDS unit cover. 7. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (three clips). 8. Recline the seat-back so you can access the OPDS unit mounting screws. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8784 9. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 10. Unplug the electrical connectors, then remove the unit. 11. Install the new OPDS unit, then snap the new cover in place. 12. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 13. Accord models only: Check the attachment bosses for the clips: ^ If the seat-back has a pocket,and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached, found under Body. Then go to step 14. ^ If the seat-back has no pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or broken, or were damaged when you removed the seat-back panel, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 14. ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 14. 14. Accord models only: Install the new clips in the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so the retaining tabs on the clips are horizontal. This ensures that the clips fully set into the mounting holes in the seat. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8785 15. Accord models only: Reinstall the seat-back panel. 16. All models except Accord: Zip the seat-back cover closed. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable, and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Use the PGM Tester to initialize the OPDS unit: ^ If you have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe. ^ If you do not have an Autoprobe, go to Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the Autoprobe 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and enter the VIN into the PGM Tester. 6. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester to get to the SYSTEM SELECT screen. From that screen, select SRS. 7. From the SRS screen, select MISC TESTS. 8. From the MISC TESTS screen, select OPD SYSTEM INIT. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 10. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 11. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 12. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8786 ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Initializing the OPDS With the PGM Tester and the SCS Service Connector 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to a normal upright position, and remove anything that is on or near the seat. 2. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. Close the doors and windows, and run the NC in Recirculation mode for 30 minutes. This will dry out any moisture that may be in the front passenger's seat. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Connect the PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC). Leave the ignition switch in LOCK (0). Follow the screen prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). NOTE: When you see the message "The SCS line in the 16P DLC has been grounded," do not press the EXIT or YES keys on the keypad. Doing so would take you out of the SCS mode, and stop OPDS initialization. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8787 5. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P memory erase signal (MES) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 8. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 02-034 > Jun > 02 > Restraint System - SRS Indicator ON/DTC's Set > Page 8788 on. 9. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. 10. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes oft, the OPDS is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. Go to step 19. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 11. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 10. 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the PGM Tester. 12. Plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Watch the SRS indicator. It comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 15. When the SRS indicator comes on again, plug the SCS service connector into the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 16. When the SRS indicator goes off, unplug the SCS service connector from the 2P MES connector within 4 seconds. The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes oft. If the initialization fails, repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot in accordance with the appropriate service manual. 19. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned oft, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 20. Civic 2-door EX, LX models: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. 21. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 22. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and for the navigation system (if equipped) Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set Occupant Position Detection System: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraint System - 'SIDE AIRBAG OFF' Indicator is ON 02-054 July 2, 2004 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic - ALL 2002 CR-V - ALL Updated information is shown by asterisks. SIDE AIRBAG OFF Indicator Comes On (Supersedes 02-054, dated October 8, 2002) SYMPTOM *The SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes for no reason: there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat.* Typical customer complaints are: ^ The indicator comes on and stays on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II). (The indicator should come on briefly, and then go off.) ^ The indicator comes on and stays on while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently while driving. ^ The indicator blinks intermittently with the vehicle stationary. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty OPDS unit. CORRECTIVE ACTION *If the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator comes on and stays on or it blinks intermittently when there are no objects on the front passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat, replace the OPDS unit.* PARTS INFORMATION *OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 4-door): P/N 81334-55H-J12, H/C 7670805 OPDS Unit (2001-02 Civic 2-door): P/N 81334-S5P-306, H/C 7620115 OPDS Unit (2002 CR-V): P/N 81334-S9A-J43, H/C 7629512* WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81334-55A-J01 H/C 6460794 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 8794 *Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 03205* Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure there are no objects on the front *passenger's seat cushion; the seat-back is thoroughly dry; and there are no aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories installed on the seat. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).* Does the SIDE AIRBAG OFF indicator come on and stay on or blink intermittently? Yes - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. No - Go to step 2. 2. Ask your customer about the condition of the seat when the indicator came on. Was there anything on the seat cushion; was the seat-back wet; or was an aftermarket seat cover cushion, backrest or other accessory installed on the seat? * Yes - Return the vehicle to your customer. Advise him or her (1) to make sure the front seat passenger is sitting up properly in the seat, (2) to keep objects (grocery bags, brief cases, laptop computers) off the front passenger's seat cushion, (3) to avoid getting the front passenger's seat-back wet, and (4) to never use aftermarket seat covers, cushions, backrests, or other accessories on the front seats.* No - Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then wait at least 3 minutes before you start work. 4. Unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 5. Civic models: Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to give you access to the OPDS unit cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 8795 6. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame (Civic: three clips: CR-V: 1 screw). 7. Position the seat-back to give you access to the two OPDS unit mounting screws. 8. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit and gently pull out the unit. 9. Unplug the OPDS unit harness and sensor connectors, then remove the unit. 10. Install the new OPDS unit. Reinstall the OPDS unit cover. 11. Civic models: Slip the seat-back cover over the left side bolster. 12. Zip the seat-back cover closed. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Initialize the OPDS (see S/B 02-052, Initializing the Occupant Position Detection System. 15. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 16. Civic 2-door EX and LX models up to VIN 1HGEM2... 1L016502: Do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 mph. ^ Keep driving the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes. NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 08-016 > Mar > 08 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P1457 Set > Page 8796 ^ You can use a smog/chassis dynamometer to do this step instead of driving the vehicle. Do not do this step with the vehicle on a lift. ^ Civic 2-door EX and LX models above VIN 1HGEM2...1L016502 have an updated cruise control actuator that does not require this learning procedure. The new actuator has the letters EB and a white dot or the letters EC on the barcode label. 17. CR-V models: Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature: ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. ^ Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. ^ Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. Enter your customer's radio station presets. 19. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension Technical Service Bulletin # 06-009 Date: 080205 Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension 06-009 February 5, 2008 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Warranty Extension: OPDS Unit or OPDS Sensor Triggers SRS DTC(s) 15-1, 15-2, 15-3 (Supersedes 06-009, dated September 21, 2007) Updated information is shown with asterisks. BACKGROUND *NOTE: Because of a class action settlement, the warranty extension coverage for the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor on 2002 Accords, 2002-04 Civics, 2003-04 Civic Hybrids, 2002-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2002 Odysseys, and 2003-04 Pilots purchased or leased between April 13, 2002, and November 7, 2006, is now 10 years or 157,500 miles, whichever occurs first. For more information, refer to Service Bulletin 06-085, Warranty Extension: Vehicle Warranty Mileage.* Several vehicle models may have a problem with the OPDS (occupant position detection system) that causes the SRS indicator to stay on. Typically, one or more of these DTCs will be set: ^ SRS DTC 15-1 (faulty OPDS unit or OPDS not initialized) ^ SRS DTC 15-2 (faulty side airbag indicator circuit) ^ SRS DTC 15-3 (faulty OPDS sensor) To ensure continued reliability with the OPDS, American Honda is extending the warranty on the OPDS unit and the OPDS sensor to 10 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first. This warranty extension does not apply to any vehicle that has ever been declared a total loss, or any that has been issued a salvage, branded, or similar title under any state's law. To check for vehicle eligibility, you must do a VIN status inquiry Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8802 VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles were mailed a notification of this warranty extension. A example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the vehicle as indicated by the INSPECTION PROCEDURE. If needed, replace the OPDS unit. In rare cases where an updated OPDS unit was already installed, replace the OPDS sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8803 PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8804 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Out of warranty: Any repairs to the SRS system for problems other than the 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 DTCs that are done after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ When you check for SRS DTCs with the HDS, codes other than 15-1, 15-2, and 15-3 are not covered by this warranty extension bulletin. ^ If the vehicle is covered by warranty, repair it using the normal warranty repair procedures. If the vehicle's warranty is expired, give your customer an estimate for the cost of the repair. Do the appropriate inspection, based on the DTC. SRS DTC 15-1 Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-1 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-1 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-1 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-2 1. Inspect the connections and the wiring in the side airbag cutoff indicator circuit. ^ If all the connections and the wiring are OK, go to step 2. ^ If any of the connections or the wiring are faulty, repair the circuit, then go to step 2. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-2 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. ^ If DTC 15-2 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the OPDS unit causes DTC 15-2 to set repeatedly, yet passes the other troubleshooting steps, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. SRS DTC 15-3 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^ If DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to step 2. ^ If DTC 15-3 sets again, continue with normal troubleshooting. 2. Ask your customer if electrical devices such as a laptop computer or a fluorescent map light are ever used near the front passenger's seat-back. (Some electrical devices that plug into the vehicle's accessory power socket, especially those using a power inverter/converter, can interfere with the seat-back sensors and cause SRS DTC 15-3 to set.) ^ If your customer uses any of these devices operate the device near the front passenger's seat-back. If DTC 15-3 sets again, clear it, then return the vehicle to the customer. Advise the customer to avoid using the device near the front passenger's seat-back. ^ If your customer does not use any of these devices and DTC 15-3 does not set again, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT. REPAIR PROCEDURE A: OPDS UNIT REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8805 1. On Accords and Pilots, remove the front passenger's seat-back panel by prying out the bottom. Replace the two lower clips. 2. On all models except Accords and Pilots, unzip the two seat cover zippers on the back of the front passenger's seat. 3. Pull back the seat-back cover from the left side bolster to access the OPDS unit cover. 4. Remove the OPDS unit cover from the seat frame. 5. Check the part number of the installed OPDS unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8806 ^ If the OPDS unit has an original part number, go to step 6. ^ If the OPDS unit has a new part number (refer to PARTS INFORMATION) or higher, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT. 6. Recline the seat-back to access the OPDS unit mounting screws. 7. Remove the mounting screws from the OPDS unit, and gently pull out the unit. 8. Disconnect the OPDS connectors, then remove the OPDS unit. 9. Install a new OPDS unit, then snap on its cover. 10. Slip the seat-back cover over the OPDS unit. 11. On Accords, check the seat-back clip attachment bosses on the seat-back panel: ^ If the attachment bosses are OK, go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back has a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, do the repair procedure in S/B 02-010, Seat-Back Panel Is Loose or Detached. Then go to step 12. ^ If the seat-back does not have a pocket, and the attachment bosses are deformed or damaged, replace the seat-back. Then go to step 12. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8807 12. On Accords and Pilots, install the new seat-back clips on the seat-back panel. Turn the clips so their retaining tabs are horizontal. 13. On Accords and Pilots, install the seat-back panel. 14. On all models except Accords and Pilots, zip the seat-back cover closed. 15. Initialize the OPDS unit. ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode. Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. Also verify the correct date and time. 6. From the System Selection menu, select SRS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8808 7. From the Mode menu, select Miscellaneous Test. 8. From the Miscellaneous Test menu, select OPDS Initialization. 9. Follow the remaining screen prompts to complete the OPDS initialization. If the initialization fails repeat the process two more times. If the initialization fails again, check for SRS DTCs, then troubleshoot them using the appropriate service manual. Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode NOTE: Non-Honda seat covers will interfere with the performance of the OPDS and are not recommended. 1. Adjust the front passenger's seat-back to an upright position, then remove anything on or near the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC (data link connector). 4. Keep the ignition switch at LOCK (0), and turn on the HDS. 5. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading. 6. From the Select Mode screen, select SCS, and follow the screen prompts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8809 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8810 7. Connect the SCS service connector to the 2P MES (memory erase signal) connector, as shown. Do not use a jumper wire. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 10. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 11. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8811 12. Watch the SRS indicator: ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect the HDS. ^ If the indicator blinks twice and then stays on, the OPDS unit is initialized, but SRS DTCs need to be cleared. Go to step 13. ^ If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS unit is not initialized. Repeat steps 3 thru 12. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the HDS. 14. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector. Do not use a jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Watch the SRS indicator. (It comes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.) Disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off. 17. When the SRS indicator comes on again, connect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on. 18. When the SRS indicator goes off, disconnect the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. (The SRS indicator blinks twice to indicate that the memory has been cleared.) 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10 seconds. 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (The SRS is OK if the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then goes off.) If the DTC clearing fails, repeat the process two more times. If the DTC clearing fails again, check for set SRS DTCs, and troubleshoot them with the appropriate service manual. REPAIR PROCEDURE B: OPDS SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the seat-back cover from the front passenger's seat: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the removal steps under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the removal steps in the procedure. 2. Slide the seat-back cushion (foam) off the seat-back frame. (The OPDS sensor is built into the seat-back cushion.) 3. Slide a new seat-back cushion over the seat-back frame. Make sure the cushion is centered. 4. Install the seat-back cover: ^ Using the appropriate service manual, go to section 20 (Body), and do the installation step under Front Seat Cover Replacement, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, then select Front Seat Cover Replacement from the list, and do the installation step in the procedure. 5. Initialize the OPDS unit: ^ To initialize with the HDS, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: HDS Method in this service bulletin. ^ To initialize with the SCS service connector, go to Initializing the OPDS Unit: Manual Mode in this service bulletin. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Occupant Position Detection System: > 06-009 > Feb > 08 > Campaign - OPDS Unit Warranty Extension > Page 8812 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8813 Occupant Position Detection System: Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8814 104. In Front Passenger's or Passenger's Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8815 OPDS Unit - Connectors A, B, C, D Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8816 Occupant Position Detection System: Description and Operation OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) The side airbag system also includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of Sensors (G) and a OPDS Unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, it will automatically disable the airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator When the side airbag is disabled, the Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off, alerting the driver that the side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPDS Unit Replacement NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the body section before performing repair or service. Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 3. Remove the seat assembly and seat-back cover. 4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors (B) from the OPDS unit. 5. Remove the two screws (C) and OPDS unit (D). Installation 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws, and connect the OPDS unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS unit. Reinstall the cover. 2. Install the seat-back cover. 3. Install the seat assembly, then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 6. Initialize the OPDS unit. 7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper system operation. Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Occupant Position Detection System <--> [Seat Occupant Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 8819 Occupant Position Detection System: Service and Repair Initializing the OPDS Unit Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Special Tools Required SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS unit are replaced, initialize the OPDS by following the procedure below. NOTE: Make sure the passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat. 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual). 3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator went off. 6. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator comes on. 7. The SRS indicator goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds. 8. Watch the SRS indicator. - If the indicator blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased. Go to step 9, then erase the DTCs. - If the indicator blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 9. - If the indicator stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, and go to the appropriate page in the DTC Troubleshooting Index. 9. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Amplifier > Component Information > Locations 142. Middle of Rear Shelf (Sedan) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Amplifier > Component Information > Locations > Page 8825 236. Window Antenna Coil (Sedan) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Amplifier > Component Information > Locations > Page 8826 Antenna Amplifier: Testing and Inspection Window Antenna Coil Test 4-door 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 1 P connector (A) and 2P connector (B) from the window antenna coil (C). 3. Check for continuity between the terminal B2 and body ground, and between terminal A1 and B1 of the antenna coil. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, go to step 4. 4. Remove the rear shelf. 5. Loosen the two bolts, and replace the window antenna coil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations 134. Right C Pillar (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8830 28. Antenna Module (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8831 Antenna Control Module: Testing and Inspection Antenna Module Input Test 2-door 1. Remove the right C-Pillar trim. 2. Make sure the antenna module mounting bolt (A) is torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the antenna module (C). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), turn the rear window defogger switch ON. Check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no voltage, check for: Faulty rear window defogger relay. - Blown No.11 (40 A) fuse or No.19 (80 A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - An open in the BLK/YEL wire. 5. With the ignition switch ON (II), turn the radio ON, and turn to an FM station. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and body ground. If there is no voltage, check for: An open in the YEL/GRN wire. - A short to ground in the YEL/GRN wire. - Faulty audio unit. 6. Disconnect the rear window defogger (+B OUT) connector (D) from the antenna module. 7. With the ignition switch and the rear window defogger switch ON, check for voltage to ground. If there is no voltage, replace the antenna module. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8832 9. Check for continuity between the rear window defogger negative terminal (A) connector and body ground. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check for: An open in the BLK wire (B) - An open in the rear window defogger wire - Poor ground (G701) (C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8842 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8843 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8849 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8850 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8853 59. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8856 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8857 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8873 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8874 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8875 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8876 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8877 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8878 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8879 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8880 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8881 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8882 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8883 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8884 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8885 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8886 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8887 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8888 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8889 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Connector Views 182. Immobilizer Control Unit - Receiver 214. Security Control Unit (Optional) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8890 Immobilizer System - Except System Image 132 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8891 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The immobilizer system is designed to prevent the car from being started without the owner's ignition key. If an attempt is made to Start the car with any other key, the immobilizer system will disable the car's fuel supply. The immobilizer system consists of the ignition key, immobilizer control unit-receiver, immobilizer indicator light, PGM-FI main relays, injector relay (GX), fuel pump (except GX), fuel tank internal solenoid valve (GX), and the ECM/PCM. With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the ECM/PCM receive an "ignition on" signal through fuse 6 and the PGM-FI main relay 1. The ECM/PCM then sends power to the ignition key transponder through the immobilizer control unit-receiver. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to the ECM/PCM through the receiver. If the signal is correct, the ECM/PCM will energize the car's fuel supply system by grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light flashes a code to indicate that the correct key has been inserted. If the ignition key signal is not correct, the ECM/PCM will not energize the car's fuel supply system by not grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light then flashes a code to indicate that an incorrect key has been inserted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B). 4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (c). 5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal. 6. After replacement, rewrite the unit with a Honda PGM Tester, then check the immobilizer system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver > Page 8897 Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair Transmitter Programming Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. 13. Within 10 sec., aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation of the transmitter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the (II) position, the immobilizer receiver unit sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the immobilizer receiver unit to the PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8908 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8909 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8910 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8911 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8912 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Programming Connector > Component Information > Diagrams (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry Receiver: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8920 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8921 80. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8922 68. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8923 68. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Page 8924 Keyless Entry Receiver: Diagrams 163. Keyless Receiver Unit (EX; '04-'05: LX, GX) 164. Keyless Receiver Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Page 8925 Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Keyless Receiver Unit Input Test 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the keyless receiver unit (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the 5P connector and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the keyless receiver unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8934 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8935 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8941 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 8942 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8947 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8948 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8949 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8950 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8951 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8952 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8953 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8954 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8955 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8956 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8957 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8958 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8959 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8960 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8961 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8962 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8963 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8964 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8965 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8966 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8967 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8968 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8969 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8970 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8971 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8977 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8978 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8979 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8980 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8981 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8982 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8983 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8984 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8985 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8986 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8987 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8988 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8989 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8990 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8991 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8992 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8993 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8994 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8995 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8996 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8997 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8998 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8999 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9000 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9001 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9002 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Test NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock the door with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Press the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If the locks don't work, go to step 2. 2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 3. 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4. 4. Reprogram the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, replace the transmitter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9003 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. 13. Within 10 sec., aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation of the transmitter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 51. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9008 63. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9009 71. Security LED Connector (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9014 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9015 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9016 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9017 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024 Cellular Phone: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9027 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9028 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9029 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9036 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9037 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9038 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9039 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9040 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9041 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9042 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9043 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9044 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9045 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9046 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9047 243. Hands - Free Telephone Control Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9048 Cellular Phone: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 152 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics Technical Service Bulletin # 07-012 Date: 070216 Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics 07-012 February 16, 2007 Applies To: ALL - with accessory Music Link installed Music Link (For iPod) General Information and Symptom Troubleshooting BACKGROUND Honda Music Link is a Honda accessory designed to let the customer play music from an Apple(R) ipod(R) through the vehicle's audio system. The basic Music Link kit includes the Music Link interface unit, an audio unit bus cable, the Music Link harness, a CD-ROM, and the Quick Reference Guide. The CD-ROM includes a detailed User's Guide and some optional ITS (text-to-speech) software that lets the customer play music by playlist, artist, album, or genre. ^ The CD-ROM is for home computer use only. Do not insert it into a vehicle CD player. ^ Quick Reference Guides, User's Guides, and the latest TTS software versions can be downloaded from http://musiclink.honda.com. ^ For customer assistance and questions regarding TTS software loading, have the customer contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department. The GENERAL INFORMATION section of this service bulletin covers these subjects: ^ Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Resources for Installation Instructions ^ Music Link First-Use Information ^ iPod Reset Procedure Information The TROUBLESHOOTING section includes troubleshooting for these symptoms: ^ Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. ^ Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on the iPod display screen. ^ Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. ^ Check mark is shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. ^ iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). ^ Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. ^ Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. ^ Song/artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. PARTS INFORMATION Bus Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10030, H/C 8387060 Music Link Harness: P/N 08-8-1H1-10031, H/C 8387052 2-Port Bus Harness: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9054 P/N 08A31-0F1-000, H/C 7512999 Music Link Interface Unit: P/N 08-8-1H1-10101, H/C 8582603 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. FLAT RATE TIMES Failed Part: P/N 08~8-1H1-10031 H/C 8387052 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 01201 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Disclaimer General Information Music Link iPod Information Resources ^ Online at http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html ^ Music Link Information Sheet (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Music Link Frequently Asked Questions (Honda ServiceNews, March 2006) ^ Quick Reference Guide (supplied in Music Link kit) ^ User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide are available online: http://musiclink.honda.com/Down_Ref.html ^ General information: www.apple.com, then select support. ^ iPod firmware (unit software) version information: www.apple.com, then select Support. ^ To find out what (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9055 - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ iPod reset procedure: http://docs.info.apple.com/ article.html?artnum=61705 Resources for Installation Instructions Online, enter the model and year, enter the keyword MUSIC LINK, and select the appropriate installation instructions. Music Link First-Use Information After installing the Music Link kit, switch the audio unit to AUX (auxiliary) mode and verify the audio unit displays CDC EJECT or CD4 EJECT. Connect the iPod to the Music Link connector. Make sure the check mark is displayed on the iPod display screen and that you hear music. ^ The Music Link disc supplied in the kit contains the TTS software and the User's Guide. It is for home computer use only. ^ The customer needs to load the TTS software/User's Guide on his/her home computer in order for all of the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate. ^ Only the shuffle functions (Disc 5-6) will operate without the TTS software installed (see the Quick Reference Guide). ^ For the search functions (Disc 1-4) to operate properly, TTS software must be run after any songs are changed (added or removed) on the iPod. ^ You can change the Disc position on most audio units by using the Disc - (preset number 5) and Disc + (preset number 6). Always refer to the User's Guide for proper operation. iPod Reset Procedure Information The iPod reset procedure applies to these Apple iPod models: ^ Fifth-generation or later iPod (also known as iPod with video) ^ iPod nano(R) ^ iPod with color display (iPod photo) ^ iPod mini(R) NOTE: To view this information online, log on to http//docs.info.apple.com/article.html?artnum=6 1705 To reset the customer's iPod: 1. Cycle the Hold switch on and off (slide it to Hold, then turn it off again). 2. Press and hold the Menu and Select buttons for 6-10 seconds until the Apple logo appears. NOTE: If you are having difficulty resetting the iPod, set it on a flat surface. As you press the Select button, make sure your finger does not touch any part of the click wheel. Also make sure that you press the Menu button toward the outside of the click wheel and not near the center. 3. If the above steps do not work, try connecting the iPod to a power adapter and plug the power adapter into an electrical outlet, or connect the iPod to your computer. Make sure the computer is on and isn't set to sleep mode. BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ^ Before troubleshooting, ask the customer these questions: - What is the main issue? - What model and generation iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. - What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? ^ Go to the Main Menu. ^ Select Settings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9056 ^ Select About. - What iTunes version are you using? - What TTS software version is installed? ^ Make sure you have the customer's iPod for troubleshooting. ^ Turn on the iPod, and verify its battery is fully charged before testing. If the battery is low, the iPod will not "make up" when connected. ^ Some iPod protective cases cause the Music Link iPod connector to be installed crookedly or not fully engaged. Be sure to remove the protective case before troubleshooting. ^ Go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech Faq.html to view technical FAQs and troubleshooting. TROUBLESHOOTING Check mark is not shown on the iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. NOTE: Remove the iPod protective case, if installed. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Replace the Music Link interface unit and the cable. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Static, or weak or no volume over speakers only in Music Link mode. NOTE: Remove iPod protective case, if installed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9057 1. At the iPod, make sure the iPod connector is fully engaged. Is the iPod connector fully engaged? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Properly connect the iPod connector and retest. Replace the cable if the connector is loose or damaged. 2. Disconnect the customer's iPod. 3. Connect headphones to the iPod, and listen to the sound quality. Is the sound quality normal in the headphones? Yes - Go to step 4. No - There is static from the customer's uploaded music. If the volume is weak or low, verify the iTunes sound level setting. 4. Connect a known-good iPod and retest. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes - The vehicle is functioning normally. Do an iPod reset on the customer's iPod and retest. If the problem does not go away, have the service advisor explain to the customer that the vehicle is operating properly and advise the customer to: ^ Install the latest iPod firmware. ^ Consult the general information at www.apple.com. This is not a comprehensive list, only a suggested starting point for the customer to troubleshoot the iPod. No - Go to step 5. 5. Disconnect the known-good iPod. 6. Do a vehicle battery cable reset: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 7. Reconnect the customer's iPod and retest. Is the sound quality normal over the speakers? Yes It is an intermittent audio unit/Music Link failure, and the system is OK at this time. No - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD4 mode" troubleshooting. Music Link has no sound, check mark is shown on iPod display screen. 1. At the Music Link interface unit, make sure both connectors are fully engaged, and the cables do not have any broken or bent pins. NOTE: To release the Music Link interface unit connectors, you must pull back on the lock sleeves. Does either cable have the connector partially disengaged, or are any pins broken or bent? Yes - Reconnect or replace the loose or damaged cable. No - Go to step 2. 2. At the audio unit, make sure the cable connectors and the connector pin fits are tight. Also check that the optional Y-bus harness (if installed) connector and connector pin fits are tight. Do the cable connections and pins fit properly? Yes - Substitute a known-good iPod and retest. If the sound is normal, do an iPod reset, and retest. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9058 NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. No - Repair the faulty connection at the audio unit. Music Link has no sound, the disc number and track number flashes on the audio display. Disconnect and reconnect the iPod, then retest. Does Music Link operate normally? Yes - The iPod connector pins are loose. Replace the cable if the connector is damaged. No - There is a firmware error. Advise the customer to install the latest iPod firmware (unit software). Check mark is shown on iPod display screen, radio does not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode. 1. Make sure the audio unit works in all other modes. Does the audio unit work in all other modes? Yes - Go to step 2. No - Do a vehicle battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. Remove the Music Link interface unit, and verify the software version on the unit label is SW 1.06 or higher. Is the software version SW 1.06 or higher? Yes - Do the "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. No - Replace the Music Link interface unit and iPod cable. iPod music and XM radio music play at the same time (Pilot). There is a software compatibility issue in the XM receiver unit. Refer to S/B 06-061, XM(R) Satellite Radio and Audio Accessories Play at the Same Time for repair information. Music Link will not do Disc 1-4 search functions. NOTE: TTS software must be loaded on the customer's home computer before Disc 1-4 search functions work. 1. Use a known-good iPod to verify that the search functions (Disc 1-4) work. NOTE: Known-good test iPods are available from Tech Line. Does the known-good iPod do search functions (Disc 1-4)? Yes - Verify with the customer if the TTS software is loaded. If the customer needs assistance, refer the customer to American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department for assistance with TTS software loading problems (see page 6 of this bulletin). No - Do the battery cable reset, then retest: ^ Remove the negative and positive battery cables. Use a jumper wire to short the two cables together, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 15 minutes. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the jumper wire. Reconnect the positive battery cable first, then reconnect the negative cable. 2. If the problem does not go away, do "Check mark is not shown on iPod display screen, radio will not switch to CD-C or CD-4 mode" troubleshooting. Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using (Disc 2) search function. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Music Link(R) - System Information/Diagnostics > Page 9059 Make sure the "Compilations" setting is switched off in the settings menu on the customer's iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - See Compilation. Is the "Compilations" setting switched off? Yes - There is a TTS software program error. Tell the customer to rerun the TTS software. No - Change the "Compilations" setting on the customer's iPod to off. Song/Artist is not categorized in the correct grouping when using Disc 1-4 search functions. Remind the customer that the TTS software must be run after any songs are changed on the iPod, and advise them to run the TTS software and retest the iPod search functions. Explain to the customer that once the TTS software has run: ^ If the iPod functions properly, there was an intermittent TTS software program error. ^ If the iPod does not function properly, direct the customer to contact Customer Service for assistance with TTS software loading problems. CUSTOMER INFORMATION NEEDED BEFORE CALLING HONDA'S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT Print this page, and give it to the customer if they are experiencing a ITS software-related issue. Direct them to answer the questions, then contact American Honda's Automobile Customer Service Department at (800) 999-1009. Customer Information Before calling customer service, go to http//musiclink.honda.com/Tech_Faq.html and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Also, go to www.apple.com, select support, and view the technical FAQs and troubleshooting. Please have the following information ready when contacting customer service: ^ What is the main issue? ^ What type of iPod do you have? Refer to www.apple.com. ^ What version iPod firmware (unit software) is loaded? To find out what firmware (unit software) is loaded on the iPod: - Go to the Main Menu. - Select Settings. - Select About. ^ What version iTunes are you using on your home computer? ^ When you connect your iPod to the vehicle's Music Link connector, is the check mark displayed on your iPod display screen? ^ What type of computer do you have (Mac or PC)? ^ What operating system are you using? ^ Have you loaded the ITS software on your home computer? ^ Do you run the ITS software every time you connect your iPod to your home computer? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9064 DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair 06-001 February 26, 2010 Applies To: 1998 and Later Models - ALL Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange and Out-of-Warranty Repair (Supersedes 06-601, dated March 4, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR, the address for Pioneer Electronics Service was changed.* COVERAGE This bulletin applies to all Honda audio units, CD players/changers, cassette tape players, navigation units, and rear entertainment system (RES) units, both in warranty and out of warranty. COMPONENT REPLACEMENT POLICY Use only remanufactured components for warranty repairs on customer vehicles. Follow the warranty information and procedures given in this service bulletin. ^ Remanufactured audio, navigation, and RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. ^ Use new components to repair new, unsold vehicles. ^ A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. ^ You must receive authorization from your District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM) before ordering a new component. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: From the Flat Rate Manual Flat Rate Time: From the Flat Rate Manual Failed Part: Use the RM part number from the repair order without the RM (example: 08A06-341-110) Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Symptom Code: From Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual Part used for repair: Use the RM part number from the repair order (example: 08A06-341-110RM) IN-WARRANTY DIAGNOSIS Service Advisor: Interview the customer to get as much information as possible. Information like where and when the problem occurs is vital to your diagnosis. This information also helps you to determine if the audio, navigation, or RES system is operating normally, or if a problem exists. Write the complaint on the repair order. NOTE: For CD/DVD related problems, you must verify if the customer used discs with adhesive labels. Service Technician: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9065 1. Print out the appropriate system worksheet from an Interactive Network (iN) workstation. ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on (ISIS) Service Publications. ^ Click on SEARCH BY PUBLICATION. ^ Click on Job Aids. ^ Click on Audio System Worksheet, Navigation System Worksheet, or Rear Entertainment System Worksheet. 2. Duplicate and confirm the problem using the customer information written on the repair order or have the customer demonstrate the problem, then write down the results on the worksheet. Using the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX or the DTC INDEX (if applicable) in the applicable service manual, find the symptom that matches the customers complaint, and follow the diagnostic procedure: ^ Refer to the appropriate section in the service manual, or ^ From the iN main menu: - Click on SERVICE. - Click on ISIS (Service Publications). - Click on SEARCH BY VEHICLE. - Enter the model and the model year. - Enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES, and the DTC (if applicable) - Select the appropriate Service Bulletin, ServiceNews article, or Symptom Troubleshooting from the list. 3. Repair the vehicle according to your diagnosis, then confirm the repair by trying to duplicate the customer's original complaint, or check to see if the DTC returns: ^ If the problem is gone, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the problem is still there, go to step 4. 4. Replace the audio/navigation/RES unit with a remanufactured unit: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9066 ^ For warranty repairs, go to the IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE procedure. ^ For vehicle service contract (VSC) and certified used car (CUC) repairs, call. ^ For goodwill repairs, contact your dealership's District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM). IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE Service Technician: NOTE: ^ Use the iN to order a remanufactured audio, navigation, or RES unit. Do not call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. ^ A Tech Line reference number is not required to submit the order. Check Yes, and enter the Reference Number only when there is a preexisting Tech Line contact. 1. With your completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet, go to an iN workstation. 2. From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE, then click on AUDIO, then select Warranty Audio Order. 3. Select the model, year, and keyword (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES) for the vehicle you are working on, then click on Search. 4. Review all displayed publications for additional repair information. If you cannot repair the problem, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9067 5. Click Warranty Audio Order to view the Warranty Audio Order form. 6. Enter the VIN and the mileage, then click the Submit button to view the Warranty Audio Order form. Use the completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet to help you answer the questions on the Warranty Audio Order form. Questions with a red asterisk (*) are required fields that you must answer to submit the form. Make sure the information is complete (17-digit VIN, etc.). This information is critical to the remanufacturing process. Screen # 2 of the form contains the problem description, condition information, and shared functions. Fill this section out with as much information as possible. Select one part number from the list provided, then click Submit. It is your responsibility to ensure the correct part number is selected based on color and application information. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9068 NOTE: Once you submit your order, you can track it using the Warranty Audio VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. For details, go to WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS in this service bulletin. 7. You will receive a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit packed in a reusable shipping box. Save this box and the packing materials. You must return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this box. Otherwise your dealership risks being billed a core loss charge, ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 8. Remove the failed audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. 9. Install the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate installation procedure from the list. 10. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Also be sure to transfer all of the mounting brackets to the replacement unit. Failure to do this may result in dash squeaks and rattles. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs it for diagnosis and testing. ^ Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core. Customer media (CDs, CD magazines, DVDs, DVD-As, cassette tapes, etc.) will be properly removed by the supplier at the point of tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealer. Make sure the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not disassembled! If the core is disassembled, your dealership will be debited a core loss charge ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 11. Put the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in the same box that the remanufactured unit came in. NOTE: If you do not return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this same box, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. Parts Manager: 12. The Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form you submitted is kept on the iN for 60 days. Print out a copy to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on Transactions. ^ Click on Advanced Search, and enter a date range. ^ Click on Filtered by Service. ^ Under Transaction Description, click on Warranty Audio Order, then go back to the top of the page and click on Search. ^ Scroll down to the appropriate VIN, then select it to view the form. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 13. Print out a copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9069 ^ Click on Returns and Surplus. ^ Click on Audio Core Return. ^ Select the appropriate VIN to view the Update Core Return information screen. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 14. Place the printed copies of the Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form and the Core Return Update Acknowledgement into the core return box with the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core. NOTE: If you return a failed audio/navigation/RES core without the proper forms, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. 15. Ship the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core to the appropriate location by using the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit. NOTE: If the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not received at the specified address within 30 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, your warranty claim will be debited, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. If you know that you cannot return the core within 30 days, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group, and ask for an extension. ^ If you call for an extension and the core is not received within 60 days from the order date, you will be debited the full amount of the warranty claim. ^ If you do not call for an extension, and the core is received between 31 and 60 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, a $250 late core charge will be assessed. WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Here is a list of answers to the most frequently asked questions about the warranty audio order program: Question: When do I use the warranty audio order program? Answer: Use the program when you are replacing an audio/navigation/RES unit under warranty (including goodwill) that has an internal failure. NOTE: The customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is removed by the supplier at tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealership. Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. Remanufactured audio/navigation/RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. New components should be used to repair new, unsold vehicles. A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. Your DPSM must authorize ordering a new component. Question: How do I order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: For a warranty replacement, use the ordering information IN WARRANTY EXCHANGE. For goodwill repair, contact your DPSM. For a non-warranty repair, see OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR. Question: Who do I call for questions on the Warranty Audio Order Program? Answer: For administrative questions, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9070 Question: Who do I call if I need help diagnosing the problem or if I have technical questions about the unit? Answer: If you cannot find the answers in the appropriate service manual, service bulletins, or ServiceNews articles on iN, create a Tech Line access code, then call Tech Line: 1. From the iN main menu, select SERVICE. 2. Select Tech Line. A dropdown menu appears, then select Tech Line. The ISIS main screen appears. 3. Select SEARCH BY VEHICLE, and enter any vehicle with any keyword like NAVI, AUDIO, or RES. 4. At the top of the screen you will see this statement: If you cannot resolve the problem with the information below, then click Tech Line. Select Tech Line. 5. The Tech Line access code screen appears. Fill in all the required fields, then select SUBMIT. 6. Have the access number ready when you call Tech Line. Question: Do I need a Tech Line reference number to order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: No. Question: What year and model audio/navigation/RES unit can I order through the warranty audio order program? Answer: Most current models are available through the vehicle's standard warranty period. If your application is not available, you will receive a message instructing you to call the Re manufactured Parts Dealer Service Group at 888-997-7278. Question: How can I track my order once I submit it? Answer: To track your order, go the Warranty Audio Order VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. 1. From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. 2. Click on Parts Ordering. 3. Click on Audio VIN Inquiry. 4. Enter a date in the All Orders Accepted Since box, then click on Submit. The AUDIO VIN INQUIRY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT screen appears, listing orders by VIN, ORD REF (Order Reference), STAT (Status), SHIP DATE, SHIPPER, and PART NUMBER. The status of your order is displayed by one of these codes: Codes generated by RPO Tech Line: ^ PEND - Your order is waiting to be processed by RPO Tech Line. ^ HOLD - Your order is waiting for additional dealer diagnosis. ^ ERR - Your order caused an error; call. ^ DENY - RPO Tech Line denied your order; call. ^ APPR - RPO Tech Line approved your order and forwarded it to AHM Parts. Codes generated by AHM Parts Division: ^ BO/TOS - Your order is on back order or is temporarily out of stock. ^ CAN/BOC - Your order has been cancelled contact your assigned parts center. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9071 ^ ALO/BOA - Your order has been allocated, but not released for shipment. ^ REL/BOR - Your order has been picked, packed, and shipped. ^ INV - Your order has been invoiced to your dealer parts account. CORE RETURN INFORMATION Service Technician: 1. If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, or cassette tape) is stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and attach it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the media, and mail it back to your dealership. 2. Use the pre paid shipping label. Each audio supplier provides a prepaid shipping label with the remanufactured audio unit. Return the core using this label to ensure it is received at the appropriate location for credit. Use the pre paid shipping labels to return audio cores to authorized locations only; do not use them for any other purpose. If you need additional prepaid shipping labels, contact Remanufactured Parts Operations. ^ Complete the shipping label with your dealership information. ^ Pack one audio unit per box, and use a separate shipping label for each one. ^ On the line requesting Your Internal Reference Information, enter YOUR DEALER NUMBER and the WARRANTY CLAIM NUMBER. 3. On the repair order, write down the warranty claim number, the original part number, the serial numbers from both the faulty and remanufactured units, and the return tracking number. 4. Ship the faulty unit in the same box the remanufactured unit came in. Make sure you include this required paperwork: ^ A copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement from the iN. ^ A copy of the warranty audio order. NOTE: When the Remanufacturing Center gets the faulty unit, your warranty audio order will be updated to indicate that the core was received. If the core is received 31-60 days from the order date, and you have been debited a core loss charge, your dealership will be credited back, less a $250 late fee. OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, AND RES UNITS PRODUCED IN 1998 OR LATER) NOTE: If you are making a repair or exchange because of a service bulletin or service campaign, do not use OUT-OF-WARRANTY procedures. Refer to IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE for more information. Service Advisor: 1. Give your customer an estimate for repairing the unit (see step 6), plus the labor cost to replace it. For an Alpine unit, your customer has the option of contacting Alpine Electronics directly. Alpine's customer service number is 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304. Service Technician: 2. Remove the failed unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9072 ^ Online, enter keyword AUDIO, NAVI, or RES, and select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, navigation DVD, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there. The manufacturer will remove and return it. 3. Obtain an Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form, and complete the Technician section.To obtain the form, do this: ^ On ISIS, click on Technical Library, then click on Job Aids. ^ Select the applicable form from the list, and print it out: - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Audio System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Navigation System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Rear Entertainment System Component Repair Form Parts Manager: 4. Complete the parts manager's section of the Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Make sure you include your name, department, and dealership phone number on the form. 5. Identify the manufacturer. Units sent to the wrong manufacturer may not be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Look for the number code on the face of the unit. ^ If the unit has no number code on its face, check the label on the unit housing, and compare the first two or three letters of the radio reference number (or the audio unit model number) to this list: Alpine - CM, CD, MR, or MF Clarion - PH Fujitsu Ten - CE or SD Panasonic - CQ or CR Pioneer KEH or DEH 6. Contact the manufacturer (see step 9) to request an estimate for the cost of the repair plus shipping. 7. Complete the required paperwork: ^ Paying by check - Make a dealership check out to the manufacturer for the cost of repair and return shipping. Make sure to include the check number on the form. NOTE: For all Panasonic products, make your check out to Komtec Electronics. ^ Paying by credit card (Visa or Mastercard only) - When you use a credit card, fill in all of these fields on the component repair form: - Credit card number - Credit card expiration date Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9073 - The name as it appears on the credit card - Signature (authorized card holder) - Phone number - Authorized charge amount NOTE: If you send in a faulty unit without a check or complete credit card information, the manufacturer may send it back to you unrepaired, or they may repair it and send it back to you C.O.D. ^ Print two copies of the completed Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Keep one copy with the repair order, and include the other copy with the faulty unit when you send it to the manufacturer. 8. Carefully pack the faulty unit and the paperwork in a suitable box, and label the box clearly. You are responsible for lost or damaged units; keep all shipping documents and insurance receipts. 9. Ship the faulty unit to the appropriate manufacturer via UPS. Alpine Electronics of America c/o Standard Radio Engineering Corp. 2012 Abalone Ave., Unit D Torrance, CA 90501 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304 Bose Corporation Automotive Systems Division-Service Framingham, MA 01701-9168 800-231-2673 S3 Clarion Factory Service Center 241 Beaver Rd. Walton, KY 41094 800-347-8667 (You must get authorization from Clarion before shipping units) Fujitsu Ten 19600 5. Vermont Ave. Torrance, CA 90502 800-237-5413 FTH Group Inc. (Kenwood Accessory Parts) 16685 E. Johnson Dr. City of Industry, CA 91745 626-333-2435 (You must get an RMA authorization number from www.fthgroupinc.com; from the home page, select Consumer Products) Komtec Electronics (Panasonic) 6590 Darin Way Cypress, CA 90630 714-903-3300 (Make sure your check is made out to Komtec) * Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc. 1925 E. Dominguez St. Long Beach, CA 90801 800-553-3756* Visteon c/o Model Electronics 615 E. Crescent Ave. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9074 Ramsey, NJ 07446 800-433-9657 (Visteon offers an open line of credit. Call their 800 number to establish an account.) NOTE: ^ The manufacturer will repair the unit and ship it back within 5-7 working days, via UPS ground prepaid or 2nd Day Air (whichever you requested). Do not forget to include the shipping cost in your dealership payment. Units damaged by misuse or mishandling cannot be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Each manufacturer's guarantee for the repair differs. To confirm the repair guarantee, contact the manufacturer using the phone number listed above. 10. To check on the status of your repair order, call the manufacturer. If your customer has any further questions or concerns, have them call Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009. NOTE: A damaged unit may need extra repair. If so, the manufacturer will call you with an estimate of any added charges. ^ If you accept the estimate, mail a dealership check for the additional amount to the manufacturer, authorize the increased amount to be applied to the credit card payment, or have the manufacturer ship the unit back to you, and you pay the difference upon arrival (C.O.D.). ^ If you reject the estimate, the faulty unit will be returned to you along with a refund. However, you will be charged $30.00 (C.O.D.) for diagnosis, shipping, and handling. The unit will be shipped back to you, via UPS Ground. COMPLETING THE OUT-OF-WARRANTY/NEW REPLACEMENT AUDIO SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR FORM Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9075 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9076 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions > Page 9077 NOTE: It is very important that you fill out this form fully and accurately. An accurate explanation of the problem and conditions helps the manufacturer to duplicate the problem, speeding the repair, and reducing the number of No Trouble Found" (NTF) units. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair Navigation System: Technical Service Bulletins Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair 06-001 February 26, 2010 Applies To: 1998 and Later Models - ALL Audio, Navigation, and RES Unit In-Warranty Exchange and Out-of-Warranty Repair (Supersedes 06-601, dated March 4, 2009, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Under OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR, the address for Pioneer Electronics Service was changed.* COVERAGE This bulletin applies to all Honda audio units, CD players/changers, cassette tape players, navigation units, and rear entertainment system (RES) units, both in warranty and out of warranty. COMPONENT REPLACEMENT POLICY Use only remanufactured components for warranty repairs on customer vehicles. Follow the warranty information and procedures given in this service bulletin. ^ Remanufactured audio, navigation, and RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. ^ Use new components to repair new, unsold vehicles. ^ A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. ^ You must receive authorization from your District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM) before ordering a new component. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: From the Flat Rate Manual Flat Rate Time: From the Flat Rate Manual Failed Part: Use the RM part number from the repair order without the RM (example: 08A06-341-110) Defect Code: From the Flat Rate Manual Symptom Code: From Audio Customer Contention Codes in the Flat Rate Manual Part used for repair: Use the RM part number from the repair order (example: 08A06-341-110RM) IN-WARRANTY DIAGNOSIS Service Advisor: Interview the customer to get as much information as possible. Information like where and when the problem occurs is vital to your diagnosis. This information also helps you to determine if the audio, navigation, or RES system is operating normally, or if a problem exists. Write the complaint on the repair order. NOTE: For CD/DVD related problems, you must verify if the customer used discs with adhesive labels. Service Technician: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9082 1. Print out the appropriate system worksheet from an Interactive Network (iN) workstation. ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on (ISIS) Service Publications. ^ Click on SEARCH BY PUBLICATION. ^ Click on Job Aids. ^ Click on Audio System Worksheet, Navigation System Worksheet, or Rear Entertainment System Worksheet. 2. Duplicate and confirm the problem using the customer information written on the repair order or have the customer demonstrate the problem, then write down the results on the worksheet. Using the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX or the DTC INDEX (if applicable) in the applicable service manual, find the symptom that matches the customers complaint, and follow the diagnostic procedure: ^ Refer to the appropriate section in the service manual, or ^ From the iN main menu: - Click on SERVICE. - Click on ISIS (Service Publications). - Click on SEARCH BY VEHICLE. - Enter the model and the model year. - Enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES, and the DTC (if applicable) - Select the appropriate Service Bulletin, ServiceNews article, or Symptom Troubleshooting from the list. 3. Repair the vehicle according to your diagnosis, then confirm the repair by trying to duplicate the customer's original complaint, or check to see if the DTC returns: ^ If the problem is gone, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the problem is still there, go to step 4. 4. Replace the audio/navigation/RES unit with a remanufactured unit: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9083 ^ For warranty repairs, go to the IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE procedure. ^ For vehicle service contract (VSC) and certified used car (CUC) repairs, call. ^ For goodwill repairs, contact your dealership's District Parts and Service Manager (DPSM). IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE Service Technician: NOTE: ^ Use the iN to order a remanufactured audio, navigation, or RES unit. Do not call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. ^ A Tech Line reference number is not required to submit the order. Check Yes, and enter the Reference Number only when there is a preexisting Tech Line contact. 1. With your completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet, go to an iN workstation. 2. From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE, then click on AUDIO, then select Warranty Audio Order. 3. Select the model, year, and keyword (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES) for the vehicle you are working on, then click on Search. 4. Review all displayed publications for additional repair information. If you cannot repair the problem, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9084 5. Click Warranty Audio Order to view the Warranty Audio Order form. 6. Enter the VIN and the mileage, then click the Submit button to view the Warranty Audio Order form. Use the completed Audio/Navigation/RES Worksheet to help you answer the questions on the Warranty Audio Order form. Questions with a red asterisk (*) are required fields that you must answer to submit the form. Make sure the information is complete (17-digit VIN, etc.). This information is critical to the remanufacturing process. Screen # 2 of the form contains the problem description, condition information, and shared functions. Fill this section out with as much information as possible. Select one part number from the list provided, then click Submit. It is your responsibility to ensure the correct part number is selected based on color and application information. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9085 NOTE: Once you submit your order, you can track it using the Warranty Audio VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. For details, go to WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS in this service bulletin. 7. You will receive a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit packed in a reusable shipping box. Save this box and the packing materials. You must return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this box. Otherwise your dealership risks being billed a core loss charge, ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 8. Remove the failed audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. 9. Install the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or ^ Online, enter a keyword: AUDIO, NAVIGATION, or RES. Select the appropriate installation procedure from the list. 10. If the remanufactured unit has a shipping cover and shipping screws, make sure you transfer them to the faulty unit being returned. Also be sure to transfer all of the mounting brackets to the replacement unit. Failure to do this may result in dash squeaks and rattles. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there for these reasons: ^ The manufacturer needs it for diagnosis and testing. ^ Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core. Customer media (CDs, CD magazines, DVDs, DVD-As, cassette tapes, etc.) will be properly removed by the supplier at the point of tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealer. Make sure the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not disassembled! If the core is disassembled, your dealership will be debited a core loss charge ranging from $800 to $2,500, depending on the unit. 11. Put the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in the same box that the remanufactured unit came in. NOTE: If you do not return the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core in this same box, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. Parts Manager: 12. The Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form you submitted is kept on the iN for 60 days. Print out a copy to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on SERVICE. ^ Click on Transactions. ^ Click on Advanced Search, and enter a date range. ^ Click on Filtered by Service. ^ Under Transaction Description, click on Warranty Audio Order, then go back to the top of the page and click on Search. ^ Scroll down to the appropriate VIN, then select it to view the form. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 13. Print out a copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement to put in the box with your core return: ^ From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9086 ^ Click on Returns and Surplus. ^ Click on Audio Core Return. ^ Select the appropriate VIN to view the Update Core Return information screen. ^ Review the form, then print out a copy by clicking on the printer icon. 14. Place the printed copies of the Warranty Audio/Navigation/RES Unit Order form and the Core Return Update Acknowledgement into the core return box with the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core. NOTE: If you return a failed audio/navigation/RES core without the proper forms, your warranty claim will be debited and the core will be sent back to your dealership. 15. Ship the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core to the appropriate location by using the prepaid shipping label that came with the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit. NOTE: If the failed audio/navigation/RES unit core is not received at the specified address within 30 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, your warranty claim will be debited, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. If you know that you cannot return the core within 30 days, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group, and ask for an extension. ^ If you call for an extension and the core is not received within 60 days from the order date, you will be debited the full amount of the warranty claim. ^ If you do not call for an extension, and the core is received between 31 and 60 days from the order date of the remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit, a $250 late core charge will be assessed. WARRANTY AUDIO ORDER PROGRAM FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Here is a list of answers to the most frequently asked questions about the warranty audio order program: Question: When do I use the warranty audio order program? Answer: Use the program when you are replacing an audio/navigation/RES unit under warranty (including goodwill) that has an internal failure. NOTE: The customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, etc.) is removed by the supplier at tear down and inspection of the failed unit, and mailed to your dealership. Any failed audio/navigation/RES unit core that is returned disassembled is considered an unusable core, and your dealership will be issued a core loss charge ranging between $800 and $2,500. Remanufactured audio/navigation/RES units are not available for non-warranty repairs. New components should be used to repair new, unsold vehicles. A new component may be used to repair a customer's vehicle only if the remanufactured component is currently unavailable from American Honda. Your DPSM must authorize ordering a new component. Question: How do I order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: For a warranty replacement, use the ordering information IN WARRANTY EXCHANGE. For goodwill repair, contact your DPSM. For a non-warranty repair, see OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR. Question: Who do I call for questions on the Warranty Audio Order Program? Answer: For administrative questions, call the Remanufactured Parts Dealer Service Group. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9087 Question: Who do I call if I need help diagnosing the problem or if I have technical questions about the unit? Answer: If you cannot find the answers in the appropriate service manual, service bulletins, or ServiceNews articles on iN, create a Tech Line access code, then call Tech Line: 1. From the iN main menu, select SERVICE. 2. Select Tech Line. A dropdown menu appears, then select Tech Line. The ISIS main screen appears. 3. Select SEARCH BY VEHICLE, and enter any vehicle with any keyword like NAVI, AUDIO, or RES. 4. At the top of the screen you will see this statement: If you cannot resolve the problem with the information below, then click Tech Line. Select Tech Line. 5. The Tech Line access code screen appears. Fill in all the required fields, then select SUBMIT. 6. Have the access number ready when you call Tech Line. Question: Do I need a Tech Line reference number to order a remanufactured audio/navigation/RES unit? Answer: No. Question: What year and model audio/navigation/RES unit can I order through the warranty audio order program? Answer: Most current models are available through the vehicle's standard warranty period. If your application is not available, you will receive a message instructing you to call the Re manufactured Parts Dealer Service Group at 888-997-7278. Question: How can I track my order once I submit it? Answer: To track your order, go the Warranty Audio Order VIN Inquiry screen on the iN. 1. From the iN main menu, click on PARTS. 2. Click on Parts Ordering. 3. Click on Audio VIN Inquiry. 4. Enter a date in the All Orders Accepted Since box, then click on Submit. The AUDIO VIN INQUIRY ACKNOWLEDGEMENT screen appears, listing orders by VIN, ORD REF (Order Reference), STAT (Status), SHIP DATE, SHIPPER, and PART NUMBER. The status of your order is displayed by one of these codes: Codes generated by RPO Tech Line: ^ PEND - Your order is waiting to be processed by RPO Tech Line. ^ HOLD - Your order is waiting for additional dealer diagnosis. ^ ERR - Your order caused an error; call. ^ DENY - RPO Tech Line denied your order; call. ^ APPR - RPO Tech Line approved your order and forwarded it to AHM Parts. Codes generated by AHM Parts Division: ^ BO/TOS - Your order is on back order or is temporarily out of stock. ^ CAN/BOC - Your order has been cancelled contact your assigned parts center. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9088 ^ ALO/BOA - Your order has been allocated, but not released for shipment. ^ REL/BOR - Your order has been picked, packed, and shipped. ^ INV - Your order has been invoiced to your dealer parts account. CORE RETURN INFORMATION Service Technician: 1. If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, or cassette tape) is stuck inside the faulty unit, fill out a Customer Media Return Label (reorder number Y0325), and attach it to the unit. The manufacturer will remove the media, and mail it back to your dealership. 2. Use the pre paid shipping label. Each audio supplier provides a prepaid shipping label with the remanufactured audio unit. Return the core using this label to ensure it is received at the appropriate location for credit. Use the pre paid shipping labels to return audio cores to authorized locations only; do not use them for any other purpose. If you need additional prepaid shipping labels, contact Remanufactured Parts Operations. ^ Complete the shipping label with your dealership information. ^ Pack one audio unit per box, and use a separate shipping label for each one. ^ On the line requesting Your Internal Reference Information, enter YOUR DEALER NUMBER and the WARRANTY CLAIM NUMBER. 3. On the repair order, write down the warranty claim number, the original part number, the serial numbers from both the faulty and remanufactured units, and the return tracking number. 4. Ship the faulty unit in the same box the remanufactured unit came in. Make sure you include this required paperwork: ^ A copy of the Core Return Update Acknowledgement from the iN. ^ A copy of the warranty audio order. NOTE: When the Remanufacturing Center gets the faulty unit, your warranty audio order will be updated to indicate that the core was received. If the core is received 31-60 days from the order date, and you have been debited a core loss charge, your dealership will be credited back, less a $250 late fee. OUT-OF-WARRANTY REPAIR (AUDIO, NAVIGATION, AND RES UNITS PRODUCED IN 1998 OR LATER) NOTE: If you are making a repair or exchange because of a service bulletin or service campaign, do not use OUT-OF-WARRANTY procedures. Refer to IN-WARRANTY EXCHANGE for more information. Service Advisor: 1. Give your customer an estimate for repairing the unit (see step 6), plus the labor cost to replace it. For an Alpine unit, your customer has the option of contacting Alpine Electronics directly. Alpine's customer service number is 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304. Service Technician: 2. Remove the failed unit: ^ Refer to the appropriate component section of the service manual or, Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9089 ^ Online, enter keyword AUDIO, NAVI, or RES, and select the appropriate removal procedure from the list. NOTE: If the customer's media (CD, CD magazine, DVD, DVD-A, cassette tape, navigation DVD, etc.) is stuck in the unit, leave it there. The manufacturer will remove and return it. 3. Obtain an Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form, and complete the Technician section.To obtain the form, do this: ^ On ISIS, click on Technical Library, then click on Job Aids. ^ Select the applicable form from the list, and print it out: - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Audio System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Navigation System Component Repair Form - Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement Rear Entertainment System Component Repair Form Parts Manager: 4. Complete the parts manager's section of the Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Make sure you include your name, department, and dealership phone number on the form. 5. Identify the manufacturer. Units sent to the wrong manufacturer may not be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Look for the number code on the face of the unit. ^ If the unit has no number code on its face, check the label on the unit housing, and compare the first two or three letters of the radio reference number (or the audio unit model number) to this list: Alpine - CM, CD, MR, or MF Clarion - PH Fujitsu Ten - CE or SD Panasonic - CQ or CR Pioneer KEH or DEH 6. Contact the manufacturer (see step 9) to request an estimate for the cost of the repair plus shipping. 7. Complete the required paperwork: ^ Paying by check - Make a dealership check out to the manufacturer for the cost of repair and return shipping. Make sure to include the check number on the form. NOTE: For all Panasonic products, make your check out to Komtec Electronics. ^ Paying by credit card (Visa or Mastercard only) - When you use a credit card, fill in all of these fields on the component repair form: - Credit card number - Credit card expiration date Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9090 - The name as it appears on the credit card - Signature (authorized card holder) - Phone number - Authorized charge amount NOTE: If you send in a faulty unit without a check or complete credit card information, the manufacturer may send it back to you unrepaired, or they may repair it and send it back to you C.O.D. ^ Print two copies of the completed Out-of-Warranty/New Replacement component repair form. Keep one copy with the repair order, and include the other copy with the faulty unit when you send it to the manufacturer. 8. Carefully pack the faulty unit and the paperwork in a suitable box, and label the box clearly. You are responsible for lost or damaged units; keep all shipping documents and insurance receipts. 9. Ship the faulty unit to the appropriate manufacturer via UPS. Alpine Electronics of America c/o Standard Radio Engineering Corp. 2012 Abalone Ave., Unit D Torrance, CA 90501 800-421-2284, Ext. 860304 Bose Corporation Automotive Systems Division-Service Framingham, MA 01701-9168 800-231-2673 S3 Clarion Factory Service Center 241 Beaver Rd. Walton, KY 41094 800-347-8667 (You must get authorization from Clarion before shipping units) Fujitsu Ten 19600 5. Vermont Ave. Torrance, CA 90502 800-237-5413 FTH Group Inc. (Kenwood Accessory Parts) 16685 E. Johnson Dr. City of Industry, CA 91745 626-333-2435 (You must get an RMA authorization number from www.fthgroupinc.com; from the home page, select Consumer Products) Komtec Electronics (Panasonic) 6590 Darin Way Cypress, CA 90630 714-903-3300 (Make sure your check is made out to Komtec) * Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc. 1925 E. Dominguez St. Long Beach, CA 90801 800-553-3756* Visteon c/o Model Electronics 615 E. Crescent Ave. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9091 Ramsey, NJ 07446 800-433-9657 (Visteon offers an open line of credit. Call their 800 number to establish an account.) NOTE: ^ The manufacturer will repair the unit and ship it back within 5-7 working days, via UPS ground prepaid or 2nd Day Air (whichever you requested). Do not forget to include the shipping cost in your dealership payment. Units damaged by misuse or mishandling cannot be shipped back within the usual 5-7 days. ^ Each manufacturer's guarantee for the repair differs. To confirm the repair guarantee, contact the manufacturer using the phone number listed above. 10. To check on the status of your repair order, call the manufacturer. If your customer has any further questions or concerns, have them call Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009. NOTE: A damaged unit may need extra repair. If so, the manufacturer will call you with an estimate of any added charges. ^ If you accept the estimate, mail a dealership check for the additional amount to the manufacturer, authorize the increased amount to be applied to the credit card payment, or have the manufacturer ship the unit back to you, and you pay the difference upon arrival (C.O.D.). ^ If you reject the estimate, the faulty unit will be returned to you along with a refund. However, you will be charged $30.00 (C.O.D.) for diagnosis, shipping, and handling. The unit will be shipped back to you, via UPS Ground. COMPLETING THE OUT-OF-WARRANTY/NEW REPLACEMENT AUDIO SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR FORM Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9092 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9093 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio/Navigation/RES - Warr. Exchange/Non-Warr Repair > Page 9094 NOTE: It is very important that you fill out this form fully and accurately. An accurate explanation of the problem and conditions helps the manufacturer to duplicate the problem, speeding the repair, and reducing the number of No Trouble Found" (NTF) units. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Locations 144. Right Side of Rear Shelf Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > CD Changer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9100 206. CD Changer (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations 73. Behind Audio Unit Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radio/Stereo: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9106 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9107 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9109 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9110 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9111 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9112 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9113 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9114 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9115 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9116 Radio/Stereo: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9117 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9118 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9119 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9120 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9121 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9122 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9123 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9124 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9125 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9126 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9127 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9128 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9129 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9130 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9131 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9132 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9133 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9134 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9135 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9136 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9137 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9138 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9139 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9140 Stereo Sound System - Sedan Image 150-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations Speaker: Locations 124. Driver's Door (Front Passenger's or Passenger's) 140. Left Side of Rear Shelf (right similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 9144 Speaker: Diagrams 81. Speaker, Driver's Door 82. Speaker, Front Passenger's Door (Sedan) 83. Speaker, Left Rear Or Right Rear (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 9145 84. Speaker, Passenger's Door (Coupe) 92. Tweeter, Left Or Right (Coupe EX; '05 Sedan: SE) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 9146 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Replacement Tweeter: 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tweeter (B). 3. Remove the mirror mount cover (C). 4. Remove the screw and tweeter from the mirror mount cover. Door Speaker: 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Pull the top of the speaker (A) straight out to release the upper clip, then lift the speaker straight up to release the lower clips. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the speaker. Rear Speaker: 4-door 1. Remove the rear shelf. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 9147 2. Remove the three mounting screws, then disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the speaker (B). Rear Speaker: 2-door 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Remove the four screws, and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the speaker (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9157 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9158 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9164 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9165 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9168 59. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9175 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9176 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9177 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9178 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9179 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9180 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9181 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9182 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9183 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9184 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9194 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9195 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9196 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9197 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9200 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9201 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9202 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9203 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9204 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Connector Views 182. Immobilizer Control Unit - Receiver 214. Security Control Unit (Optional) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9205 Immobilizer System - Except System Image 132 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit <--> [Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9206 Alarm/Immobilizer Control Unit: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The immobilizer system is designed to prevent the car from being started without the owner's ignition key. If an attempt is made to Start the car with any other key, the immobilizer system will disable the car's fuel supply. The immobilizer system consists of the ignition key, immobilizer control unit-receiver, immobilizer indicator light, PGM-FI main relays, injector relay (GX), fuel pump (except GX), fuel tank internal solenoid valve (GX), and the ECM/PCM. With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the ECM/PCM receive an "ignition on" signal through fuse 6 and the PGM-FI main relay 1. The ECM/PCM then sends power to the ignition key transponder through the immobilizer control unit-receiver. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to the ECM/PCM through the receiver. If the signal is correct, the ECM/PCM will energize the car's fuel supply system by grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light flashes a code to indicate that the correct key has been inserted. If the ignition key signal is not correct, the ECM/PCM will not energize the car's fuel supply system by not grounding the PGM-FI main relay 2 (except GX) or injector relay (GX). The immobilizer indicator light then flashes a code to indicate that an incorrect key has been inserted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations 134. Right C Pillar (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9210 28. Antenna Module (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9211 Antenna Control Module: Testing and Inspection Antenna Module Input Test 2-door 1. Remove the right C-Pillar trim. 2. Make sure the antenna module mounting bolt (A) is torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the antenna module (C). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), turn the rear window defogger switch ON. Check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no voltage, check for: Faulty rear window defogger relay. - Blown No.11 (40 A) fuse or No.19 (80 A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - An open in the BLK/YEL wire. 5. With the ignition switch ON (II), turn the radio ON, and turn to an FM station. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and body ground. If there is no voltage, check for: An open in the YEL/GRN wire. - A short to ground in the YEL/GRN wire. - Faulty audio unit. 6. Disconnect the rear window defogger (+B OUT) connector (D) from the antenna module. 7. With the ignition switch and the rear window defogger switch ON, check for voltage to ground. If there is no voltage, replace the antenna module. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9212 9. Check for continuity between the rear window defogger negative terminal (A) connector and body ground. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check for: An open in the BLK wire (B) - An open in the rear window defogger wire - Poor ground (G701) (C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9219 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9220 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9221 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9222 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9223 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. Emergency Towing There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the vehicle. To accommodate the flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is equipped with towing hooks (A) and tie down slots (B). The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down slots can be used to secure the vehicle to truck. Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain on the ground. Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this method of towing is attempted. If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do the following: Manual Transmission - Release the parking brake. - Shift the transmission in Neutral. Automatic Transmission and CVT - Release the parking brake. - Start the engine. - Shift to D position, then N position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9228 - Turn off the engine. It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h). NOTE: - Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine (automatic transmission), the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed. - Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Locations Body Control Systems: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Locations > Page 9233 Multiplex Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Locations > Page 9234 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9238 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9239 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9240 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9259 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9260 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9261 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9262 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9263 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9264 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9265 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9266 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9267 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9268 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9269 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9270 Body Control Systems: Connector Views 241. Carlink Card Reader 242. Carlink Interface Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9271 Body Control Systems: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 52-0 (LX-C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9272 Diagram 52-1 (LX-C) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9273 Diagram 52-2 (LX-C) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Page 9274 Body Control Systems: Description and Operation System Descriptions The Multiplex Control System has four internal functions: - Multiplexing (send multiple signals over shared wires) - Wake up/sleep (runs at full power only on demand to reduce battery draw) - Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals) - Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system. Mode 2 for input lines) The system controls the function of these circuits: - Entry light control (ignition key light and ceiling light) - Wiper/washer (including intermittent wipe and park functions) - Interlock system - Keyless/power Door Lock - Key-in reminder - Meter assembly, temperature gauge, and indicator lights - HVAC (compressor and fan control) Multiplex Communication To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals are sent via shared multiplex communication lines rather than sending normal electrical signals through individual wires. - The input signals from each switch are converted to digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU). - The digital signals are sent from the transmitting unit to the receiving unit as serial signals. - The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal at the receiving unit, and it operates the related component or monitors a switch. - There are exclusive communication lines between the ECM/PCM, the gauge assembly, and the under-dash fuse/relay box, Wake-up and Sleep The multiplex control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery when the ignition switch is OFF. - In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the system to operate. - As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode immediately wakes up and begins to function. - When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's or front passenger's door is opened, then closed, there is about a 10 second delay before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode. - If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function. - If a key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will not function. - When in sleep mode, the draw is reduced from 70 - 80 mA to less than 10 mA. Fail-safe To prevent improper operation, the multiplex control system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when any part of the system malfunctions (for example a faulty control unit or communication line). Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is any CPU malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit and allows the system to operate normally. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting Body Control Systems: Testing and Inspection Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Mode 1 Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Check the No.9 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the No.10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Are the fuses OK? YES - Go to step 2. NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled, the seatbelt reminder will chime 6 times. 4. Set the ceiling light to the center position and close all the doors. 5. Connect the special tool to the multiplex inspection connector. 6. After about 5 seconds the spotlight and ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blink on for 0.2 second to show the system is now in mode 1. Did the spotlight and ceiling light indicate mode 1? YES - Go to step 8. NO - Go to step 7. 7. Check for continuity between terminal 4 of the under-dash fuse/relay box connector J and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. NO - Repair the open in the wire. If the wire is ok, repair G301. 8. If the are DTCs present, the spotlight and ceiling light will blink to indicate the DTC(s). If more than one DTC is present, the DTCs will be displayed in ascending order. If there are not DTCs the spotlight and ceiling light will no blink again after the mode 1 indication. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 9277 Are there any DTCs? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Go to the Mode 2 test. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 9278 9. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in the order indicated using the shown charts. If a faulty control unit is suspected, substitute it with a known good part and recheck for DTCs. - If the DTC(s) is still present, go to the next step instead for the DTC. - If the DTC(s) is no longer present, replace the original part. Note: Before replacing a Faulty ECM/PCM make sure it has the latest software revision. Update if necessary before swapping or replacing. Made 2 Test 1. From Mode 1, disconnect the special tool from the multiplex inspection connector for 5 to 10 seconds, and then reconnect it. 2. The spotlight and ceiling light should come on for 2 seconds, go out, then blink twice, 0.2 seconds each time. The system is now in mode 2. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 9279 3. Operate the switches listed. If the circuit is ok, the spotlight and ceiling lights will blink once. If the circuit is faulty, the lights will not blink. Tip: Operate the switches most closely related to the problem you are diagnosing is a quick way of testing the circuits integrity. 4. If all inputs were confirmed, or multiple circuits failed at the same time in mode 2, go to the multiplex sleep mode test. If a single switch fails in mode 2, troubleshoot its circuit. Multiplex Sleep Mode Test 1. Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to terminal 10 of the under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (YEL) or K (WHT/GRN) and the negative lead to body ground. 2. Connect ammeter between the negative battery cable and the negative battery post. 3. Remove the special tool from the multiplex inspection connector. 4. Close the doors, the hatch, turn the headlights off, turn off the ignition switch and remove the key. 5. Within 1 minute the voltage on the communication wire (E10 or K10) should change from approx 4 - 10 V to battery voltage and the amperage at the negative battery terminal should drop from approx. 70 - 80 mA to less than 10 mA. 6. Record your findings and go to the Multiplex Wake-up Test. Multiplex Wake-up Test 1. From the sleep mode. Wake-up the multiplex system by performing one of the following operations: 2. As the system shifts to its active (wake-up) mode, communication wire voltage will return to 4 - 10 V and the battery terminal current will return to 70 - 80 mA. 3. If the system does not go into sleep mode or wake-up properly, perform the Multiplex Control Unit Input Test. NOTE: If multiple circuits fail to respond in the mode 2 tests and/or the multiplex circuit fails to go into sleep mode or wake-up, it may mean that a control unit failed without triggering a DTC in mode 1. Perform the Multiplex Control Unit Input Test. If the input test confirms that all the inputs are working properly, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit, gauge assembly or ECM one at a time. If after swapping one of the above components the system works properly, replace the original component, it is faulty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 9280 Body Control Systems: Testing and Inspection Multiplex Control Unit Input Test Multiplex Control Unit Input Test 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Unbolt the under-dash fuse/relay box and pull it down. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. 4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Multiplex Control System Troubleshooting > Page 9281 5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation Front Bumper: Description and Operation Door and Bumper Reinforcement Beams Door and bumper reinforcement beams used on Honda vehicles are made from a metal equivalent to High Strength Steel. If High Strength Steel is heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If High Strength Steel is damaged, as in a vehicle accident, where the door and bumper reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack if an attempt is made to straighten them. For this reason, door and bumper reinforcement beams should NEVER be repaired; they should be replaced if they are damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper Front Bumper: Service and Repair Front Bumper Front Bumper Removal/Installation NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the front bumper as shown. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper > Page 9288 Front Bumper: Service and Repair Front Bumper Removal/Installation Front Bumper Removal/Installation '01-03 Models NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. '04-05 Models NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper. - Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the front bumper as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Bumper > Page 9289 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Specifications > Page 9293 Rear Bumper: Description and Operation Door and Bumper Reinforcement Beams Door and bumper reinforcement beams used on Honda vehicles are made from a metal equivalent to High Strength Steel. If High Strength Steel is heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If High Strength Steel is damaged, as in a vehicle accident, where the door and bumper reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack if an attempt is made to straighten them. For this reason, door and bumper reinforcement beams should NEVER be repaired; they should be replaced if they are damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Rear Bumper Removal/Installation NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the rear bumper as shown. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers, side brackets and upper brackets on both sides securely. - Make sure the side spacers of the rear bumper engage the clips on the body securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper > Page 9296 Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Removal/Installation Rear Bumper Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the rear bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers, upper spacers and upper brackets on both sides securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper. - Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper > Page 9297 1. Remove the rear bumper as shown. 2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers, side brackets and upper brackets on both sides securely. - Make sure the side spacers of the rear bumper engage the clips on the body securely. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Cabin Ventilation Duct: Procedures Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9302 Cabin Ventilation Duct: Removal and Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B) Take care not to scratch the body. 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then remove the hood rear seal (B), and detach the clips (C) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clip (D) or clip (E), and clips (F, G), and release the hook (H) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (I) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (J), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Detach the clips (D) or clips (E), and clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (K) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (L), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clip portions into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Coupe Door Outer Handle Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary 3. Use a hooked-shaped tool to remove the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock cylinder (B). Disconnect the cylinder rod (C). 4. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9315 5. Remove the maintenance hole seal (A). Disconnect the outer handle rod (B), and remove the nuts, then remove the outer handle protector (C) from the outer handle (D). 6. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered sequence, and remove it. 7. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer door handle bolts loose so the inner protector does not interfere with the lock cylinder installation, then tighten the handle bolts. - Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the handle, then install the lock cylinder in the door. Be sure the clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9316 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Outer Handle Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary 3. Use a hooked-shaped tool to remove the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock cylinder (B). Disconnect the cylinder rod (C). 4. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A), and remove the nuts, then remove the outer handle protector (B) from the outer handle (C). 5. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered sequence, and remove it. 6. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer door handle bolts loose so the inner protector does not interfere with the lock cylinder Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9317 installation, then tighten the handle bolts. - Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the handle, then install the lock cylinder in the door. Be sure the clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Coupe Door Latch Replacement 2-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary 3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B) by pulling it downward. 4. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, and disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 5. Remove the screw, and release the clip (A) and hook (B) while pulling the cable protector (C) forward, then remove it from the latch (D) and door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9322 6. Release the lock knob (A) from the knob bracket (B), and detach the inner handle rod (C) from the rod holder (D). Detach the harness clip (E), and disconnect the actuator connectors (F). 7. Remove the screws, then remove the latch (A) through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (B), cylinder rod (C), inner handle rod (D), and lock knob cable (E). 8. If necessary, disconnect the lock knob cable (A) from the latch (B). 9. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in properly, and each rod and cable is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9323 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Latch Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary 3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, and disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer handle. 4. Remove the clip, and remove the lock rod protector (A) in the numbered sequence. 5. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower channel (B) by pulling it downward. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9324 6. Disconnect the actuator connectors (A) (for some models), and detach the inner handle rod (B) from the rod holder (C). Remove the lock knob (D). 7. Remove the screws, then remove the latch (E) through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (F), cylinder rod (G), lock rod (H), and inner handle rod. 8. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in properly (with power door lock), and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Coupe Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available 2-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. If applicable, remove the regulator handle (A) by pulling the clip (B) out with a wire hook (C). 2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to scratch the door panel. 1. Pry out on the upper portion of the cover (B) to release the hooks (C, D), then remove the cover. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way to release the hook (E). 4. Disconnect the inner handle rod (F) and power door lock switch connector (G) (driver's side for some models). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9329 3. Remove the switch panel (A) (power window model) or the pull pocket (B) (manual window model). 1. Using a trim tool, pry the cap (C), then remove the screw(D). 2. Pry out the panel or pocket to release the clips (E). 3. Release the clip (F) by pulling the cover or pocket forward. 4. Power window model: Disconnect the power window switch connector (G). 4. Remove the screws (H) securing the door panel. 5. Remove the mirror mount cover. 6. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a commercially available trim pad remover (B), then remove the door panel by pulling it upward. Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9330 7. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the rod is connected properly. - Make sure the window and power door locks operate properly. - If applicable, install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 ° angle with the glass fully closed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9331 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Sedan Front Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available 4-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. If applicable, remove the regulator handle (A) by pulling the clip (B) out with a wire hook (C) 2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to scratch the door panel. 1. Pry out on the upper portion of the cover (B) to release the hooks (C, D), then remove the cover. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way to release the hook (E). 4. Disconnect the inner handle rod (F) and power door lock switch connector (G). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9332 3. Remove the grip cover (A). To remove the passenger's grip cover, refer to rear door panel removal/installation. 1. Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the clips (B). 2. Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks (C). 3. Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks (D), and release the clip (E) by pulling the cover forward. 4. Driver's door: Disconnect the power window switch connector (A) (for some models). Remove the screws from the grip base (B). 5. Remove the mirror mount cover. 6. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a commercially available trim pad remover (B), then remove the door panel by pulling it upward. Passenger's door: Disconnect the power window switch connector (for some models). Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 7. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the rod is connected properly. - Make sure the window and power door locks operate properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Coupe > Page 9333 - If applicable, install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 ° angle with the glass fully closed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment Make sure the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out. 1. Loosen the screws (B), then insert a shop towel (C) between the body and striker. 2. Lightly tighten the screws. 3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (D). Do not tap the striker too hard. 4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel. 5. Lightly tighten the screws. 6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal (A). 2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 9342 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Upper Seal Replacement Front Door Upper Seal Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove these items: - Power mirror/manual mirror, as necessary - Door sash trim 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove the door upper seal (B). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (C) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 9343 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 9344 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 9345 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Upper Seal Replacement Door Upper Seal Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove these items: - Power mirror/manual mirror, as necessary - Door glass outer weatherstrip - Door sash trim 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clips (A, B), then remove the door upper seal (C). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip (A) if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (D) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the rear, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 9351 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B), and release the weatherstrip from the door sash trim (C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Front Door Window Motor: Component Locations Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9356 123. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc. DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9357 Front Door Window Motor: Connector Locations 123. Driver's Door (Coupe exc. DX, HX; Sedan exc. DX) 123. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc. DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9358 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) (Coupe Except DX, HX) (Except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9359 62. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 64. Power Window Motor, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX, HX) 144. Power Window Motor, Driver's (except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel, 2-door, 4-door - Plastic cover, as necessary, 2-door, 4-door 2. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9363 drop the glass inside the door. 3. Power window: Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and harness clip (B) from the door. 4. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D, E), then remove the regulator (F) through the hole in the door. Power window is shown, manual window is similar. 5. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9364 6. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary 3. Release the inner handle rod (A) and lock rod (B) from the rod holder (C), and with power door lock, remove the screws, then remove the actuator (D) from the door. 4. Remove the clip, and release the hooks (A), then remove the rod protector (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9370 5. Remove the screws securing the latch (A), then move the latch down. Take care not to bend any of the rods. 6. Remove the nuts securing the outer handle (A) and outer handle protector (B). 7. Remove the outer handle protector (A) from the outer handle (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9371 8. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered sequence, then remove it 9. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items - Make sure each rod is connected securely - Make sure the door locks and opens properly - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary - Rod protector 3. Remove the screws securing the latch 4. With power door lock, disconnect the actuator rod (A) and connector (B), then remove the actuator (C). 5. Disconnect the lock rod (A) from the lock crank (B) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9375 6. Remove the bolt, then remove the collar (A) from the center channel (B). 7. Move the latch (A) through the gap between the center channel (B) and door, then remove it. Take care not to bend any of the rods. 8. If necessary, remove any of the rods from the latch. 9. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly (with power door lock), and each rod is connected securely. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation Special Tools Required - KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 - Trim pad remover. Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available 4-door NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. If applicable, remove the regulator handle (A) by pulling the clip (B) out with a wire hook (C). 2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to scratch the door panel. 1. Pry out on the upper portion of the cover (B) to release the hooks (C, D), then remove the cover. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way to release the hook (E). 4. Disconnect the inner handle rod (F). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9379 3. Remove the grip cover (A) 1. Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the clip (B). 2. Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks (C). 3. Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks (D), and release the clip (E) while pulling the cover forward. 4. Remove the screws from the grip base (F). 5. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a commercially available trim pad remover (B), then remove the door panel by pulling it upward, and disconnect the power window switch connector (C) (for some models). Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9380 6. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the rod is connected properly - Make sure the window operates properly. - If applicable, install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 ° angle with the glass fully closed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch Replacement 4-door 1. With a T40 Torx bit, remove the door hook pin (A) from the door. 2. With a T40 Torx bit, remove the bolts, then remove the door catch (A) from the body. 3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order of removal, and apply liquid thread lock to the threads of the door hook pin. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove the door sash trim. 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove the door upper seal (B). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (C) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement > Page 9389 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B), then remove the door weatherstrip (C). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (D) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before in5tallation. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the weatherstrip. 2. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations 129. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) 129. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9397 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) 63. Power Window Motor, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary - Rod protector 3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 4. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the center channel (D). Pull the upper seal (E) away as needed, and remove the screw (F). Pull the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9401 glass run channel (G) away as needed from the center channel. 5. Move the center channel (A) away from the quarter glass (B), and the rear door glass (C), and remove the center channel out through the window slot. Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (D) 6. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). 7. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9402 8. Power window: Disconnect and detach the connector (A) from the door. 9. Remove the bolts (B), and loosen the bolts (C), then remove the regulator (D) through the hole in the door. Power window is shown, manual window is similar. 10. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown, regardless of the channel shape (B, C). 11. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Actuator > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Actuator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9407 Fuel Door Release Actuator: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Remove the front door sill trim. 3. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the opener (B) from the bolt. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to bend the cable. 5. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door Fuel Door Release Cable: Service and Repair 2 Door Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before doing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle: - Side trim panel - Door sill trim - Trunk side trim panel 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D), and detach the clip (E) with a clip remover. 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (F) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (G) from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9412 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 7. Using a clip remover, detach the clip (C) from the trunk lid, and detach the clips (D) from the trunk lid hinge. 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 9. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the alignment mark of the cable to the clip on the bottom portion of the trunk lid hinge. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9413 Fuel Door Release Cable: Service and Repair 4 Door Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle: - Front door sill trim - Seat side trim - Trunk side trim panel 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D), and detach the clip (E) by using a clip remover. 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (F) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (G) from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9414 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 7. Using a clip remover, detach the clip (C) from the body, and detach the clips (D) from the trunk lid hinge 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 9. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Align the alignment mark of the cable to the clip on the bottom portion of the trunk lid hinge. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Door Release Lever: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Using a trim tool, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Loose the bolt (E) securing the fuel fill door opener. 3. Remove the door sill trim, 2-door, and/or the front door sill trim, 4-door. 4. Remove the opener (A) from the bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to kink the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and lock securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads Hood Latch: Customer Interest Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads 00-004 March 6, 2001 *Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic 4-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L041276 - 4-door from VIN 2HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 2HGES....1L511373 - 2-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L035953* Rattle From the Hood (Supersedes 00-004, dated January 25, 2000) SYMPTOM A rattle from the front of the vehicle when driving over rough roads or small bumps. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive striker-to-latch clearance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the hood edge cushions and the hood latch. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Adjust each hood edge cushion so only one thread is showing and the "80" on the top is in the position shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 9427 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads Hood Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads 00-004 March 6, 2001 *Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic 4-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L041276 - 4-door from VIN 2HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 2HGES....1L511373 - 2-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L035953* Rattle From the Hood (Supersedes 00-004, dated January 25, 2000) SYMPTOM A rattle from the front of the vehicle when driving over rough roads or small bumps. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive striker-to-latch clearance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the hood edge cushions and the hood latch. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Adjust each hood edge cushion so only one thread is showing and the "80" on the top is in the position shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 9433 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9434 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9435 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A) from the body. 2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood latch. Take care not to kink the cable. 3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch as indicated by the arrows. - Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9436 - Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you close the hood. - Adjust the hood latch alignment. - Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9440 Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Hood Opener Cable Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items: - Front bumper '04-05 models - Inner fender, left side - Kick panel, left side, 2-door, 4-door 2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), and remove the bolts (C),then remove the hood release handle (D) from the body 3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (E), and remove the grommet (F) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement 1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Remove the front door sill trim. 3. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the opener (B) from the bolt. 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to bend the cable. 5. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative 02-008 March 12, 2002 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL 2002 Civic 2-door - From VIN 1HGEM....2L000001 thru 1HGEM....2L021057 2002 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGES....2L000001 thru 1HGES....2L022505 - From VIN 2HGES....2H500001 thru 2HGES....2H526712 - From VIN JHMES1...2S000001 thru JHMES1...2S005654 - From VIN JHMES2...2S000001 thru JHMES2...2S003617 Trunk Release Handle Does Not Work SYMPTOM The trunk release handle does not open the trunk. PROBABLE CAUSE The valet trunk lock cylinder mount is deformed, causing the lock cylinder to engage and lock the trunk release handle. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the door sill trim. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 857131 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84251-S5A-A00ZC H/C 6462642 Defect Code: 077 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative > Page 9453 Contention Code: B01 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Insert the key into the trunk lock cylinder, and make sure the trunk opens with the key. ^ If the trunk opens, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the key is difficult to turn or the trunk does not open, check for a disconnected lock rod, a defective trunk lock, a disconnected cable, or a damaged cable. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left B-pillar trim (see page 20-57 in the service manual). 2. Remove the left front kick panel (see page 20-57 in the service manual). 3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, remove the front side cap and the lock cylinder from the door sill trim. 4. Remove the door sill trim (1 screw). 5. Loosen the 6 mm flange bolt on the trunk lid opener assembly. 6. Install the new door sill trim, and align it with the trunk lid opener assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative > Page 9454 7. Push the trunk release lever to the floor, and torque the 6 mm flange bolt to 9.5 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 8. Align the lock cylinder cam with the trunk lid opener assembly, and then install the lock cylinder into the door sill trim. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to move the lock cylinder cam so that it seats properly into the base of the trunk lid opener assembly. 9. Make sure there is no gap between the lock cylinder cam and the base of the trunk lid opener assembly. If there is a gap, loosen the 6 mm flange bolt, readjust the trunk lid opener assembly, and then torque the bolt to 9.5 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 10. Lock and unlock the key cylinder several times, and operate the trunk release lever in both positions to make sure it works properly. 11. Install the front side cap. 12. Install the left front kick panel and the B-pillar trim. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative Trunk / Liftgate Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative 02-008 March 12, 2002 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL 2002 Civic 2-door - From VIN 1HGEM....2L000001 thru 1HGEM....2L021057 2002 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGES....2L000001 thru 1HGES....2L022505 - From VIN 2HGES....2H500001 thru 2HGES....2H526712 - From VIN JHMES1...2S000001 thru JHMES1...2S005654 - From VIN JHMES2...2S000001 thru JHMES2...2S003617 Trunk Release Handle Does Not Work SYMPTOM The trunk release handle does not open the trunk. PROBABLE CAUSE The valet trunk lock cylinder mount is deformed, causing the lock cylinder to engage and lock the trunk release handle. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the door sill trim. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 857131 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 84251-S5A-A00ZC H/C 6462642 Defect Code: 077 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative > Page 9460 Contention Code: B01 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Insert the key into the trunk lock cylinder, and make sure the trunk opens with the key. ^ If the trunk opens, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the key is difficult to turn or the trunk does not open, check for a disconnected lock rod, a defective trunk lock, a disconnected cable, or a damaged cable. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left B-pillar trim (see page 20-57 in the service manual). 2. Remove the left front kick panel (see page 20-57 in the service manual). 3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape, remove the front side cap and the lock cylinder from the door sill trim. 4. Remove the door sill trim (1 screw). 5. Loosen the 6 mm flange bolt on the trunk lid opener assembly. 6. Install the new door sill trim, and align it with the trunk lid opener assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 02-008 > Mar > 02 > Body - Trunk Release Handle Inoperative > Page 9461 7. Push the trunk release lever to the floor, and torque the 6 mm flange bolt to 9.5 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 8. Align the lock cylinder cam with the trunk lid opener assembly, and then install the lock cylinder into the door sill trim. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to move the lock cylinder cam so that it seats properly into the base of the trunk lid opener assembly. 9. Make sure there is no gap between the lock cylinder cam and the base of the trunk lid opener assembly. If there is a gap, loosen the 6 mm flange bolt, readjust the trunk lid opener assembly, and then torque the bolt to 9.5 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 10. Lock and unlock the key cylinder several times, and operate the trunk release lever in both positions to make sure it works properly. 11. Install the front side cap. 12. Install the left front kick panel and the B-pillar trim. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Handle: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet Evaporator Drain Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet 01-034 February 27, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic DX 4-door From VIN 2HGES1...1H513980 thru 2HGES1...1H521057 2001 Civic LX 4-door - From VIN 2HGES1...1H509287 thru 2HGES1...1H521445 2001 Civic EX 4-door From VIN 2HGES2...1H512645 thru 2HGES2...1H521206 Passenger's Side Carpet Gets Wet With the A/C On SYMPTOM The front passenger's footwell carpet gets wet when the air conditioning is used. PROBABLE CAUSE The A/C evaporator drain tube is blocked because of a casting error. CORRECTIVE ACTION Drill an opening in the drain tube. TOOL INFORMATION A specially designed drill bit is required to complete this repair. American Honda Special Tools is automatically shipping this drill bit to all dealers. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Handle: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 9467 2 Remove the drain hose from the evaporator drain tube. 3. Wrap a piece of tape around the shank 3 inches from the tip of either a 7 mm or 19/64 in. drill bit. 4. Insert the drill bit into the drain tube. ^ If you can insert the drill bit into the drain tube up to the tape, the drain tube is not blocked. Troubleshoot other causes for the wet carpet. ^ If you cannot insert the drill bit up to the tape, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Insert the specially designed drill bit into the evaporator drain tube. 2. Use an air ratchet with a 12 mm flex socket and extension to reach through the suspension and connect to the drill bit. 3. Drill out the drain tube. Stop when the end of the drill bit reaches the end of the drain tube. Do not damage the end of the drain tube. 4. Remove the drill bit. Clean any debris out of the drain tube. 5. Reinstall the drain hose onto the drain tube. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Handle: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 9468 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Handle: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 9474 2 Remove the drain hose from the evaporator drain tube. 3. Wrap a piece of tape around the shank 3 inches from the tip of either a 7 mm or 19/64 in. drill bit. 4. Insert the drill bit into the drain tube. ^ If you can insert the drill bit into the drain tube up to the tape, the drain tube is not blocked. Troubleshoot other causes for the wet carpet. ^ If you cannot insert the drill bit up to the tape, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Insert the specially designed drill bit into the evaporator drain tube. 2. Use an air ratchet with a 12 mm flex socket and extension to reach through the suspension and connect to the drill bit. 3. Drill out the drain tube. Stop when the end of the drill bit reaches the end of the drain tube. Do not damage the end of the drain tube. 4. Remove the drill bit. Clean any debris out of the drain tube. 5. Reinstall the drain hose onto the drain tube. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Handle: > 01-034 > Feb > 01 > Evaporator Drain Tube - Passenger's Carpet Gets Wet > Page 9475 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the trunk side trim panel, remove the side trim panel as necessary. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9479 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9488 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9489 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9490 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9496 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9497 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9498 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9499 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9500 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9501 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Latch Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder. 2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A), and remove the bolts securing the trunk lid latch (B). Take care not to kink the opener cable. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid latch switch connector (C). 4. Pull the trunk lid latch (A) out with the cylinder rod (B), and disconnect the cylinder rod from the trunk lid latch. Take care not to bend or kink the cylinder rod. 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you close the trunk lid. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9510 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9511 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9512 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9518 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9519 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9520 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair 2 Door Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 2-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before doing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle: - Side trim panel - Door sill trim - Trunk side trim panel 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D), and detach the clip (E) with a clip remover. 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (F) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (G) from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9523 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 7. Using a clip remover, detach the clip (C) from the trunk lid, and detach the clips (D) from the trunk lid hinge. 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 9. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Align the alignment mark of the cable to the clip on the bottom portion of the trunk lid hinge. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9524 Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair 4 Door Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement 4-door SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle: - Front door sill trim - Seat side trim - Trunk side trim panel 2. Pull the carpet back as necessary. 3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B). 4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D), and detach the clip (E) by using a clip remover. 5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (F) by turning it 90 °, and detach the opener cable junction box (G) from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2 Door > Page 9525 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 7. Using a clip remover, detach the clip (C) from the body, and detach the clips (D) from the trunk lid hinge 8. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable. 9. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. - Align the alignment mark of the cable to the clip on the bottom portion of the trunk lid hinge. - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9534 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9535 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9536 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9542 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9543 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9544 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9545 Trunk / Liftgate Lock: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9546 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9547 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9548 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9549 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9550 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9551 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9552 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9553 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9554 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9555 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9564 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9565 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9566 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9572 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9573 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9574 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9575 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9576 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A). 2. Remove the bolts securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder 45 °, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Release Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Release Lever: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. 1. Using a trim tool, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front door sill trim (C), and remove the opener lock cylinder (D). 2. Loose the bolt (E) securing the fuel fill door opener. 3. Remove the door sill trim, 2-door, and/or the front door sill trim, 4-door. 4. Remove the opener (A) from the bolt (B). 5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care not to kink the cable. 6. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the opener cable is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and lock securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trunk / Liftgate Spring: Procedures Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement 1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar center clip (B). 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the torsion bars with the torsion bar tool (A) from both trunk lid hinges. First remove the right torsion bar (B), then remove the left torsion bar (C). 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9584 4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - The shape of the right torsion bar (A) and left torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars properly. - Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9585 Trunk / Liftgate Spring: Removal and Replacement Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement Special Tools Required Torsion bar assembly tool 08M10-SM4-100 or 07AAE-SDAA100 1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar center clip (B). 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the torsion bars with the torsion bar tool from both trunk lid hinges. First remove the right torsion bar (A), then remove the left torsion bar (B). 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9586 4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - The shape of the right torsion bar (A) and left torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars properly. - Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9595 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9596 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9597 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Striker: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9603 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9604 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Striker: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9605 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations 151. Middle Of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9609 89. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Procedures Trunk Lid Weather-strip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weather-strip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the trunk lid weather-strip. Align the painted mark with the alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install the weather-strip. Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weather-strip. 3. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9614 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Removal and Replacement Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with the alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install the weatherstrip. Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 3. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Body Emblem: Procedures Emblem Replacement NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body. 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 2. Apply the emblem where shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9620 Body Emblem: Removal and Replacement Emblem Replacement NOTE: When using dental floss to cut the emblem adhesive, take care not to scratch the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9621 1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 2. Apply the emblems where shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then remove the hood rear seal (B), and detach the clips (C) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clip (D) or clip (E), and clips (F, G), and release the hook (H) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (I) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (J), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Detach the clips (D) or clips (E), and clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (K) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (L), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clip portions into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair Rear License Trim Replacement 1. On the inside the trunk lid, remove the nut (A), and release the clips (B), then remove the rear license trim (C). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Frame: Service and Repair Rear License Trim Replacement 1. On the inside of the trunk lid, remove the nut(s) (A), and release the clips (B), then remove the rear license trim (C). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clip portions into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal (A). 2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Molding Upper Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Roof Molding Roof Molding Replacement 1. Apply protective tape to the body (A). Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape (B), pry up on the roof molding (C). Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the front bracket (D) from the pin (E). 3. Pull up the front portion of roof molding. 4. Pull up and release the mar bracket (A) from the pin (B), then remove the roof molding (C). 5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage the windshield molding. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Molding > Page 9638 - Make sure the roof molding is installed securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Molding > Page 9639 Upper Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Roof Drip / Rear Pillar Moldings Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Detach the moldings from each clip, then remove the roof drip molding (A) and rear pillar molding (B) as an assembly. Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Remove the clips (C, D, E, F), and replace any damaged clips. 3. Install the clips on the body. 4. Hold the molding up, and starting at the rear, align the molding to the body shape, then push on the clip portions of the molding until the molding snaps into place. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed Windshield Moulding / Trim: Customer Interest Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed 00-064 March 17, 2009 Applied Vehicles Deformed Windshield Molding (Supersedes 00-064, dated November 13, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The windshield molding is warped or deformed. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner lip is folded, causing a poor fit against the body. CORRECTIVE ACTION Remove the entire inner lip, and fill the channel between the molding and the body with silicone sealant. REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 831004 Flat Rate Time: 0.7 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S84-A01 H/C 5443387 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Template ID: 00-064A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 9648 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Pull up the outer edge of the windshield molding. Check if the inner lip is folded over anywhere. ^ If the inner lip is folded over, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the inner lip is not folded, disregard this bulletin, and look for other possible causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying a strip of 2-inch-wide masking tape along the outer edge of the windshield molding. 2. Pull up the outer edge of the molding, and use scissors or an X-Acto knife to remove its entire inner lip. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 9649 3. Using an O-ring pick or similar tool, pull up the outer edge of the molding, and apply 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant under it, along the A-pillars and the upper edge of the windshield. 4. Push down on the molding, and smooth it out until it sits flush with the roof. 5. Wait 5 minutes, then remove the masking tape. 6. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed 00-064 March 17, 2009 Applied Vehicles Deformed Windshield Molding (Supersedes 00-064, dated November 13, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The windshield molding is warped or deformed. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner lip is folded, causing a poor fit against the body. CORRECTIVE ACTION Remove the entire inner lip, and fill the channel between the molding and the body with silicone sealant. REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 831004 Flat Rate Time: 0.7 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S84-A01 H/C 5443387 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Template ID: 00-064A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 9655 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Pull up the outer edge of the windshield molding. Check if the inner lip is folded over anywhere. ^ If the inner lip is folded over, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the inner lip is not folded, disregard this bulletin, and look for other possible causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying a strip of 2-inch-wide masking tape along the outer edge of the windshield molding. 2. Pull up the outer edge of the molding, and use scissors or an X-Acto knife to remove its entire inner lip. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 9656 3. Using an O-ring pick or similar tool, pull up the outer edge of the molding, and apply 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant under it, along the A-pillars and the upper edge of the windshield. 4. Push down on the molding, and smooth it out until it sits flush with the roof. 5. Wait 5 minutes, then remove the masking tape. 6. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Fender Liner: Procedures Front Inner Fender Front Inner Fender Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the front inner fender (A). -1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B). If equipped, remove the front splash guard (C). -2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the screw (B) securing the front bumper, splash shield (E), and front inner fender, and remove the clip (F) securing the front bumper and front inner fender. With front air spoiler, remove the clip (G) securing the front air spoiler, front bumper, and front inner fender. -3 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (F, H) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) on the body. -4 Release the hook (I) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Front Fender Fairing Front Fender Fairing Replacement 1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9662 2. Open the front door. From outside the door, remove the upper clip (A), and from inside the door, remove the lower clip (A) securing the front fender fairing (B) and front fender (C). 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (A), and release the clip (B), then remove the front fender fairing (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9663 4. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Before installing the clips of the door upper and lower portions, install the front fender fairing (A) to the front fender (B) properly as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9664 Front Fender Liner: Removal and Replacement Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing Removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9665 - Cut and remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the front wheelhouse. - Check the front damper extension and damper housing position, and check for damage. If necessary, remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the damper housing and front damper extension as an assembly, if possible. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9666 - Replace the front damper extension, damper housing, and damper housing extension as an assembly. Installation 1. Set the new damper housing assembly, front wheelhouse, and front bulkhead into position, and measure the front compartment diagonally. Check the body dimensions. 2. Tack weld the clamped position. 3. Temporarily install the front sub-frame, and check the front side frame position. 4. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, and check for difference in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 5. Do the main welding. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9667 - Weld the damper housing and front side frame. - Weld the front damper extension and dashboard upper side member. - From the passenger compartment side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower, damper housing extension, and front damper extension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9668 - From the wheelhouse side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard upper and damper housing extension. - Weld the front wheelhouse, damper housing, and front side - Weld the wheelhouse upper member. When replacing the front wheelhouse only, but weld the wheelhouse upper member. Front Inner Fender Replacement Front Inner Fender Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9669 1. Remove the front inner fender (A). 1. On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B). If equipped, remove the front splash guard (C). 2. From under the front bumper (D), remove the screw (B) securing the front bumper, splash shield (E), and front inner fender, and remove the clip (F) securing the front bumper and front inner fender. With front air spoiler, remove the clip (G) securing the front air spoiler, front bumper, and front inner fender. 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (F, H) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) on the body. 4. Release the hook (I) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender. 2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clips into place securely. Front Fender Fairing Replacement Front Fender Fairing Replacement 1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9670 2. Open the front door. From outside the door, remove the upper clip (A), and from inside the door, remove the lower clip (A) securing the front fender fairing (B) and front fender (C). 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (A), and release the clip (B), then remove the front fender fairing (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9671 4. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Before installing the clips of the door upper and lower portions, install the front fender fairing (A) to the front fender (B) properly as shown. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair Cross-Member: Service and Repair Middle Cross-member Gusset Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove these items: - Rear seat-back - Rear seat cushion - Side trim panel 2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary. 3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove the cushion tape (B), then release the harness from the middle cross-member gusset (C). 4. Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (B), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9676 5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When installing the mounting bolts for the middle cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown. If the mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur. - Replace the damaged cushion tape (P/N 91902-SB2-003). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter Subframe: Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter 05-066 November 24, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Universal Front Subframe Removal Adapter (Replaces 01-043, Civic Front Sub frame Removal Adapter, dated September 11, 2001) The universal front subframe removal adapter is a required tool. When properly fitted to a transmission jack and the vehicle's front subframe, the adapter provides a convenient way to remove the subframe. Front subframe removal is required for transmission or engine removal. NOTE: The adapter will only support the subframe it will not support the entire powertrain assembly. Refer to the WARNING label on the adapter. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2003-06 Accord - ALL 2005-06 Accord Hybrid - ALL 2001-06 Civic - ALL 2001-06 Civic GX - ALL 2003-06 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-06 Civic Si - ALL 2002-06 CRV - ALL 2003-06 Element - ALL ORDERING INFORMATION The universal front subframe removal adapter is TIN VSB02C000016. To order additional adapters, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. USING THE ADAPTER NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with the transmission jack, (new model number NRI-72500D), available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. (The old model number LSL-W93714 can still be used.). The adapter also works with many commercially available transmission jacks. 1. Loosen the four bolts that hold the adapter's adjustable arms to its center plate. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body/Frame - Universal Subframe Removal Adapter > Page 9681 2. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corners of the jack base, then attach the adapter to the jack base with the bolts that came with the jack. Tighten all of the bolts securely. 3. Raise the jack to vehicle height. 4. With the rear bar of the adapter spanning the sides of the subframe, route the adapter's strap around the front of the subframe. Pull the strap as tightly as possible, insert the pin through the appropriate loop, then tighten the wing nut. 5. With all of the vehicle parts properly supported or removed (see Engine or Transmission Removal in the appropriate service manual), carefully lower the subframe using the controls on the jack. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9682 Subframe: Service and Repair Subframe Replacement Subframe Torque After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Grille: Procedures Front Grille Replacement 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B), and remove the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the front grille cover (A) from the front grille (B). 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9688 Grille: Removal and Replacement Front Grille Replacement 2-door 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B), and remove the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the front grille cover (A) ('01-03 models) or the front grille molding (B) ('04-05 models) from the front grille (C). 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9689 - Push the clips into place securely. 4-door 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B), and remove the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the front grille the front grille molding (B)('04-05 models) from the front grille (C). 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9690 - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Specifications Arm Rest: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Arm Rest > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9695 Arm Rest: Service and Repair Front Seat Armrest Replacement For Some Models NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. 1. Unzip the armrest cover (A), and pull back the armrest cover. 2. Remove the nut, the wave washer (B), and the washer (C), then remove the armrest (D). If necessary, remove the bushings (E) from the armrest 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the armrest bracket(A). 4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Carpet: Procedures Carpet Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolsters, both sides - Kick panels, both sides - Front door sill trim, both sides - Seat side trim, both sides - Center console - Driver's dashboard under cover - Passenger's dashboard lower cover 2. Remove the nut (A), and using a hex wrench, release the clip (B), then remove the footrest (C). 3. Using B utility knife, cut the carpet (A) under the heater area (B) on the driver's side, and cut out the shift lever area (C) and parking brake lever area (D) as shown. Release the hook (E), then pull back the carpet. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9701 4. Remove the clip (A), and release the fasteners (B), then remove the carpet (C). 5. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly. - Slip the slit in the carpet over the hook. - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Reattach the cut areas under the heater around the shift lever and parking brake lever with a wire tie. - When installing new carpet, cut the carpet (A) under the heater area (B), and around the shift lever (C) and parking brake lever (D). After installing the new carpet, reattach the cut areas (C, D) with wire ties. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9702 Carpet: Removal and Replacement Carpet Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. 1. Remove these items: - Front seats, both sides - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolsters, both sides, 4-door - Kick panels, both sides - Door sill trim, both sides, 2-door - Front door sill trim, both sides, 4-door - Seat side trim, both sides, 4-door - Center console, without console armrest , with console armrest - Driver's dashboard under cover - Passenger's dashboard lower cover 2. Remove the nut (A), and using a 6 mm hex wrench, release the clip (B), then remove the footrest (C). 3. Using a utility knife, cut the carpet (A) under the heater area (B) on the driver's side, and cut out the shift lever area (C) and parking brake lever area (D) as shown. Release the hook (E), then pull back the carpet. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9703 4. Remove the clip (A), and release the fasteners (B), then remove the carpet (C). 2-door: Pull the carpet out from both side trim panels. 5. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation. - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly. - Slip the slit (A) in the carpet over the hook. - 2-door: Slip the carpet under the side trim panel on each side properly. - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Reattach the cut areas under the heater around the shift lever and parking brake lever with wire ties. - When installing new carpet, cut the carpet (B) under the heater area (C), and around the shift lever (D) and parking brake lever (E). After installing the new carpet, reattach the cut areas (D, E) with wire ties. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Console Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9709 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9710 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9711 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9712 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9713 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9714 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9715 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9716 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9717 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9718 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9719 Console Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9720 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9721 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9722 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9723 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9724 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9725 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9726 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9727 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9728 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9729 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9730 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9731 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9732 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9733 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9734 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9735 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9736 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9737 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9738 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9739 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9740 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9741 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9742 Console Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9743 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 9750 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 9751 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 9752 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 9755 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 9756 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 9757 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 9758 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9761 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9762 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9763 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9767 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Glove Box Removal/Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover. 2. While holding the glove box (A), remove the glove box stop (B) on each side. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the glove box. 4. Install the glove box in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 00-076 > Oct > 00 > Headliner - Sags in Rear Headliner: Customer Interest Headliner - Sags in Rear 00-076 October 17, 2000 Applies To: 2001 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGES1...1L000001 thru 1HGES1...1L016086 Headliner Sags In the Rear SYMPTOM The rear of the headliner is sagging. PROBABLE CAUSE The retaining clips have detached from the headliner. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reattach the clips to the headliner with adhesive. REQUIRED MATERIALS JB Kwik Weld: P/N 8276 (Found at most auto parts stores. Call 800-529-3530 for information on local suppliers.) or Devcon High Strength Plastic Welder: P/N 8-220 (Found at most hardware stores. Call 800-626-7226 for information on local suppliers.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Mask oft the headliner and the rear window so you do not get adhesive on them. 2. Mix a small amount of adhesive in a container. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 00-076 > Oct > 00 > Headliner - Sags in Rear > Page 9776 3. Carefully pull down the back of the headliner by each clip. Do not pull it down too far or you will crease the headliner. 4. Leave the clips attached to the roof. Apply a small amount of adhesive to each dip with a putty knife. 5. Slowly press the headliner against the clips. Support the headliner for at least 5 minutes with a rod that is padded at both ends. 6. Remove the masking tape you installed. Allow the adhesive to set for at least 4 hours before pulling on the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 00-076 > Oct > 00 > Headliner - Sags in Rear Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Headliner - Sags in Rear 00-076 October 17, 2000 Applies To: 2001 Civic 4-door - From VIN 1HGES1...1L000001 thru 1HGES1...1L016086 Headliner Sags In the Rear SYMPTOM The rear of the headliner is sagging. PROBABLE CAUSE The retaining clips have detached from the headliner. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reattach the clips to the headliner with adhesive. REQUIRED MATERIALS JB Kwik Weld: P/N 8276 (Found at most auto parts stores. Call 800-529-3530 for information on local suppliers.) or Devcon High Strength Plastic Welder: P/N 8-220 (Found at most hardware stores. Call 800-626-7226 for information on local suppliers.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Mask oft the headliner and the rear window so you do not get adhesive on them. 2. Mix a small amount of adhesive in a container. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 00-076 > Oct > 00 > Headliner - Sags in Rear > Page 9782 3. Carefully pull down the back of the headliner by each clip. Do not pull it down too far or you will crease the headliner. 4. Leave the clips attached to the roof. Apply a small amount of adhesive to each dip with a putty knife. 5. Slowly press the headliner against the clips. Support the headliner for at least 5 minutes with a rod that is padded at both ends. 6. Remove the masking tape you installed. Allow the adhesive to set for at least 4 hours before pulling on the headliner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9783 Headliner: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Headliner: Procedures Headliner Removal/Installation NOTE: - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - A-pillar trim, both sides - B-pillar upper trim, both sides - Rearview mirror - Ceiling light/spotlights, with moonroof - Spotlights, without moonroof - Ceiling light 2. From both sides, remove the caps (A), and remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the sunvisor (B) and holder (C). 3. Lower the grab handle, then remove the caps (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9786 grab handles. 4. Remove the headliner. With moonroof: -1 Remove the socket plug (A). -2 Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim (B) from each side. -3 Remove the remaining front door opening trim (C) and rear door opening trim (D) from each roof portion. -4 Gently pull down the headliner from the moonroof opening, and detach the clips (E) with a clip remover. Gently pull down on the side of moonroof opening to releasing fasteners (F). Be careful not to deform the headliner (G). -5 With the help of an assistant, release the clips (H) of the headliner from the moonroof frame (I), and release the headliner from the clips (J) by sliding the headliner forward, and lowering the headliner. -6 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. 5. Remove the headliner. Without moonroof: -1 Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim (A) from each side. -2 Remove the remaining front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from each roof portion. -3 With the help of an assistant, release the headliner (D) from the clips (E) by sliding the headliner forward, and lowering the headliner. -4 Remove the cushion tape (F), then remove the roof harness (G) from the headliner. -5 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9787 6. If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the grab handle bracket (A). Remove the remaining grab handle brackets, if necessary. 7. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When reinstalling the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - If the threads on a visor and grab handle screws are worn out, use an oversized self-tapping ET screw (P/N 901 37-S0A-00301) made specifically for this application. - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. - Replace any clips that remain in the roof during renoral. Reinstall the clips back in the headliner before installation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9788 Headliner: Removal and Replacement Headliner Removal/Installation Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. - Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove these items: - A-pillar trim, both sides - B-pillar upper trim, one side, 2-door - B-pillar upper trim, both sides, 4-door - C-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door - Rearview mirror - Ceiling light/spotlights, with moon roof - Spotlights, without moonroof - Ceiling light 2. Remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B) from both sides. - Remove the caps (C). - Remove the self-tapping ET screws. - Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder. - Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D), and turn the holder 90, then pull it out. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9789 3. Lower the grab handle, then remove the caps (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the grab handle (B). 4-door: Remove the remaining grab handles. 4. 2-door: From the rear driver's side, remove the screw, then remove the coat hanger (A). 5. With moon roof: Remove the headliner (A). 1. Remove the socket plug (B). 2. 2-door: Remove the upper portion of the B-pillar upper trim (C) from one side 3. 4-door: Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim (D) from each side 4. Remove the remaining door opening trim (E) from each roof portion. 5. Detach the rear clips (F) by pulling the headliner down. 6. Gently pull down the headliner from the moonroof opening, and detach the clips (G) with a clip remover. Gently pull down on the sides of moon roof opening to release fasteners (H). Be careful not to deform the headliner. 7. With the help of an assistant, release the clips (I) of the headliner from the moonroof frame (J), and lower the headliner. 8. Remove the headliner through the passenger's door opening. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9790 6. Without moonroof: Remove the headliner (A). 1. 2-door: Remove the upper portion of the B-pillar upper trim (B) from one side 2. 4-door: Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim (C) from each side 3. Remove the remaining door opening trim (D) from each roof portion. 4. Detach the rear clips (E) by pulling the headliner down. 5. With the help of an assistant, lower the headliner. 6. Remove the cushion tape or glue (F), then remove the roof harness (G) from the headliner. 7. Remove the headliner through the passenger's door opening. 7. If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the grab handle bracket (A). 4-door: Remove the remaining grab handle brackets, if necessary. 8. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - When reinstalling the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - If the threads on a visor or grab handle screws are worn out, use an oversized self tapping ET screw (P/N 90137-SOA-003) made specifically for this application. - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. - Replace any clips that remain in the roof during removal. Reinstall the clips back in the headliner before installation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area Rear Shelf: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the rear shelf, remove the rear seat side bolster from each side and lock cylinder trim. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits and hole in the rear shelf. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before installation. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is plugged in properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Rear Shelf > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area > Page 9795 Rear Shelf: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Seat Side and Rear Shelf Area Trim Removal/Installation - Seat Side and Rear Shelf Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the side trim panel, remove the rear seat-back and rear seat cushion. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the rear shelf, remove the clips from the body, and install them to the rear shelf. - Replace any damaged clips. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits in the rear shelf. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is plugged in properly. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown: - To remove the door sill trim and B-pillar upper trim, remove the side trim panel as necessary. - To remove the front side cap and opener lock cylinder, refer to trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener replacement. 2. Install the pants in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown: - To remove the driver's kick panel, remove the footrest. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9799 - To remove the seat side trim, remove the rear seat side bolster. - To remove the front side cap and opener lock cylinder, refer to trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener replacement. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise Trim Panel: Customer Interest Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise 01-048 November 20, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 4-door - ALL Rattle or Wind Noise From a Front Door Panel (Supersedes 01-048, Rattle From a Front Door Panel, dated May 8, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. SYMPTOM * A rattling or wind noise, or both, from one or both front doors while driving on rough roads or at highway speeds. * PROBABLE CAUSES Rattle - Friction between the ribs on the door panel and the door skin. * Wind noise - A gap at the top rear edge of the door panel. * CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply wool felt to the ribs on the door panel and EPT Foam 10 T to the top rear edge of the affected door(s). PARTS INFORMATION Wool Felt: P/N 06993-5A5-000, H/C 2086676 * EPT Foam 10T: P/N 06992-SA5-000, H/C 2086668 * WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83533-S5A-AO1ZD H/C 6461784 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS * Test-drive the vehicle on a rough road and at highway speeds. If you hear a rattling or buzzing sound, apply pressure to the door panel just below the front edge of the armrest. If you hear wind noise, apply pressure to the rear of the door panel. * Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise > Page 9808 If the noise disappears or changes, continue to the REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the noise persists, continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the affected door panel. Refer to section 20 of the 2001 Civic Service Manual. 2. Cut two pieces of wool felt: one 135 mm x 25 mm and one 30 mm x 25 mm. 3. Apply the pieces of wool felt to the ribs as shown. * 4. Cut a 10 mm x 40 mm piece of EPT Foam 10T. Apply it to the top rear edge of the door panel. 5. Reinstall the door panel. 6. If necessary, repeat steps 1 thru 5 on the other door panel. 7. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speed to verity the noise is repaired. Check for wind noise or rattling, or both. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise > Page 9809 8. If the noise still persists, check the felt/foam installation. If okay, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. * Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 00-086 > Oct > 00 > Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle Trim Panel: Customer Interest Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle 00-086 October 31, 2000 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL Rear Power Door Lock Will Not Cycle SYMPTOM The power door locks will not look or unlock a rear door. The door can be locked/unlocked manually with the lock tab on the door. PROBABLE CAUSE The door lock rod is binding on a rib on the back of the door panel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Free the door lock rod by pulling the bottom of the door panel out. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the inner door handle (see page 20-13 of the service manual). 2. Remove the door handle grip cover. 3. Remove the two door handle grip mounting screws. 4. Release the door panel mounting clips along the bottom and sides of the door. Do not remove the door panel. 5. Pull the bottom of the door panel out about 8 inches. Verify that the lock rod is no longer caught on the door panel rib. 6. Reinstall the door panel. Make sure the lock rod is above the rib. 7. Reinstall all removed parts. 8. Make sure the power door locks will cycle the lock on that door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trim Panel: > 00-086 > Oct > 00 > Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle > Page 9814 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise Trim Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise 01-048 November 20, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic 4-door - ALL Rattle or Wind Noise From a Front Door Panel (Supersedes 01-048, Rattle From a Front Door Panel, dated May 8, 2001) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. SYMPTOM * A rattling or wind noise, or both, from one or both front doors while driving on rough roads or at highway speeds. * PROBABLE CAUSES Rattle - Friction between the ribs on the door panel and the door skin. * Wind noise - A gap at the top rear edge of the door panel. * CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply wool felt to the ribs on the door panel and EPT Foam 10 T to the top rear edge of the affected door(s). PARTS INFORMATION Wool Felt: P/N 06993-5A5-000, H/C 2086676 * EPT Foam 10T: P/N 06992-SA5-000, H/C 2086668 * WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 83533-S5A-AO1ZD H/C 6461784 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS * Test-drive the vehicle on a rough road and at highway speeds. If you hear a rattling or buzzing sound, apply pressure to the door panel just below the front edge of the armrest. If you hear wind noise, apply pressure to the rear of the door panel. * Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise > Page 9820 If the noise disappears or changes, continue to the REPAIR PROCEDURE. If the noise persists, continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the affected door panel. Refer to section 20 of the 2001 Civic Service Manual. 2. Cut two pieces of wool felt: one 135 mm x 25 mm and one 30 mm x 25 mm. 3. Apply the pieces of wool felt to the ribs as shown. * 4. Cut a 10 mm x 40 mm piece of EPT Foam 10T. Apply it to the top rear edge of the door panel. 5. Reinstall the door panel. 6. If necessary, repeat steps 1 thru 5 on the other door panel. 7. Test-drive the vehicle at highway speed to verity the noise is repaired. Check for wind noise or rattling, or both. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 01-048 > Nov > 01 > Front Door Panel - Rattle/Wind Noise > Page 9821 8. If the noise still persists, check the felt/foam installation. If okay, continue with normal troubleshooting procedures. * Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 00-086 > Oct > 00 > Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle Trim Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle 00-086 October 31, 2000 Applies To: 2001 Civic - ALL Rear Power Door Lock Will Not Cycle SYMPTOM The power door locks will not look or unlock a rear door. The door can be locked/unlocked manually with the lock tab on the door. PROBABLE CAUSE The door lock rod is binding on a rib on the back of the door panel. CORRECTIVE ACTION Free the door lock rod by pulling the bottom of the door panel out. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the inner door handle (see page 20-13 of the service manual). 2. Remove the door handle grip cover. 3. Remove the two door handle grip mounting screws. 4. Release the door panel mounting clips along the bottom and sides of the door. Do not remove the door panel. 5. Pull the bottom of the door panel out about 8 inches. Verify that the lock rod is no longer caught on the door panel rib. 6. Reinstall the door panel. Make sure the lock rod is above the rib. 7. Reinstall all removed parts. 8. Make sure the power door locks will cycle the lock on that door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trim Panel: > 00-086 > Oct > 00 > Rear Power Door Locks - Will Not Cycle > Page 9826 Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown: - To remove the door sill trim and B-pillar upper trim, remove the side trim panel as necessary. - To remove the front side cap and opener lock cylinder, refer to trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener replacement. 2. Install the pants in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts. Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 9829 - To remove the driver's kick panel, remove the footrest. - To remove the seat side trim, remove the rear seat side bolster. - To remove the front side cap and opener lock cylinder, refer to trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener replacement. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area > Page 9830 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Removal/Installation - Seat Side and Rear Shelf Area Trim Removal/Installation - Seat Side and Rear Shelf Area Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. 1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the side trim panel, remove the rear seat-back and rear seat cushion. 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the rear shelf, remove the clips from the body, and install them to the rear shelf. - Replace any damaged clips. - When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits in the rear shelf. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is plugged in properly. - Apply liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before installation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9836 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9837 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Knob > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Knob: Locations 121. Driver's Door (Coupe except DX) 122. Driver's Door (Sedan except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Knob > Component Information > Locations > Page 9841 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9850 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9851 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9852 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9853 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9854 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Programming Connector > Component Information > Diagrams (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Keyless Entry Receiver: Component Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9862 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9863 80. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9864 68. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9865 68. Under Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Page 9866 Keyless Entry Receiver: Diagrams 163. Keyless Receiver Unit (EX; '04-'05: LX, GX) 164. Keyless Receiver Unit (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Locations > Page 9867 Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Keyless Receiver Unit Input Test 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the keyless receiver unit (B). 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. 6. Reconnect the 5P connector and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, replace the keyless receiver unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9876 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9877 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself 05-025 July 1, 2005 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2002-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-04 Element - ALL Accessory Security System Changes Modes By Itself (Supersedes 05-025, dated June 10, 2005, to update the information indicated by black bars and asterisks.) SYMPTOM The security system will not arm or it arms by itself. PROBABLE CAUSE Key switch contact chatter causes the control unit to change modes. CORRECTIVE ACTION * Civic: Replace the security control unit, and reprogram the remote(s).* * CR-V and Element: Replace the security control unit and the microphone, then reprogram the remote(s).* * NOTE: You must replace the microphone on the CR-V and Element because the security control units are matched to their microphones when they are manufactured. Using the original microphone may result in security system problems.* PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: Before starting, make sure you have all of the remotes (three maximum) the customer wishes to use. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9883 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (See the body section of the appropriate service manual.) 2. Replace the security control unit. ^ Civic: Remove the security control unit, and install the new security control unit. ^ * CR-V and Element: Remove the security control unit and microphone. Install the new security control unit and new microphone.* 3. Reprogram the keyless receiver unit. NOTE: The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored in the keyless receiver unit memory. If a fourth code is stored, the code that was input first will be erased. It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk/tailgate/hatch are closed, and that you have all of the remotes the customer wishes to use. ^ Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 05-025 > Jul > 05 > Antitheft System - Alarm Will Not Arm/Arms By Itself > Page 9884 ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, turn the ignition to ON (II). ^ Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button. ^ Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. ^ Within 10 seconds, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. ^ Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and pull out the key. 4. Confirm proper operation of the transmitters. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9889 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9890 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9891 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9892 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9893 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9894 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9895 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9896 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9897 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9898 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9899 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9900 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9901 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9902 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9903 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9904 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9905 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9906 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9907 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9908 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9909 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9910 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9911 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9912 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9913 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9919 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9920 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9921 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9922 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9923 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9924 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9925 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9926 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9927 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9928 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9929 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9930 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9931 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9932 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9933 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9934 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9935 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9936 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9937 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9938 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9939 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9940 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9941 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9942 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 9943 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9944 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Test NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock the door with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Press the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times to reset the transmitter. - If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. - If the locks don't work, go to step 2. 2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage. - If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter. - If there is no water damage, go to step 3. 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4. 4. Reprogram the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors. - If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. - If the doors don't lock and unlock, replace the transmitter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9945 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Transmitter Programming Storing transmitter codes: The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is stored, the code which was input first will be erased.) NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk are closed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 6. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 9. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the receiver in the multiplex control unit behind the driver's side of the dash. 12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or unlock button again. 13. Within 10 sec., aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key. 15. Confirm proper operation of the transmitter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9950 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9951 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations 121. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX) 122. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9955 128. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9956 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams 35. Door Lock Actuator, Driver's (except DX) 36. Door Lock Actuator, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 37. Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9957 38. Door Lock Actuator, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9958 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9959 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system.See: Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9963 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9964 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9968 118. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc: DX) 121. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9969 122. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9970 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except DX) 110. Door Lock Switch, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 9973 - There should be no continuity when the LOCKED position. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 9974 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Remove the two mounting screws and the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9984 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9985 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9991 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9992 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 9993 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9994 Trunk / Liftgate Lock: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9995 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9996 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9997 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9998 VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 9999 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 10000 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 10001 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 02-061 Date: 041105 Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 10002 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 10003 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock: > Page 10004 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10013 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10014 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10015 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body Trunk Lid Hard to Close Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Trunk Lid Hard to Close 02-061 November 5, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Trunk Lid is Difficult to Close (Supersedes 02-061, dated July 23, 2004) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The trunk lid may be difficult to close or won't latch closed. PROBABLE CAUSE The trunk lid may be misaligned, and the trunk lid opener cable, trunk lid latch, lock cylinder, lock rod, and/or the trunk lid latch striker may need adjustment or replacement. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the trunk lid and/or the trunk lid latch, or replace components as needed. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10021 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 68500-S5P-A90ZZ H/C 6528640 *Defect Code: 07406* Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE A 1. Check the side-to-side alignment of the trunk lid latch to the striker: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the gaps of the trunk lid are even on all sides. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. 3. Adjust the trunk lid hinges: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly and is properly aligned, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE B. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10022 1. Check the depth adjustment of the trunk lid: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 2. Make sure the trunk lid is flush on all sides and corners. ^ If the trunk is misaligned, go to step 3. ^ If the trunk lid is properly aligned on all sides and corners, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 3. Adjust the striker depth position and the trunk lid edge cushions: ^ Refer to page 20-132 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword TRUNK ADJUST, and select Trunk Lid Adjustment from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Use a small screwdriver to manually set and release the trunk lid latch. Check the operation of the latch: ^ If the latch is difficult to set or release, go to step 2. ^ If the latch operates properly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. 2. Replace the trunk lid latch: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 3. Check the trunk operation: ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE D. REPAIR PROCEDURE D 1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch. Check the cable operation: ^ Refer to page 20-157 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LATCH, and select Trunk Lid Latch Replacement from the list. 2. Check that there is no friction or binding of the cable by holding the outside casing and pulling back and forth on the inner cable: ^ If the cable is difficult to move or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the cable operates smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. 3. Replace the trunk lid opener cable: ^ Refer to page 20-151 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID OPEN, and select Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: > 02-061 > Nov > 04 > Body Trunk Lid Hard to Close > Page 10023 ^ If the trunk opens and closes smoothly, return the vehicle to the customer. ^ If the trunk lid is still difficult to close, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE E. REPAIR PROCEDURE E 1. Look at the back of the lock cylinder while you turn the key from lock to unlock. ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 2. Check the operation of the trunk lid lock cylinder: ^ If the lock cylinder is difficult to turn or binds, go to step 3. ^ If the lock cylinder operates properly, and the trunk lid is still difficult to close, refer to the appropriate body repair manual, and check for body inaccuracies. 3. Replace the lock cylinder, and re-key the cylinder to the customer's original key; on 2-door Civics, replace the lock cylinder and the lock cylinder rod: ^ Refer to page 20-158 of the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual. ^ In ISIS, use the keyword LID LOCK, and select Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement from the list. 4. Check the trunk operation, and return the vehicle to the customer. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10024 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10025 Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A). 2. Remove the bolts securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder 45 °, and remove it. 3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected properly. - Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Actuator Test 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B). 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator. Defogger Test (Canada): 5. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the 8P connector. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, check for an open circuit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10033 Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair Power Mirror Actuator Replacement 1. Remove the power mirror. 2. Carefully remove the mirror holder from the mirror housing. Gently pull it out by hand. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the cover, then remove the two Torx screws from the mirror connector. 5. Record the terminal locations and wire colors. 6. Cut the wire harness with the wire cutter. 7. Remove the three Trox screws and separate the actuator (A) from the mirror housing (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10034 8. Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator through the hole in the bracket (B). 9. Insert the terminals into the connector in the original arrangement as shown. 10. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break in the mirror holder when reinstalling it to the actuator. 11. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door. 12. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth operation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10038 201. Power Mirror Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10039 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10045 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10046 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10047 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - 2001 Paint Codes 01-001 January 16, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Models ALL 2001 Honda Paint Codes Paint formulations are determined by each paint company. For questions about formulas or color matching, call your paint supplier or one of the companies listed in this bulletin. The number following the paint description is the paint process used during the vehicle manufacture. 1: Two-stage process. Clear coat is applied over the color coat. 2: Two-stage process. A small amount of color is mixed in the clear coat and applied over the color coat. 3: Single-stage process. No clear coat is applied. Sayama (Japan) Produced Cars, VIN: JHMBB6 _ _ *1C _ _ _ _ _ _ (Prelude) JHLRD _ _ _ *1C _ _ _ _ _ _ (CR-V) JHM _ _ _ _ _ *1C _ _ _ _ _ _ (Accord) Marysville (U.S.) Produced Cars, VIN: 1HG _ _ _ _ _ *1A _ _ _ _ _ _ (Accord) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10048 Alliston (Canada) Produced Cars, VIN: 2HKRL1 _ _ *1H _ _ _ _ _ _ (Odyssey) 2HGES1 _ _ *1H _ _ _ _ _ _ (Civic) East Liberty (U.S.) Produced Cars, VIN: 1HG _ _ _ _ _ *1L _ _ _ _ _ _ (Civic) Tochigi (Japan) Produced Cars, VIN: JHMAP1 _ _ *1T _ _ _ _ _ _ (S2000) JHMZE1 _ _ *1T _ _ _ _ _ _ (Insight) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10049 Suzuka (Japan) Produced Cars, VIN: JHMRD _ _ _ *1S _ _ _ _ _ _ (CR-V) JHMEM _ _ _ *1S _ _ _ _ _ _ (Civic) Passport Paint Suppliers American Honda does not endorse any paint company or type of paint; this information is for reference only. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 10050 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Air Fresheners - Bad News For Paint Or Plastic SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Hanging Air Fresheners: Bad News for Paint or Plastic APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: Never let hanging air fresheners come in contact with painted or plastic surfaces. The chemicals used in them can eat into paint or permanently mar the plastic. Most of these air fresheners actually state on their packages to avoid contact with any surface. Advise your customers to heed those words. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10051 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10052 Paint: Service Precautions General Safety Precaution - Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. - The fallowing precautions are important items in order to maintain safe painting work. 1. Wear an approved respirator, and eye protection when painting. 2. Wear approved gloves, and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. 3. Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. 4. Read the paint label before opening the container. Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. 5. If paint gets in your mouth or your skin, rinse or wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. 6. After the painting work is finished, wash your face and gargle with water. 7. Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames, or cigarettes. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location Paint: Application and ID Paint Code and Color Label Location Paint Code List Paint Code - U.S Model 4-door Paint Code - U.S Model 2-door Paint Code - Canadian Model 4-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10055 Paint Code - Canadian Model 2-door Color Label Location Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10056 Vehicle Identification Number - U.S Model 4-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10057 Vehicle Identification Number - U.S Model 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10058 Vehicle Identification Number - Canada Model 4-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10059 Vehicle Identification Number - Canada Model 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10060 Paint: Application and ID Color Chart Paint Specification Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Code and Color Label Location > Page 10061 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint Paint: Service and Repair Body Paint General General The 3-coat-3-bake (3C.3B) paint finishes gives the Civic a deep gloss and stunning finish. This manual provides information on paint defects, repair, and refinishing. Throughout, the objective is to explain in a simple yet comprehensive manner the basic items you should know about paint repairs. Select the correct material for the defect, and repaint or refinish in the correct manner as described. WARNING: - Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection, and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse or wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames, or cigarettes. Basic Rules for Repairing a Paint Finish To repair paint damage, always use the 2-part acrylic urethane paints designated; polish and bake each of the three coats, as in production, to maintain the original film thickness, and to assure the same quality as the original finish. Outline of Factory Painting Process: Features in Each Work Process 1. Pretreatment and Electrodeposition In the pretreatment process, the entire body is degreased, cleaned, and coated with zinc phosphate by dipping. After the body has been cleaned with pure water, it is placed in an electrolytic bath of soluble primer (Cationic Electrodeposition) This produces a thorough corrosion inhibiting coating on the inner surface and corners of the body, pillars, sills, and panel joints. Chipping primer is then applied to the most susceptible areas. 2. Intermediate coat The intermediate coat is applied to the prepared surface for further protection against damage. 3. Top Coat Enamel paint and either polyester or acrylic resin paint are used in the top coat for higher solidity, smoothness, brightness, and weather resistance. Sectional View of Paint Coats: Refinishing Processes Refinishing Processes Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10064 Paint damage can appear in any form. Before making a repair, check the damaged area carefully, and determine the best procedure for repairing the damage. The following shows you refinishing methods for various types of paint damage or defects. Preprocessing of Painting Preprocessing of Painting 1. Featheredging NOTE: The paint film damaged area should be sanded flat and smooth. - If this is not done correctly the end results will not be acceptable. Damage to metal surface: - Sand the damaged area flat and smooth. Use the disc sander and #60-#80 disc paper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10065 Use the double action sander and #60-#80 disc paper. - Sand the area larger than the damaged area. Use the double action sander and #180-#240 disc paper. - If a double action sander is not available, use a rubber pad and wet or dry sandpaper. Use the flexible block and #280, #346, #400, #600 sandpaper. Damage to undercoat, intermediate coat and top coat: Sand the damage area flat and smooth Use the double action sander and #180 - #240 - #320 disc paper 2. Preparation of metal surface Remove all corrosion from the damaged area. Use a product that removes corrosion. 3. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. Treatment of Metal Surface Treatment of Metal Surface 1. Filling/drying Small cracks or pinholes in the sheet metal should be repaired with a body filler and sanded flat and smooth. Use the 2-part polyester resin putty. - Mix the putty with the hardener in the correct ratio. - Follow the body filler manufacturer's instructions. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10066 - Mix the body filler and hardener quickly. - Apply the body filler in several thin coats, without air bubbles. - Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. - Apply the body filler over the damaged area with a putty knife using light pressure. - After applying the body filler, allow 5-6 minutes of normal drying time, then force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer at 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) - 140 degrees F (60 degrees C). NOTE: Follow the body filler manufacturer's instructions for drying time. 2. Polishing The body filler is dry when a white mark appears when the surface is scratched with your finger nail. 1. Throughly sand the body filler surface. Use the double action sander and #80-#120 disc paper. 2. Sand the surface evenly, particularly the area that was filled. Use the flexible block and #120-#180 sandpaper. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10067 3. Featheredge the paint coat. Sand the body filler surface until the proper dimension are met. Use the double action sander and #24O'#32O #400 disc papers. 3. Air blowing/degreasing Use the alcohol, wax and grease remover. Also clean and degrease the surfaces where masking tape will be attached. Undercoating Undercoating 1. Masking Mask the area surrounding the damage to protect it from the primer surfacer overspray. Use masking tape and paper. 2. Spraying primer surfacer - Spray the primer surfacer over a wider area than the body filler and the exposed surface of the paint film. - Spray 2 - 3 coats to get 30 microns of thickness. - Use the 2-part urethane primer surfacer and a spray gun. - Mix the primer surfacer with the additive and solvent, and in the correct ratio. - Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer's instructions. 3. Drying After spraying primer surfacer, allow for 5 - 10 minutes of normal drying time, then force dry IL with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. NOTE: Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer's instruction for drying time. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10068 4. Polishing Check that the primer surfacer has dried thoroughly, then sand the primer surfacer. Use the double action sander and #32O - #4OO - #6OO disc papers. 5. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. Also clean and degrease the surfaces where masking tape will be attached. Intermediate Coating Intermediate Coating 1. Masking Mask the area surrounding the damage to protect it from the intermediate coat overspray. Use masking tape and paper. 2. Spraying top coat enamel Spray the top coat enamel over the surface until the primer surfacer is fully covered. Use the 2-part polyester urethane top coat enamel and a spray gun. - Mix the top coat enamel with the additive and solvent in the correct ratio. - Follow the top coat manufacturer's instructions. 3. Drying After spraying top coat enamel, allow for 5-10 minutes of normal drying time, then force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. NOTE: Follow the top coat manufacturer's instruction for drying time. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10069 4. Polishing Check that the top coat enamel has dried thoroughly, then sand the top coat enamel. Use the double action sander and #600 - #800 disc papers. NOTE: Be careful not to polish down to the primer surfacer. When the painting repair is almost done, polish the area that will be top coated. Use the #2000 sandpaper and compound. 5. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. Also clean and degrease surfaces where the masking tape will be attached. Top Coating Top Coating 1. Masking Mask the area surrounding the damage to protect it from the top coat overspray. Use masking tape and paper. 2. Spraying top coat enamel/clear coat Spray 2 - 3 double coat until the intermediate coat is fully covered. Use the 2-part polyester urethane top coat enamel and a spray gun. - Mix the top coat enamel with the additive and solvent in the correct ratio. - Follow the top coat manufacturer's instructions. Drying After spraying the top coat enamel, allow it to air dry, then force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. NOTE: Follow the top coat manufacturer's instructions for drying time. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10070 Spraying clear coat Spray the top coat clear evenly over the surface of the top coat enamel. Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Drying After spraying the clear coat, allow it to dry for 10 minutes, then force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. NOTE: Follow the top coat manufacturers instructions for drying times. 3. Polishing/buffing Check that the clear coat has dried thoroughly and that it is coal. 1. Any adhesion or roughness on the top coat should be wet sanded and repaired. Use the #1200 - #2000 and crystal block. 2. Polish any roughness caused by sanding. NOTE: Clean the top coat surface frequently so you don't damage the clear coat with the polishing particles. Use a buffing towel, buffing wool, and compound. 3. Finishes up with buffing. NOTE: - Do not use a power buffer. - Don't polish too much; use light hand pressure. Use the buffing sponge, fine compound, very fine compound, then ultra fine compound. 4. After buffing, remove the masking paper and tape, and thoroughly wash the entire vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10071 Paint: Service and Repair Plastic Parts Paint Features of Plastic Material Features of Plastic Material Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10072 - Check each of the plastic arts for solvent resistance and heat resistance temperatures before you do any repair work. - Select the repair material according to materials of the plastic parts. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10073 Preprocessing of Painting Preprocessing of Painting 1. Sanding Sand the damage area flat and smooth. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10074 Shallow Scratch: Use a flexible block and #240 - #400 - #600 sandpaper. Hole/Deep Gouge: Cut out and make any torn or burred area flat. Use a knife, flexible block, and #180 - #240 sandpapers. 2. Air blowing/degreasing Clean the damaged area throughly. Use alcohol, and wax and grease remover. Undercoating Undercoating 1. Spraying primer Primer is used to fill cavities in the putty and primer surfacer. - Spray primer on the exposed area. - Spray the 2 - 3 coats of primer on 2 - 3 coats over the area you applied puny. - Apply primer to the back of the bumper if the damage is a tear or hole. - Bumper primer - Warm the primer if the ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). - Follow the bumper primer manufacturer's instructions. - Use a spray gun and a brush. Drying NOTE: Take care not to let the heat lamp deform the bumper during the drying process. Dry the bumper primer thoroughly with an infrared dryer or other suitable method. Drying Time: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10075 2. Filling/Sanding Apply putty to repair any holes or deep gouges. Apply the putty on the damaged area in 2 - 3 steps. - Glue aluminum tape on the outside of the bumper, and apply putty from the other side of the bumper. - Remove the aluminum tape after the putty dries, apply putty from the outside, and fill the hole. Use a special polyester putty and a putty knife. 3. Sanding Sand the surface evenly, particularly at the area where the PP material and putty meet. Use a flexible block and #240 - #400 - #600 sandpaper. 4. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, a tack cloth, and wax and grease remover. 5. Spraying primer surfacer NOTE: Spray the bumper primer on the area where the PP material was exposed and around the putty. - Spray the primer surface wider then the putty and painted surfaces of bumper primer. - Spray 2 - 3 coats to get 20 - 30 microns of thickness. Use the 2-component type primer surfacer (gray) and a spray gun. - Follow the materials manufacturer's instructions. Drying NOTE: Take care not to let the heat lamp deform the bumper during the drying process. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10076 6. Sanding After drying, wet sand the area of the intermediate coat. Use the #600 sandpaper. NOTE: Do not use #600 or less. 7. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, a tack cloth, and wax and grease remover. Also clean and degrease the surfaces where the masking tape will be attached. Intermediate Coating Intermediate Coating NOTE: You must do this procedure on the PP parts of the bumper and side sill panel. 1. Masking Mask the area surrounding the damage to protect it from the intermediate coat overspray. Use masking tape and paper. 2. Spraying the top coat enamel - Spray the top coat enamel over the surface until the primer surfacer is fully covered. - Spray 2 - 3 coats to get 15 - 25 microns of thickness. - Use the 2-part polyester urethane top coat enamel and a spray gun - Mix the top coat enamel with the additive and solvent in the correct ratio. - Follow the top coat manufacturer's instructions. Drying NOTE: Take care not to let the heat lamp deform the bumper during the drying process. After spraying top coat enamel, allow for 5 - 10 minutes of normal drying, then force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. 3. Polishing Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10077 Check the top coat enamel has dried thoroughly, then sand the top coat enamel. Use a flexible block and #600 - #800 - #1000 sandpapers. NOTE: Be careful not to sand down to the primer surfacer. When the painting repair is almost complete, polish the top coat. Use #1500 sandpaper and compound. 4. Air blowing/degreasing Use alcohol, a tack cloth, and wax and grease remover. Clean and degrease the surfaces where the masking tape will be attached. Top Coating Top Coating 1. Masking Mask the area surrounding the damage to protect it from the top coat overspray. Use masking tape and paper. 2. Spraying top coat enamel/clear coat Spray 2 - 3 coats until the intermediate coat is fully covered. NOTE: Do not cover the surface with one heavy coat. - Apply several thin coats. Use the 2-part polyester urethane top coat enamel and a spray gun. - Mix the top coat enamel with the additive and solvent in the correct ratio. - Follow the top coat manufacturer's instructions. After spraying the top coat enamel, allow for 5 - 10 minutes drying time before you spray the clear coat. Drying NOTE: Take care not to let the heat lamp deform the bumper during the drying process. After spraying the clear coat, allow for 5 - 10 minutes drying time before you force dry it with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. 3. Polishing/buffing - Check that the clear coat has dried thoroughly. - Wet sand to remove any imperfections. Use a flexible block, Soap,and #2000 sandpaper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10078 Using a buffer and compound, remove any polishing marks made from the sandpaper. Use a buffing sponge, and buffing wool and compounds. Finish up with buffing: -1. Wet sands with #2000 sandpaper and soapy water. -2. Remove moisture using compressed air. -3. Finish using fine compound and very fine compound. Polish with an electric polisher. NOTE: Polish lightly. -4. Check the finished area at an angle, and make sure there are no polishing marks. -5. Polish with ultra fine compound and a buffing sponge. -6. Wax the finished area. Use of the Repair Material Use of the Repair Material NOTE: Follow the materials manufacturer's instructions. The use of a special polyester putty for PP bumpers is described here: 1. Filler Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10079 Mixing Ratio: Drying Time: 2. Sanding filler Spray the bumper primer on the area where the PP material was used. 3. Primer surfacer The primer surfacer is used to protect the PP resin surface and fill cavities or flaws before the intermediate coat and top coat. Use the 2-component type primer surfacer (gray). Mixing Ratio: 4. Intermediate coat and top coat Use the 2-part polyester urethane top coat. Top coat is also used for an intermediate coat. Mixing Ratio: NOTE: Be sure to mix the correct amount of the hardener and softener. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Body Paint > Page 10080 NOTE: Use a spray gun to apply the paint. Do not use a brush. Drying Time: Force dry the intermediate coat and top coat. NOTE: Mix only an amount that can be used before it hardens. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard 78. Under Middle of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10085 80. Under Middle of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10086 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams (EX; '04: LX, GX) (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10087 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10088 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10089 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system.See: Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10093 Part 1 5. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6. Part 2 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10094 6. Disconnect the M, P, K, and J connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty. Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10098 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10099 165. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10100 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair Sunshade Replacement 1. Remove the drain channel 2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade slider spacers (B). 3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers. 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the sunshade and hooks. 5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10106 6. Release both rear sunshade base sliders (A) from the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove the sunshade. 7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A). 8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment. 9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable] > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof/Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade - Moonroof motor 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (A) and the cable tube mounting screws (B), and remove the screws (C, D), then remove the slide stops (E) and cable tube rear brackets (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides. 5. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up, and remove the drain channel sliders (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10110 6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifter 7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, then remove them from the frame (C). 8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10114 Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade - Moonroof motor 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the slide stops (A), cable tube rear brackets (B), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (C) and the cable tube mounting screws (D) from both sides of the frame (E). 4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides. 5. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up, and remove the drain channel sliders (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10115 6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifter. 7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, then remove them from the frame (C). 8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10121 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10122 142. Moonroof Limit Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10123 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the moonroof limit switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE: Turn the motor by hand with the wrench. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10124 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (P) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10128 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Moonroof Component Location Index 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10129 59. Moonroof Motor (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Motor Test Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection Motor Test Motor Test 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the moonroof motor. 3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground according to the table. 4. If the motor does not run, replace it. NOTE: See closing force check for motor clutch test. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Motor Test > Page 10132 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection Closing Force and Opening Drag Check Closing Force and Opening Drag Check 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Closing force check: - With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown. - Have an assistant hold the switch to close the glass while you measure the force required to stop it. - Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving, then immediately release the switch and spring scale. 3. If the force in not within specification, remove the moonroof motor, then check: - The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage and damage. If the gear portion is broken, replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged, remove the frame, and replace the cable assembly. - The moon roof motor. If the motor fails to run or doesn't turn smoothly, rep lace it. - The opening drag. Go to step 4. 4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort required to open the glass using a spring scale (B) as shown. 5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 lbf), check: - The side clearance and glass height adjustment. - For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any sliding parts are damaged, replace them. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10133 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Motor Replacement 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove the motor (B). 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the connector is plugged in properly. - Check the motor operation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10137 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10138 165. Moonroof Close And Open Relay (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10139 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10144 138. Rear of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10145 174. Moonroof Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10146 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10147 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Windguard <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard] > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof/Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Wind Deflector Replacement 1. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the wind deflector (C) and the deflector arm spring (D) in the sequence shown. Take care not to scratch the roof panel. 2. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Specifications Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Replacement Drain Channel Replacement 1. Remove the glass. 2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof normally pivots down, and remove the screws securing the drain channel (B). 3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (B) of the drain channel slider by pulling the drain channel forward. 4. Remove the drain channel (A). 5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a faint click is heard. - Check the glass height adjustment. 6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 10156 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement Frame and Drain Tube Replacement 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (B), and the drain tubes (C), and remove the moonroof relays (D). 3. Remove the interior harness (E) by detaching the harness clips (F). 4. With an assistant holding the frame (G), remove the bolts, starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (H) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. 5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 6. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, 2-door, 4-door. Tie a string to the end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the A-pillar. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 10157 7. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the trunk compartment, remove these parts, 2-door, 4-door: - Trunk floor mat and trunk floor - Trunk rear trim panel Pull back the trunk side trim panel and release the rear drain tube (B) from the clip (C), and pull the drain tube out through the hole in the pillar. 8. From inside: Release the rear drain tube (A) from the inside of the vehicle by releasing the clips (B). Remove the rear drain tube. 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When installing the rear drain tube to the body at the C-pillar, align the cushion of the tube to the hole in the body, and align the alignment mark of the tube to the clip of the upper portion. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 10158 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove these parts from the frame: - Sunshade - Moonroof motor 3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (A) and the cable tube mounting screws (B), and remove the screws (C, D), then remove the slide stops (E) and cable tube rear brackets (F) from both sides of the frame (G). 4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides. 5. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up, and remove the drain channel sliders (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Channel Replacement > Page 10159 6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back with the link lifter 7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, then remove them from the frame (C). 8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Damaged parts should be replaced. - Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B) indicated by the arrows. - Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position. - Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10163 Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Frame and Drain Tube Replacement 1. Remove these items: - Headliner - Moonroof glass 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (B), and the drain tubes (C), and remove the moonroof relays (D). 3. Remove the interior harness (E) by detaching the harness clips (F). 4. With an assistant holding the frame (G), remove the bolts, starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (H) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. 5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers. 6. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, 2-door, 4-door. Tie a string to the end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the A-pillar. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10164 7. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the trunk compartment, remove these parts, 2-door, 4-door: - Trunk floor mat and trunk floor - Trunk rear trim panel Pull back the trunk side trim panel and release the rear drain tube (B) from the clip (C), and pull the drain tube out through the hole in the pillar. 8. From inside: Release the rear drain tube (A) from the inside of the vehicle by releasing the clips (B). Remove the rear drain tube. 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly. - When installing the rear drain tube to the body at the C-pillar, align the cushion of the tube to the hole in the body, and align the alignment mark of the tube to the clip of the upper portion. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in). - Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown. 10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure spray. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10173 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10174 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10180 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10181 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: Customer Interest Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 10191 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 10192 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing Child Seat: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing 05-016 May 17, 2005 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Is Missing PROBLEM The small button on the rear seat-back cover that marks the location of each child seat LATCH lower anchor is missing. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2001-05 Accord - ALL 2001-05 Civic - ALL 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2002-05 Civic Si - ALL 2001-05 CR-V - ALL 2003-05 Element - ALL 2001-05 Odyssey - ALL 2003-05 Pilot - ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the button. NOTE: Older vehicles have buttons without a child seat icon. The buttons in newer vehicles and the replacement buttons all have an icon. If your customer requests matching buttons, replace all the buttons at the same time as a set. PARTS INFORMATION Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit: (Kit contains buttons in nine different colors; 10 buttons of each color.) P/N 070AZ-SHJA190, H/C 7979016 Child Seat ISOFIX Button Kit Replacement Parts: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 10198 NOTE: For color information, refer to PIB A05-0005, Child Seat Anchor Buttons. Click PARTS, then click PARTS LIBRARY, then click Parts Bulletins. Select Child Seat Anchor Buttons from the list. (Each part contains fabric washers, button posts, and back portions.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 82123-SDA-305ZA Defect Code: 07801 Symptom Code: 03220 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear seat-back cover just enough to allow access to the opening where the button will be attached: ^ Refer to Section 20, Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement, in the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword SEAT COVER, and select the appropriate Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement procedure from the list. 2. Select the appropriate button from the Child Seat Anchor Service Set. 3. Attach the button to the rear seat-back cover: ^ Place a fabric washer over the button post. ^ Insert the post through the opening in the cover. ^ Snap the back portion onto the post. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-016 > May > 05 > Restraints - Child Seat Anchor Locating Button Missing > Page 10199 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as needed for additional buttons. 5. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10205 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10206 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10212 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Child Seat: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10213 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10214 Child Seat: Description and Operation Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. WARNING: Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. Additional information at Restraint Systems / Seat Belt Systems / Child Restraint. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth 01-057 February 22, 2005 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic EX - ALL 2003-04 Civic EX and LX - ALL Updated information is shown by a black bar. Driver's Seat Rocks (Supersedes 01-057, dated November 9, 2004) SYMPTOM The driver's seat rocks back and forth during normal driving. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn bushings in the height adjustment mechanism. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install new seat bushings, nuts, and spacers. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Link Bushing (six required): P/N 90502-S3N-013, H/C 6690440 8/18 mm Nut Washer (six required): P/N 90321-SCV-A11, H/C 7952138 Spacer (four required): P/N 90503-53N-003, H/C 6852578 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81536-55P-A71 H/C 6526230 Defect Code: 00503 Symptom Code: 07302 Template ID: 01-057A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10224 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat from the vehicle. Refer to page 20-109 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual. 4. Remove the recline handle by pulling it forward. 5. Remove the center cap from the height knob. Remove the C-clip that holds the height knob. Then remove the knob. 6. Remove the screw and clips from the recline cover. Remove the recline cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10225 7. Remove and discard the three nuts, and remove the washers from the outboard link and from the outboard seat track. 8. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the outboard link. 9. Remove and discard the old bushings. 10. Install the new bushings, and add one spacer as shown. 11. Reassemble the outboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 12. Install the recline cover, height knob, and recline handle. 13. Remove the seat belt buckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10226 14. Remove the three nuts and washers from the inboard link and the inboard seat track. Remove and discard the old bushings. 15. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the inboard link. 16. Install the new bushings. 17. Install three spacers on the rear mounting stud for the seat track. 18. Reassemble the inboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the seat track mounting nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the seat belt buckle mounting bolt to 32 N.m (23 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10227 19. Install the seat. 20. Confirm that the problem is resolved. If the driver's seat still rocks, look for other causes. 21. Reconnect the battery. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the SRS indicator. If the indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then turns off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator stays on, check for codes, and do normal troubleshooting. 23. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and then enter the customer's radio station presets. 24. Set the clock. 25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 26. For 2001 2-doors up to VIN 1L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes at over 40 mph with the cruise control on. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth 01-057 February 22, 2005 Applies To: 2001-02 Civic EX - ALL 2003-04 Civic EX and LX - ALL Updated information is shown by a black bar. Driver's Seat Rocks (Supersedes 01-057, dated November 9, 2004) SYMPTOM The driver's seat rocks back and forth during normal driving. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn bushings in the height adjustment mechanism. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install new seat bushings, nuts, and spacers. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Link Bushing (six required): P/N 90502-S3N-013, H/C 6690440 8/18 mm Nut Washer (six required): P/N 90321-SCV-A11, H/C 7952138 Spacer (four required): P/N 90503-53N-003, H/C 6852578 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 81536-55P-A71 H/C 6526230 Defect Code: 00503 Symptom Code: 07302 Template ID: 01-057A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10233 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 3. Remove the driver's seat from the vehicle. Refer to page 20-109 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual. 4. Remove the recline handle by pulling it forward. 5. Remove the center cap from the height knob. Remove the C-clip that holds the height knob. Then remove the knob. 6. Remove the screw and clips from the recline cover. Remove the recline cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10234 7. Remove and discard the three nuts, and remove the washers from the outboard link and from the outboard seat track. 8. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the outboard link. 9. Remove and discard the old bushings. 10. Install the new bushings, and add one spacer as shown. 11. Reassemble the outboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 12. Install the recline cover, height knob, and recline handle. 13. Remove the seat belt buckle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10235 14. Remove the three nuts and washers from the inboard link and the inboard seat track. Remove and discard the old bushings. 15. 2001-02 Models: Remove and discard the spacer from the inboard link. 16. Install the new bushings. 17. Install three spacers on the rear mounting stud for the seat track. 18. Reassemble the inboard side of the seat track in the reverse order of removal using new nuts. Torque the seat track mounting nuts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). Torque the seat belt buckle mounting bolt to 32 N.m (23 lb-ft). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Bottom > Seat Bottom Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Bottom Frame: > 01-057 > Feb > 05 > Interior - Driver's Seat Rocks Back & Forth > Page 10236 19. Install the seat. 20. Confirm that the problem is resolved. If the driver's seat still rocks, look for other causes. 21. Reconnect the battery. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the SRS indicator. If the indicator comes on for 6 seconds and then turns off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator stays on, check for codes, and do normal troubleshooting. 23. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and then enter the customer's radio station presets. 24. Set the clock. 25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are off. ^ Start the engine and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and all electrical items off) for 10 minutes. 26. For 2001 2-doors up to VIN 1L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes at over 40 mph with the cruise control on. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seat Cover Replacement Front Seat Cover Replacement For some models: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before performing repairs or service. NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - On the passenger's seat with side airbag, do not touch the OPDS sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. Seat-back Cover 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the headrest. 3. Driver's seat: If equipped, remove the armrest. 4. With side airbag: From under the seat cushion, detach the side airbag connector clip (A), and on the passenger's seat, detach the OPDS unit connector clip (B). Release the hook springs (C), then pull the harness guide (D) back. The passenger's seat is shown, the driver's seat is symmetrical except it has no OPDS unit connector. 5. Fold the seat-back forward. 6. Without side airbag: Release the hook (A), and fold back the seat-back cover (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10243 7. With side airbag: Release the hooks (A), and unzip the seat-back cover (B). Pull the side airbag harness (C) and the OPDS harness (D) (passenger's seat) out through the harness guides (E) and holes (F) in the seat-back cover. 8. With side airbag: Remove the side airbag, and release the hooks (A) from the airbag module holder (B). 9. Release the hooks (A) and hook springs (B), then loosen the seat-back cover (C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10244 10. Pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 11. Pull back the seat-back cover all the way around, then remove it. 12. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks and hook springs. - Make sure the side airbag harness and OPDS harness (passenger's seat) are routed properly. Seat Cushion Cover 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the recline cover and center cover, drivers seat, 2-door passenger's seat, 4-door passenger's seat. 3. With side airbag: From under the seat cushion, detach the side airbag connector clip, and on the passenger's seat, detach the OPDS unit connector clip. Release the hook springs. 4. Release the hooks (A) from both sides of the seat cushion. 5. Release the seat cushion cover (A) from the cushion frame spring (B), and release the hooks (C) from under the seat cushion. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10245 6. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat cushion cover. 7. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hooks. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10246 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Cover Replacement Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. - Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the seat-back, 2-door, 4-door. 2. '04-05 models: Remove the headrest. 3. On the left seat-back: Remove the screw, then remove the center belt guide (A). 4. Release the hook (A), and unzip the seat-back cover (B). The left seat-back is shown, the right seat-back is similar. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10247 5. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), and remove the clips (B), and release the hooks (C) 6. '04-05 models: Pull out the seat-back frame (A) from the pad (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. The left seat-back is shown, the right seat-back is similar 7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10248 8. 2-door: Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and remove the clips (B), then remove the seat-back cover. 9. 4-door: Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the hooks (B) of the wire (C) from the wire (D) of the pad (E), and on the left seat-back, remove the clips (F), then remove the seat-back cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10249 10. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hooks and clips. - Replace any clips you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10250 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the seat side bolster. 2. Release all the hook strips (A), and fold back the seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover from the hooks (C) to remove it. 3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hook strips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Cover Replacement > Page 10251 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement 1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door, 4-door. 2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover (B). 3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove the seat cushion cover. 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch Seat Latch: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Latch Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door, 4-door 2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch (B). 3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back locks securely and opens properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch > Page 10257 Seat Latch: Service and Repair Rear Seat-Back Lock Cylinder Rear Seat-back Lock Cylinder Replacement Special Tools Required KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 2-door NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Disconnect the cylinder rods from both seat-back latches. 3. Remove the screws, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder (A) and cylinder rods (B). 4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back opens properly. 4-door NOTE: - Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components. - Take care not to scratch the interior trim. 1. Remove the lock cylinder trim (A). 2. From trunk compartment, disconnect the cylinder rods from both seat-back latches. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Seat-Back Latch > Page 10258 3. Remove the screws, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder (A) and cylinder rods (B). 4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely. - Make sure the seat-back opens properly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10263 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Test Driver's door: 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Passenger's door: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Door Lock Cylinder Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10264 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Heated Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirrors Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10271 118. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc: DX) 121. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10272 122. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10273 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams 109. Door Lock Knob Switch, Driver's (except DX) 110. Door Lock Switch, Driver's Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Knob Switch Test 4-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. 2-door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be no continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. - There should be continuity when the door lock knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 10276 - There should be no continuity when the LOCKED position. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Knob Switch Test > Page 10277 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Remove the two mounting screws and the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when the door lock switch is in the LOCKED position. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.3 terminals when the door lock switch is in the UNLOCKED position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10281 201. Power Mirror Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10282 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Switch Test 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch (B). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10288 138. Rear Of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10289 142. Moonroof Limit Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10290 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Test 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the moonroof limit switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. NOTE: Turn the motor by hand with the wrench. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Limit Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 10291 Sunroof/Moonroof Limit Switch: Adjustments Limit Switch Adjustment 1. Remove the headliner. 2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully: - Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown. - Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height. 3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C). 4. Adjust the limit switch (D): - Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (P) pushes the limit switch (open/close). - Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G). 5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Component Locations Moonroof Component Location Index 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 10296 138. Rear of Roof (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10297 174. Moonroof Switch (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10298 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10299 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's pocket. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (C) or the moonroof switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations 151. Middle Of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10303 89. Trunk Latch Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair Splash Guard: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement 1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clips into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached Spoiler: Customer Interest Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached 03-010 April 15, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, HX, LX, EX, GX - ALL Front Bumper Air Spoiler Is Loose or Detached (Supersedes 03-010, dated March 4, 2003) SYMPTOM The front air spoiler is becoming detached from the bumper or it is loose, deformed, or shows gaps between the spoiler and the bumper. PROBABLE CAUSE The spoiler was pushed out of position when the front end of the vehicle was parked over a curb or a parking stop. CORRECTIVE ACTION If the spoiler is damaged or deformed, replace it. If it is loose or out of place, reinstall and secure it using 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive: 3M P/N 051135-08011 PARTS INFORMATION Front Bumper Air Spoiler: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA, H/C 6456784 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 023301 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA H/C 6456784 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A01 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front bumper air spoiler. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached > Page 10316 2. Clean the grooves in the front bumper and the air spoiler with isopropyl alcohol. 3. Apply a small bead (3 to 5 mm) of 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive in the groove in the front bumper air spoiler. 4. Install the front bumper air spoiler to the bumper. 5. Install the four spoiler plates and the two push clips. 6. Install the four bolts, and torque them to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Clean any excessive adhesive from the front bumper air spoiler. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached > Page 10317 8. Tell the customer not to disturb the front bumper air spoiler for 24 hours to allow the adhesive to cure completely. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF Spoiler: Customer Interest Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF 01-039 April 3, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - 4-door from VIN: 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L040443 2001 Civic - 2-door from VIN: 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L032234 Front Air Spoiler Is Loose or Coming Off SYMPTOM The front air spoiler is loose or is coming off. PROBABLE CAUSE The air spoiler plates may have been installed incorrectly (upside down), preventing the front air spoiler from properly attaching to the front bumper. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check if the air spoiler plates are installed correctly; if not, reinstall the plates. If the front air spoiler is damaged, replace it before reinstalling the plates. PARTS INFORMATION Air Spoiler: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA, H/C 6456784 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA H/C 6456784 Defect Code: 061 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF > Page 10322 2. Check that the four air spoiler plates are installed correctly. ^ If the plates are installed correctly, disregard this service bulletin, and look for other possible causes. ^ If the plates are not installed correctly, go to step 3. 3. Remove the air spoiler plates from the front bumper (one bolt each). 4. Check the front air spoiler for damage (scuffing, scratches, etc.). ^ If the air spoiler is damaged, remove it from the front bumper (2 clips), and replace it with a new one, then go to step 5. ^ If the air spoiler is OK, go to step 5. 5. Reinstall the air spoiler plates so they face correctly. Torque the bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb.ft). 6. Lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF > Page 10323 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached 03-010 April 15, 2003 Applies To: 2001-03 Civic DX, HX, LX, EX, GX - ALL Front Bumper Air Spoiler Is Loose or Detached (Supersedes 03-010, dated March 4, 2003) SYMPTOM The front air spoiler is becoming detached from the bumper or it is loose, deformed, or shows gaps between the spoiler and the bumper. PROBABLE CAUSE The spoiler was pushed out of position when the front end of the vehicle was parked over a curb or a parking stop. CORRECTIVE ACTION If the spoiler is damaged or deformed, replace it. If it is loose or out of place, reinstall and secure it using 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive: 3M P/N 051135-08011 PARTS INFORMATION Front Bumper Air Spoiler: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA, H/C 6456784 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 023301 Flat Rate Time: 0.3 hour Failed Part: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA H/C 6456784 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A01 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front bumper air spoiler. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached > Page 10329 2. Clean the grooves in the front bumper and the air spoiler with isopropyl alcohol. 3. Apply a small bead (3 to 5 mm) of 3M Weatherstrip Adhesive in the groove in the front bumper air spoiler. 4. Install the front bumper air spoiler to the bumper. 5. Install the four spoiler plates and the two push clips. 6. Install the four bolts, and torque them to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Clean any excessive adhesive from the front bumper air spoiler. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 03-010 > Apr > 03 > Body - Front Bumper Spoiler Loose/Detached > Page 10330 8. Tell the customer not to disturb the front bumper air spoiler for 24 hours to allow the adhesive to cure completely. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF Spoiler: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF 01-039 April 3, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - 4-door from VIN: 1HGES....1L000001 thru 1HGES....1L040443 2001 Civic - 2-door from VIN: 1HGEM....1L000001 thru 1HGEM....1L032234 Front Air Spoiler Is Loose or Coming Off SYMPTOM The front air spoiler is loose or is coming off. PROBABLE CAUSE The air spoiler plates may have been installed incorrectly (upside down), preventing the front air spoiler from properly attaching to the front bumper. CORRECTIVE ACTION Check if the air spoiler plates are installed correctly; if not, reinstall the plates. If the front air spoiler is damaged, replace it before reinstalling the plates. PARTS INFORMATION Air Spoiler: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA, H/C 6456784 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 71110-S5A-A00ZA H/C 6456784 Defect Code: 061 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF > Page 10335 2. Check that the four air spoiler plates are installed correctly. ^ If the plates are installed correctly, disregard this service bulletin, and look for other possible causes. ^ If the plates are not installed correctly, go to step 3. 3. Remove the air spoiler plates from the front bumper (one bolt each). 4. Check the front air spoiler for damage (scuffing, scratches, etc.). ^ If the air spoiler is damaged, remove it from the front bumper (2 clips), and replace it with a new one, then go to step 5. ^ If the air spoiler is OK, go to step 5. 5. Reinstall the air spoiler plates so they face correctly. Torque the bolts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb.ft). 6. Lower the vehicle. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spoiler: > 01-039 > Apr > 01 > Body - Front Air Spoiler Loose/Coming OFF > Page 10336 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10337 Spoiler: Service and Repair Trunk Lid Spoiler Replacement For Some '03-05 Models 1. On the inside of the trunk lid, disconnect the high mount brake light connector (A), and remove the nuts (2-door) or bolts (4-door). 2. Lift up on the trunk lid spoiler (B), and on the 4-door, release the pins (C) from both grommets (D). Remove the wire harness grommet (E), then pull out the spoiler subharness (F) through the hole in the trunk lid, and remove the spoiler. 3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged seals (G). - Before installing the seal, clean the spoiler and bracket surfaces with a sponge dampend in alcohol. - Make sure the high mount brake light connector is connected properly. - 4-door: Apply liquid thread lock to the spoiler mounting bolts before reinstallation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Removal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10341 - Cut and remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the front wheelhouse. - Check the front damper extension and damper housing position, and check for damage. If necessary, remove the wheelhouse upper member, and replace the damper housing and front damper extension as an assembly, if possible. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10342 - Replace the front damper extension, damper housing, and damper housing extension as an assembly. Installation 1. Set the new damper housing assembly, front wheelhouse, and front bulkhead into position, and measure the front compartment diagonally. Check the body dimensions. 2. Tack weld the clamped position. 3. Temporarily install the front sub-frame, and check the front side frame position. 4. Temporarily install the hood, front fender, headlight, and front bumper, and check for difference in level and clearance. Make sure the body lines flow smoothly. 5. Do the main welding. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10343 - Weld the damper housing and front side frame. - Weld the front damper extension and dashboard upper side member. - From the passenger compartment side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard lower, damper housing extension, and front damper extension. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10344 - From the wheelhouse side, plug weld the holes in the dashboard upper and damper housing extension. - Weld the front wheelhouse, damper housing, and front side - Weld the wheelhouse upper member. When replacing the front wheelhouse only, but weld the wheelhouse upper member. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Cover Replacement 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then remove the hood rear seal (B), and detach the clips (C) from the cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers. 3. Detach the clip (D) or clip (E), and clips (F, G), and release the hook (H) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (I) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (J), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Detach the clips (D) or clips (E), and clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (K) upward, and pull the cover forward to release the hooks (L), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body. 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Push the clip portions into place securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal (A). 2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 10356 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Upper Seal Replacement Front Door Upper Seal Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove these items: - Power mirror/manual mirror, as necessary - Door sash trim 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove the door upper seal (B). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (C) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 10357 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 10358 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before installation. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement > Page 10359 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Upper Seal Replacement Door Upper Seal Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove these items: - Power mirror/manual mirror, as necessary - Door glass outer weatherstrip - Door sash trim 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clips (A, B), then remove the door upper seal (C). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip (A) if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (D) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the rear, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 10364 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B), and release the weatherstrip from the door sash trim (C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. Remove the door sash trim. 2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove the door upper seal (B). 3. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace the clip if it's damaged. - Make sure the upper seal is installed in the holder (C) securely. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement > Page 10370 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Take care not to scratch the door. - Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting bolt (A). 2. Detach the clips (B), then remove the door weatherstrip (C). 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (D) securely. - Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker mounting bolt before in5tallation. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the weatherstrip. 2. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10382 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10383 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10389 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 10390 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Procedures Trunk Lid Weather-strip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weather-strip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the trunk lid weather-strip. Align the painted mark with the alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install the weather-strip. Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weather-strip. 3. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10395 Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip: Removal and Replacement Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement 1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off. 2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with the alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install the weatherstrip. Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip. 3. Check for water leaks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10400 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10404 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10405 33. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10406 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10410 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10411 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10412 207. Cruise Control Unit (USA: HX; Sedan: LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10413 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Unit Input Test Except 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures, in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10414 4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests. 5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit may be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly, replace the control unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Servo: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 10418 15. Right Side Of Engine Compartment (Coupe: LX, EX) 16. Rt. Side Of Eng. Comp. (USA: HX; Sedan: LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 10419 Cruise Control Servo: Diagrams 138. Cruise Control Actuator (USA: HX; Sedan: LX, EX,GX) 199. Cruise Control Actuator (Coupe: LX, EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cruise Control Actuator Input Test Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Actuator Input Test Cruise Control Actuator Input Test 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: 1. Disconnect the 12P connector from the actuator. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cruise Control Actuator Input Test > Page 10422 3. With the 12P connector disconnected, make these input tests. 4. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the actuator may be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly, replace the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cruise Control Actuator Input Test > Page 10423 Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Actuator Test Cruise Control Actuator Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the cruise control actuator (B). 2. Remove the cover (A), and check the output linkage (B) for smooth movement. 3. Connect the battery power to the No.2 terminal and ground to the No.1 terminal. 4. Check for a clicking sound from the magnetic clutch, The output linkage should be locked. 5. If the output linkage is not locked, replace the cruise control actuator assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cruise Control Actuator Input Test > Page 10424 6. Check the operation of the actuator motor in each output linkage position according to the table. You should be able to hear the motor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10425 Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair Cruise Control Actuator/Cable Replacement Except 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engine: 1. Loosen the lockout (A), then disconnect the actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the cruise control actuator. 3. Remove the two mounting bolts, and remove the cruise control actuator assembly. 4. Remove the cruise control actuator cover from the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10426 5. Remove the actuator cable from the cruise control actuator. 6. Install the reverse order of removal, and adjust the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the actuator cable. 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: 1. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. 2. Disconnect the actuator cable from the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10427 3. Disconnect the 12P connector from the cruise control actuator. 4. Remove the three mounting bolts, and remove the cruise control actuator. 5. Install the reverse order of removal, and adjust the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the actuator cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10431 Cruise Control Servo Cable: Adjustments Actuator Cable Adjustment 1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly with no binding or sticking. 2. Measure the amount of movement of the output linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase. At first, the output linkage should be located at the fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be 3.75 ± 0.5 mm (0.15 ± 0.02 in.). 3. If the free play is not within specs, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting nut until the free play is as specified, then retighten the locknut. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10432 Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair Cruise Control Actuator/Cable Replacement Except 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engine: 1. Loosen the lockout (A), then disconnect the actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the cruise control actuator. 3. Remove the two mounting bolts, and remove the cruise control actuator assembly. 4. Remove the cruise control actuator cover from the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10433 5. Remove the actuator cable from the cruise control actuator. 6. Install the reverse order of removal, and adjust the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the actuator cable. 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: 1. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. 2. Disconnect the actuator cable from the cruise control actuator. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10434 3. Disconnect the 12P connector from the cruise control actuator. 4. Remove the three mounting bolts, and remove the cruise control actuator. 5. Install the reverse order of removal, and adjust the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the actuator cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10438 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10439 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams 139. Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch (except DX) 157. Cruise Control Main Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch > Page 10442 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch > Page 10445 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10450 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10451 61. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10452 207. Cruise Control Unit (USA: HX; Sedan: LX, EX, GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10453 Cruise Control Module: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Unit Input Test Except 2-door D17A1, D17A2 engines: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures, in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10454 4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests. 5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit may be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly, replace the control unit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10459 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10463 64. Under Left Side Of Dash (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10464 33. Clutch Pedal Position Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 10465 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the clutch pedal position switch (A). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. - If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch. - If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Cruise Control Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10469 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) 57. Under Left Side Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10470 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams 139. Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch (except DX) 157. Cruise Control Main Switch (except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch > Page 10473 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the main switch (B), then remove the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (C) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch > Page 10476 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Warning Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10482 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10483 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10484 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10485 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10486 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10487 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10488 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10489 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10490 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10491 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10492 Brake Warning Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10493 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10494 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10495 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10496 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10497 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10498 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10499 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10500 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10501 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10502 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10503 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10504 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10505 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10506 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10507 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10508 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10509 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10510 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10511 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10512 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10513 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10514 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10515 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10522 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10523 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10524 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10527 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10528 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10529 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10530 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10533 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10534 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10535 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10540 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10541 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10542 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10543 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10544 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10545 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10546 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10547 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10548 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10549 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10550 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10551 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10552 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10553 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10554 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10555 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10556 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10557 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10558 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10559 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10560 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10561 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10562 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10563 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10564 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10565 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10566 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10567 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10568 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10569 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10570 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10571 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10572 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10573 Dimmer Switch: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10574 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10579 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10580 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10581 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check Fuel Gauge: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Charting the Fuel Gauge and the Low Fuel Indicator APPLIES TO: 1998-03 Accord, 1996-03 Civic, or 1999-03 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: If an owner is leery of the fuel gauge or low fuel indicator accuracy and worries about running out of fuel, you may be able to restore faith in the accuracy of this hardware by charting the operation. If the fuel gauge, the low fuel indicator, or both doesn't give your customer a warm, fuzzy feeling, don't replace the fuel gauge or the sending unit until you've first charted the fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator status. You rarely improve accuracy by replacing fuel gauges and sending units. To chart the fuel gauge needle position and the low fuel indicator status, do this: 1. Have your customer bring in the vehicle when the fuel tank is nearly empty. 2. Drain any remaining fuel from the tank. 3. Park the vehicle on a flat surface, and add 2 gallons of fuel to the tank with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0). 4. Start the engine, and note the fuel gauge needle position after 2 minutes. Draw a picture of the fuel gauge showing the position of the needle. Also note on your drawing if the low fuel indicator is on or off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Add 2 more gallons of fuel to the tank. Start the engine, and note the position of the needle after 2 minutes. Draw another picture of the fuel gauge showing the current position of the needle. Note the status of the low fuel indicator. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Repeat step 5 until the fuel tank is full. Then give your customer all of the pictures you've drawn. They're usually enough to convince even the staunchest Doubting Thomas. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10586 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Fuel Gauge and Low Fuel Indicator Light WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from the work area. Drain fuel only into an approved container. The fuel gauge and low fuel indicator light are controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives fuel level information from the fuel gauge sending unit. The fuel gauge sending unit's resistance varies from about 11 - 13 ohms at full to about 130 - 132 ohms at empty. The fuel level signals current changes with the varying resistance, which enables the CPU to determine the level of the fuel. When the CPU determines that the fuel level is low, it turns the low fuel indicator light on. When you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), the gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge dial regardless of the fuel level. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10591 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10592 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10593 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10594 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from minimum to maximum position and then returns to the minimum position, the gauge is OK. Go to step 3. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep from minimum to maximum position and then return to the minimum position, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion. 5. Remove the access panel from the floor. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 7. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 7. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground. - an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G551). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10595 9. Install a 2 Ohms resistor between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F". - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicates "F", replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom on the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. 11. Relieve the fuel pressure. 12. Remove the fuel fill cap. 13. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel pump. 14. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10596 15. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the shown readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10597 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the seat cushion. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10598 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the stopper (O). Release the hook (P) and remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. When connecting the fuel tank unit, make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). 11. Install in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (I) and new O-rings (J), then check these items: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (K) is firmly locked into the place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist the connector excessively. - When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the fuel tank (M) and the fuel tank unit (N). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10603 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10604 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10605 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10606 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10607 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10608 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10609 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10610 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10611 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10612 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10613 Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10614 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10615 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10616 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10617 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10618 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10619 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10620 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10621 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10622 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10623 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10624 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10625 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10626 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10627 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10628 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10629 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10630 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10631 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10632 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10633 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10634 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10635 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10636 Headlamp Reminder Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Headlamp Reminder Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10637 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Vehicle Damage Warnings Airbag Handling and Storage Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. - Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the removed airbag. - To prevent damage to the airbag assembly, keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water. - Store the removed airbag on a secure, fiat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F / 93 °C). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10644 - Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance. - Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. - Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag. General Precautions General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Precautions For Electrical Inspections Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10645 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact Sensors Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front sensors, or the side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit, front sensors, and other related components. After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors, and the side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors. Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact sensors. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit. Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft) Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust. Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F / 40 °G) and dry (less than 80% relative humidity, no moisture) area. Wiring Precautions Wiring Precautions SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Vehicle Damage Warnings > Page 10646 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace the harness. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfere with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Seats With Side Airbags Seats with Side Airbags Seats with side airbags have a tag attached to the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the correct replacement parts. Because the seats are made by more than one manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is indicated on the seat-back. Moreover, the manufacturer name is indicated on the seat-back frame and the seat-back pad. Confirm the indication when you exchange these parts. * When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat. * Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace the seat-back cover. * After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side airbag with new parts. If the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is definitely deformed, it must be replaced. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10649 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Components SRS Components Airbags The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), seat belt tensioners (I), seat belt buckle tensioners (J), and front impact sensors (K). Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. Side Airbags The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger. Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants in their seats. OPDS The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G) and a OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag Cutoff indicator will go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10650 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation SRS Operation SRS Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: Seat Belt Tensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners 1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners. 3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners. Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s) 1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags. Side Airbag(s) 1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the OPDS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag. 3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag. Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the SRS is operating normally. If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the SRS. The SRS must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the data link circuit. This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the data link connector (DLC). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10651 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Definitions Air Bag An inflatable cloth cushion designed to deploy in certain frontal crashes. It supplements the protection offered by the seat belts by distributing the impact load more evenly over the vehicle occupant's head and torso. Asynchronous Performed in a nonperiodic fashion, (i.e., no defined time or interval). (B+) Battery voltage, (B+) The voltage available at the battery at the time of the indicated measurement. With the key "ON" and the engine not running, the system voltage will likely be between 12 and 12.5 volts. At idle the voltage may be 14 to 16 volts. The voltage could be as low as 10 volts during engine cranking. Bulb Check The SDM will cause the "AIR BAG" warning lamp to flash seven times and then go "OFF" whenever the ignition switch transitions to the ON position from any other ignition switch position and no malfunctions are detected. "CONTINUOUS MONITORING" Tests performed by the SDM on the SRS every 100 milliseconds while "Ignition 1" voltage is in the normal operating voltage range at the SDM. Data Link Connector (DLC) Formerly "DLC" a connector which allows communication with an external computer, such as a scan tool. Datum Line A base line parallel to the plane of the underbody or frame from which all vertical measurements originate. Deploy To inflate the air bag. Deployment Loops The circuits which supply current to the air bag assemblies to deploy the air bag. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Formerly "Code", a numerical designator used by the SDM to indicate specific SRS malfunctions. Driver Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the driver air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Driver Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the steering wheel hub consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Memory which retains its contents when power is removed from the SDM. Ignition Cycle The voltage at the SDM "Ignition 1" inputs, with ignition switch "ON", is within the normal operating voltage range for at least ten seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". Ignition 1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Seats With Side Airbags > Page 10652 A battery voltage (B+) circuit which is only powered with the ignition switch in the ON, or START positions. Initiator The electrical component inside the air bag assembly which, when sufficient current flows, sets off the chemical reaction that inflates the air bag. "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test" Tests performed once each ignition cycle when no malfunctions are detected during "Turn-ON" or "Continuous Monitoring." This test checks for the correct SDM configuration for the vehicle, shorts to "Ignition 1 in the deployment loops, high resistance or opens in the "Driver Side High", "Driver Side Low", "Passenger Side High" and "Passenger Side Low" circuits and measures the resistance of the inflator assembly consisting of: 1. Initiators. 2. SRS coil assembly (driver side only). 3. Connectors and associated wiring. Normal Operating Voltage Range The voltage measured between the SDM "Ignition 1" terminals and "Ground" terminals is between 9 and 16 volts. Passenger Current Source An output of the SDM which applies current into the passenger air bag assembly circuit during the "Initiator Assembly Resistance Test". Passenger Air Bag Assembly An assembly located in the right side of the instrument panel consisting of an inflatable bag, an inflator and an initiator. Scan Tool An external computer used to read diagnostic information from on-board computers via the data link connector. SDM Sensing and Diagnostic Module which provides reserve energy to the deployment loops, deploys the air bags when required and performs diagnostic monitoring of all SRS components. Serial Data Information representing the status of the SRS. SRS Supplemental Restraint System. SRS Coil Assembly An assembly of two current-carrying coils in the driver deployment loop that allows the rotation of the steering wheel while maintaining the continuous contact of the driver deployment loop to the driver air bag assembly. SRS Wiring Harness The wires and connectors that electrically connect the components in the SRS. "Turn-ON" Test which the SDM performs on the SRS once during each ignition cycle immediately after "Ignition 1" voltage is applied to the SDM and before "Continuous Monitoring". Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming General Precautions Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the instructions described or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes before beginning work. NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery. Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards as the original parts and quality. Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs. Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector. Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury. Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag. The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's radio code before disconnecting the battery cable. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10655 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Connector Disconnection / Connection Disconnecting System Connectors Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, front sensor, the side impact sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning the following procedures. - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D), the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (F), and the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G). - Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (1) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C). - Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, G). 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes. Driver's Airbag Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10656 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel. Front Passenger's Airbag 3. Lower the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B. Side Airbag 4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Tensioner 5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness. Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 10657 6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Gauge Bulb Replacement Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Gauge Bulb Replacement Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) at the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Transmission > Page 10663 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Continuously Variable Transmission Gauge Bulb Replacement Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) at the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Key Reminder Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10668 Key Reminder Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10669 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10670 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10673 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10674 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10675 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10676 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10677 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10678 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10679 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10680 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10681 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10682 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10683 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10684 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10685 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10686 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10687 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10688 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10689 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10690 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10691 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10692 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10693 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10694 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10695 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10696 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10697 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10698 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10699 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10700 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10701 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10702 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10703 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10704 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10705 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10706 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10707 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10708 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10709 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the circuit diagram and input test. When the ignition key is in the ignition switch the multiplex control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch and sounds the beeper. 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Low Fuel Indicator Test 1. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test. - If the system is OK, go to step 2. - If the system has any malfunction, repair it. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the float at the E (EMPTY) position. - If the low fuel indicator is on, go to step 3. - If the low fuel indicator is not on, '01-02 model: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram, '03 model-Nippon Seiki Type: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram, '03 model-Visteon Type: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram 3. Lift the float above the LOW position. - If the low fuel indicator goes off, the system is OK. - If the low fuel indicator is not on, '01-'02 model: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram, '03 model-Nippon Seiki Type: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram, '03 model-Visteon Type: refer to the low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Maintenance Required Indicator Doesn't Reset APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 Civic Sis, 2003 Civic Hybrids, 2002-03 CR-Vs, and 2003 Elements. SERVICE TIP: Are customers complaining that they can't reset the maintenance required indicator (MAINT REQ'D) on the instrument panel? Find out if the headlights, parking lights, or both were turned on when they tried to reset it. The maintenance required indicator can't be reset if any of these lights are on. In fact, some aftermarket daytime running light devices designed to turn on the headlights, parking lights, or both as soon as you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), must be disabled before the indicator can be reset. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10717 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection If the light does not blink or does not come on, check the bulb and speedometer operation. If the bulb and the speedometer are OK, the gauge internal circuits must be faulty. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10718 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Required Indicator Reset 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET button in the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON 3. Hold the button until the indicator resets (approximately ten seconds). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10722 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test or the test cannot be finished. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures to set them in this section. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10723 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Circuit Troubleshooting 1. Connect an OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and read the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester. Does the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester communicate with the ECM/PCM? YES - Go to step 3. NO - Go to troubleshooting "DLC Circuit Troubleshooting". 3. Check the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for DTCs. Are any DTCs indicated? YES - Go to the DTC Troubleshooting index. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions NO - Go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and watch the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on and stay on for more than 20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II)? YES - If the MIL always comes on and stays on, go to step 74. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E29) and the data link connector (DLC). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. NO - If the MIL is always off, go to step 6. But if the MIL sometimes works normally, first check for these problems. A loose No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A loose No.20 IG (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. - A loose No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. - A poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal E31. - An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the throttle position (TP) sensor, knock sensor, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT). - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A5) and the knock sensor. - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the low oil pressure light on? YES - Go to step 10. NO - Go to step 8. 8. Inspect the No.10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 9. NO - Repair short in the wire between No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse and the gauge assembly. Also replace the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse. 9. Inspect the No.20 IGN (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10724 YES - Repair open in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the gauge assembly. If the wires are OK, test the ignition switch. NO - Repair short in the wire between the No.20 IG (40A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also replace the No.20 IG (40A) fuse. 10. Try to start the engine. Does the engine start? YES - Go to step 11. NO - Go to step 14. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E31 to body ground with a jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Check for an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. Also check for a blown MIL bulb. If the wires and the bulb are OK, replace the gauge assembly. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Inspect the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 22. NO - Go to step 16. 16. Remove the blown No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box 17. Remove the glove box and PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10725 18. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.4 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 19. 19. Disconnect each of the components or connectors connector below, one at a time, and check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Each injector 2P connector - Idle air control (IAC) valve 3P connector - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) 3P connector - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 20. NO - Replace the component that made continuity to body ground go away when disconnected. If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 20. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. - PGM-FI main relay 2 - ECM/PCM connector A (31P) - Injectors - Idle air control (IAC) valve - Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (Top dead center (TDC) sensor) - Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10726 21. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. NO - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the No 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse. 22. Inspect the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is the fuse OK? YES - Go to step 34. NO - Go to step 23. 23. Remove the blown No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 24. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 25. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Go to step 26. NO - Replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10727 26. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 27. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E9 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9), or the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 28. 28. Remove the rear seat cushion. 29. Remove the access panel from the floor. 30. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 31. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Go to step 32. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10728 32. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (A). 33. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it as necessary. Also replace the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse. 34. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 35. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 36. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals E9 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 37. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9). 37. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10729 38. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E7 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 42. NO - Go to step 39. 39. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 40. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.4 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 41. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10730 41. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.3 and ECM/PCM connector terminal E7. Is there continuity? YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1. If the relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (E7). 42. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 43. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 44. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 51. NO - Go to step 45. 45. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 46. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (A). 47. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10731 48. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 49. NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay 1. 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 50. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually. Is there continuity? YES - Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (A2, A3). 51. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A23, and A24 individually. Is there less than 1.0 V? YES - Go to step 52. NO - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (A4, A5, A23, A24). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10732 52. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 59. NO - Go to step 53. 53. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 54. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 with the ignition switch ON (II). Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the sensor that restored 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 55. 55. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 56. Disconnect the 3P connector from the following sensors. - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 1 57. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10733 58. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, CVT driven pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 1 (CVT). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 59. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20. Is there about 5 V? YES - Go to step 66. NO - Go to step 60. 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 61. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 with the ignition switch ON (II). Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) Is there about 5 V? Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10734 YES - Replace the sensor that restored about 5 V when disconnected. NO - Go to step 62. 62. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 63. Disconnect the 3P connectors from the following sensors. - Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor - Knock sensor - Throttle position (TP) sensor - CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT) - CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT) 64. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 65. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the EGR valve position sensor, knock sensor, TP sensor, CVT drive pulley speed sensor (CVT), or CVT speed sensor 2 (CVT), or repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A8) and the knock sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 66. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. NO - Go to step 67. 67. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 68. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 3P connector. 69. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10735 70. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5. Is there about 5 V? YES - Replace the FTP sensor. NO - Go to step 71. 71. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 72. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 73. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 74. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 75. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 76. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there about 5 V (or battery voltage)? YES - Go to step 80. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 10736 NO - Go to step 77. 77. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 78. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 79. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E29 and body ground. Is there continuity? YES - Repair short in the wire between the DLC and the ECM/PCM (E29). NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 80. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 81. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 82. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the MIL on? YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ECM/PCM (E31). If the wires are OK, replace the gauge assembly. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Odometer: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Speedometer and Odometer The odometer circuit drive and the speedometer are controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives pulses from the vehicle speed sensor (except CVT) or PCM (CVT). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured by the CPU. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 10743 161. Middle Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 10744 12. Oil Pressure Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 10745 Oil Pressure Sender: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Switch Test 1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running. 3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 10746 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter wrench. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch. 3. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch. 4. Install the oil filter. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10751 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10752 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10753 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10754 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10755 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10756 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10757 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10758 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10759 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10760 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10761 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10762 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10763 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10764 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10765 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10766 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10767 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10768 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10769 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10770 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10771 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10772 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10773 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10774 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10775 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10776 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10777 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10778 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10779 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10780 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10781 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10782 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10783 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10784 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10785 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10789 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10790 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10791 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Locations SRS Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10797 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10798 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10799 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10800 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10801 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10802 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10803 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10804 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10805 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10806 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10807 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10808 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10809 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10810 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10811 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10812 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10813 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10814 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10815 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10816 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10817 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10818 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10819 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10820 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10821 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10822 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10823 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10824 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10825 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10826 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10827 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10828 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10829 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10830 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10831 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10837 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10838 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10839 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10840 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10841 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10842 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10843 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10844 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10845 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10846 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10847 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10848 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10849 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10850 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10851 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10852 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10853 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10854 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10855 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10856 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10857 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10858 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10859 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10860 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10861 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10862 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10863 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10864 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10865 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10866 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10867 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10868 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10869 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10870 Dimmer Switch: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10871 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10876 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10877 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10878 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip Fuel Gauge Sender: Technical Service Bulletins Gas Tank - Fuel Pump/Sending Unit Installation Tip SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Installing an In-Tank Fuel Pump/Sending Unit? Don't Forget a New Base Gasket, Locknut, and Fuel Line Retainers APPLIES TO: See Models Listed In Illustration SERVICE TIP: Whenever you install an in-tank fuel pump/sending unit into a plastic fuel tank, the S/M tells you to install a new base gasket. But did you know you also need to replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers as well? Make a note in the Fuel Supply System subsection of the appropriate S/Ms to also replace the locknut and the fuel line retainers. Then follow this handy chart to order the appropriate parts. Install the new gasket on the fuel tank side, not on the fuel pump/sending unit side; this ensures that the gasket doesn't get pinched or rolled. If you don't install the fuel pump/sending unit correctly, the MIL could come on with an EVAP control system leakage DTC set. The gasket and the locknut are currently available in Honda parts stock under separate part numbers. But soon, they'll be packaged under a single part number. The fuel sending unit, gasket, and locknut will also be packaged together under a single part number. The gasket and the locknut will then be discontinued as separate part numbers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10883 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10884 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10885 Fuel Supply System - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10886 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit Diagram. 1. Check the No.10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Do the gauge drive circuit check. - If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from minimum to maximum position and then returns to the minimum position, the gauge is OK. Go to step 3. - If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep from minimum to maximum position and then return to the minimum position, replace the gauge assembly and retest. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion. 5. Remove the access panel from the floor. 6. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector. 7. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. - If the voltage is OK, go to step 7. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground. - an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G551). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, then reinstall it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10887 9. Install a 2 Ohms resistor between fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.1 and No.2, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F". - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicates "F", replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom on the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level. 11. Relieve the fuel pressure. 12. Remove the fuel fill cap. 13. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel pump. 14. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10888 15. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If you do not get the shown readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. NOTE: Remove the No.9 BACK UP (10A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10889 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement Special Tools Required Fuel sender wrench 07XAA-001010A 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the seat cushion. 4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). 6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit. 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10890 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit. 9. Remove the stopper (O). Release the hook (P) and remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the fuel pressure regulator (F). 10. When connecting the fuel tank unit, make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (H). 11. Install in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (I) and new O-rings (J), then check these items: - When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connector (K) is firmly locked into the place. - When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist the connector excessively. - When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the fuel tank (M) and the fuel tank unit (N). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Key Reminder Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10895 Key Reminder Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10896 Keyless/Power Door Lock System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10897 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10900 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10901 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10902 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10903 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10904 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10905 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10906 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10907 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10908 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10909 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10910 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10911 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10912 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10913 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10914 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10915 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10916 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10917 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10918 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10919 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10920 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10921 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10922 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10923 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10924 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10925 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10926 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10927 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10928 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10929 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10930 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10931 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10932 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10933 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10934 Key Reminder Switch: Electrical Diagrams Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10935 Lights-on, Key-in And Seat Belt Reminders, Key Light Timer And Low Oil Pressure Indicator Image 73-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10936 Key Reminder Switch: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Switch Test NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the circuit diagram and input test. When the ignition key is in the ignition switch the multiplex control unit senses ground through the closed ignition key switch. When you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground through the closed door switch and sounds the beeper. 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch. - There should be no continuity with the key removed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Gauges Component Location Index (Part 1 Of 4) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10940 108. Middle Of Floor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10941 13. Parking Brake Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10942 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Switch Test 1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector (A) from the switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal and body ground: ^ With the brake lever up, there should be continuity. ^ With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Locations Automatic Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations > Automatic Transmission > Page 10947 Shift Indicator: Locations Continuously Variable Transmission Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10950 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10951 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10952 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10953 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10954 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10955 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10956 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10957 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10958 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10959 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10960 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10961 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10962 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10963 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10964 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10965 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10966 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10967 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10968 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10969 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10970 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10971 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10972 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10973 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10974 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10975 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10976 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10977 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10978 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10979 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10980 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10981 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10982 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10983 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Automatic Transmission Circuit Diagram Continuously Variable Transmission Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10984 Circuit Diagram Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between All terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [A position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Automatic Transmission > Page 10987 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Continuously Variable Transmission Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator P, N, or R does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to the P position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in the P position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the N position, and check for continuity between AS terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the N position and no continuity in any-other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the R position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the R position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 10988 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair Indicator Bulb Replacement SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the gauge assembly. 2. Replace the bulb (A) in the gauge assembly (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Gauges - Eratic Gauges Or Odd Odometer Display Speedometer Head: Technical Service Bulletins Gauges - Eratic Gauges Or Odd Odometer Display SOURCE: Honda Service News February 2003 TITLE: Erratic Gauges or Odd Odometer Display? Reset the Gauge Control Module. APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, or 2002-03 CR-Vs SERVICE TIP: If owners are complaining that the gauge needles are bouncing around or the odometer display is blank or displays nonsense, try resetting the gauge control module. Here's how: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the battery cables, starting with the negative cable. 3. Touch the battery cable ends together for about 1 minute. 4. Reconnect the battery cables, starting with the positive cable. 5. Start the engine, and watch the gauge assembly. - If the gauges or odometer still don't work right, shut off the engine, and do the self diagnostic procedure in the Body Electrical section of the appropriate S/M. Then go to step 6 - If the gauges and odometer work OK, shut off the engine, and go to step 6. 6. Do the idle learn procedure: - Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. - Let the engine reach its normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). - Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed and with all electrical items off ) for 10 minutes. Shut off the engine. 7. Initialize the driver's window auto-up feature (if applicable): - Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the driver's window is fully closed. - Push down and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way down. - Pull back and hold the window switch. Make sure the window goes all the way up, then hold the switch for at least 2 more seconds. 8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped). Enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10993 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Speedometer and Odometer The odometer circuit drive and the speedometer are controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives pulses from the vehicle speed sensor (except CVT) or PCM (CVT). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured by the CPU. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations 4. Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 10998 88. Test Tachometer Connector Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation How the Circuit Works The indicators are controlled by relative conditions in their associated systems. For the following indicators the information supplied to the gauge assembly is received via the multiplex control unit: - Charging System - Door Indicator Light - Maintenance Required Indicator - Seat Belt Reminder - Trunk Indicator Light Refer to each associated system to see its entire schematic. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge is controlled by the CPU built-in the gauge assembly. The CPU receives coolant temperature information from the ECM/PCM via the multiplex control unit, The ECM/PCM receives coolant temperature information from the ECT sensor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11002 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection Coolant Temperature Gauge Troubleshooting Before testing, check the No.9 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the No.10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Start the engine, and check the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Does the MIL come on? YES - Troubleshoot the cause of the ECM/PCM DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 2. 2. Check for a multiplex control unit DTC. Is a DTC indicated? YES - Troubleshooting the cause of the multiplex control unit DTC, and recheck. NO - Go to step 3. 3. Do the communication line check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Is the word "Error" indicated on the odo/trip display? YES - The gauge cannot receive the signal from the multiplex control unit and the ECM/PCM. Check for an open in the WHT/GRN wire (gauge connector terminal A5 for 03 model Visteon type, terminal A2 for other type.). NO - Go to step 4. 4. Do the gauge drive circuit check with the self-diagnosis procedure. Does the temperature gauge needle sweep from the minimum position to the maximum, then return to the minimum position? YES - Go to step 5. NO - Replace the gauge assembly. 5. Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. Did the symptom/indication go away? YES - Replace the ECM/PCM. NO - Substitute a known-good gauge assembly. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11008 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11009 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11010 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11011 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11012 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11013 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11014 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11015 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11016 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11017 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11018 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11019 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11020 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11021 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11022 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11023 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11024 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11025 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11026 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11027 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11028 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11029 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11030 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11031 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11032 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11033 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11034 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11035 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11036 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11037 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11038 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11039 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11040 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11041 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Electrical Diagrams A/T Gear Position Indicator - Except CVT Image 89 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11042 A/T Gear Position Indicator - CVT Image 89-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11043 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11044 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and repair the system as indicated by DTC. 2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear position indicator [P], [N], or [R] does not come on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) and B (22P). 3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact. 4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. 5. Shift to [P] position, and check for continuity between A5 terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. There should be continuity in [P] position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 6. Shift to the [N] position, and check for continuity between A3 terminal (BLK/RED) and ground. There should be continuity in the [N] position and no continuity in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to the [R] position, and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT) and ground. There should be 0 V in the [R] position. There should be about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your test results are different, check for a faulty transmission range switch or an open in the wire. 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and ground with the ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage. If your test results are different, check for a blown No.10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground under all conditions. There should be continuity. If your test results are different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an open in the wire. 10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11050 (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11051 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11052 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11053 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11058 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11059 29. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11060 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) connector. 2. Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 3P connector No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations 147. Left Side of Trunk (Sedan) (right similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11066 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11067 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11068 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11069 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11070 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11071 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11072 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11073 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11074 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11075 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11076 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11077 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11078 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11079 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11080 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11081 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11082 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11083 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11084 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11085 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11086 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11087 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11088 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11089 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11090 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11091 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11092 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11093 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11094 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11095 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11096 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11097 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11098 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11099 226. Brake Light/Taillight, Left Or Right Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11100 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Diagram 110-12 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11101 Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11105 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11106 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 141. Middle of Rear Shelf Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11112 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Connector Locations 143. Middle of Rear Shelf 152. Bottom of Spoiler on Trunk Lid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11113 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams 9. High Mount Brake Light (Honda Accessory) 52. High Mount Brake Light Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11114 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair High Mount Brake Light Replacement 1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the high mount brake light (B). 2. Carefully remove the rear shelf and high mount brake light. 3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Console Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11120 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11121 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11122 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11123 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11124 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11125 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11126 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11127 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11128 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11129 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11130 Console Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11131 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11132 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11133 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11134 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11135 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11136 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11137 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11138 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11139 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11140 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11141 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11142 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11143 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11144 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11145 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11146 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11147 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11148 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11149 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11150 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11151 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11152 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11153 Console Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11154 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11159 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11160 208. DRL Control Unit (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11161 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test - Canada The DRL indicator light in the gauge assembly will come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the headlight switch off and the parking brake set. If should go off when you turn on the headlight switch, release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, do the control unit input test. NOTE: When the daytime running lights are on, the high beam indicator will glow at half its normal intensity. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. '01-03 models Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11162 4. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. '04 model Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11163 5. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11167 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11168 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dimmer Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11173 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11174 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11175 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11176 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11177 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11178 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11179 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11180 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11181 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11182 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11183 Dimmer Switch: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11184 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11185 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11186 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11187 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11188 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11189 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11190 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11191 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11192 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11193 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11194 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11195 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11196 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11197 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11198 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11199 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11200 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11201 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11202 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11203 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11204 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11205 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11206 Dimmer Switch: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11207 Interior Lights - Dash And Console Lights Image 114-1 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Dome Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11212 Dome Lamp: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11213 Dome Lamp: Locations 130. Front of Roof (with Moonroof) 132. Middle Of Roof (Without Moonroof) 133. Rear of Roof (with Moonroof) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11216 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11217 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11218 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11219 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11220 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11221 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11222 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11223 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11224 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11225 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11226 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11227 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11228 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11229 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11230 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11231 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11232 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11233 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11234 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11235 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11236 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11237 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11238 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11239 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11240 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11241 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11242 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11243 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11244 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11245 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11246 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11247 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11248 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11249 Dome Lamp: Connector Views 102. Ceiling Light (EX), Rear 103. Ceiling Light (except EX) 137. Ceiling Light/spotlights (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11250 Dome Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-2 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11251 Diagram 114-3 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11252 Diagram 114-4 (Sedan EX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof 1. Turn the ceiling light/spotlights switches OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing (B). 4. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the housing. 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement > Page 11255 Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection Ceiling Light Test/Replacement Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two mounting screws. 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C). 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof 1. Turn the ceiling light/spotlights switches OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing (B). 4. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the housing. 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ceiling Light/Spotlight Test/Replacement > Page 11258 Dome Lamp: Service and Repair Ceiling Light Test/Replacement Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two mounting screws. 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C). 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11263 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11264 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11265 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Diode > Component Information > Diagrams 45. Fog Light Diode (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 58. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11273 159. Fog Light Relays 1 And 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 77. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11277 160. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11282 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11283 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11290 72. Behind Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11291 193. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11292 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the center panel (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11297 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Headlight: 1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the headlight. 2. Remove the rubber cover (B). 3. Pull the retaining spring (C) away from the bulb (D), then remove the bulb. 4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the tabs in the headlight. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11301 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11302 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11303 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: Recalls Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11320 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11321 Low Beam Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11322 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11323 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11328 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11329 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11330 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horn Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11334 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11335 11. Horn Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11336 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) No.2 terminal to body ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: horn relay - No.7 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A), and disconnect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B). 5. Using a jumper wire, connect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B) to ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 6. - If the horn does not sound, replace the cable reel. 6. Reconnect the horn switch positive connector (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11337 7. Using a jumper wire, connect the steering column. - If the horn sounds, replace the steering column. - If the horn does not sound, replace the horn and contact plate. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11342 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11343 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11344 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11345 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11346 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11347 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11348 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11349 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11350 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11351 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11352 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11353 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11354 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11355 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11356 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11357 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11358 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11359 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11360 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11361 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11362 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11363 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11364 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11365 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11366 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11367 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11368 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11369 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11370 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11371 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11372 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11373 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11374 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11375 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 115-0 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11376 Diagram 115-1 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11377 Diagram 115-2 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11378 Diagram 115-3 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11379 Diagram 115-4 (Sedan EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11380 Diagram 115-5 (Sedan EX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11381 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11382 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to steps. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11386 173. Ignition Key Swithc/key Light Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Key Cylinder Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11387 Key Cylinder Lamp: Testing and Inspection Ignition Key Light Test 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector. 3. The LED should come on when power is connected to the No.6 terminal and ground is connected to No.5 terminal. 4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11391 150. Middle of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11394 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11395 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11396 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11397 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11398 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11399 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11400 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11401 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11402 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11403 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11404 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11405 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11406 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11407 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11408 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11409 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11410 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11411 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11412 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11413 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11414 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11415 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11416 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11417 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11418 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11419 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11420 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11421 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11422 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11423 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11424 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11425 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11426 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11427 56. License Plate Light Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11428 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 110-13 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11429 Diagram 110-14a (Sedan) Diagram 110-14b (Coupe) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11430 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair License Plate Lights Replacement 1. Remove the license plate cover. 2. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light. 3. Separate the lens (B) and housing (C), then remove the bulb. 4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Specifications Map Light: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11434 Map Light: Locations 130. Front of Roof (with Moonroof) 131. Front of Roof (without Moonroof) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Map Light: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11437 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11438 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11439 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11440 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11441 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11442 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11443 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11444 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11445 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11446 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11447 Map Light: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11448 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11449 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11450 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11451 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11452 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11453 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11454 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11455 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11456 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11457 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11458 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11459 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11460 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11461 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11462 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11463 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11464 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11465 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11466 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11467 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11468 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11469 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11470 Map Light: Connector Views 85. Spotlights (except EX) 137. Ceiling Light/spotlights (EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11471 Map Light: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-2 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11472 Diagram 114-3 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11473 Diagram 114-4 (Sedan EX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof Map Light: Testing and Inspection Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof 1. Turn the ceiling light/spotlights switches OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing (B). 4. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the housing. 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof > Page 11476 Map Light: Testing and Inspection Spotlights Test/Replacement - Without Moonroof Spotlights Test/Replacement - Without Moonroof 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lenses (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two mounting screws. 4. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the housing (c). 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK,check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the spotlights. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof Map Light: Service and Repair Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof 1. Turn the ceiling light/spotlights switches OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing (B). 4. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the housing. 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ceiling light. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof > Page 11479 Map Light: Service and Repair Spotlights Test/Replacement - Without Moonroof Spotlights Test/Replacement - Without Moonroof 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lenses (A) with a small screwdriver. 3. Remove the two mounting screws. 4. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the housing (c). 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK,check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the spotlights. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Front Turn Signal / Side Marker Lights: Parking Light: 1. Remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lights. 3. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove them from the headlight housing. 4. Install the new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Front Turn Signal / Side Marker Lights: Parking Light: 1. Remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lights. 3. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove them from the headlight housing. 4. Install the new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 94. Behind Glove Box (except GX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11492 (A/T, CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11493 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11494 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11495 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11499 Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11500 208. DRL Control Unit (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11501 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test - Canada The DRL indicator light in the gauge assembly will come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the headlight switch off and the parking brake set. If should go off when you turn on the headlight switch, release the parking brake. If it comes on at any other time, do the control unit input test. NOTE: When the daytime running lights are on, the high beam indicator will glow at half its normal intensity. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. '01-03 models Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11502 4. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. '04 model Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 11503 5. Make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11507 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11508 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations 58. Under Left Side Of Dash (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11512 159. Fog Light Relays 1 And 2 (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11516 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11517 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11521 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11522 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11523 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11527 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11528 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11529 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Interior Lighting Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11534 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11535 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11536 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11537 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11538 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11539 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11540 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11541 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11542 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11543 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11544 Interior Lighting Module: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11545 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11546 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11547 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11548 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11549 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11550 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11551 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11552 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11553 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11554 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11555 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11556 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11557 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11558 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11559 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11560 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11561 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11562 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11563 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11564 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11565 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11566 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11567 Interior Lighting Module: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 115-0 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11568 Diagram 115-1 (except EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11569 Diagram 115-2 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11570 Diagram 115-3 (Coupe EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11571 Diagram 115-4 (Sedan EX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11572 Diagram 115-5 (Sedan EX) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11573 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. 5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11574 - If all the input tests prove OK, go to steps. 6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11578 158. DRL Relay (Canada); Low Beam Cut Relay ('01-'03 Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11579 Low Beam Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11580 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11581 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11585 Tail Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11586 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11587 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11591 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11592 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11593 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11594 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11595 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11601 6. Transmission Housing (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11602 29. Back-up Light Switch (M/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11603 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Light Switch Test 1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) connector. 2. Check for continuity between the back-up light switch 3P connector No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. There should be continuity when the shift lever is in reverse. 3. If necessary, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11607 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11608 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B). 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals (with cruise control). - There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed. - There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released. 4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11617 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11618 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11619 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11620 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11621 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11622 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11623 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11624 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement NOTE: ^ Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. ^ Use only a genuine Honda wheel cylinder special bolt. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). 3. Remove the bolt (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. 4. Apply Three Bond 1109G sealant or equivalent (E) between the wheel cylinder (B) and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder. 5. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Bleed the brake system. 7. Check for leaks at the line joint and bleed screw, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11636 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11637 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11638 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11639 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11640 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11641 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11642 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 05-006 > May > 05 > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11643 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications CVT ATF pan/bolts Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11649 21. Transmission Housing (A/T) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 11650 87. TCC Solenoid Valve (A/T Except CVT) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 11651 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 11652 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Page 11653 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Test 1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid valve connector. STANDARD: 12 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if the resistance is out of standard. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve if no sound is heard when connecting the battery positive terminal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Component Information > Page 11654 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Replacement 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (A). 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work Door Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Key Beeper, Light Chime & Ceiling Light Don't Work SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Key Beeper, Light Chime, Ceiling Light Don't Work APPLIES TO: 2001-03 Civic, 2002-03 CR-V SERVICE TIP: If the ignition key-in beeper, the headlights-on chime, the ceiling light, and the driver's-dooropen indicator are all on the fritz check the driver's door switch in the doorjamb. A faulty door switch can cause all of these symptoms. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11659 Door Switch: Locations Entry Light Control System Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11660 110. Left B Pillar (Right Similar) 111. Left C Pillar (Sedan) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11661 Door Switch: Diagrams 4. Door Switch, Driver's 5. Door Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan) 6. Door Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear 7. Door Switch, Passenger's (Coupe) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations 77. Under Middle Of Dash Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11665 160. Fog Light Switch (Honda Accessory) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11669 72. Behind Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11670 193. Hazard Warning Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11671 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection Hazard Warning Switch Test 1. Remove the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B). 3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the center panel (C). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (D) or the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: Recalls Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headlamp Switch: > NHTSA04V086000 > Feb > 04 > Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect Headlamp Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V086000: Headlamp Switch/Connector Defect DEFECT: On certain passenger vehicles, the low-beam terminal on the head light wire harness can overheat and could cause the low beams to fail without warning. An unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect the head light switch and coupler for signs of heat damage. If heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the switch and coupler. If no heat damage is present, the dealer will replace the head light switch and one mating pin in the coupler. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification was to begin on April 5, 2004 . Owners may contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Horn Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11688 53. Steering Wheel (Airbag Inflators Removed) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11689 11. Horn Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11690 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection Horn Switch Test 1. Remove the steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A) No.2 terminal to body ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 4. - If the horn does not sound, check these items: horn relay - No.7 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - Horn. - An open in the wire. 4. Reconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P connector (A), and disconnect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B). 5. Using a jumper wire, connect the horn switch positive 1P connector (B) to ground. - If the horn sounds, go to step 6. - If the horn does not sound, replace the cable reel. 6. Reconnect the horn switch positive connector (B). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11691 7. Using a jumper wire, connect the steering column. - If the horn sounds, replace the steering column. - If the horn does not sound, replace the horn and contact plate. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11702 Tail Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11703 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11704 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Trunk Lamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Trunk Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals. - There should be continuity with the trunk lid open. - There should be no continuity with the trunk lid closed. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11718 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11719 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11720 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11721 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11722 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11723 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11724 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11725 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04-015 Date: 040326 Recall - Combination Light Switch Replacement 04-015 March 26, 2004 Applies To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED Safety Recall: Combination Light Switch BACKGROUND A terminal in the headlight wire harness connector can overheat and may cause the low-beam headlights to fail without warning. Although the high-beam position remains operational, an unexpected loss of low beams could result in a crash. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be sent a notification of this recall. An example of the customer notification is shown in this service bulletin. Not all vehicles within the VIN ranges are affected by this recall. Before beginning work on a vehicle, verify its eligibility by checking at least one of these items: ^ The customer has a notification letter. ^ The vehicle is shown on your campaign responsibility report. ^ The vehicle is shown as eligible on an iN VIN status inquiry. In addition to the bulleted verification items, check for a punch mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. A punch mark in that location means the combination light switch has already been repaired. Some vehicles affected by this recall may be in your used car inventory. According to federal law, these vehicles cannot be sold or leased until they are repaired. To see if a vehicle is affected by this recall, do a VIN status inquiry before selling it. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination light switch, the RED/WHT wire in the headlight wire harness, and if needed, the 16P headlight wire harness connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11731 PARTS INFORMATION Combination Light Switch Repair Kit: (Includes switch, wire harness connector, 250 mm wire with an attached terminal, and wire splice connector) Civic: P/N 35012-S5A-307, H/C 7743875 Insight: P/N 35012-S3Y-306, H/C 7743883 TOOL INFORMATION Terminal Pin Kit C: T/N 07QAZ-003020C, or equivalent (Terminal Pin Kit C contains the wire crimper and the heat gun used for wire splicing.) Terminal Maintenance Set: T/N 070AZ-S5A0100* [Contains Terminal Remover Set (six small, plastic tools used to remove terminals from the 16P headlight wire harness connector), and Secondary Lock Opener (a miniature, flat-tip screwdriver used to open the secondary locks on the 16P headlight wire harness connector)] * This tool is being sent to your dealership along with your initial allocation of combination light switch repair kits. NOTE: If you need additional tools, order them through the parts ordering system. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed Part: P/N 35255-S5A-A01 H/C 6453336 Defect Code: 5CN Symptom Code: P23 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE: ^ SRS components are located in this area. Before you begin, review the SRS component locations, cautions, and procedures in the service manual. ^ Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces. ^ For information about wire terminal replacement and wire splicing, refer to service bulletin 00-099 Terminal Replacement Instructions. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio (if applicable), then write down your customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. On Civics, remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. For Civic 2/4-door, see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 20-97. For Civic Hatchback, see the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 20-61. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11732 4. Remove the steering column covers (see the 2001-04 Civic Service Manual, page 17-27, step 4; the 2002-04 Civic Hatchback Service Manual, page 17-9, step 4; or the 2000-04 Insight Service Manual, page 17-9, step 5). On the Insight steering column, also remove the two front nuts, and loosen the two rear nuts. 5. On Civics, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch and the 5P connector from the cable reel. On Civic Hatchbacks, also disconnect the 14P connector from the wiper switch. Then carefully pull the wire harness to the right of the steering column. On Insights, disconnect the 16P connector from the combination light switch. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position, then turn the steering wheel to the right. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11733 7. Remove the two screws from the combination light switch. 8. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with electrical tape, slightly lift the switch cover, then remove the switch, and discard it. 9. Remove the tape or corrugated tubing/foam from the 16P connector wire harness to expose about 200 mm of wire. Discard the tape, but retain the tubing/foam. 10. Locate the RED/WHI wire in the 16P connector. Then measure 150 mm from the end of the connector, and cut the RED/WHT wire there. 11. Inspect the 16P connector for heat damage or discoloration. ^ If the connector is OK, go to step 12. ^ If the connector is damaged or discolored, go to step 14. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11734 12. Using the Secondary Lock Opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A0100), carefully pry open the secondary lock on the RED/WHT wire side of the 16P connector. 13. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into the center row cavity of the 16P connector, above the RED/WHT wire cavity, then remove and discard the RED/WHT wire. 14. Strip off 7 mm of insulation from the vehicle wire harness side of the RED/WHI wire. Insert the stripped end into one side of the splice connector, and crimp the connector. 15. Cut the new RED/WHI wire 170 mm from the end of its terminal. Then strip off 7 mm of insulation from the cut end. 16. Insert the stripped end of the new RED/WHI wire into the other side of the splice connector, then crimp the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11735 17. With a non-combustible material between the RED/WHI wire and the vehicle wire harness, use a heat gun to shrink the splice connector casing. NOTE: ^ Be careful not to get burned. ^ Do not overheat the wire. 18. If the original 16P connector is not heat damaged or discolored, insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity on the connector, then go to step 22. If the 16P connector is damaged, go to step 19. 19. Using the secondary lock opener from the Terminal Maintenance Set (T/N 070AZ-55A-010), carefully pry open the other secondary lock on the 16P connector. 20. Twist off a terminal remover from the Terminal Remover Set (T/N 070AZ-S5A-011). Insert the terminal remover into a center row cavity of the original 16P connector, remove the corresponding wire from its cavity, and transfer it to the same cavity in the new 16P connector. Repeat this for all the wires except the original RED/WHT wire. 21. Insert the new RED/WHT wire into its proper terminal cavity in the new 16P connector. 22. Snap the secondary lock(s) closed on the 16P connector. 23. Using electrical tape, retape the wire harness or insert the wires into the corrugated tubing/foam and retape the tubing/foam. 24. Install the new combination light switch with the two original screws. 25. On Civics, reroute the wire harness over the steering column, then connect the 16P connector to the combination light switch, the 5P connector to the cable reel connector and, on Civic Hatchbacks, the 14P connector to the wiper switch. On Insights, connect the 16P connector to the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11736 combination light switch. 26. Connect the negative cable to the battery. 27. Check the operation of the headlights, the parking lights, and the turn signals. 28. On Civics, install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 29. Install the steering column covers. 30. Enter the radio anti-theft code (if applicable), then enter your customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. 31. Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, lights, etc.) are off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine reach normal operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed) for 10 minutes. 32. On 2001 Civic LX and EX 2-door models thru VIN 1HGEM2...2L016502, do the cruise control learn procedure: ^ Drive the vehicle, and set the cruise control above 40 miles per hour. ^ Drive the vehicle for 5 to 10 minutes at the set speed. If you cancel the set speed before driving 5 to 10 minutes, repeat the procedure. NOTE: This procedure can also be done on a chassis dynamometer, but it cannot be done with the vehicle on a lift. 33. Center-punch a completion mark above the 12th character of the engine compartment VIN. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11737 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 04-015 > Mar > 04 > Recall Combination Light Switch Replacement > Page 11738 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11739 Combination Switch: Locations Exterior Lights Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11740 54. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11741 212. Combination Light Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11742 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11743 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B). 4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID PLEASE NOTE: The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Turn Signal/Hazard Relay. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Front Turn Signal / Side Marker Lights: Parking Light: 1. Remove the inner fender. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lights. 3. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove them from the headlight housing. 4. Install the new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Relay: Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11754 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11755 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11756 Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11757 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11758 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B). 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 3. 3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Terminal Numbering System Terminal Numbering System Connector terminals are numbered according to the cavities they're in. The cavities are numbered starting from the upper left, looking at the male terminals from the terminal side or looking at the female terminals from the wire side. Both views are in the same direction so the numbers are the same. All actual cavities are numbered, even if they have no wire terminals in them. NOTE: Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals are numbered according to SAE standard J1962, not the Honda standard. The numbers of the four end terminals are molded into the corners of the connector face. The connector cavity number is listed next to each terminal on the circuit schematic. The cavity/terminal shown below is #6. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11766 Wire Color Abbreviations Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11767 Wires Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11768 Connectors - "C" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11769 Splices Components Ground - "G" Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11770 Terminals - "T" Shielding Switches Fuses Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11771 Diodes Light Emitting Diode (LED) Motor Pressure Sensor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11772 Resistor Variable Sensor Solenoid Transistors Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11773 Circuit Schematics Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow from power at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another for example is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11774 All in-line and junction connectors are numbered (C725, C416 etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified either by the name of the component if the component only has one connector or by a capital letter (A, B, C etc.) if the component has more than one connector. Below most connector numbers and component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo in the back of the book that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration in the back of the book that shows the connector terminals, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector as seen from either of the viewpoints shown on diagram [8] . Except for the DLC (data link connector) disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C554, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C554. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11775 Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the vehicle. Refer to the Power Distribution diagram set to get a more detailed understanding of how picture is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. So if Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Ground Distribution Schematics Ground Distribution Schematics This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share the same ground point. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11776 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids General Troubleshooting Information General Troubleshooting Information Tips and Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. NOTE: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring. Handling Connectors - Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals. - Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors). - All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). - Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a pull type lock. - Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket (A). - Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead. - Always reinstall plastic covers. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11777 - Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent. - Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). - The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is contaminated, replace it. - Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked. - Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down. Handling Wires and Harnesses - Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11778 - Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A). - Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip. - After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts. - Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws and bolts. - Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B). Testing and Repairs - Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape. - After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them. - When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described. - If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector). - Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. - Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector terminals. Five-Step Troubleshooting Five-Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11779 Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Test Equipment Test Equipment CAUTION: Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Test Light and DVOM On circuits without solid-state devices, use a test light to check for voltage. A test light is made up of a 12 volt bulb with a pair of leads attached. After grounding one lead, touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. The bulb will go on if there is voltage at the point being tested. If you need to know how much voltage is present, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). Self-Powered Test Light and DVOM Use a self-powered test light to check for continuity. This tool is made up of a light bulb, battery, and two leads. To test it, touch the leads together: the light should go on. Use a self-powered test light only on an unpowered circuit. First, disconnect the battery, or remove the fuse that feeds the circuit you are working on. Select two points in the circuit between which you want to check continuity. Connect one lead of the self-powered test light to each point. If there is continuity, the test light's circuit will be completed, and the light will go on. If, in addition, you need to know exactly how much resistance there is between two points, use a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In the "OHMS" range, the DVOM will measure resistance between two points along a circuit. Low resistance means good continuity. Diodes and solid-state devices in a circuit can make a DVOM give a false reading. To check a reading, reverse the leads, and take a second reading. If the readings differ, the component is affecting the measurement. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11780 Jumper Wire Use a jumper wire to bypass an open circuit. A jumper wire is made up of an in-line fuse holder connected to a set of test leads. It should have a five ampere fuse. Never connect a jumper wire across a short circuit. The direct battery short will blow the fuse. Short Finder (Short Circuit Locater) Short finders are available to locate shorts to ground. The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the shorted circuit which you can follow to the location of the short. To order any test equipment shown above, contact your local tool supplier. For a list of suppliers and tool numbers, refer to Honda Required Special Tools and Equipment Service Bulletin. Troubleshooting Precautions Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: - Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: - Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11781 - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 10-megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Troubleshooting Tests Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing for Voltage Drop Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11782 Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. Circuits must be operating when checking voltage drop. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Testing for a Short with a Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing for a Short with a Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11783 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing for a Short with a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11784 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short finder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will read current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. How to Replace Connector Terminals Terminal Replacement Procedure HOW TO REPLACE CONNECTOR TERMINALS The terminal repair kits provide necessary tools and materials (terminals, wire seals, and splice connectors) to repair many damaged or faulty connector terminals. However, not all terminals for all connectors are available. Refer to the labels on the lids of the repair kits for replacement terminal availability. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. Before you begin, inspect the wire you are about to repair for damage and length. Make sure the wire will be long enough to make a terminal repair without stretching it when you reinstall the terminal in the connector. If the wire is too short, or if access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair, you may need to install a pigtail terminal (a short length of wire with a factory-crimped terminal on it). Refer to HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS. Removing the Terminal Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11785 Use the tools from Pin Tool Set. First, check the connector that you are about to repair. - If it has a secondary terminal lock, go to Connectors With a Secondary Lock. A secondary lock, found on most connectors on some models, is an additional locking device on the connector housing as a backup for the primary lock on the terminal. - If the connector does not have a secondary lock, go to Connectors Without a Secondary Lock. Connectors With a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of the secondary terminal locks; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size. Identify the connector by the type of secondary lock, not by the number of terminal cavities. EXAMPLE A: 1. Release the secondary lock. 2. Remove the terminal. 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11786 1. Remove the secondary lock from the male terminal half. 2. Remove the secondary lock from the female terminal half. 3. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the secondary lock. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11787 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: 1. Remove the secondary locks. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11788 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal (same procedure for male and female). 3. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11789 1. Remove the secondary locks. 2. Remove the terminal from the female half. 3. Remove the terminal from the male half. 4. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. Connectors Without a Secondary Lock All examples are shown with the connector lock facing up. The illustrations are examples of connector terminals without a secondary lock; however, the connector you are repairing may vary in size and shape. EXAMPLE A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11790 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE B: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE C: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE D: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11791 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE E: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE F: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11792 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. EXAMPLE G: 1. Remove the terminal. 2. Go to HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS. How to Install New Terminals HOW TO INSTALL NEW TERMINALS 1. Carefully match the old terminal with a new one from the terminal repair kit. Choose the correct replacement terminal based on the wire size range the terminal will accommodate. NOTE: If the replacement terminal quantities are low, reorder them by using the terminal part number listed on the inside lid of the terminal repair kit. Replacement terminals are available through your parts department using normal parts ordering procedures. 2. Depending on the size of the wire you are repairing, use the proper size slot in the crimping tool. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11793 3. Strip the insulation off the end of the wire so the wire fits in the new terminal as shown. (If the wire has a wire seal, replace it with a new one from the kit.) NOTE: After stripping the end of the wire, make sure you did not cut any wire strands. If you did, cut the wire off even with the insulation, and strip it again. 4. Position the terminal in the crimping tool slot with the solid portion of the terminal toward the anvil and the open section toward the former. 5. Insert the wire in the terminal to the position shown in step 3. 6. Squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. 7. Crimp the insulation crimp. - If you do not have a wire seal, then use the next larger size crimp slot. Position the crimping tool over the insulation crimp section of the terminal, then squeeze the tool with both hands until the stops make contact. - If you have a wire seal, position the insulation crimp in the 5.5 crimping slot, then carefully squeeze the crimp closed until its ends are touching and making a full-circle shape. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11794 8. Inspect the quality of the wire crimp. If it has any of the following NO GOOD crimps, cut it off and start over. 9. Insert the terminal into the connector. Make sure the wire seals are pushed all the way into the connector. Lightly pull on the wires to make sure the terminal is locked into place. 10. Close or insert the secondary terminal lock, if applicable, and reconnect the connector. How to Install Pigtail Terminals HOW TO INSTALL PIGTAIL TERMINALS Pigtail terminals (short pieces of wire with a factory crimped terminal) are used when the wire is too short or when access to the connector is too restricted to make a terminal repair. NOTE: To replace just a connector terminal, go to How to Replace Connector Terminals. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION: On some models, the SRS wires are in a separate harness. If the SRS harness is damaged, replace the harness; do not repair it. On other models, wire harnesses include yellow SRS wires. If any SRS wire is damaged, replace the entire harness; do not repair it. 1. Remove the damaged or faulty terminal from the connector. Use the proper removal tool from Pin Tool Set. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11795 2. Cut off the wire about an inch back from where it connects to the damaged or faulty terminal, then strip about half of the insulation off that piece. This will be used to size the wire end of the replacement pigtail terminal. NOTE: If you are not sure of the wire size, start with a large enough hole on the stripper that will not nick or cut off any strands of wires. 3. Select a pigtail terminal that matches the original wire at both ends (same kind of terminal and same diameter bare wire). 4. Select the smallest splice connector (yellow, pink, or blue) that will fit onto the stripped end of the original wire. 5. Insert the pigtail terminal into the connector cavity; push it in until it locks in place. 6. Lay the pigtail and the original wire side-by-side, and cut off both ends at once. If you are making more than one splice, do not cut each pigtail at the same location; the resulting "lump" of splice connectors would interfere with rewrapping the harness. Instead, cut the first pigtail close enough to the terminal so you will have room to make each remaining cut about 20 mm (3/4 inch) farther down on the next pigtail. 7. If you are using a yellow splice connector, strip about 6 mm (1/4 inch) of insulation off the ends of both wires. If you are using a pink or blue splice connector, strip off about 8 mm (5/16 inch) of insulation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11796 8. Put the splice connector in the proper size slot in the Crimper Tool, slide it to one end (where the flare begins), and close the crimper handles far enough to hold it in place. To release the ratchet mechanism at any point after the first click, squeeze the handles slightly and push the release lever, then let the handles open. 9. Insert one of the bare wires into the splice connector end that is in the crimper jaws. Push the wire all the way into the splice connector, and squeeze the crimper handles. Keep squeezing until the jaws touch, and hold it at that position until the ratchet clicks again. 10. Crimp the other wire in the same way into the other end of the splice connector. 11. After crimping, gently pull on the wires in the opposite directions to make sure they are secure in the connector. 12. Separate the other wires in the harness from the repaired wire(s), and shield them with nonflammable material. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11797 13. Plug in the heat gun, and turn it on. Start at the middle of the splice connector, and move the gun toward the ends as the tube shrinks. Apply heat evenly by rotating the curved heat spreader around the splice connector. Shrinking is complete when a small amount of sealant appears at each end of the tube. Pigtail Terminal Selection Chart PIGTAIL TERMINAL SELECTION CHART Select the proper size pigtail terminal by matching the replacement terminal part number and the wire size being repaired to the corresponding pigtail terminal part number. Then use the color (size) splice connector listed. In some instances you may also have to match the wire seal style to select the proper pigtail terminal. Pigtail terminals are available through your parts department, in quantities of 10, using normal parts ordering procedures. Checking For Poor Fir of Terminals CHECKING FOR POOR FIT OF TERMINALS Loose terminal fit can cause a number of intermittent problems in electrical circuits. By using the Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set you can inspect the terminal fit between the two matching connectors without removing the terminals from the connector body. 1. Find the terminal tool that best matches the male terminal in the mating connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11798 2. Insert the terminal tool into the female terminal, and then remove the terminal tool. NOTE: Make sure you do not select a terminal tool that is larger than the mating male terminal because it would spread the female terminal and cause a loose fit. 3. Compare the drag to the other terminals in the connector. If the drag is less, replace the terminal with a replacement terminal from the appropriate terminal repair kit. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11799 Vanity Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 114-0 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11800 Diagram 114-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.)within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location photographs (references to PHOTOS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Locations by Photo Number. See: Locations/Component Locations/Locations By Photo Number Connector Views: Connector terminal views (references to VIEWS) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Connector Views by View Number. See: Diagrams/Connector Views/Connector Views By View Number Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11806 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11810 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11811 Heated Glass Element Switch: Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Diagrams Rear Defogger: Diagrams (Coupe) (Sedan) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Engine Compartment Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11819 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11823 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11824 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11825 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11826 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11827 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11832 Rear Window Defogger Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11833 Heated Glass Element Switch: Diagrams 194. Recirc - A/C - Defogger Switch Assembly Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations 120. Driver's Door (Sedan except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11837 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11846 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11847 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11853 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11854 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11855 Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11856 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11857 Power Windows Component Location Index 119. Driver's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11858 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan except DX) 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11859 119. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 120. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11860 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11861 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11862 Power Window Switch: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11863 (Coupe Except DX, HX) 167. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 168. Power Window Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11864 169. Power Window Switch, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX, HX) 232. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11867 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11868 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11869 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11870 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11871 4. Disconnect the 20P connector and make these input tests. 5. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch and make these input tests. 2-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11872 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, Go to step 4. 4. Reconnect the 14P connector to the power window master switch, and perform the given input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11873 5. Disconnected the 14Pconnecter and, make these in put tests at the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11874 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11875 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11876 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Input Test Passenger's Switch Input Test 1. Remove the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11877 4. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11878 5. Disconnect the 5P connector, and make these input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11881 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11882 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11883 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11884 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11885 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Front Door Window Motor: Component Locations Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11892 123. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc. DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 11893 Front Door Window Motor: Connector Locations 123. Driver's Door (Coupe exc. DX, HX; Sedan exc. DX) 123. Driver's Door (Coupe Exc. DX, HX; Sedan Exc. DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11894 Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) (Coupe Except DX, HX) (Except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11895 62. Power Window Motor, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 64. Power Window Motor, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX, HX) 144. Power Window Motor, Driver's (except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations 129. Left Rear Door (Right Similar) 129. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11899 Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) 63. Power Window Motor, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Dashboard Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11903 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11904 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11905 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it. NOTE: See the turn signal/hazard relay input test. Normally-open type A: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11906 PGM-F1 Main Relay 1, 2 Type 1, 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Normally-open type B: Rear Window Defogger Relay Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11907 Blower Motor Relay Type 1, Type 2 Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Five-terminal type Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations 120. Driver's Door (Sedan except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11911 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: Customer Interest Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11920 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11921 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation 06-010 March 8, 2006 Applies To: 2001-05 Civic - All LX and EX 4-door 2003-05 Civic Hybrid - ALL 2001-05 Civic GX ALL Power Window Does Not Work or Works Intermittently SYMPTOM One or more of the power windows does not work or works intermittently from the power window master switch (in the driver's door). PROBABLE CAUSE The power window master switch is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the power window master switch. PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 744100 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hr Failed Part: P/N 35750-S5A-A01ZA H/C 6453419 Defect Code: 03217 Symptom Code: 01201 Template ID: 06-010A (Black Switch) 06-010B (Medium Taupe Switch) Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11927 1. Remove the driver's side grip cover: ^ Using a trim tool, pry out the front edge of the cover to release the front clip. ^ Pry out along the bottom to release the lower hooks. ^ Pry out along the top to release the upper hooks. ^ Pull the cover forward to release the rear clip. 2. Disconnect the power window master switch connector. 3. Remove the two screws that attach the power window switch base to the armrest, then remove the switch base. 4. Remove the three screws, then replace the power window master switch assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 06-010 > Mar > 06 > Body - Power Windows Inoperative/Intermittent Operation > Page 11928 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal. 6. Test the operation of all windows with the power window master switch.If any of the windows do not work correctly, continue with normal troubleshooting, and do the master switch input test: ^ Refer to page 22-168 of the 2001-05 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword MASTER TEST, and select Power Window Master Switch Input Test (4-door) from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11929 Power Window Switch: Locations Relay And Control Unit Locations - Door, Roof And Seat Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11930 Power Windows Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11931 Power Windows Component Location Index 119. Driver's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11932 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan except DX) 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11933 119. Driver's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 120. Driver's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11934 125. Passenger's Door (Coupe Except DX, HX) 126. Front Passenger's Door (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11935 127. Left Rear Door (Sedan Except DX) (Right Similar) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11936 Power Window Switch: Diagrams (Sedan Except DX) (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11937 (Coupe Except DX, HX) 167. Power Window Switch, Front Passenger's (Sedan Except DX) 168. Power Window Switch, Left Rear Or Right Rear (Sedan Except DX) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11938 169. Power Window Switch, Passenger's (Coupe Except DX, HX) 232. Power Window Master Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Test/Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11941 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11942 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11943 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11944 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Switch Input Test Master Switch Input Test 4-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11945 4. Disconnect the 20P connector and make these input tests. 5. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch and make these input tests. 2-door NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver's window operations. 1. Remove the door grip cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11946 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the master switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, Go to step 4. 4. Reconnect the 14P connector to the power window master switch, and perform the given input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11947 5. Disconnected the 14Pconnecter and, make these in put tests at the connector. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11948 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11949 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11950 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Window Switch Input Test Passenger's Switch Input Test 1. Remove the switch panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the switch (B). 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11951 4. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Switch Test/Replacement > Page 11952 5. Disconnect the 5P connector, and make these input tests. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Master Switch Replacement Master Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power window master switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11955 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. Replace the switch. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the driver's door panel. 5. Remove the armrest from the door panel. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11956 6. Separate the master switch plate (A) from the armrest (B). 7. Remove the three screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11957 1. Remove the screws and the power window master switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Driver's Switch: The driver's switch is combined with the control unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it. Instead, run the master switch input test procedures. If the tests are normal, the driver's switch must be faulty. 4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11958 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement 4-door 1. Remove the door grip cover. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger's power window switch (B). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the two screws and replace the switch. 2-door Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Switch Replacement > Page 11959 1. Remove the screw and passenger's power window switch (A) from the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. 4. If the continuity is not as specified remove the two screws and replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door Back Window Glass: Service and Repair 2-Door Rear Window Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire. - Cover interior surfaces to avoid damaging them. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - Rear shelf 2. Disconnect the window antenna connector (A) and rear window defogger connectors (B). 3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. 4. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11965 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window: If the rear window is to be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding (D). - If the molding is damaged, replace the rear window and molding as an assembly. 7. Carefully remove the rear window. 8. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the clips or fasteners from the body. 9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 10. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the clips or the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. 11. Attach the clips (A) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (B) as shown: Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11966 - Be sure the clips and fasteners line up with the alignment marks (C). - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. Clips adhesive tape: Thickness 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.) Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.) 12. Attach the clips to the rear window opening flange. 13. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 14. Remove the rear window. 15. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11967 16. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 17. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. 18. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) and moldings (C) as shown. Apply the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11968 adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 19. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 13, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 20. Scrape or wipe any excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 21. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 22. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire. - Cover interior surfaces to avoid damaging them. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - Rear shelf 2. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A) from the window antenna terminal cover base (B), and disconnect the window antenna connector (C). 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors (D). 4. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11969 5. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 6. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window. 8. Carefully remove the rear window. 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fasteners from the body. 10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 11. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11970 12. Attach the upper fasteners (A) and side fasteners (B) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window-(C) as shown. Apply primer to the inside face of the rear window as shown. If necessary, apply primer to the areas where the window antenna terminal base (D) will be attached, then attach the base with adhesive tape: Be sure the fasteners (and window antenna terminal cover base) line up with the alignment marks (E). - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11971 13. Attach the upper molding (A), side moldings (B), and lower molding (C) with adhesive tape around the edge of the rear window (D): - Attach the moldings in the numbered sequence. - After installing the moldings, cut the corner edge areas (E) of the moldings as shown. - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 14. Attach the upper fasteners (A) and side fasteners (B) with adhesive tape to the rear window opening flange (C) of the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11972 15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 16. Remove the rear window. 17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces. 18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11973 - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 19. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. 20. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) and moldings (C) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 21. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 15 and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 22. Scrape or wipe any excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11974 Back Window Glass: Service and Repair 4-Door Rear Window Replacement NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. - Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna grid lines, and terminals. 1. Remove these items: - Trunk lid - Rear shelf 2. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A) from the window antenna terminal base (B), and disconnect the window antenna connector (C). 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors (D). 4. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a grease pencil. 5. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, or you may crease or break it. 6. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11975 7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window. 8. Carefully remove the rear window. 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange: - Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fasteners from the body. 10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 11. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11976 12. Glue the fasteners (A) to the inside face of the rear window (B) as shown. Apply primer (3M N-200, or equivalent) to the inside face of the rear window as shown. If necessary, apply primer (3M N-200, or equivalent) to the areas where the window antenna terminal base (C) will be glued, then glue the base on: Be sure the fasteners (and window antenna terminal cover base) line up with the alignment marks (D). - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11977 13. Glue the upper molding (A), side moldings (B), and lower molding (C) around the edge of the rear window (D): - Glue the moldings in the numbered sequence. - After installing the moldings, cut the corner edge areas (E) of the moldings as shown. - Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 14. Glue the fasteners (A) to the rear window opening flange (B) of the body. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11978 15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window and body with a grease pencil at the 4 points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied. 16. Remove the rear window. 17. With a sponge apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surface. 18. With a sponge apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the rear window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > 2-Door > Page 11979 19. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) as shown. 20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) and moldings (C) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 21. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: - Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the rear, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement > Page 11985 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Remove the mirror. 2. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B), and release the weatherstrip from the door sash trim (C), then remove the weatherstrip. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Glass Replacement 2-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire. - Cover interior surfaces to avoid damaging them. 1. Remove these items: - C-pillar trim and side trim panel - B-pillar upper trim 2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body, and along the edge of the headliner. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 3. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire quarter glass: If the quarter glass will be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding (D). - If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter glass, molding fastener (E), and clips (F) as an assembly. - If any of the clips and fastener are broken, the quarter glass can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step 8). 4. Carefully remove the quarter glass. 5. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the clips and fastener from the body. 6. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 7. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, any broken clips, and the fastener from the glass. Clean the inside face and the edge of the glass with alcohol where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11989 8. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light coat of primer, then apply butyl tapes (A) and (B) to the molding (C) as shown: Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. - Do not peel the separator off the butyl tapes. 9. If the new quarter glass will be installed, attach the fastener (A) with adhesive tape to the body. Be sure the fastener lines up with the alignment marks (B). Fastener adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) Width 7 mm (0.28 in.) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11990 10. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the quarter glass upright in the opening, and make alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and body with a grease pencil at the three points shown. Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. 11. Remove the quarter glass. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11991 12. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the quarter glass (A) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces. 13. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes: Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange. - Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 14. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11992 15. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the quarter glass (B) as shown: - After applying the adhesive, peel the separator off the butyl tape. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. 16. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (B) over the opening, align the clips or the alignment marks (C) made in step 10, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 17. Scrape or wipe any excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 18. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly. 19. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement 4-door NOTE: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Take care not to scratch the door. 1. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the weatherstrip. 2. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove these items: - Door panel, 2-door, 4-door - Plastic cover, as necessary, 2-door, 4-door 2. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. Take care not to Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12001 drop the glass inside the door. 3. Power window: Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and harness clip (B) from the door. 4. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D, E), then remove the regulator (F) through the hole in the door. Power window is shown, manual window is similar. 5. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12002 6. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement 4-door NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Raise the glass fully. 2. Remove these items: - Door panel - Plastic cover, as necessary - Rod protector 3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 4. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the center channel (D). Pull the upper seal (E) away as needed, and remove the screw (F). Pull the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12006 glass run channel (G) away as needed from the center channel. 5. Move the center channel (A) away from the quarter glass (B), and the rear door glass (C), and remove the center channel out through the window slot. Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (D) 6. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B). 7. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12007 8. Power window: Disconnect and detach the connector (A) from the door. 9. Remove the bolts (B), and loosen the bolts (C), then remove the regulator (D) through the hole in the door. Power window is shown, manual window is similar. 10. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown, regardless of the channel shape (B, C). 11. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. - Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. - Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. - Check for water leaks. - Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles. - When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 01-050 > May > 01 > Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds Window Seal: Customer Interest Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds 01-050 May 8, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - 4-door ALL Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds SYMPTOM The left, right, or both front windows are slow to move, or they bind when going up or down. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel for the front window glass is not set properly in the center sash. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reinstall the run channel, and apply silicone grease. PARTS INFORMATION Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One container will repair about 25 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-S5A-003 H/C 6457394 Defect Code: 030 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 01-050A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the affected front window glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6 of the 2001 Civic Service Manual). 3. Carefully remove the plastic cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 01-050 > May > 01 > Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds > Page 12016 4. Inspect the run channel for pinching along the center sash: ^ If the run channel is not pinched and is correctly installed, disregard this repair procedure and look for another cause for the binding. ^ If the run channel is pinched, reinstall it correctly in the center sash. 5. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the run channel. 6. Move the window up and down several times to distribute the silicone grease and to check the window operation. 7. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 01-050 > May > 01 > Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds Window Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds 01-050 May 8, 2001 Applies To: 2001 Civic - 4-door ALL Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds SYMPTOM The left, right, or both front windows are slow to move, or they bind when going up or down. PROBABLE CAUSE The run channel for the front window glass is not set properly in the center sash. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reinstall the run channel, and apply silicone grease. PARTS INFORMATION Silicone Grease: P/N 08798-9013, H/C 4642294 (One container will repair about 25 vehicles.) WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 72275-S5A-003 H/C 6457394 Defect Code: 030 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 01-050A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the affected front window glass fully. 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6 of the 2001 Civic Service Manual). 3. Carefully remove the plastic cover. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 01-050 > May > 01 > Body - Front Window Moves Slowly or Binds > Page 12022 4. Inspect the run channel for pinching along the center sash: ^ If the run channel is not pinched and is correctly installed, disregard this repair procedure and look for another cause for the binding. ^ If the run channel is pinched, reinstall it correctly in the center sash. 5. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the run channel. 6. Move the window up and down several times to distribute the silicone grease and to check the window operation. 7. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed Windshield Moulding / Trim: Customer Interest Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed 00-064 March 17, 2009 Applied Vehicles Deformed Windshield Molding (Supersedes 00-064, dated November 13, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The windshield molding is warped or deformed. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner lip is folded, causing a poor fit against the body. CORRECTIVE ACTION Remove the entire inner lip, and fill the channel between the molding and the body with silicone sealant. REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 831004 Flat Rate Time: 0.7 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S84-A01 H/C 5443387 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Template ID: 00-064A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 12032 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Pull up the outer edge of the windshield molding. Check if the inner lip is folded over anywhere. ^ If the inner lip is folded over, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the inner lip is not folded, disregard this bulletin, and look for other possible causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying a strip of 2-inch-wide masking tape along the outer edge of the windshield molding. 2. Pull up the outer edge of the molding, and use scissors or an X-Acto knife to remove its entire inner lip. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 12033 3. Using an O-ring pick or similar tool, pull up the outer edge of the molding, and apply 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant under it, along the A-pillars and the upper edge of the windshield. 4. Push down on the molding, and smooth it out until it sits flush with the roof. 5. Wait 5 minutes, then remove the masking tape. 6. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed Windshield Moulding / Trim: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed 00-064 March 17, 2009 Applied Vehicles Deformed Windshield Molding (Supersedes 00-064, dated November 13, 2007, to update the information marked by the black bars) REVISION SUMMARY SYMPTOM The windshield molding is warped or deformed. PROBABLE CAUSE The inner lip is folded, causing a poor fit against the body. CORRECTIVE ACTION Remove the entire inner lip, and fill the channel between the molding and the body with silicone sealant. REQUIRED MATERIALS WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 831004 Flat Rate Time: 0.7 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S84-A01 H/C 5443387 Defect Code: 00401 Symptom Code: 00101 Template ID: 00-064A Skill Level: Repair Technician Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 12039 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS Pull up the outer edge of the windshield molding. Check if the inner lip is folded over anywhere. ^ If the inner lip is folded over, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the inner lip is not folded, disregard this bulletin, and look for other possible causes. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying a strip of 2-inch-wide masking tape along the outer edge of the windshield molding. 2. Pull up the outer edge of the molding, and use scissors or an X-Acto knife to remove its entire inner lip. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Windshield Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Moulding / Trim: > 00-064 > Mar > 09 > Body Windshield Moulding Warped/Deformed > Page 12040 3. Using an O-ring pick or similar tool, pull up the outer edge of the molding, and apply 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant under it, along the A-pillars and the upper edge of the windshield. 4. Push down on the molding, and smooth it out until it sits flush with the roof. 5. Wait 5 minutes, then remove the masking tape. 6. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 12049 - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. '04 model 6. Disconnect the X connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connector. If this input test proves OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12057 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams (Canada) 94. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12061 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12062 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12063 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12067 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12068 Wiper Switch: Diagrams 209. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12069 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12070 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12074 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams (Canada) 94. Washer Fluid Level Switch (Canada) Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Tube Replacement 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer operation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 154. Behind Left Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12084 154. Behind Left Side Of Front Bumper Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12085 Windshield Washer Motor: Diagrams 99. Windshield Washer Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12086 Windshield Washer Motor: Testing and Inspection Washer Motor Test 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer motor(B). 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground the No.2 terminal of the washer motor. The motor should run. - If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. - If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump outlet in the motor. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12090 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Reservoir Replacement 1. Remove the left inner fender. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector(s) (A) and washer tube (B). 3. Remove the three bolts and washer reservoir. 4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal. Check the washer motor operation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Washer Nozzle Troubleshooting Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Technical Service Bulletins Windshield Washer Nozzle Troubleshooting SOURCE: Honda Service News April 2003 TITLE: Troubleshooting Windshield Washer Nozzle Problems APPLIES TO: 2003 Accords, 2001-03 Civics, 2002-03 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 1999-03 Odysseys, and 2003 Pilots. SERVICE TIP: Warranty Parts Inspection (WPI) tested windshield washer nozzles that were replaced because they were "inoperative" or "did not work properly." Every one of the nozzles tested was determined "no trouble found." To cut down on unnecessary nozzle replacement and a possible warranty debit to your dealership follow these tips to fix windshield washer nozzle problems. Washer nozzle doesn't work. If the washer nozzle doesn't work, it's most likely clogged or frozen. If the nozzle is clogged, remove it, and blow some compressed air out through the nozzle to clear it. Then, before you reconnect the nozzle, run the washer pump to flush out any debris from the hoses. If you suspect the washer didn't work because it was frozen, replacing the nozzle won't fix the problem. Drain and refill the washer reservoir with a washer fluid that doesn't freeze. Washer nozzle doesn't work properly. If the washer nozzle isn't aimed right, adjust the ball shaped nozzle; don't replace the nozzle. To adjust the nozzle, use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to push on the deflector and move the ball. Never stick a needle or any such object in the nozzle. Adjust the nozzle so the center of the spray hits the middle of the windshield. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12098 Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12099 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12100 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Windshield Wiper Blade Care and Replacement APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: A buildup of road film, oil, or grease on the windshield or the wiper blades can cause the wiper blades to smear, streak, or chatter when being used. If your customers complain of this problem, and their wiper blades are less than 6 months old, try doing this before you replace the blades: - Use Glass Cleaner or equivalent, to thoroughly clean the windshield. Make sure you clean it well enough so that water slides off of it, not just beads up. - Use Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze straight from the bottle on a soft cloth to clean the wiper blades. This stuff contains a wetting agent that conditions the blade rubber. If the wiper blades still smear, streak, or chatter after you've cleaned the windshield and the blades, then blade replacement is in order. When you remove the old blade from its holder, make sure you grab the locking end of the blade on its top and bottom (use your thumb and index finger for this). Tug on the blade until it releases, then slide it off the holder. Don't grab the locking end from the sides. The metal rails could come loose and you could also wind up with a nasty cut. If the new blades don't have rails, make sure you install the rails from the old blades on the new blades like this: If the old rails are curved: - Install them on the new driver's-side wiper blade with the ends bowing away from the windshield. This makes the blade press harder against the middle of the windshield, providing a clear center of vision for the driver. - Install them on the new passenger's side wiper blade with the ends bowing toward the windshield. This makes the blade press harder against the edges of the windshield to clear off any water at the upper and lower ends of each wiper pass. If the old rails lie flat: Install them on either new wiper blade. If one of the new blades is shorter than the other (this is common on many vehicles), just install the shorter blade on the driver's side. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Windshield Wipers - Blade Care & Replacement > Page 12105 Slide the new blade into the holder, and push from behind with your thumb until you feel the tabs snap into place. Make sure the blade is locked in place before you reinstall the blade assembly. If it's not, the blade could come off during use and the blade assembly could scratch the windshield. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Control Unit Input Test 1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. 2. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y. NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals are OK, go to step 5. 5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 12109 - If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. '04 model 6. Disconnect the X connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connector. If this input test proves OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Specifications Wiper Motor: Specifications Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12113 Wiper Motor: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 35. Under Left Side of Cowl Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12114 35. Under Left Side Of Cowl Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Wiper Motor: Connector Views 170. Windshield Wiper Motor Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12117 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Wiper Motor Test 1. Carefully remove the windshield wiper arms. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor (B). 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.4 terminal and ground the No.2 terminal of the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low speed. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor. 4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.5 (+) and No.3 (-) terminals, and run the motor at low or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 12 V and 4V or less alternately. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12118 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Replacement 1. Open the hood. Remove the nut covers, nuts (A) and the windshield wiper arms (B). 2. Remove the hood seals (C) and cowl covers (D). 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor. 4. Remove the three bolts (B) and wiper linkage assembly (C). 5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield wiper linkage to show the original adjustment. Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12119 wiper motor (C). 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: - Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts. - Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to the park position. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Check the wiper motor operation. Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Wiper/Washer Component Location Index 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12126 55. In Steering Column Cover Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12127 Wiper Switch: Diagrams 209. Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Ex Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1668cc 1.7L SOHC (VTEC) MFI (2001)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12128 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B) 4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch. 5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.